JP7844147B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

This invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable displays and control the game to a state that is advantageous to the player.

In pachinko and other gaming machines, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the game is controlled to a normal game state, with the probability of a jackpot being determined set to approximately 1/300. If a jackpot does not occur even after 1000 special symbol games, the game state is controlled to a ceiling probability variation state, increasing the probability of a jackpot to approximately 1/100. Furthermore, it has been disclosed that if a jackpot does not occur after 1000 games in the normal game state, a time-saving state may be generated instead of the ceiling probability variation state (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Additionally, there are systems that display a normal background during the first waiting period after the variable display of symbols ends, and then display a demonstration during the second waiting period after the first waiting period ends (see, for example, Patent Document 2).

Japanese Patent Publication No. 2005-95449 Japanese Patent Publication No. 2016-22196

However, there was room to improve the marketability of gaming machines having the functions and configurations described in Patent Documents 1 and 2.

This invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances and aims to provide a gaming machine with enhanced marketability.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 is
A gaming machine that displays variable special identification information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Movable body and,
Light-emitting means,
Light emission control means,
An effect execution means capable of performing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special effect that operates the movable body and illuminates the light-emitting means,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As the aforementioned specific performance, it is possible to perform a first specific performance that displays a specific character and notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state using the specific character, and a second specific performance that does not display the specific character and notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
When it is announced that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the aforementioned specific performance, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the aforementioned specific performance.
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character is displayed along with an effect image related to the movement of the movable body.
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, the effect image in the same manner as the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed.
The mode of illumination of the light-emitting means in the special effect is the same whether the special effect is performed in the first specific effect or in the second specific effect.
The aforementioned effect image is an image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body and is not displayed at a time prior to the movement of the movable body.
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific performance is performed than when the second specific performance is performed.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table .
The total number of luminance data points constituting the demonstration display luminance data table is greater than the total number of luminance data points constituting the background display luminance data table used in game state 1.
It is characterized by the following.

Furthermore, the present invention may have only the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention, or it may have the inventive features described in the claims of the present invention along with other features not described therein.

This is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. This is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. This diagram shows the numerical range for a jackpot and the numerical range for a miss with time reduction in the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal state or time reduction state. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This is a front view showing a pachinko game machine in feature section 069SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and other components installed in the pachinko game machine in feature section 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of each jackpot. This is an explanatory diagram showing a table that determines the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stopping process. This is a state transition diagram used to explain state transitions. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the "Playtime" (relief time reduction) feature. This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the "playtime" (rescue time reduction). This is also an explanatory diagram for explaining the "playtime" (rescue time reduction). (A) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation methods related to Battle Rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of presentation methods related to Playtime. This is an explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the presentation methods for Extreme Battle Rush. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of presentation methods related to variable display count and special display count. This is a time chart showing the timing of the animations that occur when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of presentation patterns when a relief time reduction is reached after a RAM clear. (A) is a time chart showing the timing of the execution of the performance when the relief time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win, and (B) is a time chart showing a modified version of the time reduction entry performance B. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating a specific example of the presentation when, after a big win, the relief time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the animation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached. This is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the animation sequence when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the relief time reduction is reached. This is an explanatory diagram illustrating specific examples of presentation methods for the customer waiting screen. This figure shows an example of a performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen, as a modified example of feature section 069SG 1. This figure shows a modified example of a performance operation example related to the transition to the customer waiting screen, as a modified example of feature section 069SG 1. This flowchart shows a modified example of feature section 069SG, specifically the timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing the special symbol stopping process as a modified example 2 of feature section 069SG. This is a flowchart showing the special symbol stopping process as a modified example 2 of feature section 069SG. This is a flowchart showing the display process as a modified example 2 of feature section 069SG. This figure shows a modified example 3 of feature section 069SG. This is a diagram to explain the content of various performances. This diagram shows an example of the visual effects used in countdown announcements. Similarly, this is a diagram showing an example of the animation and actions used in the countdown announcement. This diagram shows an example of the animation and action for the pending change notification. This diagram shows an example of the animation and action for the symbol chance notification. This diagram shows an example of the animation and operation of the effect display notification. Figures (A) through (D) show the pre-announcement type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing the pre-announcement and prediction pattern determination tables. This flowchart shows an example of the variable display start setting process. This flowchart shows an example of the processing for effects during variable display. (A) is the table for determining the execution of the reach予告 (reach notification), and (B) to (E) are the tables for determining the button notification effect pattern. Figures (A) through (D) show the character preview pattern determination table. Figures (A) to (D) show the movable body motion pattern determination tables. Figures (A) to (D) show the movable body予告 pattern determination table. (A) to (C) are diagrams illustrating various operation examples for different game states. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display patterns of symbols in the probability variation state, the shortened time-saving state A with no misses and no reach variations, and (B) is a timing chart showing the shortened time-saving state B with no misses and no reach variations. This is an example of the animation and behavior of the shortened non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A. This is an example of the animation and behavior of the shortened non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A. This is an example of the animation and behavior of the shortened non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B. These are examples of the animations for SP Reach E and SP Reach D. This diagram compares examples of animation patterns for non-reach misses. This diagram compares examples of animation patterns for non-reach misses. This diagram compares examples of the performance and operation of different Super Reach variation patterns. This diagram compares examples of the performance and operation of different Super Reach variation patterns. This diagram compares examples of the performance and operation of different Super Reach variation patterns. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing examples of control operations in SP Reach E, C, and D. This diagram compares a super reach with a non-reach miss. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing examples of the introductory sequence for entering the bonus round, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of the sequence for entering the bonus round A. Figures (A1) to (A4) show examples of the animation sequence for entering a bonus round, and figures (B1) to (B4) show examples of the animation sequence B for entering a time-saving mode. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 in feature section 069SG. This figure shows a part of the variable display start setting process as Embodiment 2 in feature section 069SG. This figure shows the variable display effect pattern determination table. This is an example of the animation and actions for SP Reach D. This diagram illustrates the characteristics of different game states. In feature section 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot type. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal symbol win determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal symbols, and (D) is an explanatory diagram of the opening time of the second starting prize slot when a normal symbol win occurs. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation patterns corresponding to the variable display results. This is an explanatory diagram of the data storage area for game control. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table under normal conditions. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table during the probability variation state. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table during the probability variation state. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state A. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern determination table in time-saving state B. This is a diagram illustrating the probability of winning a prize at the starting prize slot and the interval between winning prizes. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values α, β, and γ. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values α', β', and γ'. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values δ, ε, and ζ. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values δ', ε', and ζ'. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values η, θ, and ι. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values η', θ', and ι'. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values κ, λ, and μ. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values κ', λ', and μ'. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values ν, ξ, and π. This is an explanatory diagram of the period values ν', ξ', and π'. This is a diagram illustrating the values for each period. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual shooting values for 10 hours of pachinko gaming machines, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design values for pachinko gaming machines. This is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average change time under normal conditions. This is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time in time-saving state A. This is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time in time-saving state B. This is an explanatory diagram for calculating the average fluctuation time during a bonus round. This diagram illustrates the average variation time when the second special symbol is varied during the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. This diagram illustrates the average variation time when the second special symbol displays variations 110 times in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed with 3 reserved symbols in the second special symbol in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed with 3 reserved symbols in the second special symbol in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed with 2 reserved symbols in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed with 2 reserved symbols in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed with 1 reserved memory in the second special symbol in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed with 1 reserved memory in the second special symbol in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed with the number of reserved memories in the second special symbol being 0 in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed with the number of reserved memories in the second special symbol being 0 in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. This is a diagram explaining the values for each period. This is a diagram explaining the values for each period. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern in feature section 018SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. This diagram shows the execution period of various effects in the big win variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. This diagram shows the execution period of various effects in the losing variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. (A) is a diagram to explain the content of various effects, and (B) is a diagram to explain the character types. (A) is a diagram showing the character display patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E, and (C) is a diagram showing the BGM and sound effect output patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E. (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. This is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP Reach演出 A to E. This diagram shows an example of the animation sequence from the start of the variable display of SP Reach α, β, and γ until the SP Reach animation begins. This diagram shows an example of the animation sequence for SP Reach animation A. This diagram shows examples of the animations for SP Reach animations B and C. This diagram shows examples of the animations for SP Reach animations D and E. This figure shows an example of the animation for the "win/lose" button. This figure shows examples of the performance actions of movable parts. This diagram shows examples of the animation and operation of the jackpot notification animations A through E for SP Reach animations. This diagram shows examples of the animation and animation actions for the failure notification of SP Reach animations A through E. This diagram shows an example of the staging actions for post-event staging A. This diagram shows an example of the staging actions for post-event staging B. This diagram shows an example of the staging actions for post-event staging B. (A) is SP Reach Performance Type Determination Table A, (B) is SP Reach Performance Type Determination Table B, and (C) is SP Reach Performance Type Determination Table C. This diagram illustrates the data table for illuminating the frame LEDs in a smooth rainbow light pattern. This diagram illustrates the data table for illuminating the frame LEDs in a flashing rainbow pattern. This is a front view showing a gaming machine according to an embodiment. This is a diagram showing the various control boards and other components installed in a pachinko gaming machine. This diagram illustrates the effects control commands. This is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. This is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the jackpot type determination table, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot types. This is an explanatory diagram of the fluctuation pattern. This is an explanatory diagram of the variation pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the data storage area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the command buffer received when a prize is won at the start. This flowchart shows an example of the main game control process. This flowchart shows an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. This is a flowchart showing an example of the special pattern processing. This is a flowchart showing an example of the process for determining whether a player has entered the competition at the start of the competition. This flowchart shows an example of the normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing for controlling the visual effects. This flowchart shows an example of the performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. This flowchart shows an example of a demo performance control process. (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing the first performance mode, (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing the second performance mode, and (C1) and (C2) are diagrams showing the third performance mode. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. This figure shows the flow of variable display of decorative patterns, following Figure 35. This diagram shows the variable display flow of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. (A) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode, and (B) is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the second and third performance modes. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. This diagram shows the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. (A) is a diagram showing the start and end conditions for displaying the demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing the configuration of the demo movie display. This diagram shows examples of how each part operates during the demo video. This is a diagram illustrating the transitions in the demo performance while waiting for customers. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. This figure shows an example of how the demo movie display works. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display in the first scene (company name), (B) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) is an example of the display in the fourth scene (warning 2). This diagram compares the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved symbols, and the small symbols. This diagram shows the illumination patterns of the lamps corresponding to the game state. (A) is a diagram showing the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) is a schematic diagram of (A). Figures (A1) to (A8) show examples of operation when a customer waiting demo is performed after the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state has finished. (A4) to (A5) are diagrams showing the main parts of Figure 50. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a low base state. Figures (B1) to (B8) show examples of how customer waiting demo effects work in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This is a timing chart showing the flow of the demo performance while waiting for customers in a high base state. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up in a cold start state and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This is a timing chart showing the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up in a cold start state until the customer waiting demo begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a low base state, and then a customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. This diagram shows an example of how a pachinko machine operates when it starts up with a hot start in a high base state, and then the customer waiting demo sequence begins. This timing chart shows the sequence of events from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state, to when the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends over time in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events that occur when the demo movie display ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed, under high base conditions. Figures (A) to (E) show examples of operation when the demo movie display starts and ends upon winning a prize in a low base state. Figures (A) to (G) show details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 66. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends when the second start is awarded, under low base conditions. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the second start and winning when the game is in a high base state. This timing chart shows the sequence in which the demo movie display ends with the first win in a high base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by steering wheel operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends due to steering input in a low base state. Figures (A) to (C) show examples of operation when the demo movie display is terminated by menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when a demo movie display ends due to menu operation in a low base state. This timing chart shows the sequence of events when the demo movie display ends via menu operation in a high base state. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device in response to a prize win, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device in response to a prize win. This figure shows an example of how the system works when a bulb failure error occurs during a customer-waiting demo. This is a diagram to explain priority layers. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a low base state. This diagram shows the process when an error occurs during a customer waiting demo performance that starts in a high base state. This diagram explains the mechanism of output to the LED driver. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. This diagram illustrates an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management in the child table. This figure shows an example of a parent table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a child table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This figure shows an example of a grandchild table that makes up a lamp data table. This diagram shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay). Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of the normal parent table. Lamp Data Table: Background This diagram shows the settings of a normal child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for a typical grandchild table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the background time reduction. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of background probability changes. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table in the customer waiting demo. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings for the sub-table of the button that lights up white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for the button that blinks white. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings in the parent table for the red blinking button. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the subtable for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table for the button that blinks red. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for initialization notifications. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the child table for initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the sub-table of the initialization notification. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the parent table for errors. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the error child table. Lamp Data Table: This diagram shows the settings of the grandchild table for errors. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. This diagram shows the settings for the common table. Figures (A1) to (A4) show examples of how text is displayed and how light is emitted in each scene. (A) is a diagram showing examples of actions in the first scene, (B) is in the third scene, and (C) is in the fourth scene. This is a comparison table showing text animation displays. (A) and (B) are diagrams used to explain analogous colors. This diagram illustrates the timing of the demo movie display. Figures (A) to (G) show details of the high base state of the display mode in Figure 66.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings.

(Feature part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of type 1-1 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (for example, 2) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (for example, 3), and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (for example, 4)).
When the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, about 5.58 seconds), and less than the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Probability Change State" (for example, about 4.83 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the variable displays for which it is not decided to control the system to a favorable state have fewer types of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of variable display time. As a result, the rate at which the variable displays are consumed is higher than in other states, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in form 1-1,
It is possible to display variable amounts of decorative identification information in multiple rows (for example, decorative patterns displayed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C).
The starting order of the variable display of decorative identification information in each column is common to both cases: when, in the first special state, the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display of decorative identification information being in a specific state; and when, in the second special state, the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display of decorative identification information being in a specific state.
The time it takes for the variable display speed of the decorative identification information in each column that has started variable display to reach the maximum speed differs depending on whether the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, or whether the variable display mode of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state (for example, the starting order of the variable display of decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, and in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time reduction state B, but the time it takes for the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach the maximum speed is shorter in time reduction state B than in the probability variation state and time reduction state A (tb1 to tb2 < ta1 to ta3). See Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a different impression to be created for each state, enhancing interest, as the variable display start order of the decorative identification information for each column is the same in the first special state and the second special state, but the time it takes to reach the maximum speed differs.

The gaming machine of form 1-3 is the gaming machine described in form 1-1 or form 1-2,
It is possible to display variable information for multiple rows of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns).
The stopping order of the variable display of decorative identification information in each row differs depending on whether, in the first special state, the variable display of decorative identification information is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed, or in the second special state, the variable display of decorative identification information is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, the stopping order of the variable display of decorative symbols is left → right → middle in the case of a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, and in the case of a non-reach failure variation pattern in time reduction state B, left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed simultaneously. See Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different display stop sequences for decorative identification information in each column between the first special state and the second special state, thereby creating different impressions for each state and enhancing interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to display variable information for multiple rows of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns).
The stopping order of the variable display of decorative identification information in each column is common to both cases: when, in the first special state, the variable display of decorative identification information is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display being controlled to the specific state; and when, in the second special state, the variable display of decorative identification information is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means and a non-specific display result is displayed without the variable display being controlled to the specific state.
The time from when one decorative identification information in multiple rows is stopped to when the next decorative identification information is stopped differs depending on whether, in the first special state, the variable display of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, or in the second special state, the variable display of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in a variable display that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means (for example, decorative pattern display). The stopping order of the variable display of decorative symbols in areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same whether it is a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, or in the non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B. However, the time from when a decorative symbol stops to when the next decorative symbol stops in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, or 5C may differ depending on whether it is a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, or in the non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different impressions to be created for each state, enhancing interest, because the time between the display of one decorative identification piece and the display of the next decorative identification piece differs between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-5 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to display variable information for multiple rows of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns).
The system includes an output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decorative identification information for each column is displayed in a stopped state.
The number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 differs depending on whether the variable display of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display where the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the first special state, or whether the variable display of the decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display where the determination means does not determine to control the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is 3 times in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A because the left, middle, and right symbols stop at different timings, and 1 time in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time reduction state B because the left, middle, and right symbols stop at the same timing. See Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the stopping sound to draw attention to the stopping of decorative identification information, and by having different numbers of stopping sounds output for the first special state and the second special state, it is possible to create different impressions for each state and enhance interest.

The gaming machine of form 1-6 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to display variable information for multiple rows of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns).
The system includes an output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decorative identification information for each column is displayed in a stopped state.
The number of times the stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is common to both cases: when the variable display of decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display of decorative identification information in the first special state in which the determination means does not determine to control it to the advantageous state, and when the variable display of decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed in the variable display of decorative identification information in the second special state in which the determination means does not determine to control it to the advantageous state (for example, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be common to both cases where it is a non-reach miss variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, and cases where it is a non-reach miss variation pattern in time-saving state B).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the stopping sound to draw attention to the stopping of the decorative identification information, and by standardizing the number of times the stopping sound is output between the first special state and the second special state, development costs can be reduced.

The gaming machine of form 1-7 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
When the determination means does not determine that the system should be controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without becoming a specific mode, the system is equipped with a display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when the decorative identification information is stopped from being displayed.
In the first special state, if the decorative identification information is displayed as stopped, the specific action display is executed; in the second special state, if the decorative identification information is displayed as stopped, the specific action display is not executed (for example, in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, if the variation pattern is one of non-reach failure, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed, whereas in the time reduction state B, if the variation pattern is one of non-reach failure, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is not performed. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the first special state, the visual effect is enhanced by specific action displays, while in the second special state, smooth variable displays can be achieved by not performing specific action displays.

The gaming machine of form 1-8 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
When the determination means does not determine that the system should be controlled to the advantageous state, and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is a variable display that displays a non-specific display result without becoming a specific mode, the system is equipped with a display means capable of executing a specific operation display that causes the decorative identification information to perform a specific operation when the decorative identification information is stopped from being displayed.
The display mode of the specified action display is common to both the case where the decorative identification information is displayed in a stopped state in the first special state and the case where the decorative identification information is displayed in a stopped state in the second special state (for example, the specified action display (symbol stop action) is common to both the case where the non-reach failure variation pattern occurs in the probability variation state and time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach failure variation pattern occurs in time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the effect of the performance with the specified action display, while also making the mode of the specified action display common to the case of the probability variation state and time-saving state A and time-saving state B. See Figures 11-51 to 11-54).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced visual effects through specific action displays, while simultaneously reducing development costs by standardizing the specific action display patterns between the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-9 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-8,
It is possible to synchronize and variably display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) and predetermined identification information different from said decorative identification information (e.g., small patterns),
The period from when the identification information is stopped to when the predetermined identification information is stopped is shorter in the case of a variable display where the mode of variable display of decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed when the determination means does not decide to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state, compared with the case of a variable display where the mode of variable display of decorative identification information does not become a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed when the determination means does not decide to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the period from when the decorative symbol is stopped to when the small symbol is stopped is shorter in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in time-saving state B than in the case of a non-reach miss variation pattern in probability change state and time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7) > t2 (tb3 to tb4)} portion. See Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature enables smooth variable display in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-10 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
In the first special state, the minimum period from when the decorative identification information is stopped in one variable display until the variable display of the decorative identification information begins in the next variable display is common to both the first special state and the second special state. (For example, the symbol confirmation period (ta7 to ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped in one variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbol begins in the next variable display in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, and the symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped in one variable display until the variable display of the decorative symbol begins in the next variable display in time reduction state B, are common to both. See Figure 11-51.)
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by standardizing control processes that take into account drawing processes and other factors until the decorative identification information is completely displayed.

The gaming machine of form 1-11 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-10,
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in the second special state, and when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in the first special state, and these are common (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the loss variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in "Time-Saving State B" (e.g., "Non-Reach A") and the loss variation pattern that can be determined in "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Variation State" (e.g., "Non-Reach A") are common).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (for example, 2) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (for example, 3) and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (for example, 4)).
When the variable display is not controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state, and also shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is a "miss", the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, about 2.2 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, about 5.58 seconds), and also less than the average duration of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Probability Change State" (for example, about 4.83 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the variable displays for which it is not decided to control the system to a favorable state have fewer types of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of variable display time. As a result, the rate at which the variable displays are consumed is higher than in other states, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1,
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in the second special state, and when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common to both (for example, the losing variable pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and the losing variable display pattern that can determine in at least one of time-saving state A and probability-changing state (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) are common to both).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-3 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1 or form 2-2,
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in the second special state, and when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in both the first special state and the third special state, and these are common (for example, the losing variable pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and the losing variable display pattern that can determine in both time-saving state A and probability-changing state (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variation state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variation state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average duration of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, which increases the rate at which the variable display is consumed, thus providing a more favorable second special state. In the first special state, the average duration of the control period is longer, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 2-5 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-4,
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 2) is less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 3), and the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 3) is less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in probability variation state (e.g., 4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of selectable variable display patterns is reduced to prioritize the consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of selectable variable display patterns is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of form 1-12 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2), and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, about 40 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "Probability Variation State" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the development costs can be reduced by having fewer types of variable display patterns in the variable display that is decided to control the system to an advantageous state. Furthermore, since the system is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily stimulated, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-13 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display that is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means includes a variable display part that performs a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part that notifies game value information that can identify the amount of game value granted in the advantageous state after the completion of the variable display part,
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the post-event performance part in the first special state and the execution period of the post-event performance part in the second special state are the same (for example, the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part in the time-saving state B, while the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state is the same from the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post-event performance part in the time-saving state B. See Figure 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by unifying the execution period of post-event effects in variable displays that are controlled to be advantageous in both the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-14 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to display identification information in a variable manner.
The variable display that is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means includes a variable display part that performs a variable display of identification information, and a post-performance part that notifies game value information that can identify the amount of game value granted in the advantageous state after the completion of the variable display part,
The variable display includes a display means capable of performing a specific operation display to specify the identification information when the identification information is stopped displaying during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display which has been determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means,
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state and the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state are different.
The execution period of the specific operation display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific operation display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display time of the variable display part of the time-saving state A and the probability variation state (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time of the variable display part of the time-saving state B (25 seconds), while the display time of the jackpot specific operation display in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state (ta3 to ta4) is common to the display time of the jackpot specific operation display in the time-saving state B (ta3 to ta4). See Figure 11-61).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by unifying the execution period of specific operation displays in variable displays that are determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in both the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-15 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-14,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine the variable display pattern in the second special state, and when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine the variable display pattern in the first special state, and these are common (for example, when the variable display result is "Big Win", the losing variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in "Shortened Time State B" (e.g., "SP Reach D") and the losing variation pattern that can determine in "Probability Variation State" (e.g., "SP Reach D") are common parts).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of form 2-6 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2) and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state, and also shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time-saving state B" (for example, about 40 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "time-saving state A" (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and also less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "probability variation state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the development costs can be reduced by having fewer types of variable display patterns in the variable display that is decided to control the system to an advantageous state. Furthermore, since the system is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily stimulated, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-7 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-6,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in the second special state, and when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display pattern determination means can determine a variable display pattern in at least one of the first special state and the third special state, are common to both (for example, the jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., SP reach D) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can determine in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., probability variation state) (e.g., SP reach D) are common to both).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-8 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-7,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, at least a portion of the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state and the variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in both the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, the portion that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B (e.g., without SP) and the portion that the CPU 103 can determine in both the time-saving state A and the probability variation state (e.g., without SP) are common).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set variable display patterns that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-9 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-8,
The average duration of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the portion in which the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state B is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variation state, and the average duration of the control period controlled to the probability variation state is shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled to the time-saving state A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the average duration of the control period is shorter than in the third special state, which increases the rate at which the variable display is consumed, thus providing a more favorable second special state. In the first special state, the average duration of the control period is longer, which enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 2-10 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-9,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in probability variation state (e.g., 3)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of selectable variable display patterns is reduced to prioritize the consumption of the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of selectable variable display patterns is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of form 1-16 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-15,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays of special identification information (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A-E Miss") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) after the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becomes a specific mode (e.g., a reach mode), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information without the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becoming a specific mode.
In the second special state, the proportion of times the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state is higher than the proportion of times the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the proportion of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state A" (for example, 95%), and also higher than the proportion of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "probability change state" (for example, 95%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, by setting the mode of the variable display to a specific mode in the variable display where it has not been decided to control the system to an advantageous state, the system is less likely to be unnecessarily stimulated, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-17 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts until it stops is shorter than the period in the first non-specific variable display pattern from when the variable display of the decorative identification information starts until the mode of variable display becomes the specific mode (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach-miss variation pattern is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) of the super reach-miss variation pattern from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until the mode of variable display becomes the reach mode. See Figure 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display to end in a shorter period than the period it takes for the variable display to become a specific state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-18 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to display variable information for multiple rows of decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns).
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the decorative identification information of a predetermined column among the multiple columns is shorter than the period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the decorative identification information of the predetermined column in the first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, in the non-reach miss variation pattern, the period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (tb0 to tb1) is shorter than the period from the start to the stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (tb0 to tb2) in the super reach miss variation pattern. See Figure 11-62).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the variable display of decorative identification information in a predetermined column to be completed in a short period of time, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-19 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-18,
The variable display pattern determination means has common features with the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B and the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state are common features).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second non-specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of form 2-11 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 1-10,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine, in the case of a variable display of special identification information that is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A-E Miss") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information (e.g., a miss display result) after the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becomes a specific mode (e.g., a reach mode), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-reach Miss") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information without the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becoming a specific mode.
In the second special state, the proportion in which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state is higher than the proportion in which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state in the first special state, and is also higher than the proportion in which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the proportion in which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the proportion in which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "time-saving state A" (for example, 95%), and is also higher than the proportion in which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "probability change state" (for example, 95%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, by setting the mode of the variable display to a specific mode in the variable display where it has not been decided to control the system to an advantageous state, the system is less likely to be unnecessarily stimulated, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-12 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-11,
The variable display pattern determination means has common features with the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B and the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state are common features).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second non-specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-13 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-12,
The variable display pattern determination means has common characteristics with the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first and third special states (for example, the non-reach miss variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., no reach) and the non-reach miss variation pattern that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., no reach) are common to each other).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second non-specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of form 1-20 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-19,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays of special identification information (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine, when the variable display of special identification information is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach A-C, E Big Win") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information after the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becomes a specific mode, and a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach D (Instant Win or Full Rotation)", "SP Not Via") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information without the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becoming a specific mode.
In the second special state, the proportion in which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the proportion in which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information that has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion in the time-saving state B in which the "SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (instant hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion in the time-saving state A in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 5%), and is also higher than the proportion in the probability variation state in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 5%). See Figure 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the mode of the variable display in the variable display in which it is decided to control the system to an advantageous state is set to a specific mode, thereby providing a suitable second special state without being unnecessarily influenced.

The gaming machine of form 1-21 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
The system includes a display means capable of performing a first specific action display that performs a specific action on decorative identification information when the variable display mode becomes a specific mode, and a second specific action display (for example, a pattern stop action display) that performs a specific action on the decorative identification information when the decorative identification information is stopped.
In the first specific variable display pattern, the display means executes the first specific operation display and the second specific operation display; however, in the second specific variable display pattern, the display means does not execute the first specific operation display, but instead executes the second specific operation display (for example, in the variation pattern of SP Reach E which goes through Reach, the Reach specific operation display and the Jackpot specific operation display are executed, but in the variation pattern of SP Reach D which does not go through Reach, the Reach specific operation display is not executed, but the Jackpot specific operation display is executed. See Figure 11-55).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, since the first specific operation display is performed in the second special state, there is less chance of being unnecessarily provoked, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-22 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-21,
The variable display pattern determination means has common features with the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B and the non-reach miss variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state are common features).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of form 2-14 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-13,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays of special identification information (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine, when the variable display of special identification information is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach A-C, E Big Win") which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information after the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becomes a specific mode, and a second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP Reach D (Instant Win or Full Rotation)", "SP Non-Via A", etc.) which displays the display result of the variable display of special identification information without the mode of the variable display of decorative identification information becoming a specific mode.
In the second special state, the proportion in which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the determination means determines that the special identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the proportion in which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the special identification information will be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, and also higher than the proportion in which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display will be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state (for example, in the time-saving state B, the proportion in which the "SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (instant hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion in the time-saving state A in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 5%), and also higher than the proportion in the probability variation state in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode is determined (for example, 5%). See Figure 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the mode of the variable display in the variable display in which it is decided to control the system to an advantageous state is set to a specific mode, thereby providing a suitable second special state without being unnecessarily influenced.

The gaming machine of form 2-15 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-14,
The variable display pattern determination means has common features with the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state (for example, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., without SP) and the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., without SP) are common features).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-16 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
The variable display pattern determination means has common characteristics with the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state (for example, the non-reach jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., without SP) and the non-reach miss variation pattern that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., without SP) are common to each other).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of form 1-23 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-22,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first starting prize slot), and by performing variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect that includes an effect that suggests the control to the aforementioned advantageous state,
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "not reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the second reserved storage means can store a reserved memory when no reserved memory is stored in the second reserved storage means in the first special state and the second special state, and the determination means does not determine that the variable display should be controlled to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and not executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in the losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Shortened Time State A", and when the variable display is executed in the losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Probability Change State", suggestive performances such as "Movable Body Announcement" and "Character Announcement" are executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in the losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Shortened Time State B", suggestive performances such as "Movable Body Announcement" and "Character Announcement" are not executed in the variable display. See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is not unnecessarily excited by suggestive effects, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-24 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, if the variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is not performed by the performance execution means, and if the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the suggestive performance is performed by the performance execution means (for example, in the time-saving state B, if it is a losing variation pattern, the "movable body予告" and "character予告" may not be performed, and if it is a winning variation pattern, the "movable body予告" and "character予告" may be performed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest in the second special state by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects are executed.

The gaming machine of form 1-25 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to display decorative identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) in a variable manner.
The variable display pattern determination means includes a variable display pattern that displays the display result of the variable display after the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific mode,
The aforementioned suggestive performance includes a performance that encourages whether or not the variable display mode will be a specific mode (for example, a suggestive performance that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot state may include a "reach announcement" or "button announcement" as a performance that encourages whether or not the variable display mode will be a reach mode (whether or not a reach will be established)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest in the second special state by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects are executed.

The gaming machine of form 1-26 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-25,
The performance execution means is capable of executing multiple types of suggestive performances, including a first suggestive performance and a second suggestive performance that has a higher probability of controlling to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive performance is executed, based on the decision result of the decision means (for example, a portion in which multiple types of suggestive performances are capable of executing a first suggestive performance (for example, a line of dialogue A or a small vibration) and a second suggestive performance (for example, a line of dialogue B or a large vibration) that has a higher probability of controlling to the jackpot game state than when the first suggestive performance is executed, based on the variable display result).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest in the second special state by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects are executed.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of form 2-17 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-16,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first starting prize slot), and by performing variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect that includes an effect that suggests the control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing "movable body予告" and "character予告"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "not reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which a reserve memory can be stored in the second reserve storage means when no reserve memory is stored in the second reserve storage means in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, and the determination means has not decided to control the display to the advantageous state.
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state, but does not execute the suggestive performance in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state (for example, when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Shortened Time State A" and when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Probability Change State", suggestive performances such as "Movable Body Announcement" and "Character Announcement" are executed in the variable display, while when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Shortened Time State B", suggestive performances such as "Movable Body Announcement" and "Character Announcement" are not executed in the variable display. See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern is not unnecessarily excited by suggestive effects, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of form 1-27 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-26,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot state) by displaying variable identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) based on the fulfillment of starting conditions (e.g., when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Information transmission means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to the game (e.g., performance control commands),
An effect execution means (for example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a pre-announcement effect) that, based on the information received from the information transmission means, suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state, and
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The aforementioned performance execution means can determine one pre-announcement performance pattern from among multiple types of pre-announcement performance patterns (for example, "countdown announcement,""hold change announcement,""symbol chance announcement,""effect display announcement"),
When the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state, the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 3), and less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 4)).
The proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state in the second special state is lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to control it to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 30%), and also lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 40%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, development costs can be reduced by having fewer pre-announcement animation patterns in the variable displays where it is not decided to control the system to an advantageous state, and since the player is less likely to be unnecessarily excited by the pre-announcement animations, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 1-28 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-27,
As pre-announcement performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there is a first pre-announcement performance pattern and a second pre-announcement performance pattern in which the proportion of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first pre-announcement performance pattern is executed.
The proportion in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the proportion in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as pre-announcement animation patterns that the performance control CPU 120 can commonly execute in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, there is a first pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "blue" pattern of "hold change announcement", "symbol chance eye announcement", and "effect display announcement") and a second pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "red" pattern of "hold change announcement", "symbol chance eye announcement", and "effect display announcement") which has a higher proportion of control to the advantageous state than when the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed, and the proportion in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 0%, see Figure 11-43(D)) is lower than the proportion in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state A and probability variation state (for example, 10%, see Figure 11-43(C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second special state is less likely to be unnecessarily hyped up by the first pre-announcement演出 (pre-announcement effect), thus providing a more favorable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-29 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-28,
As pre-announcement performance patterns that can be commonly executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the second special state, there is a first pre-announcement performance pattern and a second pre-announcement performance pattern in which the proportion of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the first pre-announcement performance pattern is executed.
The proportion in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as pre-announcement animation patterns that the performance control CPU 120 can commonly execute in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, there is a first pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "blue" pattern of "hold change announcement", "symbol chance eye announcement", and "effect display announcement") and a second pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "red" pattern of "hold change announcement", "symbol chance eye announcement", and "effect display announcement") which results in a higher proportion of control to the advantageous state than when the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed, and the proportion in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 90%, see Figure 11-43(D)) is higher than the proportion in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state A and probability variation state (for example, 50-70%, see Figure 11-43(C))).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, the second pre-announcement effect is more likely to be executed in the second special state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-30 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-29,
The pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can execute in the first special state and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can execute in the second special state are common (for example, the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the time-saving state A and the probability variation state and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the "symbol chance announcement")),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set pre-announcement animation patterns that can only be determined in the second special state.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of form 2-18 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 1-17,
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by displaying variable identification information (e.g., decorative patterns) based on the fulfillment of starting conditions (e.g., when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A holding storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of identification information as a holding storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Information transmission means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of transmitting information related to the game (e.g., performance control commands),
An effect execution means (for example, a part of the effect control CPU 120 that can execute a pre-announcement effect that suggests that the reserved memory stored in the reserved memory means will be controlled to the advantageous state) based on the information received from the information transmission means,
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The aforementioned performance execution means can determine one pre-announcement performance pattern from among multiple types of pre-announcement performance patterns (for example, "countdown announcement,""hold change announcement,""symbol chance announcement,""effect display announcement"),
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that can be determined in the first special state and less than the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 3) and less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 4)).
The proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the second special state is lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state, and also lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the third special state (for example, the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0%) is lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 30%), and also lower than the proportion in which the pre-announcement effect is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 40%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, development costs can be reduced by having fewer pre-announcement animation patterns in the variable displays where it is not decided to control the system to an advantageous state, and since the player is less likely to be unnecessarily excited by the pre-announcement animations, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of form 2-19 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-18,
The pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variation state are common (for example, the "symbol chance announcement" portion)),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set pre-announcement animation patterns that can only be determined in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-20 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-19,
The pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in the second special state and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance execution means can determine in both the first and third special states are common (for example, the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in the time-saving state B and the pre-announcement performance pattern that the performance control CPU 120 can determine in both the time-saving state A and the probability variation state are common (for example, the "symbol chance announcement" portion)),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for reduced development costs and program size by eliminating the need to set a second specific variable display pattern that can only be determined by the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 2-21 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-20,
In the second special state, the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine is less than the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state, and the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the first special state is less than the number of pre-announcement performance patterns that the performance execution means can determine in the third special state (for example, the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0) is less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 3), and less than the number of types of pre-announcements that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 4)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of selectable pre-announcement animation patterns is reduced to prioritize the consumption of variable displays, while in the third special state, the number of selectable pre-announcement animation patterns is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of form 1-31 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing effects including action-promoting effects that encourage the player's actions (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notification"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The execution rate of the action-promoting effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action-promoting effect per variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a big win, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a big win, 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 80% for a big win, 30% for a miss). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times the player is prompted to take action in the first variable display is small, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-32 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, the proportion in which the performance execution means executes the action-promoting performance when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the proportion in which the performance execution means executes the action-promoting performance when the variable display is not determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, in time-saving state B, the proportion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button notification" when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 10%) is higher than the proportion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes a "button notification" when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 5%)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest by drawing attention to the fact that action-enhancing effects are performed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-33 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-32,
The action-promoting action patterns that the aforementioned action execution means can execute include a first action-promoting action pattern and a second action-promoting action pattern that has a higher rate of controlling to the advantageous state than when the first action-promoting action pattern is executed.
The proportion in which the second action-promoting performance pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second action-promoting performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, as performance patterns for "button notification," there is a "one-shot" pattern and "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns which have a higher proportion of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "one-shot" pattern is executed, and the proportion in which the "one-shot" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 10%) is lower than the proportion in which the "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns are executed in time-saving state A or the probability variation state (for example, 40%), but the proportion in which the "one-shot" pattern is executed in time-saving state B may be higher than the proportion in which the "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns are executed in time-saving state A or the probability variation state).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this characteristic, when an action-enhancing effect is performed in the second special state, it often results in the second action-enhancing effect pattern, thus enhancing the overall enjoyment.

The gaming machine of form 1-34 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-33,
The period during which the action-promoting effect is performed in the first special state and the period during which the action-promoting effect is performed in the second special state are the same (for example, the period during which the "button notification" is performed in time-saving state A or probability variation state and the period during which the "button notification" is performed in time-saving state B are the same (for example, the period during which the "reach notification" is performed)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by unifying the execution period of the action acceleration sequence between the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-35 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-34,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing a performance preparation performance before executing the performance acceleration performance,
The period during which the action acceleration preparation animation is performed in the first special state and the period during which the action acceleration preparation animation is performed in the second special state are the same (for example, if the performance control CPU 120 makes it possible to perform an action acceleration preparation animation before executing a "button announcement" (for example, although not particularly shown, an animation in which the push button 31B to be operated is displayed in a fade-in or an animation in which an effect display is shown before the operation validity period begins), it is preferable that the period during which the action acceleration preparation animation is performed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state and the period during which the action acceleration preparation animation is performed in the time-saving state B are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a common execution period for the action acceleration preparation sequence between the first and second special states, thereby reducing development costs and enabling effective notification of the execution of the action acceleration sequence.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of form 2-22 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing effects including action-promoting effects that encourage the player's actions (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notification"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The execution rate of the action-promoting effect per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the action-promoting effect per variable display in the first special state, and also lower than the execution rate of the action-promoting effect per variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a big win, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a big win, 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of the button notification per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 80% for a big win, 30% for a miss). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times the player is prompted to take action in the first variable display is small, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of form 1-36 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect that includes an action-promoting effect that encourages the player to take action, and a specific effect that notifies the player that they have been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing the "win/fail button effect" and the "movable body effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The aforementioned performance execution means can perform the action-promoting performance and the specific performance as performance execution patterns for the variable display of 1, and there are a first performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-2, A-3") in which the action-promoting performance is performed first and then the specific performance is performed, and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") in which the specific performance is performed without performing the action-promoting performance.
The proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion in which the "instant win performance" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern without executing the "win/fail button performance" (for example, 90%) in the time-saving state B, is higher than the proportion in the time-saving state A, where the "instant win performance" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern without executing the "win/fail button performance" (for example, 0%), and is also higher than the proportion in the probability variation state, where the "instant win performance" or "full rotation performance" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern without executing the "win/fail button performance" (for example, 0%). See Figure 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the system will be less likely to prompt the player to take action when it is announced that the system has been controlled to an advantageous state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of form 2-23 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including an action-promoting effect that encourages the player to take action, and a specific effect that notifies the player that they are being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing a "button notification" and a "win/fail button effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The aforementioned performance execution means can perform the action-promoting performance and the specific performance as performance execution patterns for the variable display of 1, and there are a first performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-2, A-3") in which the action-promoting performance is performed first and then the specific performance is performed, and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") in which the specific performance is performed without performing the action-promoting performance.
The proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state, and also higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the proportion in which the "instant win performance" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern without executing the "win/fail button performance" in the time-saving state B (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion in the time-saving state A where the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "win/fail button performance" in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (for example, 0%), and also higher than the proportion in the probability variation state where the "movable body performance" is executed without executing the "win/fail button performance" in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (for example, 0%). See Figure 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the system will be less likely to prompt the player to take action when it is announced that the system has been controlled to an advantageous state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine of form 1-37 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the game's effects, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing effects including action-promoting effects that encourage the player's actions (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notification"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The types of action-promoting effects that the aforementioned effect execution means can perform include a first action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (for example, an action-promoting display for a "single hit" operation) and a second action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined period of time (for example, an action-promoting display for a "rapid press" or "long press" operation).
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing both the first action acceleration performance and the second action acceleration performance in the first special state, and is capable of executing the first action acceleration performance while not executing the second action acceleration performance in the second special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of deciding to execute either the "single-shot pattern" or the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern" in the "probability variation state" and "time-saving state A", and is capable of deciding the "single-shot pattern" while not deciding to execute the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern" in "time-saving state B". See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is less likely that the player will be prompted to perform cumbersome actions such as operating for a predetermined period of time, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine of form 2-24 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
Action detection means capable of detecting the player's actions (for example, a CPU 120 for controlling the performance, a push sensor 35B),
An effect execution means capable of executing effects including action-promoting effects that encourage the player's actions (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "button notification"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The types of action-promoting effects that the aforementioned effect execution means can perform include a first action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action (for example, an action-promoting display for a "single hit" operation) and a second action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined period of time (for example, an action-promoting display for a "rapid press" or "long press" operation).
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing both the first action-promoting performance and the second action-promoting performance in the first special state and the third special state, and is capable of executing the first action-promoting performance in the second special state while not executing the second action-promoting performance (for example, the performance control CPU 120 is capable of deciding to execute either the "single-shot pattern" or the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern" in the "probability variation state" and "time-saving state A", and is capable of deciding the "single-shot pattern" in "time-saving state B", while not deciding to execute the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern". See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is less likely that the player will be prompted to perform cumbersome actions such as operating for a predetermined period of time, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state. Therefore, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of form 1-38 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including an effect that suggests the control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body予告"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The performance execution means is capable of executing multiple types of suggestive performances, including a first suggestive performance (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive performance (e.g., "large vibration") which has a higher probability of controlling to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive performance is executed, based on the decision result of the decision means.
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0% for big wins, 0% for misses) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 90% for big wins, 30% for misses), and also lower than the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Probability Variation State" (for example, 90% for big wins, 40% for misses). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the number of times it is suggested that the system will be controlled to a favorable state will be reduced, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-39 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-38,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the proportion in which the suggestive performance is executed in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the proportion in which the "movable body予告" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the proportion in which the "movable body予告" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 90%), but the proportion in which the "movable body予告" is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the proportion in which the "movable body予告" is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased entertainment value by differentiating the level of attention given to suggestive effects between the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-40 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-39,
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the proportion in which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first special state when the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the proportion in which the "small vibration" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 0%) is lower than the proportion in which the "small vibration" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%), but the proportion in which the "small vibration" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the proportion in which the "small vibration" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 30%)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased entertainment value by differentiating the level of attention given to suggestive effects between the first and second special states.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of form 2-25 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including an effect that suggests the control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body予告"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The performance execution means is capable of executing multiple types of suggestive performances, including a first suggestive performance (e.g., "small vibration") and a second suggestive performance (e.g., "large vibration") which has a higher probability of controlling to the advantageous state than when the first suggestive performance is executed, based on the decision result of the decision means.
The execution rate of the suggestive performance per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per variable display in the first special state, and also lower than the execution rate of the suggestive performance per variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0% for big wins, 0% for misses) is lower than the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 90% for big wins, 30% for misses), and also lower than the execution rate of the "movable body予告" per variable display in "Probability Variation State" (for example, 90% for big wins, 40% for misses). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to a favorable state, the number of times it is suggested that the system will be controlled to a favorable state will be reduced, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of form 1-41 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-40,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect that includes an effect that encourages the user to choose whether or not to set the variable display mode of decorative identification information to a specific mode (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character announcement" or "reach announcement"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The execution rate of the aforementioned hype animation per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the aforementioned hype animation per variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the "character予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a big win, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a big win, 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of the "character予告" per variable display in "Probability Variation State" (for example, 80% for a big win, 30% for a miss). Also, the execution rate of the "reach予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of the "reach予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 40%), and also lower than the execution rate of the "reach予告" per variable display in "Probability Variation State" (for example, 50%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times the decision of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of form 2-26 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-25,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect that includes an effect that encourages the user to choose whether or not to set the variable display mode of decorative identification information to a specific mode (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute "character announcement" or "reach announcement"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The execution rate of the hype animation per variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the hype animation per variable display in the first special state, and also lower than the execution rate of the hype animation per variable display in the third special state (for example, the execution rate of the "character予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a big win, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of the "character予告" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a big win, 20% for a miss) It is lower than the above, and also lower than the execution rate of "character announcements" per variable display in "probability variation state" (for example, 80% for a big win, 30% for a miss). Furthermore, the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "time reduction state B" (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "time reduction state A" (for example, 40%), and also lower than the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "probability variation state" (for example, 50%). See Figure 11-50.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, the number of times the decision of whether or not to display a specific display is prompted is reduced, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of form 1-42 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
A movable body (for example, movable body 32),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect that operates the movable body and a specific effect that notifies that the system is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute "movable body notification" and "movable body effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The aforementioned performance execution means can perform the movable body performance and the specific performance as performance execution patterns for the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be performed in the variable display of 1, and the following are included: a first performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is performed before the execution period of the specific performance and also during the execution period of the specific performance; and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not performed before the execution period of the specific performance, but is performed during the execution period of the specific performance.
The proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 10%), and also higher than the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Change State" (for example, 20%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control the system to an advantageous state, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the movable parts are less likely to be operated unnecessarily even before a specific performance, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-43 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-42,
The control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control it to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control it to the advantageous state in the second special state, are common to all (for example, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) and the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) are common to all).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the commonization of control data used to control the movable body between the first and second special states, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of form 1-44 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-43,
Equipped with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the machine to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the machine to the advantageous state in the second special state, are common to all (for example, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 that illuminate in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or probability variation state (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that illuminates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (for example, control data corresponding to an extended command such as B000), are common to all of these).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the reduction of development costs by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the movable body effects in both the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-45 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-44,
The system includes a display means capable of displaying an effect image to emphasize the movable body,
The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state, are common to all (for example, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)), and the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)), are common to all of these).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the unification of effect images displayed in conjunction with the movable body animation between the first and second special states, thereby reducing development costs.

The gaming machine of form 1-46 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-45,
Equipped with vibration means capable of performing vibration of a predetermined part,
The vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means decides to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state, are common to both (for example, the vibration mode performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, and the vibration mode performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B are common to both).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by standardizing the vibration patterns executed in conjunction with the movable body effects between the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-47 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-46,
The proportion in which the first performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state is higher than the proportion in which the first performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state (for example, the proportion in which "Pattern A-2, A-3 (First Performance Execution Pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state (for example, 80-90%) is higher than the proportion in which "Pattern A-2, A-3 (First Performance Execution Pattern)" is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B (for example, 10%)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased interest in the first special state by drawing attention to whether or not the movable parts are operating.

The gaming machine of form 1-48 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-47,
The frequency of execution of the movable body effect in the second special state is lower than the frequency of execution of the movable body effect in the first special state (for example, the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the frequency of execution of the "movable body effect" in time-saving state A or probability variation state (for example, 80-90%)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that the movable parts are less likely to be moved unnecessarily in the second special state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of form 2-27 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
A movable body (for example, movable body 32),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect including a movable body effect that operates the movable body and a specific effect that notifies that the system is controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute "movable body notification" and "movable body effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The aforementioned performance execution means can perform the movable body performance and the specific performance as performance execution patterns for the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be performed in the variable display of 1, and the following are included: a first performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body performance is performed before the execution period of the specific performance and also during the execution period of the specific performance; and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "Pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is not performed before the execution period of the specific performance, but is performed during the execution period of the specific performance.
The proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and also higher than the proportion in which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the third special state (for example, the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 10%), and also higher than the proportion in which "Pattern A-1" is executed when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Change State" (for example, 20%). See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control the system to an advantageous state, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, the movable parts are less likely to be operated unnecessarily even before a specific performance, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of form 1-49 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the "movable body effect" and the "post-effect"), which includes a specific effect that notifies that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when it has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-effect that is executed after the specific effect and notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be dispensed) that can identify the magnitude of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state,
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2), and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, about 40 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "Probability Variation State" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
The presentation method of the aforementioned post-event performance is the same whether the post-event performance is performed in the first special state or in the second special state (for example, the presentation method of the "post-event performance" that notifies the number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, which is notified by the SP reach performance that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is the same as the "time-saving state B", "probability change state", and "time-saving state A" as shown in Figure 11-60. See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to a favorable state, the variable displays that are decided to be controlled to a favorable state have fewer types of variable display patterns and a shorter average duration of variable display periods, which increases the rate at which the variable displays are consumed. Furthermore, after it is announced that the player will be controlled to a favorable state, the game can be enhanced with the same effects as the first special state, thus providing a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of form 1-50 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific performance that is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the specific performance that is executed when the decision means determines to control the game to the advantageous state in the second special state, are common to both (for example, the "movable body performance" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, and the "movable body performance" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state B are common parts. See Figure 11-59 (D1)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the reduction of development costs by standardizing specific effects between the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-51 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-50,
Equipped with a light-emitting means capable of emitting light,
The control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the control data used to control the movable LED 208 that illuminates in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state and the control data used to control the movable LED 208 that illuminates in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the portion of the light-emitting control data executed based on the extended command D300)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the reduction of development costs by standardizing the control data used to control the light-emitting means that illuminates in conjunction with the post-event effects in both the first and second special states.

The gaming machine of form 1-52 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-51,
Equipped with vibration means capable of performing vibration of a predetermined part,
The vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the first special state and the vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-event performance in the second special state are common (for example, the vibration mode performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state and the vibration mode performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event performance" in the time-saving state B are common (for example, the vibration control data portion performed based on the extended command S300)),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a reduction in development costs by standardizing the vibration patterns that are executed in conjunction with the post-event effects between the first and second special states.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of form 2-28 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
An effect execution means capable of executing an effect (for example, the part in which the effect control CPU 120 can execute the "movable body effect" and the "post-effect"), which includes a specific effect that notifies that the variable display is controlled to the advantageous state when it has been determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-effect that is executed after the specific effect and notifies game value information (for example, the planned number of balls to be dispensed) that can identify the magnitude of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state,
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determination means can determine in the second special state is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state and less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time-saving state B" (e.g., 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A" (e.g., 2) and less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "probability variation state" (e.g., 3)).
When the variable display is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state, the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination means in the second special state is shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state, and also shorter than the average duration of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "jackpot", the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time-saving state B" (for example, about 40 seconds) is less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "time-saving state A" (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and also less than the average duration of the variable display time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in "probability variation state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds). See Figure 11-50).
The presentation method of the aforementioned post-event performance is common to the cases in which the post-event performance is performed in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, the presentation method of the "post-event performance" that notifies the number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, which is notified by the SP reach performance that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot game state, is common to "Shortened Time State B", "Probability Change State", and "Shortened Time State A", as shown in Figure 11-60. See Figure 11-50).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable displays that are decided to be controlled to an advantageous state have fewer types of variable display patterns and a shorter average period of variable display, which increases the rate at which the variable displays are consumed. Furthermore, after it is announced that the player will be controlled to an advantageous state, the game can be enhanced with the same effects as in the first and third special states, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of form 1-53 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-52,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first starting prize slot), and by performing variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The variable display pattern determination means is
In the first special state, if no hold memory is stored in the second hold memory means and the determination means does not decide to control to the advantageous state, a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "not reach") for a predetermined variable display period can be determined for which the hold memory can be stored in the second hold memory means.
In the second special state, if no hold memory is stored in the second hold memory means, and the determination means does not decide to control the variable display to the advantageous state, it is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, when the number of hold memories is 0, the CPU 103 can determine a losing variation pattern with a long variable display time to gain time to store hold memories in the second hold memory (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds), while in the time-saving state B, when the number of hold memories is 0, it can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time than a losing variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds) (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds, or a shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds). See Figure 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, even if no hold memory is stored, a predetermined variable display pattern with a long variable display period is determined, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state. This prevents a decrease in the rate of consumption of the variable displays, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine of form 2-29 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-28,
A game machine (e.g., a pachinko game machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (e.g., a jackpot game state) by performing variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a first starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first starting prize slot), and by performing variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) based on the fulfillment of a second starting condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A first reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A second reserved storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as reserved storage (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the start prize determination process in step S101 of the special symbol process processing),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The variable display pattern determination means is
In the first special state or the third special state, if no hold memory is stored in the second hold memory means and the determination means does not decide to control to the advantageous state, it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "not reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which the hold memory can be stored in the second hold memory means.
In the second special state, if no hold memory is stored in the second hold memory means, and the determination means does not decide to control the variable display to the advantageous state, it is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a special variable display time shorter than the predetermined variable display period (for example, when the number of hold memories is 0 in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a losing variation pattern with a long variable display time to gain time to store hold memories in the second hold memory (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds), while when the number of hold memories is 0 in time-saving state B, it can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time than a losing variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds) (for example, an ultra-shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds, or a shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds). See Figure 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, even if no hold memory is stored, a predetermined variable display pattern with a long variable display period is determined, taking into account that a long period of time has passed during which the state has not been controlled to an advantageous state. This prevents a decrease in the rate of consumption of the variable displays, thus providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of form 1-54 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the aforementioned special state is initiated, the control of the special state is initiated, and the control of the special state is initiated by an indication of the start of the special state, including an effect execution means (for example, the part in which the control of the effect CPU 120 can execute an "entry effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
When the control of the first special state is initiated, the special state start indicator is displayed in the special state start animation.
When control of the second special state is initiated, the special state initiation animation displays the special state initiation indicator, and also displays special indicators that are not displayed when control of the first special state is initiated (for example, when control of time-saving state A is initiated, the time-saving entry animation A displays the entry image 069SG470, and when control of the probability variation state is initiated, the probability variation entry animation displays the entry image 069SG472, which consists of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variation image 069SG471, while when control of time-saving state B is initiated, the time-saving entry animation B displays the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as the entry image 069SG470 displayed when entering time-saving state A and the probability variation state, and also displays the playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special indicators that are not displayed when control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A is initiated. See Figures 11-50, 11-63, and 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the system is not controlled to an advantageous state, the special state start animation displays not only the same special state start display as when the control of the first special state begins, but also a special display that is not displayed when the control of the first special state begins, thereby making the start of the second special state more exciting.

The gaming machine of form 1-55 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-54,
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the aforementioned advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
Equipped with,
The variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern for a variable display period in which the special state start performance can be executed in the variable display when the control of the second special state is started (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time in which the "entry performance" can be executed in the rescue time reduction reach variation).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the execution of a special state initiation sequence.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of form 2-30 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the aforementioned special state is initiated, the control of the special state is initiated, and the control of the special state is initiated by an indication of the start of the special state, including an effect execution means (for example, the part in which the control of the effect CPU 120 can execute an "entry effect"),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
When the control of the third special state is initiated, the special state start indicator is displayed in the special state start animation.
When control of the second special state is initiated, the special state start display is shown in the special state start animation, and special displays that are not shown when control of the third special state is initiated are shown (for example, when control of time-saving state A is initiated, the entry image 069SG470 is shown in time-saving state entry animation A, and when control of the probability variation state is initiated, the entry image 069SG472, consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variation image 069SG471, is shown in the probability variation state entry animation, while when control of time-saving state B is initiated, the entry image 069SG470, which is common to the entry image 069SG470 shown when entering time-saving state A and the probability variation state, is shown in time-saving state entry animation B, and playtime images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are shown as special displays that are not shown when control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A is initiated. See Figures 11-50, 11-63, and 11-64).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the player is not controlled to an advantageous state, the special state start animation displays not only the special state start display which is the same as when the control of the third special state starts, but also a special display which is not displayed when the control of the third special state starts, thereby making the start of the second special state more exciting.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of form 1-56 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1-1 to 1-55,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays of special identification information (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The aforementioned advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C (10R)) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.
The variable decorative display means is capable of performing a special variable decorative display (for example, SP Reach D (full rotation)) which, when the determination means determines that the system should be controlled to the advantageous state, displays a specific display result, which is shown as the result of the variable display of the decorative identification information that the determination means has determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, for a predetermined period of time, and then stops displaying it.
The proportion in which the special decorative variable display is executed when the determination means decides to control the game to the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the special decorative variable display is executed when the determination means decides to control the game to the second advantageous state in the first special state (for example, the proportion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in the time-saving state B (for example, 100%) is higher than the proportion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes "SP Reach D (Full Rotation)" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in the time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and is also higher than the proportion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes "SP Reach D (Full Rotation)" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in the probability variation state (for example, 0% (not executed)). See Figure 11-69).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a second advantageous state with a higher degree of advantage, taking into consideration that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby providing a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of form 2-31 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 2-1 to 2-30,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that can control the game to a favorable state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state) by displaying variable special identification information based on when the starting conditions are met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot),
State control means capable of controlling between a non-special state and a special state in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state (for example, a part in which the CPU 103 can control between a normal state, a time-saving state A in which time-saving control is performed to improve the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), a probability change state, and a time-saving state B),
A determination means capable of determining whether to control to the advantageous state (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination process in step 069SGS62 of the special symbol normal processing),
Based on the determination result of the aforementioned determination means, a variable display pattern determination means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among multiple types of variable display patterns with different variable display periods for special identification information (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 determines one of multiple types of variable patterns based on the variable display result in the variable pattern setting process of step 069 SGS 111),
A variable decorative display means that performs a variable display of decorative identification information in response to the variable display of special identification information (for example, the part in which the performance control CPU 120 synchronizes with the first special symbol and the second special symbol to perform a variable display of decorative symbols as multiple types of decorative identification information),
Equipped with,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays of special identification information (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The aforementioned advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)) and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C (10R)) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state.
The variable decorative display means is capable of performing a special variable decorative display (for example, SP Reach D (full rotation)) which, when the determination means determines that the system should be controlled to the advantageous state, displays a specific display result, which is shown as the result of the variable display of the decorative identification information that the determination means has determined to be controlled to the advantageous state, for a predetermined period of time, and then stops displaying it.
The proportion in which the special decorative variable display is executed when the determination means decides to control the second advantageous state in the second special state is higher than the proportion in which the special decorative variable display is executed when the determination means decides to control the second advantageous state in the first special state, and also higher than the proportion in which the special decorative variable display is executed when the determination means decides to control the second advantageous state in the third special state (for example, when the type of jackpot is "jackpot C (10R)" in time-saving state B) The percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "Full Rotation Performance" when it has been determined (for example, 100%) is higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes "SP Reach D (Full Rotation)" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in the time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and also higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes "SP Reach D (Full Rotation)" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in the probability variation state (for example, 0% (not executed)). See Figure 11-69.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, if it is decided to control to a second advantageous state with a higher degree of advantage, taking into consideration that a long period of time has passed during which the system has not been controlled to an advantageous state, a special variable display is more likely to be executed, thereby providing a suitable second special state.

(Feature part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of form 1 of feature section 099SG is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is performed in the second special state by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is performed in the first special state by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-100) The gaming machine of type 2 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state, which is performed in the second special state, by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state, which is performed in the first special state, by the first count, and is also smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state, which is performed in the third special state, by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-30, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average variation time of 1 in the time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average variation time of 1 in the time-saving state A, by 110, and the portion of the period value ψ that is smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average variation time of 1 in the probability variation state, by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-101) The gaming machine of type 3 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state performed in the second special state by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state performed in the first special state by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-102) The gaming machine of type 4 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state performed in the second special state by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state performed in the first special state by the second count, and is also smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display not controlled by the favorable state performed in the third special state by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-30, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, by 1100, and the portion of the period value ψ' that is smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average variation time of 1 in probability-changing state, by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-103) The gaming machine of type 5 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 0 by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 0 by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display whose variable display result is a miss and is started when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 0 in the time-saving state B by 110 is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display whose variable display result is a miss and is started when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 0 in the time-saving state A by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-104) The gaming machine of type 6 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 0, by the first count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 0, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 0, It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by one count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state B and the result is a miss is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state A and the period value ξ is smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in probability variation state and the result is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-105) The gaming machine of type 7 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 0 by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 0 by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 0 in the time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 0 in the time-saving state A by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-106) The gaming machine of type 8 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 0, by the second count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 0, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 0, by the second count Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1100 (for example, as shown in Figure 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in time-saving state A by 1100, and the period value ξ' is smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 in probability variation state by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-107) The gaming machine of type 9 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1 by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1 by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a miss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 1 in the time-saving state B by 110 is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a miss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 1 in the time-saving state A by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of type 10 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1, by the first count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1, and the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 1, Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by one count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state B and the result is a miss is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state A and the result is a miss, and the period value λ is smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in probability variation state and the result is a miss),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-109) The gaming machine of type 11 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, the normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1 by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1 by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 1 in the time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 1 in the time-saving state A by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-110) The gaming machine of type 12 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, the normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 1, by the second count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 1, by the second count, and the average variable display period for a variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 1, by the second count Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by (for example, as shown in Figure 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state A by 1100, and the period value λ is smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in probability variation state by 1100),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-111) The gaming machine of type 13 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, the normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 2 by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 2 by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 2 in the time-saving state B by 110 is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 2 in the time-saving state A by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of type 14 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 2, by the first count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 2, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 2, Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by one count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in time-saving state B and the result is a miss is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in time-saving state A and the result is a miss, and the period value θ is smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in probability variation state and the result is a miss),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-113) The gaming machine of type 15 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 2 by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 2 by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 2 in the time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 2 in the time-saving state A by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-114) The gaming machine of type 16 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as a holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 2, by the second count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 2, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 2, by the second count Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by (for example, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of a variable display that results in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of a variable display that results in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in time-saving state A by 1100, and the period value θ' is smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of a variable display that results in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 2 in probability variation state by 110),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-115) The gaming machine of type 17 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, the normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 3 by the first count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 3 by the first count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display whose variable display result is a miss and is started when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 3 in the time-saving state B by 110 is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display whose variable display result is a miss and is started when the number of reserved memories for the second special state is 3 in the time-saving state A by 110).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-116) The gaming machine of type 18 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding memory means (for example, a first special feature holding memory unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding memory unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding memory,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 3, by the first count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 3, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 3, It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by one count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in time-saving state B and the result is a miss is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in time-saving state A and the period value ε is smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period for variable displays that start when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in probability variation state and the result is a miss).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-117) The gaming machine of type 19 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, a normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the execution frequency of the variable display is higher than that of the non-special state, in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 3 by the second count is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state and is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 3 by the second count (for example, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 3 in the time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for a variable display that results in a loss when the number of reserved memories in the second special state is 3 in the time-saving state A by 1100).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

(SG2020-118) The gaming machine of type 20 is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko machine 1) that displays a variable status based on whether the starting conditions have been met (for example, when a game ball enters the starting prize slot) and can be controlled to an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot game state),
The system includes a state control means (for example, the part in which the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in Figure 6) that can control between a non-special state (for example, the normal state) and a special state (for example, a time-saving state A, a time-saving state B, a probability change state) in which the starting conditions are more likely to be met than in the non-special state.
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, a second special state (e.g., time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 900 times) have been performed, and a third special state (e.g., probability-changing state) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends.
The termination condition for the first special state includes the execution of a first variable display (for example, 110 times) in the first special state.
The termination condition for the second special state includes the execution of a second variable display (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state.
The termination condition for the third special state includes the execution of a third variable display (for example, 110 times) which is less than the second number of times, in the third special state.
The system further includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special feature holding storage unit 099SG151A or a second special feature holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information related to variable displays as holding storage,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the second special state is 3, by the second count, is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the first special state is 3, and the average variable display period for 1 variable display that is not controlled by the favorable state, which is started when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means in the third special state is 3, by the second count Smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying by 1100 (for example, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in time-saving state B by 1100 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in time-saving state A by 1100, and the period value ε' is smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of variable displays that result in a loss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 3 in probability variation state by 1100),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing a predetermined number of variable displays in the non-special state, to progress faster than in the first special state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in the second special state.

The gaming machine of form 21 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that launches gaming media into a gaming area (for example, a right gaming area and a left gaming area) into which gaming media can flow,
As a variable display, it is possible to perform variable displays of special identification information and variable displays of ordinary identification information (for example, the part that can perform variable displays of special symbols and variable displays of ordinary symbols),
Based on the fact that a specific display result is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information, a variable means (for example, a variable prize ball device 6B that forms a second starting prize opening) changes between a first state in which a game medium can enter (for example, an open state) and a second state in which it is more difficult for a game medium to enter than in the first state.
A holding storage means (for example, a first special design holding storage unit 099SG151A and a second special design holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing information relating to the variable display of the special identification information as a holding storage,
Equipped with,
The game area has a special path (for example, the left game area) on which the variable means is provided, and a non-special path (for example, the right game area) that is different from the special path.
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that the reserved memory means can store is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special figure reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special figure reserved memory unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the game state),
The probability that the aforementioned specific display result is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the variable display of the ordinary identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in Figure 12-2(B), the probability of winning is the same regardless of whether the game state is time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability variation state).
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in Figure 12-2(D), the opening time of the second start prize entry is 3 seconds regardless of whether the game state is time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability variation state).
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is launched toward the special path (for example, both time-saving state A and time-saving state B are game states in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a greater degree of commonality in gameplay between the first and second special states, preventing players from becoming confused by significant differences in gameplay between the two special states.

The gaming machine of form 22 is the gaming machine described in form 21,
When the aforementioned period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the first or second variable display, which is not controlled by the advantageous state, is executed in each special state, the start time of the measurement includes the time when the game medium is launched (for example, the portion in which the average variable display period is calculated as the period from the timing when the game ball is launched, or the timing when the launched game ball enters the starting prize slot, to the timing when the variable display based on the starting prize ends),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the accurate acquisition of period values through measurement.

The gaming machine of form 23 is a gaming machine described in any of form 2, form 6, form 10, form 14, or form 18,
It is equipped with a retained storage means capable of storing multiple pieces of information related to variable display as retained storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that the reserved memory means can store is the same in all three special states (for example, regardless of the game state, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is limited to four).
The average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figures 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of variable display variation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories, so the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a miss differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The aforementioned period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the proportion of variable displays performed for each reserved memory number to the first number of times by the average variable display period for that reserved memory number (for example, as shown in Figure 12-13, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the proportion of variable displays performed for each reserved memory number to 110 variable displays by the average variable display period for each reserved memory number).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 24 is the gaming machine described in form 23,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, regardless of the game state, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is limited to 4),
In special state XL1,
The average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the ratio of the variable displays executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is ratio a (for example, A is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0, and a is the ratio of the variable displays when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0 to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The average variable display period for a variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the ratio of variable displays executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is ratio b (for example, B is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special feature is 1, and b is the ratio of variable displays when there is 1 reserved memory for the second special feature in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period C, and the proportion of the variable display performed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is the proportion c (for example, C is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 2 and the result of the variable display is a miss, and c is the proportion of the variable display when there are 2 reserved memories of the second special feature to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period D, and the ratio of variable displays performed with 1 reserved memory to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, D is the average variable display period in time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 3, and d is the ratio of variable displays when there are 3 reserved memories of the second special feature to the 110 variable displays in time-saving state A).
The duration value of the first special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0, obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio a and the average variable display period A; the value corresponding to hold 1, obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio b and the average variable display period B; the value corresponding to hold 2, obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio c and the average variable display period C; and the value corresponding to hold 3, obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio d and the average variable display period D (for example, the duration value α is the portion calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

The gaming machine of form 25 is the gaming machine described in form 23 or form 24,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, regardless of the game state, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is limited to 4),
In the second special state described above,
The average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period E, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, E is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0, and e is the ratio of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 0 to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is F, and the ratio of variable displays performed with a reserved memory of 1 to the first number of times is f (for example, F is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 1, and f is the ratio of variable displays when there is 1 reserved memory of the second special feature to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period G, and the proportion of the variable display performed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is the proportion g (for example, G is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 2, and g is the proportion of the variable display when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 2 to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period H, and the ratio of variable displays performed with 1 reserved memory to the first number of times is the ratio h (for example, H is the average variable display period during which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 3 in the time-saving state B, and h is the ratio of variable displays when there are 3 reserved memories of the second special symbol in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
The duration value of the second special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio e and the average variable display period E; the value corresponding to hold 1 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio f and the average variable display period F; the value corresponding to hold 2 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio g and the average variable display period G; and the value corresponding to hold 3 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio h and the average variable display period H (for example, the duration value β is the portion calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

The gaming machine of form 26 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 23 to 25,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, regardless of the game state, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is limited to 4),
In the special state described above,
The average variable display period for the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 0 in the probability variation state, and i is the ratio of the variable display when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 0 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variation state).
The average variable display period of a variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the ratio of variable displays executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is ratio j (for example, J is the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 1 in the probability variation state, and j is the ratio of variable displays when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variation state).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period K, and the ratio of variable displays performed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the first number of times is the ratio k (for example, K is the average variable display period during which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 2 in the probability variation state, and k is the ratio of variable displays when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 2 to the 110 variable displays in the probability variation state).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is L, and the ratio of variable displays performed with 1 reserved memory to the first number of times is l (for example, L is the average variable display period during which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 3 in the probability variation state, and l is the ratio of variable displays when there are 3 reserved memories of the second special symbol to the 110 variable displays in the probability variation state).
The duration value of the third special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio i and the average variable display period I; the value corresponding to hold 1 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio j and the average variable display period J; the value corresponding to hold 2 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio k and the average variable display period K; and the value corresponding to hold 3 obtained by multiplying the first count by the ratio l and the average variable display period L (for example, the duration value γ is the portion calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

The gaming machine of form 27 is a gaming machine described in any of form 4, form 8, form 12, form 16, or form 20,
It includes a holding storage means (for example, a first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and a second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B) capable of storing multiple pieces of information related to variable display as holding storage,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memories that the reserved memory means can store is the same in all three special states (for example, regardless of the game state, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is up to four).
The average variable display period of the variable display differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means (for example, as shown in Figures 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, the selection ratio of variable display variation patterns in which the variable display result is incorrect differs depending on the number of reserved memories, so the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is incorrect differs depending on the number of reserved memories stored).
The aforementioned period value is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the proportion of variable displays performed for each reserved memory number to the second number of times by the average variable display period for that reserved memory number (for example, as shown in Figure 12-14, the period value in each game state is the sum of the values obtained by multiplying the proportion of variable displays performed for each reserved memory number to 1100 variable displays by the average variable display period for each reserved memory number).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of form 28 is the gaming machine described in form 27,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B regardless of the game state is up to 4),
In special state XL1,
The average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the ratio of the variable displays executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is the ratio a' (for example, A is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 0, and a' is the portion where the variable displays when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 0 to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is B, and the ratio of variable displays performed with a reserved memory of 1 to the second number of times is ratio b' (for example, B is the average variable display period in time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 1, and b' is the ratio of variable displays when there is 1 reserved memory of the second special feature to the 1100 variable displays in time-saving state A).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period C, and the proportion of the number of variable displays performed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is the proportion c' (for example, C is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special feature is 2, and c' is the proportion of the number of variable displays in the time-saving state A where the number of reserved memories for the second special feature is 2 to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period D, and the proportion of the number of variable displays performed with a reserved memory of 1 to the second number of times is the proportion d' (for example, D is the average variable display period in the time-saving state A when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 3 and the result of the variable display is a miss, and d' is the proportion of the number of variable displays in the time-saving state A when there are 3 reserved memories of the second special feature to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A).
The duration value of the first special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio a' and the average variable display period A; the value corresponding to hold 1 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio b' and the average variable display period B; the value corresponding to hold 2 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio c' and the average variable display period C; and the value corresponding to hold 3 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio d' and the average variable display period D (for example, the duration value α' is the portion calculated by the value of A × a' + B × b' + C × c' + D × d').
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the first special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

The gaming machine of means 29 is the gaming machine described in embodiment 27 or embodiment 28,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B regardless of the game state is up to 4),
In the second special state described above,
The average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period E, and the ratio of the variable displays executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e' (for example, E is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 0, and e' is the portion where the variable displays when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 0 to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is F, and the ratio of variable displays performed with a reserved memory of 1 to the second number of times is f' (for example, F is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 1, and f' is the ratio of variable displays when there is 1 reserved memory of the second special feature to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period G, and the proportion of the number of variable displays performed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is the proportion g' (for example, G is the average variable display period in the time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special feature is 2, and g' is the proportion of the number of variable displays in the time-saving state B where the number of reserved memories for the second special feature is 2 to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is the average variable display period H, and the ratio of variable displays performed with 1 reserved memory to the second number of times is the ratio h' (for example, H is the average variable display period in time-saving state B where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special feature is 3, and h' is the ratio of variable displays when there are 3 reserved memories of the second special feature to the 1100 variable displays in time-saving state B).
The period value of the second special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio e' and the average variable display period E; the value corresponding to hold 1 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio f' and the average variable display period F; the value corresponding to hold 2 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio g' and the average variable display period G; and the value corresponding to hold 3 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio h' and the average variable display period H (for example, the period value β' is the portion calculated by the value of E × e' + F × f' + G × g' + H × h').
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the second special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

The gaming machine of form 30 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 27 to 29,
The upper limit of the number of reserved memory means is 4 (for example, the number of reserved memories that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B regardless of the game state is up to 4),
In the special state described above,
The average variable display period for the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed when the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 0 to the second number of times is the ratio i' (for example, I is the average variable display period in the probability variation state where the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 0, and i' is the portion where the variable display when the number of reserved memories for the second special symbol is 0 to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variation state),
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 1, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is J, and the ratio of variable displays performed with a reserved memory of 1 to the second number of times is ratio j' (for example, J is the average variable display period in which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is 1 in the probability variation state, and j' is the ratio of variable displays when there is 1 reserved memory of the second special symbol in the probability variation state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variation state).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 2, the average variable display period of the variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state and is executed is the average variable display period K, and the ratio of the variable display executed when the number of reserved memories is 1 to the second number of times is the ratio k' (for example, K is the average variable display period during which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories in the second special symbol is 2 in the probability variation state, and k' is the ratio of the variable display when the number of reserved memories in the second special symbol is 2 to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variation state).
When the number of reserved memories stored in the reserved memory means is 3, the average variable display period of 1 variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state is L, and the proportion of the number of variable displays performed with 1 reserved memory to the second number of times is proportion l' (for example, L is the average variable display period during which the variable display result is a miss when the number of reserved memories in the second special symbol is 3 in the probability variation state, and l' is the proportion of the number of variable displays when there are 3 reserved memories in the second special symbol state to the 1100 variable displays in the probability variation state).
The duration value of the third special state is the sum of the following: the value corresponding to hold 0 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio i' and the average variable display period I; the value corresponding to hold 1 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio j' and the average variable display period J; the value corresponding to hold 2 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio k' and the average variable display period K; and the value corresponding to hold 3 obtained by multiplying the second count by the ratio l' and the average variable display period L (for example, the duration value γ' is the portion calculated by the value of I × i' + J × j' + K × k' + L × l').
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for obtaining an accurate duration value for the third special state corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

(Feature part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) Feature section 018 The gaming machine of form 3-1 of the SG form is,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 of feature section 018SG) that can be controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot state),
Light-emitting elements (for example, movable LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, etc.)
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) and
An effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing SP reach effects A to E and movable body effects), which includes a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special effect that operates the movable body and illuminates the light-emitting body.
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As the aforementioned specific performance, it is possible to perform a first specific performance (e.g., SP Reach Performance B) that displays a specific character (e.g., enemy character X-1) and notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the specific character, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP Reach Performance A) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled without displaying the specific character.
When it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the aforementioned specific performance, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the aforementioned specific performance (for example, the portion in which the movable body performance can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach performance (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5)),
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character (for example, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with an effect image related to the movement of the movable body (for example, effect image 018SG250B) (see Figure 13-14 (D2) (D4)).
During the execution period of the special performance in the second specific performance, an effect image related to the movement of the movable body in a manner common to the first specific performance (for example, effect image 018SG250B) is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed (see Figure 13-14 (D1)).
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the special effect (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) is the same whether the special effect is performed in the first specific effect or in the second specific effect (see Figure 13-6(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the unification of the movement patterns of the movable parts and the light-emitting patterns of the light-emitting parts in the first special effect, in which a specific character is displayed, and the second special effect, in which the specific character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. At the same time, the presence or absence of the specific character displayed during the execution period of the special effect enhances the connection between the special effect and the first special effect, thereby improving the effect of the performance.

The gaming machine of form 3-2 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1,
The proportion of times the game is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific performance is performed than when the second specific performance is performed (for example, the probability of a big win is higher for the variation pattern of Super Reach β than for the variation pattern of Super Reach α, so the probability of a big win is higher for SP Reach Performance B and SP Reach Performance C than for SP Reach Performance A (probability of a big win: SP Reach Performance A < SP Reach Performance B < SP Reach Performance C))
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to focus on whether or not a second specific performance is executed as a special performance, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-3 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1 or form 3-2,
The execution period for the special performance is the same for both the first and second specific performances (for example, the execution period for the "decisive performance" in SP Reach Performances A to E (ta3 to ta4) is the same for both SP Reach Performances A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP Reach Performance A = SP Reach Performance B = SP Reach Performance C = SP Reach Performance D = SP Reach Performance E)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the standardization of the execution period for special effects, enabling the standardization of control data for movable and luminous elements used in special effects, thereby further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-4 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The period for the execution of the aforementioned special performance includes the first period and the second period which follows the first period.
The performance modes in the first period are common to the first specific performance and the second specific performance, while the performance modes in the second period differ between the first specific performance and the second specific performance (for example, the execution period of the movable body performance includes the first period and the second period which follows the first period, and the performance modes in the first period are common to SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A (the attack image 018SG250 in Figure 13-14(C) is common), while the performance modes in the second period differ between SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A. The image shown in Figure 13-14(D1) and the image shown in Figure 13-14(D2 to D5) are different).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by using the same presentation style until the first period, manufacturing costs can be further reduced, and since it is unclear whether it is the first or second specific presentation until the first period, the entertainment value of the specific presentation can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of form 3-5 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-4,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing a third specific performance (e.g., SP reach performance E) which displays a special character different from the aforementioned specific character (e.g., enemy character X-2) as the specific performance,
The proportion of the game being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on whether the first specific performance is executed or the third specific performance is executed (for example, in the low base state, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the determination ratio of the SP Reach β variation pattern corresponding to SP Reach performance B is 300/997, and in the high base state, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the determination ratio of the SP Reach γ variation pattern corresponding to SP Reach performance E is 800/997).
In the third specific performance, during the execution period of the special performance which is performed when it is notified that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state, an effect image common to the first specific performance (for example, effect image 018SG250B) corresponding to the movement of the movable body is displayed, and the special character (for example, character image 018SGX2) is displayed.
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the special performance performed in the third specific performance (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2) is the same as the light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the special performance performed in the first specific performance (see Figure 13-6(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the standardization of the movement patterns of the movable parts and the illumination patterns of the light-emitting parts in each special effect, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. At the same time, it allows for an increase in specific effects where the proportion of control to a favorable state differs, drawing attention to which specific effect will be executed, and thus improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-6 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-5,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's movements,
Regardless of the detection timing at which the player's actions are detected by the action detection means during the operation validity period before the control to the advantageous state is notified in the aforementioned specific performance, the light emission termination pattern of the light-emitting element in the special performance is common (for example, even if the "movable body performance" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button performance" is executed, or at the timing when the operation validity period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is the common light emission pattern LP3-2).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the timing of the light-emitting element's termination to be changed by altering the timing of the player's actions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-7 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-6,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing a post-period performance (jackpot notification) during the period following the special performance within the specified performance.
Regardless of the type of the specific performance in which the aforementioned post-period performance is executed, the light emission pattern is common (for example, in the post-period performance after the movable body performance during the execution of SP reach performances A to E, a jackpot confirmation notification can be executed as a post-period performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, regardless of the type of SP reach performances A to E, the light emission patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 are common (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2). See Figure 13-6(B)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a common lighting pattern to be used for subsequent effects, regardless of the specific type of effect, thus further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-8 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R),
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of outputting special performance sounds from the sound output means in the special performance,
The output pattern of the special sound effect is common to all types of the specific effects (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is common to all types of SP reach effects A to E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3). See Figure 13-6(C)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for further reductions in manufacturing costs by standardizing the output patterns for special sound effects.

The gaming machine of form 3-9 is the gaming machine described in form 3-8,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, a push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's movements,
Regardless of the timing at which the player's actions are detected by the action detection means during the operation validity period before the player is notified that they have been controlled to the advantageous state in the aforementioned specific performance, the manner in which the output of the special performance sound ends in the special performance is common (for example, even if the "movable body performance" is executed at any timing in the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button performance" is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected, or at the timing when the operation validity period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is the same sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the timing of the special sound effect output termination to be changed by altering the timing of the player's actions, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-10 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special performance executed in the first specific performance is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in Figure 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 is displayed in a display color that is common to or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for an enhanced relationship between specific characters and effect images, thereby increasing the effectiveness of special effects.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of form 3-11 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-10,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 of feature section 018SG) that can be controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot state),
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) and
An effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state, a special effect that operates the movable body, and a post-effect that is executed after the special effect (for example, an effect control CPU 120 capable of executing SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B),
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As a specific performance, a performance that displays a specific character (for example, an enemy character) and notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the specific character can be performed in both the first embodiment (for example, SP reach performance B) and the second embodiment (for example, SP reach performance D).
When it is announced that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state in the aforementioned specific performance, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the aforementioned specific performance (for example, the portion in which the movable body performance can be executed during the execution period of the SP reach performance (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5)),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first and second embodiments, the specific character (for example, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with a common effect image related to the movement of the movable body (for example, effect image 018SG250B).
When the aforementioned specific performance is performed in the first mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the first mode of the specific performance is not performed, and when the aforementioned specific performance is performed in the second mode, the post-performance using the specific character displayed in the second mode of the specific performance is performed (for example, in the case of SP Reach performance B, instead of post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP Reach performance, post-performance A in which the enemy character is not displayed is performed (see Figure 13-17), while in the case of SP Reach performance D, post-performance B using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP Reach performance (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19) is performed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by standardizing the movement patterns of specific characters and movable parts in special effects between the first and second embodiments, manufacturing costs can be reduced. At the same time, by displaying the same specific character with different effects, the relationship between specific effects and special effects, and between specific effects and post-effect effects, can be enhanced, thereby improving the overall effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-12 is the gaming machine described in form 3-11,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that changes the specific character into a special form after the special performance that is performed in the specific performance,
When the aforementioned specific performance is performed in the second mode, the special performance is performed after the post-performance (for example, in SP Reach performance B, in the jackpot notification before post-performance A, a character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by a fade-out display (see Figure 13-15 (E2)), and in SP Reach performance D, in post-performance B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 is blown away and then disappears into a star (see Figure 13-19 (G1-5))).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for improved visual effects because the timing of special effects changes depending on the specific type of effect being performed.

The gaming machine of form 3-13 is the gaming machine described in form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing the post-performance during the variable display period in which the variable display 1 is being executed.
In the aforementioned post-event performance, game value information is provided that allows for the identification of the magnitude of the game value granted in the advantageous state, which is controlled by the aforementioned specific performance related to the post-event performance (for example, the execution period of "post-event performances A and B" in SP reach α, β, and γ is defined as the period from the start to the end of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7)) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) of the variable display period (
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase attention to post-game presentations that announce game value information, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-14 is the gaming machine described in form 3-11 or form 3-12,
A gaming machine in which the player is notified that the game is controlled to the advantageous state as a result of a specific display outcome being derived and displayed as a result of a variable display,
The aforementioned performance execution means can execute the post-performance when the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-performance A, B" in SP Reach α, β, γ is defined as the period from the time ta5 when the confirmed decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination in the jackpot confirmation notification of SP Reach Performance A to E are temporarily stopped and displayed (ta5 to ta7) during the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts and ends),
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier to recognize when post-event effects are being executed, thus increasing attention to them.

The gaming machine of form 3-15 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-11 to 3-14,
The aforementioned advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the game value granted is greater than that of the first advantageous state.
The proportion of times the game is controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific performance of the second mode is performed than when the specific performance of the first mode is performed (for example, when SP Reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in a low base state and SP Reach performance B is performed, the proportion of times the game is controlled to "jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 30%, and when SP Reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in a high base state and SP Reach performance D is performed, the proportion of times the game is controlled to "jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows players to focus on whether a particular effect is performed in the first or second mode, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-16 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-11 to 3-15,
When the aforementioned performance execution means performs the specific performance in the first mode, it is possible to perform the post-performance in a mode in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, in post-performance A of SP reach performance A, the character does not appear in SP reach performance A, so the character does not appear in post-performance A either. Also, in post-performance A of SP reach performances B and C, the character appears in SP reach performances B and C, but does not appear in post-performance A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a post-event performance is also performed when the specific performance of the first embodiment is executed, thus enhancing the performance effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-17 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of executing the aforementioned specific performance during one variable display,
The variable display period of the variable display in which the specified performance is performed in the second mode is shorter than the variable display period of the variable display in which the specified performance is performed in the first mode.
In the specific performance of the second embodiment, the period from the end of the special performance until the variable display result is derived and displayed is longer than the period from the end of the special performance until the variable display result is derived and displayed in the specific performance of the first embodiment (for example, the variable display period for SP Reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period for SP Reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP Reach γ < SP Reach β), and in SP Reach γ, the period from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends until the timing ta7 when the confirmed decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7) is longer than the period from the timing ta4 when the "movable body performance" ends until the timing ta7 when the confirmed decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in SP Reach β (ta4 to ta7: SP Reach γ > SP Reach β)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the second type of special performance which is executed during a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced even if the variable display period is short by extending the period after the special performance ends.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of form 3-18 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-17,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 of feature section 018SG) that can be controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot state),
The system includes a specific performance that notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the system is notified in the specific performance that it is controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance, and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B),
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As a specific performance, it is possible to execute a first specific performance (e.g., SP Reach performance D) that displays a specific character (e.g., enemy character X-1) and a special character (ally character A-1) and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state using the specific character and the special character, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP Reach performance E) that displays a special character different from the specific character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1) and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to the advantageous state using the special character and the special character.
As a post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the first specific performance, a first post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) can be executed, which notifies game value information (e.g., planned number of balls) that can identify the magnitude of the game value granted in the advantageous state, by displaying and operating the specific character and the special character displayed in the first specific performance.
As a post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) can be executed, which notifies the amount of game value information (e.g., planned number of balls) that can identify the amount of game value granted in the advantageous state, by displaying and operating the special character displayed in the second specific performance.
At least the behavior of the special character is common to both the first and second post-event sequences (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the use of common characters in both specific and post-event scenes, thereby reducing manufacturing costs while simultaneously making the relationship between the two scenes easier to understand, thus enhancing the overall effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-19 is the gaming machine described in form 3-18,
The execution period for the second post-event sequence is the same as the execution period for the first post-event sequence (for example, the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) for "post-event sequence B" corresponding to SP reach sequences D and E are all the same).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier to reuse control data for post-event effects, particularly the motion control data for special characters, by standardizing the execution period, thus further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-20 is the gaming machine described in form 3-18 or form 3-19,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of causing the light-emitting element to emit light in the aforementioned post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting element is common to both the first post-event performance and the second post-event performance (for example, the light emission patterns of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the planned ball payout addition part of post-event performance B are common to both SP reach performance D and SP reach performance E (light emission pattern LP4-4)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for standardization of the light emission patterns, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-21 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-18 to 3-20,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of displaying a background image in the aforementioned post-performance,
The aforementioned background image is common to both the first post-event presentation and the second post-event presentation (for example, background image 018SG280 representing space is common to both post-event presentation B of SP Reach Presentation D and post-event presentation B of SP Reach Presentation E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the standardization of background images, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-22 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-18 to 3-21,
The aforementioned special character is common to both the first post-event scene and the second post-event scene (for example, ally character A-1 is common to both the post-event scene B of SP reach scene D and the post-event scene B of SP reach scene E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the standardization of special characters, further reducing manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of form 3-23 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-18 to 3-22,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
In the first post-event presentation, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at the same time,
In the second post-event sequence, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in post-event sequence B corresponding to SP Reach sequence D, images of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed at the same time, and in post-event sequence B corresponding to SP Reach sequence E, images of enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed at the same time (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows each character to be displayed simultaneously, enhancing the impact of the post-event scene and improving the overall effect.

The gaming machine of form 3-24 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-18 to 3-23,
The performance period of the aforementioned post-event performance includes the first performance period and the second performance period which is later than the first performance period.
The aforementioned performance execution means is
During the first performance period, an indication of the magnitude of the game value to be granted in the advantageous state, which is controlled by the specific performance related to the post-performance, and an addition indication showing the magnitude of the game value to be added to the indication indication are displayed (for example, the planned payout addition part where the planned payout is added in accordance with the allied characters that appeared in SP reach performances D and E attacking the enemy characters),
During the second performance period, the amount of game value added to the game value indicated by the addition display is reported as the amount of game value granted in the advantageous state (for example, after an ally character delivers the final blow to an enemy character, the planned number of balls to be dispensed is displayed and reported, and then the confirmed decorative symbols that result in a jackpot combination are displayed and the variable display ends in the planned ball dispensing notification part).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for enhanced post-game effects, as the magnitude of the game value granted in a favorable state is announced after the suggestion and addition displays are shown during the post-game presentation.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of form 3-25 is a gaming machine described in any of forms 3-1 to 3-24,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 of feature section 018SG) that can be controlled to be in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a jackpot state),
The system includes a specific performance that notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the system is notified in the specific performance that it is controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-performance that is executed after the special performance, and a performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that is capable of executing SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B),
The aforementioned advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, "Big Win A (6R)" in a low base state / "Big Win B (6R)" in a high base state) and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state (for example, "Big Win B (6R)" in a low base state / "Big Win C (10R)" in a high base state),
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As the aforementioned specific performances, it is possible to execute a first specific performance (for example, SP Reach performance D), a second specific performance (for example, SP Reach performance E) which has a different performance mode from the first specific performance, and a third specific performance (for example, SP Reach performance A) which has a different performance mode from the first and second specific performances.
As a post-event performance, when the special performance is performed in the first specific performance, a first post-event performance of a performance type related to the first specific performance (for example, post-event performance B in which ally A-1 and enemy X-1 appear) can be performed.
As a post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the second specific performance, a second post-event performance of a performance type related to the second specific performance (for example, post-event performance B in which ally A-1 and enemy X-2 appear) can be executed.
As a post-event performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, a third post-event performance (for example, post-event performance A) of a performance mode related to the third specific performance can be executed.
The proportion of the game being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether the first, second, or third specific performance is executed (for example, when the SP Reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in a high base state, the proportion of the game being controlled to "Jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40% when SP Reach Performance D is executed and 60% when SP Reach Performance E is executed; and when the SP Reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in a low base state, the proportion of the game being controlled to "Jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 100% when SP Reach Performance A is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature not only informs players that they will be controlled to a favorable state by a specific animation, but also shows that the percentage of being controlled to a second favorable state differs depending on which specific animation is performed. This effectively increases the player's attention to the specific animation and enhances the enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of form 3-26 is the gaming machine described in form 3-25,
The production period for the first post-production and the production period for the second post-production are the same,
The duration of the third post-event sequence differs from the durations of the first and second post-event sequences (for example, the execution duration (ta5 to ta7) of "Post-Event Sequence A" corresponding to each of SP Reach Sequences A to C is the same, and the execution duration (ta5 to ta7) of "Post-Event Sequence B" corresponding to each of SP Reach Sequences D and E is the same, while the execution duration of "Post-Event Sequence A" (10 seconds) and the execution duration of "Post-Event Sequence B" (15 seconds) differ).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the sharing of the same duration between the first and second post-event effects, making it easier to standardize the content and control of the effects between them, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. Furthermore, by implementing a third post-event effect with a different duration, it is possible to prevent the post-event effects from becoming monotonous and enhance their effectiveness.

The gaming machine of form 3-27 is the gaming machine described in form 3-25 or form 3-26,
The aforementioned performance execution means is capable of causing the light-emitting element to emit light in the post-performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the first post-event effect is the same as the light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the second post-event effect,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the third post-event performance differs from the light emission pattern of the light-emitting element in the first and second post-event performances (for example, the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in the scheduled ball output notification part of post-event performance B corresponding to SP Reach Performance D and SP Reach Performance E are the same, while the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-event performance A corresponding to SP Reach Performance A differ from the light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in post-event performance B corresponding to SP Reach Performance D and SP Reach Performance E. See Figure 13-6).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for further reduction of manufacturing costs by using the same light pattern for the first and second post-event effects, while also enhancing the effect of the post-event effects by executing a third post-event effect with a different light pattern.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko machine).

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 1 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or variation.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

The image display device 5 may have display areas on its screen for displaying pending displays corresponding to variable displays whose execution is currently suspended, and active displays corresponding to variable displays that are currently running. The pending displays and active displays are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays.

The number of variable displays that are currently being held is also called the held memory count. The number of held memory corresponding to the first special feature game is called the first held memory count, and the number of held memory corresponding to the second special feature game is called the second held memory count. The sum of the first and second held memory counts is also called the total held memory count.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 3). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-type mechanism having a pair of movable pieces. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so the tips of the movable pieces approach the prize ball device 6A, resulting in a closed state where game balls cannot enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable pieces of the variable prize ball device 6B are in a tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B only needs to be capable of changing between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to those equipped with an electric tulip-shaped mechanism.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 1, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 in the game board 2.

A movable body 32, described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in Figure 1), which operates according to the effects. A movable body lamp 9d is also provided on the movable body 32. The movable body lamp 9d, along with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c, are sometimes collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. Note that these main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are all composed of LEDs.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is mounted at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 3).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a circuit board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is equipped with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching between the setting change state and the setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing setting values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate when the setting change state is active. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be mounted externally to the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined location on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is positioned in the center of the back of the main board 11, and a display switching switch 31 is positioned to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 can be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display switching switch 31 are positioned in front of the main board 11 when viewing the back side of the game board 2 with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as the consecutive win ratio, the payout ratio, and the base rate. The consecutive win ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that come from winning in the large winning slot (attacker). The payout ratio is the proportion of the total number of winning balls that come from winning in the second starting winning slot (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that come from winning in the large winning slot (attacker). The base rate is the proportion of the total number of winning balls relative to the number of game balls launched. When the settings are changed or confirmed, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values that are being changed or confirmed when the settings are changed or confirmed.

The setting key 51 and setting switch 52 are inoperable from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably equipped with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed using the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically elongated rectangular frame shape. When the game machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the circuit board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and can be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol will differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss." Furthermore, in this pachinko machine 1, "misses" include "misses with time-saving features," where the game is controlled to a high-base state (time-saving state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

In a jackpot state, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until the earlier of the following two timings: the elapsed time of a predetermined period (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) or the time when the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls). The predetermined period is the upper limit period for which the large prize winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit period. One cycle in which the large prize winning slot is open in this manner is called a round (round game). In a jackpot state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability/high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability/high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability/low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability/low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to enter a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," if the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and other components, as shown in Figure 3. In addition, various other boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of reserves), execution of regular symbol games (including management of reserves), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display switching switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting switching switch 52, and a door opening sensor 90. The door opening sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effects based on the effect execution instructions from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. Furthermore, the display control unit 123 supplies sound specification signals (signals specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and lamp signals (signals specifying the on/off mode of the lamps) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize audio output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamps 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies signals to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 4 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the setting confirmation process (Step S5). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol change can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

If the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the configuration change process (Step S7). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

In step S5, the setting confirmation process determines whether the predetermined setting confirmation conditions have been met. For example, the setting confirmation conditions are met when, at the start of power supply, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON. Step S5 is executed only if the recovery conditions, including the clear signal being OFF, are met in step S3. Therefore, the setting confirmation conditions can only be met when the clear signal is OFF; thus, the clear signal being OFF can also be included as a setting confirmation condition.

In step S5, if the setting confirmation conditions are met, the pachinko machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state where the set values can be checked, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the set values set in the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be set to a game stop state, which halts the progress of the game on the pachinko machine 1. In the game stop state, the launching of game balls by operating the ball-shooting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped. Furthermore, the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols, or to display symbols corresponding to a different game stop state than the losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the corresponding game stop state should also end.

In step S7, the setting change process determines whether a predetermined setting change condition has been met. For example, the setting change condition is met when, at the start of power supply, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being ON.

If the setting change conditions are met during the setting change process in step S7, the pachinko machine 1 enters a setting change state where the set value can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the set value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the displayed value is sequentially updated each time the setting switch 52 is operated. Subsequently, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an employee of the gaming hall, the set value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When pachinko machine 1 is in the setting change state, it may be put into the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated game stop state should also end.

On the performance control board 12 side, upon receiving a setting confirmation start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or changed. For example, the image display device 5 may display a predetermined image, speakers 8L and 8R may output a predetermined sound, or light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned ON, for example, by pressing the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is ON and the setting key 51 is ON, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process in step S6 and the setting change process in step S7 are executed, allowing control to the setting change state. If the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed, allowing control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is OFF, or if the setting key 51 is OFF, if the clear switch is ON, the initialization process in step S6 is executed, but the control to the setting change state is not performed. If the clear switch is OFF, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the control to the setting confirmation state is not performed.

After performing a setting confirmation process or a setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, it sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). After that, it enters a loop process. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request. Upon receiving the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 5. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 5 begins, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, it performs a predetermined main-side error processing to diagnose an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, it performs a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes the start-up prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory count. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value is extracted to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern, and this is stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory count, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the reserved memory count, and the prediction judgment results. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 4.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S120), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special symbol game using the second special symbol may be executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot game state if the upper limit has been reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

Pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change according to the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol processing, the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the set value. For example, the set value consists of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 having the highest probability of winning a jackpot, and the probability of winning a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the set value is 6, it is the most advantageous for the player, and the advantage decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 as the value decreases. If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the set value, the payout rate may also change according to the set value. The probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the set value. The pachinko game machine 1 only needs to be configured to allow the player to set one of several setting values that offer different levels of advantage. The setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is notified to the performance control board 12 by a setting value specification command being sent from the main board 11.

Figure 7 shows an example of the display result determination table configuration. Figure 7(A) shows an example of the display result determination table configuration for the first special symbol, used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7(B) shows an example of the display result determination table configuration for the second special symbol, used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the winning determination value, which is compared with the random value MR1 according to the set value, is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random value MR1 is a random value for determining the display result, and its value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. A common display result determination table may be used for both the first and second special symbols.

As shown in Figure 7(A), when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving state, the value can take on a range of 0 to 65535. Of the winning judgment values compared with the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "Big Win," 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "Time-Saving Miss," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Furthermore, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is probability-changing state, of the aforementioned winning judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "Big Win," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Note that when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the setting value is 2 to 6, and the game state is normal or time-saving state, as shown in Figure 7(A).

As shown in Figure 7(B), when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving state, the value can take on a range of 0 to 65535. Of the winning judgment values compared with the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "Big Win," 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "Time-Saving Miss," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Furthermore, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is probability-changing state, of the aforementioned winning judgment values, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "Big Win," and the remaining numerical ranges are assigned to "Miss." Note that when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value is 2 to 6, and the game state is normal or time-saving state, as shown in Figure 7(B).

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the winning judgment values assigned to "Big Win" and "Short Time Loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Figure 8, in the first special display result judgment table when the game state is normal or short time, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the winning judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the big win judgment value for determining a big win regardless of the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1238 and continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to each setting value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1238 to 1253 for setting 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result judgment table when the game state is normal or shortened time, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) among the possible winning judgment values (0 to 65535) are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, the values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65535 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value, regardless of the setting value, for determining a time-saving loss. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value. However, the time-saving loss determination value is set in a different numerical range from the jackpot determination value range (1020 to 1346) for setting value 6, with 65317 as the reference value for a time-saving loss (time-saving loss reference value), within the range of 65317 to 65535. This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each setting value.

Furthermore, in the first special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability variation state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1347 and corresponding to each setting value, continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1347 to 1383 for setting 2, 1347 to 1429 for setting 3, 1347 to 1487 for setting 4, 1347 to 1556 for setting 5, and 1347 to 1674 for setting 6.

In other words, in the first special symbol display result judgment table when the game state is in a probability variation state, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) among the win judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, among the win judgment values, the values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1347 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is normal or shortened time state, the range of 1020 to 1237 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a win, regardless of the setting value.

Furthermore, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range for determining a jackpot is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"). However, for settings 2 through 6, a non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set, starting from 1238 and continuing from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value according to each setting value. This non-common numerical range for the jackpot determination value is set as follows: 1238 to 1253 for setting 2, 1238 to 1272 for setting 3, 1238 to 1292 for setting 4, 1238 to 1317 for setting 5, and 1238 to 1346 for setting 6.

In other words, in this pachinko machine 1, when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, in the second special symbol display result judgment table, if the setting value is 1, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) among the win judgment values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535 are assigned to "Big Win." On the other hand, if the setting value is 2 or higher, among the win judgment values, values within the range of the common numerical range plus the non-common numerical range are assigned to "Big Win." Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases from 1238 as the setting value increases.

Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot increases as the setting value increases, with 1020 serving as the baseline value for the jackpot determination (jackpot baseline value). This increase is due to the expansion of non-common numerical ranges that are continuous within the common numerical range.

Furthermore, in the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is either the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for the time-saving loss determination value, regardless of the setting value, for determining a time-saving loss. Focusing on the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as the numerical range for the jackpot determination value. However, the time-saving loss determination value is set in a different numerical range from the jackpot determination value range (1020 to 1346) for setting value 6, with 65317 as the reference value for a time-saving loss (time-saving loss reference value), within the range of 65317 to 65425. This prevents the numerical range of the time-saving loss determination value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a probability variation state, the range of 1020 to 1346 among the win determination values is set as a common numerical range for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. Other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a time-saving miss, regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state. When the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a time-saving miss, regardless of the setting value, whether the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state. In other words, when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the proportion of variable display results that are time-saving misses is the same for all setting values, thus preventing excessive gambling depending on the setting value. Furthermore, for time-saving misses, to which a common judgment value number is assigned for each setting value, the numerical range is set to be continuous from 65317, which is the standard value for time-saving misses, regardless of the setting value, thus reducing the processing load on the CPU 103 related to the judgment of whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss.

Furthermore, while this pachinko machine 1 has six configurable settings (1 through 6), the number of configurable settings for the pachinko machine 1 may be five or fewer, or seven or more. Additionally, the smaller the setting value set for the pachinko machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The type of jackpot may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the assignment of judgment values in the jackpot type determination table. Alternatively, the type of jackpot may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the setting value, based on the assignment of judgment values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the setting value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the setting value, and the frequency of normal reaches and super reaches may suggest the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to execute arbitrary setting-suggesting effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control processing as shown in the flowchart of Figure 9. When the main performance control processing shown in Figure 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. It also executes initial operation control processing (step S72). In the initial operation control processing, controls are executed to perform the initial operations of the movable body 32, such as controls to drive the movable body 32 back to the origin position and controls to perform predetermined operation checks.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeated and the system waits.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, the random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Figure 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-announcement setting process (step S161). In the pre-announcement setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, and settings are made for executing the pre-announcement performance based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 at the time of the start-up win. Furthermore, processing is executed to display the hold indicator based on the number of hold memories specified from the performance control command.

After executing the process in step S161, the CPU 120 for performance control selects and executes one of the processes in steps S170 to S175, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "6". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing ends.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "7". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(A variation of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko game machine 1 described above was a payout-type game machine that dispensed a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning combinations. However, it may also be a sealed-type game machine that encloses game media and awards points based on the occurrence of winning combinations.

During the variable display of special symbols, only one type of symbol (for example, a "-" symbol) may be displayed, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing this symbol. Furthermore, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, it does not need to be displayed when the variable display stops (the display result does not need to include the "-" symbol).

In the basic description above, a pachinko machine 1 was shown as an example of a gaming machine. However, the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of the following: Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter referred to as Bonus, etc.)) that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of tokens are dispensed to the player when tokens are inserted, a predetermined number of tokens are set, multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the player's operation of the lever, and the symbols are stopped according to the player's operation of the stop button, resulting in a specific combination of symbols being dispensed to the player.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed and provided via a removable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1, but may also be distributed by pre-installing them on the storage device of the computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention may also be distributed by downloading them from other devices on a network connected via a communication line, etc., by providing a communication processing unit.

Furthermore, the execution method of the game is not limited to execution by attaching a removable storage medium. It may also include a method where downloaded programs and data are temporarily stored in internal memory, etc., and then executed; or a method where the game is executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line, etc. Moreover, it is also possible to execute the game by exchanging data with other computer devices, etc., via a network.

Furthermore, in this specification, expressions comparing various percentages, such as the percentage of performance execution (expressions like "high," "low," "different," etc.), may include cases where one of the percentages is "0%." For example, this includes cases where one percentage is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%."

(Explanation of feature section 069SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 069SG in this embodiment will be described based on Figures 11-1 to 11-64. In the description of each step in the flowchart of this feature section 069SG, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach", and "Super Reach" may be abbreviated as "SP Reach". Also, in feature sections 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "Variable" may be referred to as "Variable Display". Furthermore, for configurations that are the same as the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic description, or have the same function but different in form or arrangement, the same reference numerals will be used, and detailed explanations will be omitted. In the following, the front side of Figure 11-1 will be the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side will be the rear (rear view) side, and the explanation will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko game machine 1 from the front side. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko game machine 1 is the surface facing the player who is playing the game on the pachinko game machine 1.

[Embodiment 1]
The first embodiment of feature section 069SG will be described below. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, as explained in Figure 7, is not set to any of several setting values (for example, 1 to 6) that differ in the proportion of times the jackpot display result is shown, but is described as a game machine in which the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319.

Furthermore, after the gaming machine is powered on (when a RAM clear process is performed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (900 times in this example) in a low probability state but no further jackpot occurs, the machine may be controlled to one of several types of time-saving states, specifically time-saving state B (also called rescue time-saving state or rescue time-saving). This rescue time-saving state is designed to help players who have played for a long period of time without a jackpot occurring (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and in this example, it is called "Playtime."

In this embodiment, if the game is controlled to Jackpot A among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in Shortened Time State A (low probability/high base state), resulting in 790 variable displays remaining from the end of Shortened Time State A until the rescue short-time state is reached. On the other hand, if the game is controlled to either Jackpot B or Jackpot C among the multiple types of jackpots, 110 variable displays are performed in the Probability Variation State (high probability/high base state), resulting in 900 variable displays remaining from the end of the Probability Variation State until the rescue short-time state is reached. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of variable displays in Shortened Time State B (low probability/high base state), based on the rescue short-time state counter value becoming "0", is 1100.

In this embodiment, during the variable display when the relief time reduction is reached, a shutter image (see Figures 11-23(B) and (C)) is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. This reduces the visibility of the first background image (see Figure 11-23(A)) corresponding to the normal state, which was displayed as the background image during the variable display before the relief time reduction was reached. Then, a third background image (see Figure 11-23(D)) corresponding to the relief time reduction is displayed as the background image.

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed as a left game area through which game balls can flow, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area through which game balls can flow. Game balls launched weakly by the launching device flow down the first path in the left game area, and game balls launched strongly by the launching device flow down the second path in the right game area.

In this embodiment, the special variable prize ball device 7 has a first large prize opening and a second large prize opening formed along the direction of the flow of game balls. The first large prize opening can be changed between an open state allowing game balls to enter and a closed state preventing game balls from entering by driving a large prize opening door (not shown) via solenoid 069SG2A (see Figure 11-2). The second large prize opening can also be changed between an open state allowing game balls to enter and a closed state preventing game balls from entering by driving a large prize opening door (not shown) via solenoid 069SG2B (see Figure 11-3).

Furthermore, a first count switch 069SG023A capable of detecting game balls is provided inside the first large prize winning slot, and a second count switch 069SG023B capable of detecting game balls is provided inside the second large prize winning slot.

In other words, game balls flowing down the left game area (first path) can enter the general prize entry point 10 and the first starting prize entry point formed by the prize ball entry device 6A, while game balls flowing down the right game area (second path) can enter the second starting prize entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B, the general prize entry point 10, and the first or second large prize entry point formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7, and can also pass through the passage gate 41.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the switch circuit 110 is connected to the first count switch 069SG023A, the second count switch 069SG023B, and the jackpot start switch 069SG024, which is built into the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

Multiple obstructing pins are positioned between the prize ball entry device 6A, the variable prize ball entry device 6B, and the special variable prize ball entry device 7. Therefore, game balls flowing down the left game area cannot enter the second starting prize entry point or the large prize entry point, and game balls flowing down the right game area cannot enter the first starting prize entry point.

As shown in Figure 11-2, in this embodiment, a first special symbol display device 069SG004A capable of variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve indicator 069SG025A capable of displaying the first reserve memory count, a second reserve indicator 069SG025B capable of displaying the second reserve memory count, a normal symbol indicator 069SG020 capable of variable display of normal symbols, and a normal symbol reserve indicator 069SG025C capable of displaying the normal symbol reserve memory count. A game information display unit is provided, which collectively displays the following: a round indicator 069SG131 capable of displaying the number of rounds (type of jackpot) of a jackpot game during a jackpot game; a right-shooting lamp 069SG132 that lights up in game states where game balls are shot toward the right game area, such as jackpot game state, high probability/high base state (probability variation state), and low probability/high base state (time reduction state); a probability variation lamp 069SG133 that lights up when in a high probability/high base state (probability variation state); and a time reduction lamp 069SG134 that lights up in both high probability/high base state (probability variation state) and low probability/high base state (time reduction state). Note that, in the case of a normal game state, the right-shooting lamp 069SG132 exceptionally lights up from the moment the variable display stops if the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with an information output circuit that outputs game information (signals) to external devices such as the management computer of the amusement facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, via a terminal board (not shown).

In this embodiment, the second large prize opening is provided with a V-prize opening and an outlet located downstream of the V-prize opening. Furthermore, a variable V-prize ball device (V-lid) is provided upstream of the V-prize opening. The variable V-prize ball device changes between a closed state and an open state via a solenoid. In other words, game balls flowing down the second large prize opening can pass through the V-prize opening when the variable V-prize ball device is in the open state, and cannot pass through the V-prize opening when the variable V-prize ball device is in the closed state, instead flowing down to the outlet.

As shown in Figure 11-2, the main board 11 is equipped with a V-switch 069SG023B1, which can detect when a game ball has passed through the V-prize opening located downstream of the second large prize opening, and a discharge switch 069SG023B2, which can detect when a game ball has passed through the discharge opening, both via a switch circuit 110.

Furthermore, the performance control board 12 is connected to a vibration motor 61 built into the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32. The lamp control board 14 is connected to a right-hand LED 069SG031 to prompt right-hand shooting, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during the variable display of the first special symbol, a second special symbol LED 069SG033 that lights up during the variable display of the second special symbol, a first reserve LED 069SG034A that lights up when the first reserve memory count is 1 to 2, and a first reserve LED 069SG034A that lights up when the first reserve memory count is 3 to 4. The following are connected: 69SG034B, the second reserve LED 069SG035A which lights up when the second reserve memory count is 1 to 2, the second reserve LED 069SG035B which lights up when the second reserve memory count is 3 to 4, the button LED 62 built into the push button 31B, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided on the gaming machine frame 3.

Figure 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, MR4 for determining the normal display result, and MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the CPU 103 using different random counters and updated by software, or they may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the game control microcomputer 100, or it may be configured as a separate random number circuit chip from the game control microcomputer 100. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random values MR1 to MR5 are exemplified as being within the ranges shown in Figure 11-3(A). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of these random values MR1 to MR5 may differ depending on the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to perform various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all types of random numbers used on the main board 11 by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 of the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only game control programs but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various judgments and decisions. Furthermore, ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes multiple control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, as well as a variable pattern judgment table that stores multiple types of variable display patterns for each symbol in variable displays such as special symbols and regular symbols.

Figure 11-3(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special drawing display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 069SG, a common special drawing display result determination table is used for both the first and second special drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special drawing display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special drawings.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for special symbol display result determination, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the special feature section 069SG, the special symbol display result determination table assigns a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state). This value is then assigned to the special symbol display results of "jackpot" or "miss."

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot". In the special symbol display result determination table of this feature unit 069SG, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this feature unit 069SG) compared to the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature unit 069SG). In other words, in the special display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

The judgment tables stored in ROM 101 include, in addition to the first special symbol display result judgment table and the second special symbol display result judgment table shown in Figure 7, the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3(C1), the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3(C2), as well as a variation pattern judgment table, a normal symbol display result judgment table (not shown), a normal symbol variation pattern determination table (not shown), and so on.

Furthermore, while the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (payout rate) does not change according to the set value, it may also be configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot (payout rate) changes according to the set value.

(Big win type determination table)
Figures 11-3(C1) and 11-3(C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 11-3(C1) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize slot (i.e., when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). Also, Figure 11-3(C1) is the table used when determining the jackpot type using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize slot (i.e., when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed).

The jackpot type determination table is a table referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol. It uses a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination to determine whether the jackpot is one of jackpots A through C.

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 11-3(D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include Jackpot A, Jackpot B, and Jackpot C, in which time-saving control is executed for up to 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game state. Furthermore, Jackpots A, B, and C are also jackpots in which, after the first round of the jackpot game state, the game ball enters the second jackpot entry point and then the V entry point, resulting in probability-changing control being executed for up to 110 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the variable V-prize ball device (V-lid) has two open states: a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds). For jackpot A, the variable V-prize ball device is in a short open state during the first round of the jackpot game state. For jackpots B and C, the variable V-prize ball device is in a long open state during the first round of the jackpot game state.

The "Big Win A" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win A," the variable V-prize ball device is in a short-open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Therefore, the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, effectively making it a normal jackpot.

The "Big Win B" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win B," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

The "Big Win C" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the tenth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win C," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration with three types of jackpots, A through C. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and there may be two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A, and values from 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and values from 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this example, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a short-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, it will be explained that the ball will not enter the V-zone and the probability variation control will not be executed. Similarly, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to not enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a long-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it will be explained that the ball will enter the V-zone and the probability variation control will be executed.

In this embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined using MR2, a random value used for determining the type of jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random value used for determining the special display result.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, for example, a configuration is given in which there are jackpot types B and C for the second special symbol, in which 110 rounds of probability variation control and time reduction control can be performed after the jackpot game state ends. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a jackpot D may be provided in which time reduction control is performed 1009 times (probability variation state: 110 times + time reduction state A: 899 times) after the jackpot game state ends. By doing so, the next jackpot is almost certain, thus increasing the level of excitement. Moreover, even if the probability variation control ends without a jackpot occurring during the 110 rounds of probability variation state after the jackpot ends, the game will perform 899 variable displays without a jackpot occurring in time reduction state A (low probability/high base state), and then after performing one variable display in the normal state, it will be controlled to time reduction state B (rescue time reduction state) described later, further increasing the level of excitement.

(Number of times reduced time)
Figure 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time-saving rounds for each transition trigger. As shown in Figure 11-4, in this example, if a jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 110 times, resulting in time-saving state A (in this example, it is controlled to a Battle Rush with 110 time-saving rounds). Also, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball enters the probability variation area, (1) time-saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability variation control is performed 110 times, resulting in a probability variation state (in this example, it is controlled to an Extreme Battle Rush with 110 time-saving rounds). It is controlled to RUSH). Also, if the variable display is performed 900 times in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, it is controlled to a time-saving state B (in this example, a time-saving 1100 Battle Rush (Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH)) in which (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times. However, even if the variable display is performed again 900 times in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state B, it will not be controlled to time-saving state B again based on this.

Furthermore, if a losing symbol with a time-saving feature stops and is displayed in the normal state, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state B (in this example, a 1100-times battle rush with 1100 time-saving rounds), in which (1) time-saving control is performed 1100 times and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times. In this case, even if a losing symbol with a time-saving feature stops and is displayed in a high-base state (probability state, time-saving state), the game state transition control will not be performed (the game will not be controlled to a time-saving state with 1100 time-saving rounds). This is to avoid reducing the degree of relief for the player. For example, if the game were configured to re-control to a time-saving state with 1100 time-saving rounds based on the display of a losing symbol with a time-saving feature when the game is controlled to a probability state where big wins are more likely, it would be undesirable because it would control the game from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state for the player. Therefore, the system should be configured to control the game to a time-saving state of 1100 spins only when the game state being controlled is the normal state when a losing symbol with time-saving features stops and is displayed.

Furthermore, the rescue time reduction rate is the percentage of times the game is controlled to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. Since the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction is controlled by performing a variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled to a jackpot game state, the rescue time reduction rate K can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K = probability of reaching the rescue time reduction, ML = probability of winning the jackpot, n = number of variable display counts)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in this embodiment is approximately 1/319, the rescue time-saving mode reach rate K will be 5.9%. Furthermore, in the case of a gaming machine where the setting value can be adjusted, if the rescue time-saving mode reach rate increases as the jackpot probability is set to a lower value, players can be rescued even with a low jackpot probability setting.

(Variation pattern)
Figures 11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the variation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

Figure 11-5 shows three examples: (A) a specific example of a losing pattern determination table when the number of reserved memories in the normal state is 0 to 2; (B) a specific example of a losing pattern determination table when the number of reserved memories is 3; and (C) a specific example of a winning pattern determination table when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-5(A), in the variable pattern determination table for losing when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to Non-Reach B, 2 determination values are assigned to SP Reach A, and 1 determination value is assigned to SP Reach B. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-5(B), in the variable pattern determination table for losing when the number of reserved memories is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to Shortened Non-Reach B, 2 determination values are assigned to SP Reach A, and 1 determination value is assigned to SP Reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-5(C), in the variable pattern determination table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP non-transit B, 40 determination values are assigned to SP reach A, and 50 determination values are assigned to SP reach B.

Furthermore, Figure 11-6 shows, (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories in the probability variation state is 0, (B) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big win when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-6(A), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to Non-Reach A, 2 determination values are assigned to SP Reach C, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-6(B), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 85 determination values are assigned to Shortened Non-Reach A, 10 determination values are assigned to Non-Reach A, 2 determination values are assigned to SP Reach C, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-6(C), in the case where the number of reserved memories is 0, the variable pattern determination table for jackpots has 5 determination values assigned to SP non-transit A, 80 determination values assigned to SP reach C, and 15 determination values assigned to SP reach D.

Furthermore, Figure 11-7 shows, (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state A is 0, (B) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a winning outcome when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-7(A), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 95 determination values are assigned to Non-Reach A and 5 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-7(B), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 90 determination values are assigned to Shortened Non-Reach A, 5 determination values are assigned to Non-Reach A, and 5 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-7(C), in the variable pattern determination table for jackpots when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 5 determination values are assigned to SP non-transit A, and 95 determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

Furthermore, Figure 11-8 shows, (A) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) is 0, (B) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, and (C) a specific example of the variation pattern determination table for a big win when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-8(A), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach A and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Also, as shown in Figure 11-8(B), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 97 determination values are assigned to ultra-shortened non-reach and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-8(C), in the jackpot pattern determination table for cases where the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

As shown in Figures 11-6(A) and (B), the average variable display time for the losing variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the probability variation state is approximately 8.2 seconds {((7s × 95) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and the average variable display time for the losing variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}.

Here, assuming that the first variable display after the start of the probability variation state has a reserved memory count of 0, and the variable displays from the 2nd to the 110th display have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined in the probability variation state is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 10⁹)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-6(C), the average display time for the variable jackpot pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in the probability variation state is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22s × 5) + (55s × 80) + (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}. Therefore, the average display time for the variable jackpot pattern that can be determined in the probability variation state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

As shown in Figures 11-7(A) and (B), in time-saving state A, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the average variable display time for the losing variation pattern that can be determined is approximately 9.15 seconds {((7s × 95) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}. When the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the average variable display time for the losing variation pattern that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}.

Here, assuming that when time-saving state A begins, the first variable display has a reserved memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 10⁹)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-7(C), the average variable display time for the jackpot variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in time-saving state A is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

As shown in Figures 11-8(A) and (B), in time-saving state B, the average variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and the average variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}.

Here, assuming that when time-saving state B begins, the first variable display has a reserved memory count of 0, and the variable displays from 2 to 1100 times have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-8(C), the average variable display time for the jackpot variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 in time-saving state B is approximately 40 seconds. Therefore, the average variable display time for the jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 40 seconds.

Thus, when the number of reserved memory slots is 0, the number of possible losing spin patterns is 3 for the probability variation state, 2 for the time-saving state A, and 2 for the time-saving state B. When the number of reserved memory slots is 1 to 3, the number of possible losing spin patterns is 4 for the probability variation state, 3 for the time-saving state A, and 2 for the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the average display time for the determinable losing variation patterns is 4.83 seconds in the probability variation state, 5.58 seconds in the time-saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, when the number of reserved memory slots is between 0 and 3, the number of possible winning spin patterns is 3 for the probability variation state, 2 for the time-saving state A, and 1 for the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the average display time for the determinable jackpot variation patterns is 51.1 seconds in the probability variation state, 62.8 seconds in the time-saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time-saving state B.

In other words, the number of determinable losing variation patterns decreases in the order of probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (probability variation state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the average display time of the determinable losing variation patterns decreases in the order of probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (probability variation state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

Furthermore, the number of selectable jackpot variation patterns decreases in the order of probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (probability variation state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B). The average duration of the variable display time for selectable jackpot variation patterns also decreases in the order of probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (probability variation state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B). Thus, time-saving state B has fewer variation pattern types and a shorter variable display period compared to probability variation state and time-saving state A. In other words, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

Furthermore, while the example given shows that the number of possible losing and winning patterns is greater in the probability variation state than in the time-saving state A, the number of time-saving state A patterns may also be greater than the probability variation state, or they may be the same for both the probability variation state and time-saving state A.

Furthermore, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in Figures 11-5 to 11-8 are used in common for both the first and second special symbols. In particular, in time-saving state B, the variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-8 is used in common for both the first and second special symbols. Therefore, even if a first-start win occurs in time-saving state B, the number of possible variation pattern types is smaller compared to the probability variation state and time-saving state A, and the average time of variable display is shorter, resulting in a monotonous and efficient variable display.

Furthermore, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Furthermore, if a V-entry occurs during a jackpot game state triggered by "Jackpot A," the game is controlled to a probability variation state where probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "Jackpot B" and "Jackpot C." Therefore, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-6. Also, if a V-entry does not occur during a jackpot game state triggered by "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot C," the game is controlled to a time reduction state A where only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, similar to "Jackpot A." Therefore, the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-7. In other words, the variation pattern determination table is not based on the type of jackpot; rather, because irregular states can occur during a jackpot game state, a variation pattern determination table linked to the state after the jackpot game state ends is used.

In other words, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to enter a probability variation state after the end of a jackpot state based on the passage of a game ball through a specific area (e.g., a V-entry slot) during an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot state), if a V-entry occurs during a jackpot state where a V-entry is possible, the game is controlled to enter a probability variation state after the end of the jackpot state. On the other hand, if a V-entry does not occur during a jackpot state where a V-entry is possible, the game is controlled to enter a first time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state. On the other hand, if a V-entry does not occur during a jackpot state where a V-entry is difficult, the game is controlled to enter a second time-saving state after the end of the jackpot state. In this case, the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state are common time-saving states, and it is preferable that the variable display period in the first time-saving state and the second time-saving state is shorter than the variable display period in time-saving state B of this embodiment.

(Fluctuating patterns without a reach)
In this embodiment, the variable patterns that do not involve a reach ("Shortened Non-Reach A, Shortened Non-Reach B", "Ultra-Shortened Non-Reach", "Non-Reach A, Non-Reach B", "SP Non-Via A, SP Non-Via B") are variable patterns in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a reach is not established after the variable display starts and the variable display result is either a "miss" or a "jackpot" is displayed. "Shortened Non-Reach A, Shortened Non-Reach B", "Ultra-Shortened Non-Reach", "Non-Reach A, Non-Reach B", and "SP Non-Via A, SP Non-Via B" are collectively referred to simply as "Non-Reach" or "Non-Reach Variable Pattern". Note that "SP Non-Via A, SP Non-Via B" are non-reach variable patterns for jackpots in which a jackpot is achieved without a reach or SP reach being established.

In this embodiment, among the fluctuation patterns that do not involve reaching, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Non-Reach A" is 7000 ms, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "SP Non-Via A" is 7000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Non-Reach B" is 12000 ms, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "SP Non-Via B" is 12000 + 15000 ms, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Shortened Non-Reach A" is 3000 ms, the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Shortened Non-Reach B" is 5000 ms, and the variable display period when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "Ultra-Shortened Non-Reach" is 1500 ms. Of these, the "ultra-shortened non-reach" variation pattern is a variation pattern that can only be determined in time-saving state B, and its variable display period is shorter than any of the variation patterns determined when the game is controlled in other game states where time-saving control is performed (time-saving state A, probability change state).

(Variation pattern accompanied by a super reach)
In this embodiment, in the variation patterns accompanied by a super reach ("SP Reach A", "SP Reach B", "SP Reach C", "SP Reach D", "SP Reach E"), after the reach state is established, an SP reach performance is executed, such as a bowling performance (SP Reach A) in which the ally character and the enemy character bowl to announce whether or not a jackpot has been won, or a battle performance (SP Reach B to E) in which the ally character and the enemy character battle to announce whether or not a jackpot has been won. After the bowling performance or battle performance ends, the final display result is confirmed and stopped. If the final display result is a "miss", a performance in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat performance) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", a performance in which the ally character wins against the enemy character (victory performance) is executed, or after a performance in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat performance) is executed, a performance in which the ally character revives and wins against the enemy character (revival performance) is executed.

Furthermore, a "variation pattern without a reach" refers to a variation pattern where the variable display of the decorative symbols does not result in a predetermined reach pattern, but rather the result of the variable display is shown. This also includes variation patterns where, even with reach-inducing prompts such as the "reach announcement" described later, the result of the variable display is shown without ultimately resulting in a reach pattern. Additionally, a "variation pattern with a super reach" refers to a variation pattern where, after the variable display of the decorative symbols results in a predetermined reach pattern, the reach animation develops, an SP reach animation is executed, and then the display result is shown.

Furthermore, the Super Reach Jackpot Variation Patterns (SP Reach A-E) include a variable display part in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and a post-event performance part that, after the victory and revival performances of the variable display part have finished, specifically announces the number of balls that will be awarded in the jackpot game state.

The variable display period for the variable display part is 45,000 ms for SP Reach A, 80,000 ms for SP Reach B, 40,000 ms for SP Reach C, 25,000 ms for SP Reach D, and 50,000 ms for SP Reach E, differing for each type of SP Reach (A-E). On the other hand, the execution period for the post-event performance part is a common 15,000 ms for SP Reach A-E. In this embodiment, the post-event performance part is allocated a predetermined period (for example, 15,000 ms) within the variable display period, but the predetermined period may differ depending on the type of SP Reach. Furthermore, the fanfare period during a jackpot game state may also be allocated to the post-event performance part.

In this embodiment, all fluctuation patterns involving a reach are defined as super reach fluctuation patterns, and a configuration without a normal reach fluctuation pattern is illustrated. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and a normal reach fluctuation pattern may also be included.

(Performance control command)
Figure 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command in this embodiment. A performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 11-9(A) is just one example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 11-9(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time) of decorative symbols, etc., that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies the variable display result, such as special symbols or decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(B), different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot" ("miss with time reduction"), and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several jackpot types will be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot".

In the variable display result specification commands, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result specification command, which specifies that the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is the second variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A". Command 8C02H is the third variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B". Command 8C03H is the fourth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C".

Command 8FXXH is a pattern confirmation command that specifies the period for stopping (confirming) the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and for starting the next variable display.

In the symbol confirmation command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(C), command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A specification command that ends the special symbol variation and sets the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. Command 8F01H is a symbol confirmation B specification command that ends the special symbol variation and sets the symbol confirmation period to 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, different symbol confirmation commands are sent during the rescue time reduction reach variation depending on whether (i) the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, or (ii) the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win. Specifically, (i) when the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, a symbol confirmation A command is sent during the rescue time reduction reach variation, setting the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. Furthermore, (ii) when the rescue time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win, a symbol confirmation B command is sent during the rescue time reduction reach variation, setting the symbol confirmation period to 20 seconds.

Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state in the pachinko machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko machine 1, different EXT data is set using this game state specification command. As a specific example, command 9500H is designated as the first game state specification command corresponding to game states where time-saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is designated as the second game state specification command corresponding to game states where time-saving control is performed (high base state, time-saving state).

Command E1XXH is a command that notifies the remaining number of time-saving control attempts in the time-saving state (time-saving state A), excluding the rescue time-saving. Command E2XXH is a command that notifies the remaining number of probability-changing control attempts in the probability-changing state.

Command F100H is a command to notify the right-side LED 069SG031 when it lights up. Command F101H is a command to notify the right-side LED 069SG031 when it turns off.

Command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of recovery time reductions. It is a performance control command that converts the value of the recovery time reduction counter to hexadecimal and specifies it when power is restored. In this command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(D), different EXT data is set depending on each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit, 4th digit) of the recovery time reduction counter value (a 4-digit value) when power is restored.

In the recovery time reduction count specification commands, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(D), commands 9100H to 910FH are recovery time reduction count specification 1 commands that specify the first digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9110H to 911FH are recovery time reduction count specification 2 commands that specify the second digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9130H to 913FH are recovery time reduction count specification 3 commands that specify the third digit of the recovery time reduction count value. Commands 9140H to 914FH are recovery time reduction count specification 4 commands that specify the fourth digit of the recovery time reduction count value.

Command 94XXH is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions, and is a performance control command that specifies the remaining variable number of displays (126 or less) until rescue time reduction is triggered. In the rescue time reduction count specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(E), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable number of displays (126 or less) until rescue time reduction is triggered.

In the commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9(E), command 9400H is a rescue time reduction count A specification command, indicating that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a rescue time reduction count B specification command, indicating that 1 to 125 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a rescue time reduction count C specification command, indicating that 126 times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a rescue time reduction count D specification command, indicating that 127 or more times remain until the rescue time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2), and is a performance control command that specifies the remaining variable display count (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction is triggered. In the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2), for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display count (in units of 100) until rescue time reduction is triggered is set in the EXT data of the command. For example, if the remaining variable display count until rescue time reduction is triggered is 100, command 9601H is sent as the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (2). If the remaining variable display count is 700, command 9607H is sent as the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions (1). Command 9F00(H) is a command to specify a customer waiting demonstration.

(Main game control processing)
Figure 11-10 is a flowchart showing the main game control process in this embodiment. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S7, S8 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in Figure 4.

In this example, when a performance control command instructing recovery from a power outage is sent in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the recovery time reduction counter, which counts the remaining variable display counts until the recovery time reduction occurs. It then converts the current value of the recovery time reduction counter to hexadecimal, sets the value, and sends a recovery time reduction count specification command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction count counter and sends a rescue time reduction count specification command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, if the current value of the rescue time reduction count counter is between 1 and 125, CPU 103 sends command 9401H as the rescue time reduction count specification command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, the rescue time reduction count specification command is sent, and the remaining variable display count until the current rescue time reduction is notified.

In this example, we show a case where, upon power restoration, a command specifying the number of recovery time reductions and another command specifying the number of recovery time reductions are sent separately from the command sent during power restoration. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the EXT data of the command sent during restoration in step S7 (e.g., the power-on command) may be configured to include a value corresponding to the remaining number of recovery time reductions before transmission.

Furthermore, when a RAM clear is requested in step S3, when no backup data is found in step S4, or when an abnormality is found in the backup RAM in step S5, the initialization process in step S8 performs a clear operation on the area including the area for the rescue time reduction count counter.

Furthermore, when a performance control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time-saving counter to "900" (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, if a RAM clear process is performed when the gaming machine is powered on, the relief time-saving counter is set to "900". In other words, in this example, if a jackpot does not occur after 900 variable display attempts following a RAM clear process when the gaming machine is powered on, the machine enters relief time-saving mode and is controlled to time-saving state B. In this example, since the performance control command instructing initialization sent in step S9 corresponds to the initial value ("900") set in the relief time-saving counter, the CPU 103 can also determine the initial value to set in the relief time-saving counter based on the transmission of the performance control command instructing initialization.

Next, CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction count counter (which is "900" in this example), converts the current rescue time reduction count counter value to hexadecimal, sets the value, and sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery (step 069SGS0016).

Thus, the setting of the relief time reduction counter is performed before the timer interrupt processing, which is part of the game's progression process, is executed. This prevents the variable display from starting before the relief time reduction counter is set, ensuring reliable management of the number of attempts until the relief time reduction is reached.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed upon power-on to the gaming machine. However, the system is not limited to this configuration; it may also be configured so that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. Such a configuration allows the game to start from the previous day's rescue time reduction counter value, reducing the investment required to trigger the rescue time reduction and ensuring a configuration that is not disadvantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when configured as described above, the initial setting of the recovery time reduction count counter may be configured so that it is not initialized only when the clear switch is detected as ON (step S3; Yes) and the RAM clear process is executed, while the initial setting of the recovery time reduction count counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clear process is executed.

(Time reduction flag, probability change flag)
In this embodiment, a time-saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for controlling the system to a time-saving state are met. There are two time-saving flags: time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B. In the following description, clearing (erasing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time-saving flag A is set when the game is controlled to time-saving state A via jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and is cleared when time-saving state A ends (at the timing of a jackpot during time-saving state A, or when the 110 time-saving control ends and the game returns to the normal state).

The Time-Saving Flag B is set when the game is controlled in Time-Saving State B, which is controlled via the rescue Time-Saving feature. This Time-Saving Flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after a RAM clear, during which the display result is not a winning symbol, or when 900 variable displays are executed in a low-probability state after a winning game state ends, during which the display result is not a winning symbol. It is cleared when Time-Saving State B ends (e.g., when a winning combination occurs during Time-Saving State B, or when the 1100 Time-Saving controls end and the game returns to the normal state).

The probability variation flag is set when the game is controlled to a probability variation state. In this embodiment, when a V-win occurs in the first round of a jackpot game, the probability variation flag is set when the game state is controlled to a probability variation state at the end of the jackpot game. This probability variation flag is cleared at the timing when the probability variation state ends (e.g., when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, or when the 110th probability variation control is executed and the game is controlled to a normal state). For example, if the probability variation flag is determined to be YES in step 069SGS69A of Figure 11-12 (described later), it is cleared based on the fact that the variable display has been controlled to a probability variation state for 110 times.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figures 11-11 and 11-12 are flowcharts of the normal special symbol processing (step S110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the combined reserved memory count (step 069 SGS 51). Specifically, it checks the count value of the combined reserved memory count counter, which counts the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. If the combined reserved memory count is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count is 0 or not (step 069 SGS 52). Specifically, it checks whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter, which counts the second reserved memory count, is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory count is not 0, the CPU 103 sets the data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed on the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 069 SGS 53). If the second reserved memory count is 0 (i.e., only the first reserved memory count is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets the special symbol pointer to data indicating "first" (step 069 SGS 54).

In this embodiment, the execution of steps 069SGS52 to S54 prioritizes the execution of the variable display of the second special symbol over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for initiating the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to take precedence over the first start condition for initiating the variable display of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the system is not limited to the configuration shown in this example. For example, it may be configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots.

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069 SGS 55). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Furthermore, if the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the reserved memory counter indicated by the special symbol pointer by 1, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069 SGS 56). Specifically, if the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the first reserved memory counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. If the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 decrements the count value of the second reserved memory counter by 1 and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory count = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory count buffer of the RAM 102 into the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory count = n-1. Furthermore, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory count = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory count buffer of the RAM 102 into the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory count = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random values stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) are extracted always matches the order of first reserved memory number (or second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the combined reserved memory count by 1. That is, it subtracts 1 from the count value of the combined reserved memory count counter (step 069 SGS 57). The CPU 103 also saves the value of the combined reserved memory count counter before the subtraction of 1 to a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads a random number for determining a win from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads a random number for determining a win that was extracted in the start-up prize determination process (step S101) and stored in the first and second reserve memory buffers, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value with a random number for determining a win, and if they match, it is determined to be a jackpot. In other words, it is a program that performs the jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variation flag indicating a probability variation state is not set (i.e., it is in a low probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for low probability. Also, if the probability variation flag is set (i.e., it is in a high probability state), the CPU 103 performs a jackpot determination using the jackpot determination value for high probability. The CPU 103 determines that a win is awarded for the special symbol if the value of the random number used for determining a win matches any of the winning values.

If it is determined that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 069SGS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (jackpot A, jackpot B, or jackpot C) corresponding to the value of the random number used for type determination stored in the random number buffer area (Step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number used for type determination, which was extracted in the start-up prize award determination process (Step S101) and stored in the first and second reserve memory buffers, and determines the type of jackpot. Then, it proceeds to Step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined that a jackpot has been awarded (Step 069SGS63; No), it proceeds to Step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing the normal processing for special symbols, a rescue time-saving condition (the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being subtracted to "0") can be generated regardless of the variable display result (jackpot or miss). In this example, the system is controlled to time-saving state A based on a jackpot A, and to time-saving state B based on the completion of a predetermined number of variable displays (900 times in this example) without another jackpot occurring. However, it is conceivable that the variable display result of a variable display where the rescue time-saving condition has been met may be a jackpot. Therefore, if the variable display result of a variable display where the rescue time-saving condition has been met is a jackpot, the system is configured to control the system to time-saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time-saving counter, which counts the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 069 SGS 66). If the value of the time-saving counter is not 0, the CPU 103 deducts 1 from the value of the time-saving counter (step 069 SGS 67) and checks whether the value of the time-saving counter after the deduction is 0 (step 069 SGS 68). If the value of the time-saving counter after the deduction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving termination flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the variable display ends (step 069 SGS 69).

In this example, steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed to subtract from the time-saving counter before the counting process of the variable display count up to the relief time-saving feature from step 069SGS71 onwards. However, the processing is not limited to this configuration. For example, the system may be configured to perform the subtraction process for the time-saving counter after the counting process of the variable display count up to the relief time-saving feature from step 069SGS71 onwards. In this case, for example, if the variable display results in a relief time-saving feature, setting the time-saving counter to "110" (see step 069SGS172) and then performing the subtraction process would result in an extra 1 being subtracted from the time-saving counter. Therefore, for variable displays resulting in a relief time-saving feature, the system may be configured to add 1 to the time-saving counter again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the system may be configured to pre-set the time-saving counter to "111," which is one more than the default value.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (i.e., the game is in a probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. In this example, because the process in step 069SGS69A is executed, if the game is in a probability variation state, the processes from step 069SGS70 onwards (especially the process in step 069SGSS71) are not performed. Therefore, even if the variable display is executed when the game state is in a probability variation state (in this example, during Extreme Battle Rush), the value of the relief time reduction counter is not reduced. If the probability variation flag is not set (i.e., the game is not in a probability variation state), the process proceeds to step 069SGSS70.

In this embodiment, if the probability variation flag is set, the process from step 069SGSS70 onwards is not executed, and the system proceeds to step 069SGS84. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. Even if the probability variation flag is set, the system may proceed to step 069SGSS70, but the process in step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the relief time reduction counter is not updated, a relief time reduction count specification command or a relief time reduction count 2 specification command corresponding to the unupdated value of the relief time reduction counter may be sent.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. At this point, if the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is 0, it means that the game has already been controlled to a time reduction state via rescue time reduction (time reduction state B) (either controlled to time reduction state B, or controlled to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations in time reduction state B), and a jackpot, which would trigger the setting of 900 in the rescue time reduction count counter, has not yet occurred. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is deducted by 1 (step 069SGS71). Furthermore, in this example, the execution of step 069SGS71 updates the value of the relief time reduction counter uniformly, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is performed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 127 or greater (step 069SGS72). If the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the reduced rescue time counter in the EXT data and performs control to send a command to specify the number of reduced rescue times to the CPU 120 for performance control (step 069SGS73). For example, if the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9401H as the command to specify the number of reduced rescue times. Also, if the value of the reduced rescue time counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 947EH as the command to specify the number of reduced rescue times.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is not 0, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction decision flag indicating that the system will control to time reduction state B at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 069SGS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and performs control to send command 957FH as a relief time reduction count specification command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 069SGS77). Note that whether the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction counter. If the remaining variable display count until the relief time reduction is in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction count counter in the EXT data and performs control to send a command to specify relief time reduction count 2 to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, if the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9601H as the command to specify relief time reduction count 2. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to send command 9608H as the command to specify relief time reduction count 2. Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS84.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) counts the remaining variable number of displays until the rescue time-saving feature is activated and sends commands to specify the number of rescue time-saving features and the command to specify two rescue time-saving features. However, this is not the only configuration. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to count the remaining variable number of displays until the rescue time-saving feature is activated and execute the teasing and countdown effects described later.

Furthermore, for example, if you set the rescue time reduction count counter (to "900") at the time a rescue time reduction occurs, and configure the system to allow for consecutive rescue time reductions, you could configure it so that the rescue time reduction count specification command and the rescue time reduction count 2 specification command are sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs for the first time, and not send these commands for subsequent rescue time reductions.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stopping symbol for the special symbols according to the result of determining the type of jackpot (step 069 SGS 84). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be jackpot A, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "2", if it is determined to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be jackpot C, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a miss, the stopping symbol for the special symbols is determined to be "-". The CPU 103 also stores the determined stopping symbols for the special symbols in the stopping symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069 SGS 85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special symbol stop processing)
Figures 11-13 and 11-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol confirmation period timer (step 069SGS131), and then checks whether the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132).

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the confirmation display period for the first and second special symbols has not yet ended), the special symbol stop process ends. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the confirmation display period for the first and second special symbols has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 069 SGS 133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 clears the probability variation flag, time reduction flag A, time reduction flag B, rescue time reduction decision flag, and the time reduction count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time reduction state (step 069 SGS 134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction count counter to "900" (step 069 SGS 135). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction count counter is set to "900" as a result of a jackpot. If, after the jackpot game ends, the variable display is executed 900 times in a low probability state and no further jackpot occurs, the game enters a relief time reduction state and is controlled to time reduction state B.

In this example, step 069SGS135 is executed to set the relief time reduction counter to "900" at the start of the fanfare period for a jackpot, but the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "900" during the rounds of a jackpot game, or it may be configured to be set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the activation of the right-side hitting lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). The CPU 103 also controls the system to send a right-side hitting LED activation notification command to the performance control CPU 120, informing it that the right-side hitting LED 069SG031 has been activated (step 069SGS137).

Next, CPU 103 performs control to send a command to specify the start of a jackpot to the CPU 120 for performance control (step 069SGS138). Then, CPU 103 sets a timer to measure the time before the jackpot opening (fanfare time) until the first jackpot opening 069SG007A and the second jackpot opening 069SG007B are opened (step 069SGS139). Finally, CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (Step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving decision flag is set (Step 069SGS170). If the rescue time-saving decision flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving decision flag (Step 069SGS171). If it is set, it sets time-saving flag B and controls the system to the time-saving state (Step 069SGS171A). Then, it sets the time-saving count counter to "1100" (Step 069SGS172).

Furthermore, CPU 103 performs control to send a command to specify time-saving state B to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). CPU 103 also performs control to start lighting the right-side lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A) and sends a right-side LED lighting notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify that the right-side LED 069SG031 has lit up (step 069SGS174B). After that, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, while the system only controls to time-saving state B when a rescue time-saving state occurs and does not set the rescue time-saving count counter, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the system may be configured to control to time-saving state B and set the rescue time-saving count counter (to "900") when a rescue time-saving state occurs. Such a configuration would allow for continuous occurrence of rescue time-saving states, and once a rescue time-saving state occurs, it can be configured to continue until a jackpot occurs.

Furthermore, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction count counter is set to "900," and the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is deducted by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction is triggered when the value of the rescue time reduction count counter becomes "0." However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the rescue time reduction count counter may be set to "0," and the value of the rescue time reduction count counter may be increased by 1 each time the variable display is executed, and a rescue time reduction may be triggered when the value of the rescue time reduction count counter becomes "900."

Furthermore, this example shows a case where the execution of step 069SGS172 sets the number of time reductions to 1100, which is greater than the variable number of display cycles (900) until the relief time reduction occurs. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, in step 069SGS172, the time reduction counter may be set to the same value as "900" or a smaller value.

Furthermore, in step 069 SGS172, the system may be configured to allow setting values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving rounds in the time-saving round counter. For example, if a rescue time-saving round occurs the first time, the time-saving round counter may be set to "110," and if a rescue time-saving round occurs the second time, the time-saving round counter may be set to "1100."

Furthermore, for example, the system may be configured to determine the number of time-saving rounds by performing a random number-based lottery process, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time-saving rounds determined by the lottery process may be set in the time-saving round counter. In this case, for example, the system may be configured to determine the number of time-saving rounds as 110 with a 10% probability and 1100 with a 90% probability. Also, when determining the number of time-saving rounds by a lottery process, the random numbers used for determining the type of jackpot and the type of time-saving round may be used for both purposes, or dedicated random numbers may be used to determine the number of time-saving rounds.

Furthermore, if the relief time reduction decision flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 checks whether the time reduction termination flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time reduction termination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time reduction termination flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, CPU 103 resets one of the set time-saving flags (either time-saving flag A or B) and ends the time-saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, CPU 103 controls the right-side shooting lamp 069SG132 to turn off (step 069SGS150). Also, CPU 103 controls the right-side shooting LED off notification command to the performance control CPU 120 to notify the off of the right-side shooting LED 069SG031 (step 069SGS151). Finally, CPU 103 controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a normal state specification command (a type of game state specification command) (step 069SGS152). Then, the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In this example, the process from steps 069SGS141 to S152 is executed, resulting in a transition to the normal state and termination of the right-hand shooting notification at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the final time-saving spin. However, the system is not limited to this configuration. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and terminate the right-hand shooting notification at the start of the spin or at the start of the symbol confirmation period in the final time-saving spin.

Furthermore, if the time-saving termination flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the special symbol (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state transition)
Next, the state transitions in this embodiment will be described. Figure 11-15 is a state transition diagram illustrating the state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, it is controlled to the probability variation state. If a jackpot A occurs, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)). Although not shown in the figure, even if a jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, it is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Furthermore, even in the case of a miss, if a rescue time-saving state occurs ((P)(P-1) After RAM clear processing or (P-2) After the end of the probability variation state, if the number of variable displays reaches 900 without the next jackpot occurring, or (Q)(Q-1) After the end of 110 variable displays in time-saving state A, if the number of variable displays reaches 790 without the next jackpot occurring), it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the probability variation state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to return to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the time-saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state A, if 110 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to the normal state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variation area, the game is controlled to the probability variation state. Although not shown in the figure, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs but the game ball does not pass through the probability variation area, the game is controlled back to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot). Also, in time-saving state B, if 1100 variable displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to the normal state. Furthermore, even if the result is a miss, if a rescue time-saving mode is activated (for example, if the variable display count reaches 900 times without another big win occurring after the (P)(P-1) RAM clear process or (P-2) probability variation state ends, or if the variable display count reaches 790 times without another big win occurring after the 110 variable displays in time-saving mode A ends), the game will be controlled to time-saving mode B (time-saving mode via rescue time-saving mode).

In this example, we show a case where, if a jackpot occurs during time-saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variation area, the system uniformly transitions to time-saving state A. However, the control method is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of time-saving rounds could be compared with the number of time-saving rounds corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variation area (110 rounds in this example). If the remaining number of time-saving rounds is greater, the system could be configured to continue in the current time-saving state B.

In this example, while it is possible to perform variable display of the first special symbol during the time-saving mode or the probability-increasing mode, this would result in a disadvantageous gameplay for the player. Therefore, the explanation of state transitions does not assume that variable display of the first special symbol will be performed during the time-saving mode or the probability-increasing mode.

(Explanation of Playtime)
Next, the characteristics of "Playtime," which is the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) in this embodiment, will be explained based on Figures 11-16 to 11-18. Figure 11-16 shows an example where (A1) and (A2) are not equipped with "Playtime," and (B1) and (B2) are examples where "Playtime" is equipped. Figure 11-17 shows an example of a losing variation in the normal state, with (A) to (D) being diagrams. Figure 11-18 shows explanatory diagrams of Playtime where the variation efficiency is the same as the normal state, with (E1) and (E2) being diagrams of Playtime where the variation efficiency is higher than the normal state, with (F1) to (F4) being diagrams of Playtime in this embodiment. Note that in Figures 11-16 to 11-18, for the convenience of explaining the characteristics of "Playtime," explanatory images different from the performance images described below will be used.

First, in the case of a pachinko machine without the "Play Time" feature of this embodiment, for example, as shown in Figures 11-16 (A1) and (A2), even if a variable display is shown for a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times if the jackpot probability is approximately 1/300, or about three times the jackpot probability denominator) without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state (for example, the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the machine will not be controlled by "Play Time," that is, the time-saving state. At this point, the player has already gone through approximately three times the jackpot probability denominator, meaning they have been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and their investment has increased. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, requiring further investment, which could significantly reduce the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "Play Time" feature of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-16 (B1) and (B2), after a jackpot ends, if the machine displays a predetermined number of times (for example, approximately 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled to a jackpot in a low probability state (for example, the normal state (low probability/low base state)), "Play Time" is activated, and the machine is controlled to a time-saving state B for a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, or up to approximately 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the player has already gone through approximately 3 times the jackpot probability, meaning they have been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and their investment has increased considerably. However, by being controlled to "Play Time," that is, time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed, and the possibility of a jackpot increases, thus preventing a decline in the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-17(A) to (D), during the period from the end of a jackpot until the "Play Time" is activated, the player continues to play without a jackpot ("stuck"), and during that time, various pre-announcement effects are executed to continuously build anticipation. Furthermore, with 900 variable displays, for example, when the variable display is executed for the first time (e.g., 105 times) after a big win (see Figure 11-17(A)), when it is executed for the second time (e.g., 213 times) (see Figure 11-17(B)), when it is executed for the third time (e.g., 506 times) (see Figure 11-17(C)), when it is executed for the fourth time (e.g., 882 times) (see Figure 11-17(D)), at least a predetermined number of high-probability big win animations, such as SP Reach animations (e.g., the "Super Hot" SP Reach animation), are executed. Since these SP Reach animations consistently fail, it's highly likely that the player is quite discouraged.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-18 (E1) and (E2), even when the game is finally controlled to "Playtime" (Shortened Time State B) after 900 variable displays, if this Shortened Time State B is a state with low variation efficiency, such as the normal state (low probability/low base state), the number of wasted shots will increase, potentially leading to further additional investment and prolonged gameplay. Furthermore, since the SP reach演出 (special reach animation) is consistently unsuccessful during the 900 variable displays, frequent teasing animations during "Playtime" will further decrease the desire to play.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "playtime" (time-saving state B) of this embodiment is a time-saving state in which the variation efficiency is higher than that of the normal state (low probability/low base state), so it is possible to continue playing while suppressing additional investment. In addition, the time-saving control is performed by executing the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, up to a maximum of about 3.8 times the probability of hitting a jackpot), and since the probability of being controlled to hit a jackpot during the period controlled to time-saving state B is high (for example, about 97%), it is possible to play with peace of mind. For example, if the probability of hitting a jackpot is 1/319.9, the probability that a jackpot will not occur in one variable display is about 99% {(319.9 - 1) ÷ 319.9 = 0.996874}, and the probability that a jackpot will not occur within 1100 spins is about 3% (0.996874^1100 = 0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1100 spins is approximately 97% (1 - 0.031937 = 0.968063).

Furthermore, in "Playtime," the variable display period for the selected variation pattern is short, resulting in higher variation efficiency than other time-saving states. This increases the likelihood of efficiently processing losing variable displays and hitting a jackpot in a short period. Additionally, right-hand play increases the chance of hitting a jackpot in the second special symbol game, making it a favorable state where the player is likely to receive a jackpot that is advantageous to them (e.g., Jackpot B or Jackpot C). Moreover, since the execution of pre-announcement effects and SP reach effects, as described later, is less likely, and there are fewer opportunities to be teased by losing effects, the decline in the player's motivation to play can be effectively suppressed. In short, unlike the probability variation state or time-saving state A, where players enjoy the effects while waiting for the next jackpot, "Playtime" in this embodiment prioritizes efficiently processing losing variations and hitting the next jackpot over enjoying the effects. Details of "Playtime" (time-saving state B) in this embodiment will be explained below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to a time-saving state A via a big win A, the performance mode is controlled to "Battle Rush". Figure 11-19(A) shows an example of the performance on the image display device 5 when the performance mode is controlled to "Battle Rush".

As shown in Figure 11-19 (A1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state A), and the value of the time-saving count counter is between 0 and 110, the performance mode is "Battle Rush," and a second background image 069SG320, depicting a city scene in the evening, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. The performance mode display 069SG221, consisting of the words "BATTLE RUSH," is displayed at the top of the image display device 5 screen. Furthermore, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 110) is displayed at the bottom left of the image display device 5 screen, corresponding to the remaining variable number of displays controlled to the low probability/high base state. The right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" are displayed at the bottom right of the image display device 5 screen.

At this time, corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and corresponding to the value of the second reserved memory being 4, four second reserved displays 069SG002 are displayed in the second reserved display area 069SG012. Furthermore, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 screen for displaying the first reserved memory (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory (e.g., the number "4"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., the arrow "↓↓↓"). The small symbol is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, reserve display, small symbols, error display indicating an error state occurring in the pachinko game machine 1 (not shown), time-saving display 069SG201, right-hand play notification image 069SG400, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserve memory count, second reserve memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also called the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol that indicates that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable manner. For example, it is displayed in a variable manner by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5 (see the small symbol displayed in the display area 5SL shown in Figure 11-19 (A1)). Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable manner, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the performance content including the variable display of the decorative symbols disappears from the screen for a moment, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the decorative symbols are currently being displayed in a variable manner. The performance control CPU operates the image display device 5 based on the receipt of the first variable display start command to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. The performance control CPU also operates the image display device 5 based on the receipt of the second variable display start command to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display devices, such as the LED069SG032 for the first special symbol and the LED069SG033 for the second special symbol, which are located in places other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display is completed while the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, if the system is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), the first background image 069SG310, depicting a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. The variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the text "Game 0 times"), corresponding to the number of variable displays performed since the system was controlled to the low probability/low base state, is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG221 at the top of the image display device 5 screen, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 100) in the lower left corner of the image display device 5 screen, and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen are erased.

Furthermore, when the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less, the countdown animation described later will be executed, and a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the text "Play - Up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the text "XXX times remaining", and a triangular object, XXX = 1 to 300) will be displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen.

(Play 1100 Battle Rush [Play Time])
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to time-saving state B via the relief time-saving mode, the performance mode is controlled to "Play 1100 Battle Rush" (also called "Play Time"). Figure 11-19(B) shows an example of the performance on the image display device 5 when the performance mode is controlled to "Play 1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in Figure 11-19 (B1), when the game state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (time-saving state B), and the value of the time-saving count counter is between 0 and 1100, the performance mode is "Play 1100 Battle Rush," and a third background image 069SG330 depicting a night city scene is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. The performance mode display 069SG222, consisting of the words "Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH," is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the remaining time-saving display 069SG201 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 1100) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the remaining variable number of displays controlled to the low probability/high base state, and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 screen for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., the arrow "↓↓↓"). The small symbol is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, regarding the time-saving display 069SG201, the display format (e.g., design, font, color, etc.) is common to the probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B, which allows for cost reduction.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display is completed while the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, if the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. At this time, the text "Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining," XX = 0 to 1100), and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

In this embodiment, even if no jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B and the 1100th variable display is completed, and then no jackpot occurs in the low probability state and 900 variable displays are executed, the system will not be controlled to time-saving state B. Therefore, while the variable display count indicator 069SG202 is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen after no jackpot occurs in time-saving state A or the probability variation state described later and the 110th variable display is completed, the variable display count indicator 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5 after no jackpot occurs in time-saving state B and the 1100th variable display is completed. This prevents the user from mistakenly believing that the system will be controlled to time-saving state B if no jackpot occurs in the low probability state and 900 variable displays are executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-19 (B1), an example is shown in which, during the period controlled to time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013 and the second reserved display 069SG002 is displayed in the second reserved display area 069SG012. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and during the period controlled to time-saving state B, the active display 069SG003 and the second reserved display 069SG002 may not be displayed. Also, during time-saving state A and the probability variation state, the active display 069SG003 and the second reserved display 069SG002 may be displayed or not displayed.

Furthermore, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, and after the 110th variable display has finished, if the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it may be possible to display text such as "BATTLE RUSH Ended" before controlling to the low probability/low base state. On the other hand, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, and after the 1100th variable display has finished, if the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state, it is preferable not to display text such as "BATTLE RUSH Ended" as described above.

Furthermore, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, and after the 1100th variable display has finished, if the game is then controlled to a low probability/low base state, the shutter effect (see Figure 11-23(B)) that occurs when transitioning to time-saving state B may be performed before the game is controlled to a low probability/low base state.

Furthermore, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state A, a countdown notification indicating that there are 10 time-saving rounds remaining may be displayed when the 101st variable display begins. Conversely, when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, the countdown notification may not be displayed when the 1091st variable display begins. This prevents the system from unnecessarily hyping up the game when time-saving state B (playtime) is about to end.

(Extreme Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when the game is controlled to enter a probability variation state via jackpot B or jackpot C, the performance mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush". Figure 11-20 shows an example of the performance on the image display device 5 when the performance mode is controlled to "Extreme Battle Rush".

As shown in Figure 11-20(A), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state (probability variation state) and the value of the time reduction counter is between 11 and 110, the performance mode is "Extreme Battle Rush," and the fourth background image 069SG340, which depicts a daytime wilderness landscape, is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols. The performance mode display 069SG223, consisting of the words "Extreme BATTLE RUSH," is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, the remaining time reduction display 069SG201 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," XX = 11 to 110) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, corresponding to the remaining variable number of displays controlled to the high probability/high base state, and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, a display area 5SL is provided in the upper left corner of the image display device 5 screen for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "4"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., the arrow "↓↓↓"). The small symbol is displayed variably in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-20(B), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state and the value of the time-saving round counter is between 0 and 10, an enhanced time-saving round remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the text "XX rounds remaining," where XX = 0 to 10) is displayed in the lower left corner of the image display device 5 screen. This enhanced display is larger than the time-saving round remaining display 069SG201 used when the time-saving round counter value is between 11 and 110. Note that the enhanced time-saving round remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to an enlarged version of the time-saving round remaining display 069SG201; the display color of the time-saving round remaining display 069SG201 may be changed, or effects may be added to the time-saving round remaining display 069SG201. Furthermore, a dedicated sound effect may be played from the speaker at the timing of the switch from the time-saving round remaining display 069SG201 to the enhanced time-saving round remaining display 069SG201.

Furthermore, in both Time-Saving State A and Time-Saving State B, the remaining time may be displayed in a manner similar to that of the Probability-Boosting State. Also, in Time-Saving State B, the display of the remaining time may be omitted to avoid causing stress to the player.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-20(C), when the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, and the 110th variable display, which results in a "miss," is executed, the result image 069SG500 is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 includes the text "Extreme Battle Rush Ended," indicating the end of the Extreme Battle Rush; the text "BONUS x 〇 times" (where 〇 is the number of big wins); and the text "XXXX pt" (where XXXX is the total number of game balls awarded).

Furthermore, the number of jackpots included in this result image 069SG500 refers to the number of consecutive jackpots (so-called consecutive wins) based on the variable display during the high probability state. The total number of game balls awarded includes the number of prize balls awarded for the jackpots during the consecutive wins.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-20(D), after 110 variable displays have finished while the game state is controlled to a high probability/high base state, if the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image for the decorative symbols, and the variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the text "Game 0 times") corresponding to the number of variable displays performed since the game state was controlled to a low probability/low base state is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen. At this time, the performance mode display 069SG223 at the top of the image display device 5 screen, the emphasized time reduction remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining," X=0 to 10) in the lower left corner of the image display device 5 screen, and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen are erased.

Furthermore, when the game state is controlled from a probability variation state, time reduction state A, or time reduction state B to a normal state, a left-hand shooting notification may be executed based on the end of the time reduction control, instructing the player to shoot to the left. In the left-hand shooting notification, a left-hand shooting notification image and the words "Shoot Left" or an arrow image are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the voice message "Please shoot to the left" is played from speakers 8L and 8R.

Furthermore, in any of the following cases, such as after the 110th variable display when controlled in time-saving state A as shown in Figure 11-19 (A2), after the 1100th variable display when controlled in time-saving state B as shown in Figure 11-19 (B2), or after the 110th variable display when controlled in probability-increasing state as shown in Figure 11-20 (D), when control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count of the variable display count indicator 069SG202 is displayed as a common "0 times." This makes it difficult to easily grasp the state of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the type of the previous jackpot, or whether it was controlled in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability-increasing state), thereby increasing the expectation of being controlled in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, when control of the low probability/low base state (normal state) begins, the variable display count indicator 069SG202 may display the number of variable displays performed in each state, such as "110 times" when control of time-saving state A ends, "1100 times" when control of time-saving state B ends, and "110 times" when control of probability-changing state ends. This allows players to roughly confirm the state of the pachinko machine 1 (the type of previous jackpot, whether it was controlled in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability-changing state), making it easier to predict the number of variable displays until control enters time-saving state B, thus increasing the player's motivation to play.

Furthermore, in both time-saving state A and time-saving state B, a common song (for example, song A) may be played as the background music, and in the probability-increasing state, one of several songs (for example, songs A through X) including song A may be selected, and the selected song may be played.

Furthermore, when song A plays during the shortened time state A and the probability variation state, the game effect lamp 9 and the movable LED 208 may be illuminated with a light pattern corresponding to song A (such as a light pattern that matches the rhymes of the song).

Furthermore, when song A plays in time-saving state B, the game effect lamp 9 and movable LED 208 may be illuminated with a different lighting pattern (such as a lighting pattern that matches the background image) than when song A plays in time-saving state A or probability variation state.
Furthermore, the lighting patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and movable LED 208 in time-saving state A and probability variation state (patterns that match the rhymes of the music) are more emphasized than the lighting patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and movable LED 208 in time-saving state B (patterns that match the background image), while the lighting patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and movable LED 208 in time-saving state B are more subdued. The emphasized lighting patterns include patterns with higher brightness than the subdued lighting patterns, patterns with shorter intervals between switching of lighting data, and patterns with shorter flashing cycles. In this way, as explained above, players may be feeling down in time-saving state B, so by making the lighting patterns of the game effect lamp 9 and movable LED 208 more subdued rather than overemphasizing them, it is possible to suppress player dissatisfaction.

Furthermore, for example, while displaying the same background image in both time-saving state A and time-saving state B, the perspective (visibility) of the background image in time-saving state B may be made different from that in time-saving state A. This would allow users to understand that even though the same background image is used, the states are completely different (giving a different impression).

Furthermore, the size of the decorative patterns may also be different between time-saving state A and time-saving state B (for example, time-saving state A: normal, time-saving state B: large), so that even if the background image is reused, it is clear (or gives the impression) that they are completely different states.

Furthermore, after the execution of the bonus round entry animation and the time-saving mode entry animation A, a reminder to remove the prepaid card and the gaming machine manufacturer's information may be displayed. In this case, it is preferable not to display the reminder to remove the prepaid card and the gaming machine manufacturer's information after the execution of the time-saving mode entry animation B. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the stress on players caused by displaying the above information when entering time-saving mode B without going through a big win.

(Variable display count, special display count)
In this embodiment, when the game state is controlled to a low probability/low base state (normal state), the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen can display a variable display count display 069SG202 (in this example, the words "Game XXX times," etc.) corresponding to the number of variable displays performed since the game was controlled to a low probability/low base state, and a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the words "Play until 1100 BATTLE RUSH," the words "XXX times left," and a triangular object, etc.) corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the relief time reduction is reached. In this embodiment, the effect in which the special count display is shown is referred to as the countdown effect.

In this embodiment, the display of either the variable display count or the special display count is determined based on the value of the relief time reduction count counter. Furthermore, the display mode of the special display count can be changed according to the value of the relief time reduction count counter. Figure 11-21 shows an example of the display on the image display device 5 when either the variable display count or the special display count is shown.

As shown in Figure 11-21(A), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is between 301 and 900, the variable display count indicator 069SG202 (in this example, the text "Game XXX times," where XXX = 0 to 699, etc.) is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen. The number (XXX) in the variable display count indicator 069SG202 is incremented each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in Figure 11-21(B), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is between 31 and 300, a countdown animation is executed, and a special count display 069SG203 in white (in this example, the words "Play - Up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the words "XXX times remaining" in white, and a white triangular object, XXX = 31 to 300) is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen.

As shown in Figure 11-21(C), when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 30, a countdown animation is executed, and a special red count display 069SG203 (in this example, the words "Play - Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH" in red, the words "XXX times remaining" in red, and a red triangular object, XXX = 30) is enlarged in the center of the image display device 5 screen for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), and then, as shown in Figure 11-21(D), it moves to the lower right of the image display device 5 screen and is displayed in a reduced size. Furthermore, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is between 1 and 30, a countdown animation is executed, and the special red count display 069SG203 (in this example, the words "Play - Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH" in red, the words "XXX times remaining" in red, and a red triangular object, XXX = 1 to 30) is displayed in the lower right of the image display device 5 screen.

In this embodiment, the special count display is not shown in the variable display when the rescue time reduction count counter value becomes 0. However, the variable display is not limited to this configuration, and the special count display may be shown in the variable display when the rescue time reduction count counter value becomes 0. For example, in the variable display when the rescue time reduction count counter value becomes 1, after the red special count display is shown, when the variable display where the rescue time reduction count counter value becomes 0 is executed, the gold special count display 069SG203 (in this example, the words "Play - Up to 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the gold text "0 times remaining", and a gold triangular object, etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which the variable count display 069SG202 is hidden during the period when the special count display 069SG203 is displayed, the present invention is not limited to this. The special count display 069SG203 may be displayed while the variable count display 069SG202 remains displayed, and the addition display of the variable count display 069SG202 and the subtraction display of the special count display 069SG203 may be performed in accordance with the variable display. In this case, it is preferable to display the variable count display 069SG202 in a manner that is less visible than the display manner of the special count display 069SG203 (for example, displaying the variable count display 069SG202 in a less conspicuous manner, such as by reducing its size compared to the special count display 069SG203).

Furthermore, the trigger for starting the display of the special count indicator 069SG203 may be a fixed timing, such as when the variable display starts when the remaining number of variable displays until the time-saving state B is controlled reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 50 remaining). Alternatively, it may be at an irregular timing, such as when the lottery for starting the display of the special count indicator 069SG203 is executed and a win is achieved, when the variation pattern of a failed SP reach ends, or when it is indicated by the execution of a remaining count indication effect that the remaining number of variable displays until the time-saving state B is controlled has reached a predetermined number (e.g., 50 remaining). Also, when starting the display of the special count indicator 069SG203, it may be highlighted by displaying it in full screen. Furthermore, instead of displaying the special count indicator 069SG203, it may be possible to execute a dedicated background effect that switches to a dedicated effect mode (e.g., "Super Hot When You Reach").

Furthermore, when the rescue time-saving counter value reaches 301-900, the game may switch to a variable pattern table that makes it more difficult to determine the SP reach variation pattern than before the counter value reached 301-900. This allows for a variable display that caters to the player's desire to enter rescue time-saving mode quickly.

Furthermore, during the display period of the special count indicator 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period described above), the execution of various pre-announcement effects described later may be restricted (for example, not executed, or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). Also, if the execution timing of a pre-announcement effect overlaps with the display period of the special count indicator 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period described above), the special count indicator 069SG203 may be displayed in a manner that does not highlight it. Alternatively, if the execution timing of the pre-announcement effect described later overlaps with the display period of the special count indicator 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period described above), the special count indicator 069SG203 may be displayed when the variable display begins after the pre-announcement effect has finished. Furthermore, if a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special count indicator 069SG203 (including the full-screen display period described above) results in a jackpot, the display of the special count indicator 069SG203 may be restricted (for example, not displayed, or displayed in an inconspicuous manner).

(Example of a scene when the relief time reduction is reached)
As described above, (i) if the rescue time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed (if the rescue time reduction is reached without any big wins after the RAM clear), a symbol confirmation A command is sent during the rescue time reduction arrival variation, which sets the symbol confirmation period to 0.5 seconds. (ii) If the rescue time reduction is reached after a big win with 900 variable displays (if the rescue time reduction is reached after one big win without any further big wins), a symbol confirmation B command is sent during the rescue time reduction arrival variation, which sets the symbol confirmation period to 20 seconds. In this embodiment, since the symbol confirmation period differs between case (i) and case (ii), the presentation of the period from when the rescue time reduction arrival variation in the low probability/low base state ends until the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (time reduction state B) and the rescue time reduction game begins (i.e., the symbol confirmation period) is different.

Next, we will explain examples of the presentation when (i) the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, using Figures 11-22 to 11-25. This example will explain the case where (i) the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, and the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss."

(Example of a performance in case (i))
Figure 11-22 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process is performed and the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss". Figure 11-23 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in Figure 11-23(A), when the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1) (at timing T1 shown in Figure 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which received the symbol confirmation A specification command, confirms and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "146") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. That is, it confirms and stops the combination of decorative symbols that results in a "miss" display.

At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the active display 069SG003 within the active display area 069SG013, and based on the fact that the first reserved memory count is 1, it displays the reserved display 069SG001 in the first reserved display area 069SG011. Furthermore, based on the fact that the game state is the normal state, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image for the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation displays the number "1" in the display area 5SL because the first reserved memory count is 1, and displays the number "0" because the second reserved memory count is 0. It also stops the display area for the small symbols, confirming the combination of small symbols (in this example, "146"). That is, it stops the display of the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss."

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing T2 shown in Figure 11-22), the performance control CPU 120 executes the shutter effect, displaying the shutter image 069SG250 across the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in Figure 11-22), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation A specification command, confirms and stops the final combination of small symbols (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, it confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" are displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, and a right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-hand shooting" are faded in and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 screen. By doing this, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player may continue playing with left-handed shots, thus diminishing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, by quickly displaying the right-handed shot notification image 069SG400 in the lower right corner of the screen, and then fading in the right-handed shot notification image 069SG401, the player can be effectively guided to play with right-handed shots.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-23(D), when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A command has elapsed (at the timing T4 shown in Figure 11-22), and the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative symbols, corresponding to the performance mode becoming "Play 1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the performance mode display 069SG222, consisting of the text "遊・1100BATTLE RUSH", at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, displays the remaining time display 069SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining", XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the combination of decorative symbols that was executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. It also displays the combination of small symbols that was executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

Next, regarding (ii) the case where the relief time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win, we will explain the example of the presentation using Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25. This example will explain the case where, after (ii) the relief time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win, the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss."

(Example of presentation in case (ii))
Figure 11-24 is a time chart showing the timing of execution of each effect when, after a big win, the relief time reduction is reached after 900 variable displays and the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss," and (B) is a time chart showing a modified version of the time reduction entry effect B. Figure 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an effect image related to each of these effects.

First, the presentation configuration in Figures 11-25(A) and (B) is the same as the presentation configuration in the variation pattern of "non-reach (shortened non-reach or non-reach) miss" when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM clear process, as shown in Figures 11-23(A) and (B). Therefore, the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in Figure 11-24(A)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation B specification command, confirms and stops the final combination of small symbols (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, it confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the lower right of the image display device 5 screen, and a right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-hand shooting" are faded in and displayed in the center of the image display device 5 screen. By doing this, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player may continue playing with left-handed shots, thus diminishing the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, by quickly displaying the right-handed shot notification image 069SG400 in the lower right corner of the screen, and then fading in the right-handed shot notification image 069SG401, the player can be effectively guided to play with right-handed shots.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25(D), when 0.5 seconds have elapsed within the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B command (at the timing T4 shown in Figure 11-24(A)), the performance control CPU 120 terminates the shutter performance, erases the shutter image 069SG250 from the entire screen of the image display device 5, and fades out the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401 while displaying the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400, then executes the time-saving entry performance B, and displays the entry image 069SG473 (in this example, an image containing the text "Entering Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH"), which will be described later, across the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the Time-Saving Mode B, the player is notified that the game state has been controlled to Time-Saving Mode B (low probability/high base state) by displaying the entry image 069SG473, which includes the text "Entering Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH".

Furthermore, the entry image 069SG473 is composed of the entry image 069SG470, which is displayed in common when the control of the time-saving state A and the probability variation state begins; the playtime image 069SG473A, which consists of the characters "1100" displayed at the smallest size with 0% transparency in the lower left corner of the display screen; and the playtime image 069SG473B, which consists of the character "遊" (play).

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25(E), when the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B command has elapsed (at the timing T5 shown in Figure 11-24(A)), and the game state is controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state), the performance control CPU 120 displays the third background image 069SG330 as the background image for the decorative symbols, corresponding to the performance mode becoming "Play 1100 Battle Rush". At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the performance mode display 069SG222, consisting of the text "Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH," at the top of the image display device 5 screen, displays the remaining time display 069SG201 (in this example, the text "XX times remaining," XX = 1100) at the bottom left of the image display device 5 screen, and displays the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" at the bottom right of the image display device 5 screen. At this time, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the combination of decorative symbols that was executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. It also displays the combination of small symbols that was executed immediately before (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area.

In addition, the examples in Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25 show an example where the performance mode becomes "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed at a timing different from the timing when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B after the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command has elapsed. However, the system is not limited to this form, and the performance mode may become "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing when the game state is controlled to time-saving state B after the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command has elapsed. For example, after the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, the performance mode may become "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at the timing when (A) the customer waiting demo display specification command is received, or at the timing when the first variable display after being controlled to time-saving state B begins. Alternatively, at the point when 0.5 seconds have elapsed within the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B command (in this example, the symbol confirmation period specified by the symbol confirmation A command) (in this example, at the T4 timing), the time-saving mode B (Figure 11-25 (D)) may not be executed, and the performance mode may change to "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed.

Furthermore, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in Figures 11-23(B) and 11-25(B), an image indicating that the system is controlled to time-saving state B (for example, the character "遊") may be displayed. This makes it easier to distinguish between the timing when the system is controlled to time-saving state B and other timings when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in common (for example, when the performance mode switches).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as explained in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, examples were given of different presentation modes for (i) when the relief time-saving mode is reached after a RAM clear and (ii) when the relief time-saving mode is reached after a big win with 900 variable displays. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and a common presentation mode may be executed in both cases (i) and (ii). In other words, the time-saving mode entry presentation B may be executed in both cases (i) and (ii), or the time-saving mode entry presentation B may not be executed in both cases. Alternatively, different time-saving mode entry presentation B may be executed in both cases (i) and (ii).

Furthermore, while the examples in Figures 11-24(A) and 11-25 illustrate a configuration in which the time-saving mode entry sequence B is executed during the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B command, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving mode entry sequence B may be started after the system is controlled to time-saving mode B. Below, variations in the execution timing of each sequence when a rescue time-saving mode is reached will be described based on Figures 11-24(B), 11-26, and 11-27.

Figure 11-24(B) is a modified time chart showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time reduction is reached. Figure 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect operation when the number of reserved memories is 0 when the rescue time reduction is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in Figure 11-26(A) is the same as the presentation configuration shown in Figure 11-25(A), so the explanation will be omitted. Next, as shown in Figure 11-26(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts the variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (at the timing T2 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-26(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation B specification command, confirms and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") that results in a "miss" display in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in Figure 11-26(D), upon receiving the right-hand LED illumination notification command, the right-hand LED 069SG031 is illuminated, the special count display 069SG203 is hidden, the right-hand notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand" are displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, and a larger right-hand notification image 069SG401 and the words "Right-hand" are faded in in front of the decorative symbols in the center of the image display device 5 screen, thus commencing the right-hand notification.

Next, when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A command has elapsed (at the timing T4 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), control of the time-saving state B begins, and the variable display becomes available. However, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the display of the right-hand shooting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in Figure 11-26(D) is maintained.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-26(E), when the right-hand play begins in time-saving state B and a second starting win (or first starting win) occurs, the first variable display starts (at the timing T5 shown in Figure 11-24(B)). At this timing, the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-hand play notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-26(F), the CPU 120 for performance control terminates the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display begins after the first variable display has finished (at the timing T6 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry effect B.

Furthermore, the Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence B may be started at a timing other than the start of the second variable display in Time-Saving Mode B (for example, during the first variable display or at the start of the second or subsequent variable displays). Also, if the variable display period is short (for example, 1500ms), such as when a super-short variable pattern is determined as the variable display pattern, it may be made to run continuously across multiple variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the video of Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence B is displayed continuously, regardless of the variable display of decorative symbols. Also, if a jackpot variable display starts during the execution period of Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence B, the running Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence B may be interrupted or terminated, and the game may transition to an sequence corresponding to the variable pattern (for example, an SP Reach sequence), or the jackpot notification sequence may be executed without going through a sequence corresponding to the variable pattern.

Next, Figure 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the animation operation when the number of reserved memories is 1 or more when the relief time reduction is reached.

First, the production configurations in Figures 11-27(A) to (C) are the same as those shown in Figures 11-26(A) to (C), so we will omit the explanation.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-27(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), the performance control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation B specification command, confirms and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") that results in a "miss" display in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and also confirms and stops the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5. Next, as shown in Figure 11-27(D), upon receiving the right-hand LED illumination notification command, the right-hand LED 069SG031 is illuminated, the special count display 069SG203 is hidden, the right-hand notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand" are displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, and a larger right-hand notification image 069SG401 and the words "Right-hand" are faded in in front of the decorative symbols in the center of the image display device 5 screen, thus commencing the right-hand notification.

Here, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more, when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A command has elapsed (at the timing T4 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), control of the time-saving state B begins, and the first variable display starts. Therefore, as shown in Figure 11-27(D), the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the right-hand shooting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Subsequently, as shown in Figure 11-27(E), the CPU 120 for performance control terminates the shutter effect after the first variable display has finished and at the timing when the second variable display has started. It then hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving mode entry effect B.

Thus, when the variable display of the relief time-saving state B is completed, the CPU 120 for performance control lights up the right-hand LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-hand LED lighting notification command, and displays the right-hand notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the words "Right-hand" on the display screen of the image display device 5, thereby starting the right-hand notification. Because the variable display does not start after the control of time-saving state B has begun, even if the shutter effect indicating the start of time-saving state B control or the time-saving state entry effect B does not start, it is possible to prevent the player from starting disadvantageous left-hand play without knowing that they are in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a 0.5-second symbol confirmation period was set when the relief time-saving mode was reached after a RAM clear, and a 20-second symbol confirmation period was set when the relief time-saving mode was reached after 900 variable displays following a big win. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common symbol confirmation period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) may be set for both when the relief time-saving mode is reached after a RAM clear and when it is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win. Even in this case, by executing the right-hand shooting notification and the time-saving mode entry演出 B after the variable display has started following the commencement of control of time-saving mode B, it is possible to prevent the player from starting disadvantageous left-hand shooting without knowing that they are controlled in time-saving mode B.

In the above embodiment, when the relief time reduction is reached after the RAM is cleared, the shutter effect is terminated when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A specification command has elapsed, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated, and the background image of the Play-1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Here, if the performance control CPU 120 is unable to properly receive the symbol confirmation A specification command, for example, if it misses the symbol confirmation A specification command sent from CPU 103, or if the received command is not recognized as the symbol confirmation A specification command due to command corruption, the shutter effect may be terminated when (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demo display specification command is received, or when (B) a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to time reduction state B is received (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern specification command, etc.) is received, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated, and the background image of the Play-1100 Battle Rush is displayed. Furthermore, when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to time-saving state B is received (for example, a game state specification command, a symbol confirmation specification command, etc.), the shutter effect may be terminated, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the background image of the Play-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, when the relief time-saving mode is reached after a big win with 900 variable displays, the shutter effect is terminated at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed within the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is terminated, and the time-saving mode entry effect is executed. Here, if the CPU 120 for performance control fails to properly receive the symbol confirmation B specification command, for example, if it misses the symbol confirmation B specification command sent from CPU 103, or if the received command is not recognized as a symbol confirmation B specification command due to command corruption, then the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed at the timing of (A) receiving the customer waiting demo display specification command, or (B) receiving a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display after being controlled to time-saving state B (for example, a variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), a variable pattern specification command, etc.). Alternatively, the shutter performance may be terminated, the display of shutter image 069SG250 may be terminated, and the time-saving entry performance B may be executed at the timing of receiving another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to time-saving state B (for example, a game state specification command, a symbol confirmation specification command, etc.).

Furthermore, Figures 11-22 to 11-25 describe the various effects executed when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) miss" in cases where the rescue time-saving mode is reached after a RAM clear and when the rescue time-saving mode is reached after 900 variable displays following a big win. Although not specifically illustrated, when the variation pattern is determined to be "SP reach A miss or SP reach B miss," the SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type (for example, bowling effect for SP reach A, battle effect for SP reach B) is executed. After displaying an image of the ally character being defeated by the enemy character in the bowling or battle effect, and notifying that the variable display result is a miss, the shutter effect is started. Additionally, the time-saving mode entry effect B may be started during the symbol confirmation period after the shutter effect ends.

Furthermore, if the variable display (rescue time reduction reach variation) where the rescue time reduction counter value becomes 0 indicates a jackpot, the following (1) to (3) may be used.

(1) If the variable display setting for the rescue time reduction counter is 0, and the jackpot variation pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)" has been determined, a shutter effect may be performed at the start of the variable display (for example, the same as in Figure 11-23 (B)). For example, the shutter effect may end at the timing when the SP Reach effect B develops (see the timing in Figure 13-11 (A2)), after which the SP Reach effect B is executed and the jackpot is announced.

(2) If the variable display shows the value of the relief time reduction counter as 0 and the winning variation pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)" has been determined, the special count display may remain at "1" and the SP Reach B animation may be executed without any shutter animation, thus guaranteeing a win.

(3) A special variation pattern for big wins may be provided when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (for example, shutter closes → shutter opens with matching decorative symbols → big win).

Furthermore, it is preferable to restrict the execution of the pre-announcement effect described later when the rescue time reduction counter reaches a specific number of remaining spins, and to restrict the execution of the pre-announcement effect when the rescue time reduction counter reaches zero in the variable display.

(Example of a customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer-waiting demo display specification command that indicates a customer-waiting state, a customer-waiting demo performance is executed in which the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. Figure 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in the customer-waiting state.

As shown in Figure 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing an ally character, the text "Demo Video," and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image with the text "Playtime Equipped" displayed on a triangular object). Furthermore, if the rescue time reduction counter value is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes, in addition to the aforementioned images (ally character, "Demo Video," etc.), a special count display 069SG203 (in this example, a white version of the special count display).

This configuration allows the player to be notified while waiting for a customer that the remaining number of variable display counts until the relief time reduction is reached is low (in this example, the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less), thereby promoting operation.

(A variation of the customer waiting screen)
In the example shown in Figure 11-28(A), the demo image 069SG700 includes the special count display 069SG203 when the value of the relief time reduction count counter is between 1 and 300. However, the example is not limited to this form, and the demo image 069SG700 may be configured so that the special count display 069SG203 is not included in either the case where the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 301 or greater, or 300 or less.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-28(B), when the customer waiting demo is executed, the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A representing an ally character, the text "Demo Video," and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image with the text "Playtime Equipped" displayed on a triangular object). However, it does not include a special count display, regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction count counter.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-28(C), when a new starting prize is awarded and the variable display of the first special symbol begins, the customer waiting demo performance ends, and the special count display 069SG203 is displayed in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen.

With this configuration, by not informing players of the remaining variable number of spins until the relief time-saving feature is reached while they are waiting for customers, it is possible to prevent the selection of only gaming machines with a small number of remaining variable number of spins until the relief time-saving feature is reached, thereby suppressing excessive bias in the operation of gaming machines.

Furthermore, regardless of whether a RAM clear process is performed upon power-on, the variable display count display and special display count display may be hidden until a predetermined number of variable display cycles (e.g., 50 cycles) have been executed after power-on.

For example, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on, and the value of the rescue time reduction count counter at the time of power-on is 301 or greater, or 300 or less, the variable display count and special count displays will be hidden until a predetermined number of variable displays have been performed. This can deter players who play solely for the purpose of obtaining rescue time reductions. Furthermore, if the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on, and the value of the rescue time reduction count counter at the time of power loss is 301 or greater, or 300 or less, the variable display count and special count displays will be hidden until a predetermined number of variable displays have been performed. This can deter players from avoiding the game.

With this configuration, if the RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on at opening time, it is possible to prevent players aiming for a quick relief time from selecting a gaming machine with a low remaining number of variable displays until reaching the quick relief time by referring to the final number of variable displays at the time of the power outage the previous day. Furthermore, if the RAM clear process is performed when the power is turned on at opening time, it is possible to prevent players aiming for a quick relief time from avoiding gaming machines with a high remaining number of variable displays until reaching the quick relief time by referring to the final number of variable displays at the time of the power outage the previous day.

Furthermore, regardless of the above configuration, if the value of the relief time reduction count counter reaches a specific value, the variable display count display or special count display may be shown even if the predetermined number of variable display operations have not been performed since power-on.

For example, if a RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on, and the value of the relief time reduction count counter at the time of power-on is a specific value (e.g., 20 or less) that is less than a value corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 50), then the special count display may be shown during the customer waiting state after power-on or when the variable display of special symbols is being executed. Furthermore, if a RAM clear process is not performed when the power is turned on, and the value of the relief time reduction count counter at the time of power-on is not the specific value, but the value of the relief time reduction count counter becomes the specific value (e.g., 20 or less) due to the variable display executed after power-on, then the special count display may be shown even if the value of the relief time reduction count counter does not correspond to a predetermined number of times.

(Feature section 069SG modified example 1)
Next, a modified example of feature section 069SG 1 will be described. Figure 11-29 is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen as a modified example of feature section 069SG 1. Figure 11-30 is a diagram showing a modified example of the performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen as a modified example of feature section 069SG 1.

First, regarding the example of the performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-29 (A1), for example, when a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 30,000 ms) has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols stopped in the normal state (low probability/low base state) without a new variable display starting, the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving the customer waiting demo display specification command, displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executes the customer waiting demo performance (see Figure 11-29 (A2)). Subsequently, when a starting prize is won, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and the variable display starts (see Figure 11-29 (A3)).

Next, regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the rescue time-saving mode, an example of the performance operation will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-29 (B1), when the variable display of symbols in the rescue time-saving mode reach variation stops, and the number of reserved memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving a notification command to light up the right-hand LED in response to the end of the variable display, lights up the right-hand LED 069SG031, displays the right-hand notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, and simultaneously fades in a larger right-hand notification image 069SG401 and the words "Right-hand" in front of the decorative symbols in the center of the image display device 5 screen, thus starting the right-hand notification. Furthermore, when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A specification command has elapsed, control of time-saving mode B begins (see Figure 11-29 (B2)).

Furthermore, when the variable display of symbols in the relief time reduction variation stops and a predetermined time (for example, approximately 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display starting, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a customer-waiting demo display specification command, will maintain the state of displaying the right-hand shooting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 on the image display device 5 without displaying the demo image 069SG700 and executing the customer-waiting demo performance (see Figure 11-29 (B3)).

Subsequently, when a starting prize is awarded, the performance control CPU 120, based on the fact that right-hand play has started in time-saving state B and a second starting prize (or first starting prize) has occurred, initiates the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display begins, and displays the shutter image 069SG250 across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-hand play notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the shutter effect when the first variable display finishes, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand notification image 069SG401, and then, when the second variable display begins (at the timing T6 shown in Figure 11-24(B)), displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving entry performance B (see Figure 11-29(B5)).

Next, an example of the performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right-hand shooting notification will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-29 (C1), when the variable display of the symbols in the rescue time reduction reach variation stops after reaching the rescue time reduction, if the number of reserved memories is 1 or more (for example, 1), the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving a right-hand shooting LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, lights up the right-hand shooting LED 069SG031, displays the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" in the lower right of the image display device 5 screen, and fades in a right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-hand shooting" in front of the shutter image 069SG250 in the center of the image display device 5 screen, and starts the right-hand shooting notification. Furthermore, when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A command has elapsed, control of the time-saving state B begins, and the first variable display starts after the first reserve memory is consumed. Therefore, the performance control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect, and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed across the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-hand notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (C2)).

Subsequently, when the first variable display finishes and the first hold memory becomes 0, the right-hand shooting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250, maintaining this state (see Figure 11-29 (C3)).

Then, after the control of time-saving state B has started and the variable display of the symbols has stopped during the first variable display, if a predetermined time (for example, approximately 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display starting, the performance control CPU 120, even if it receives a command to specify a customer-waiting demo display, will not display the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and execute the customer-waiting demo performance. Instead, it will maintain the state in which the right-hand shooting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-29 (C4)).

Subsequently, when a starting win occurs, the CPU 120 for performance control, based on the fact that right-hand play has started in time-saving state B and a second starting win (or first starting win) has occurred, terminates the shutter performance, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand play notification image 069SG401, and then displays the entry image 069SG473 to start time-saving state entry performance B (see Figure 11-29 (C5)).

Thus, in the modified example 1 of the feature section 069SG, the CPU 120 for performance control restricts the execution of the waiting demo performance and prioritizes the right-hand shooting notification during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction arrival variation until the end of the time reduction entry performance B. Therefore, the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400, do not disappear. As a result, as shown in Figure 11-29 (A2), the demo image 069SG700 is displayed, preventing the player from starting a disadvantageous left-hand shooting game without realizing they are controlled to time reduction state B.

Furthermore, in this modified example, a configuration is shown in which the execution of the customer-waiting demo sequence is restricted and the right-hand shooting notification is prioritized during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving mode arrival variation until the end of the time-saving mode entry sequence B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution of the customer-waiting demo sequence may also be restricted by the CPU 103 not sending a customer-waiting demo display specification command during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving mode arrival variation until the end of the time-saving mode entry sequence B.

Next, we will describe further variations of the example animation for transitioning to the customer waiting screen when the relief time reduction is reached.

As shown in Figure 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of symbols stops during the rescue time reduction reach variation, and the number of reserved symbols is 0, the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving a notification command to light up the right-hand LED in response to the end of the variable display, lights up the right-hand LED 069SG031, displays the right-hand notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, and simultaneously fades in a larger right-hand notification image 069SG401 and the words "Right-hand" in front of the decorative symbols in the center of the image display device 5 screen, thus starting the right-hand notification. Furthermore, when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A specification command has elapsed, control of time reduction state B begins (see Figure 11-30 (D2)).

Then, after the variable display of symbols in the relief time reduction variation stops and the system is controlled to time reduction state B, if a predetermined time (for example, approximately 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display starting, the performance control CPU 120, based on receiving the customer waiting demo display specification command, displays demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executes the customer waiting demo performance, and also displays the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen (see Figure 11-30 (D3)).

Subsequently, when a starting prize is awarded, the CPU 120 for performance control, based on the fact that right-hand play has started in time-saving state B and a second starting prize (or first starting prize) has occurred, initiates the shutter effect at the timing when the first variable display begins, and displays the shutter image 069SG250 across the entire screen of the image display device 5. The right-hand play notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see Figure 11-30 (D4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D3), when the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demo performance is being executed, the demo image 069SG700 may be hidden and the customer waiting demo performance terminated when the player touches the touch ring on the ball-hitting operation handle 30. Then, the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-hand shooting" shown in Figure 11-30 (D2) may be displayed, and the shutter effect may be started at the timing when the first variable display begins.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance ends the shutter effect when the first variable display finishes, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG401, and then, when the second variable display begins, displays the entry image 069SG473 to start the time-saving mode entry performance B (see Figure 11-30 (D5)).

Thus, during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time reduction reach variation until the end of the time reduction entry演出 B, the demo image 069SG700 may be displayed to enable the execution of the customer waiting demo performance. Alternatively, the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" may be displayed along with the demo image 069SG700 to execute the right-hand shooting notification. In this way, the control for displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer waiting demo performance is made common with the normal state to reduce the processing burden. Furthermore, by displaying the right-hand shooting notification image 069SG400 and the text "Right-hand shooting" in the lower right corner of the image display device 5 screen, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-hand shooting game.

Furthermore, for example, the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, may be displayed in front of the demo image 069SG700, thus ensuring that the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 is displayed with higher visibility than the demo image 069SG700.

(Feature section 069SG modified example 2)
Next, a modified example of feature section 069SG 2 will be described. Figure 11-31 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for game control as a modified example of feature section 069SG 2. Figure 11-32 is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing as a modified example of feature section 069SG 2. Figure 11-33 is a flowchart of the special symbol stop processing as a modified example of feature section 069SG 2. Figure 11-34 is a flowchart of the display processing as a modified example of feature section 069SG 2.

In the above embodiment, as shown in Figures 11-13 and 11-14, the lighting and extinguishing of the right-side lamp 069SG132 and the transmission of right-side LED lighting notification commands and right-side LED extinguishing notification commands to the performance control board 12 are exemplified within the special symbol stop processing. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the processing of lighting and extinguishing the right-side lamp 069SG132 and the processing of transmitting right-side LED lighting notification commands and right-side LED extinguishing notification commands to the performance control board 12 may be performed outside the special symbol stop processing. Furthermore, the value of the rescue time reduction count counter is subtracted in the special symbol normal processing, and the rescue time reduction decision flag is turned on when the rescue time reduction is reached. However, the value of the rescue time reduction count counter may be subtracted in the special symbol stop processing, and the lighting and extinguishing of the right-side lamp 069SG132 and the transmission of right-side LED lighting notification commands and right-side LED extinguishing notification commands to the performance control board 12 may be performed without using the rescue time reduction decision flag.

For example, as shown in Figure 11-31, which is a modified example of feature section 069SG 2, in the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 103 executes display processing (step 069SGS24A) which includes setting processing to turn the right-side lamp 069SG132 on and off after executing the random number update processing for gameplay (step S24), and sending right-side LED on notification commands and right-side LED off notification commands to the performance control board 12. Furthermore, after executing the normal symbol processing (step S26), it executes display control processing (step 069SGS26A) which turns the right-side lamp 069SG132 on and off according to the setting processing performed in the display processing.

In the modified example 2 of feature section 069SG, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-32 and 11-33 in order to perform the display processing (step 069SGS24A) and display control processing (step 069SGS26A) described above.

In the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-32 and 11-33, the CPU 103 first executes steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS135 if the jackpot flag is set, similar to the special symbol stop process shown in Figures 11-13 and 11-14. Then, without starting the right-side lamp 069SG132 to light up or sending a right-side LED lighting notification command, the CPU 103 executes steps 069SGS138 and 069SGS139. After that, it clears the memory of the states of the time-saving flags A and B (step 069SGS139a), and then executes step 069SGS140 to terminate the special symbol stop process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 executes the processes in steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS133, then identifies the state of the time-saving flag A and time-saving flag B at that time, and updates and stores the state of these time-saving flags A and B (step 069SGS160). It also determines whether the probability-increasing flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability-increasing flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E. If the probability-increasing flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), it further determines whether the value of the relief time-saving counter is already 0 (step 069SGS162).

If the value of the relief time reduction count counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state is already B (Step 069SGS162; Yes), proceed to Step 069SGS174E. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter is not 0 (Step 069SGS162; No), subtract 1 from the value of the relief time reduction count counter (Step 069SGS163), and then determine whether the value of the relief time reduction count counter after subtracting 1 is 0 (Step 069SGS164).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processes in steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, then executes the process in step 069SGS152 without stopping the illumination of the right-hand shooting lamp 069SG132 or sending a notification command to turn off the right-hand shooting LED, and then proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

Furthermore, if the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processes in steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174. Without starting the right-side shooting lamp 069SG132 to light up or sending a right-side shooting LED start notification command, it sets a specific number (for example, 4) to the specific count arrival information output counter, which indicates the number of times the variable display count has reached 1100 without the variable display result being a jackpot, via an external output terminal (not shown) to the hall management computer, etc. It also sets a specific count arrival information output period timer, which indicates the output period per instance of the specific count arrival information, and proceeds to step 069SGS174E (steps 069SGS174C, SGS174D).

Furthermore, in the next interrupt information output processing (step S23), the CPU 103 should output the information indicating the number of occurrences over the period set in the timer for the specified number of occurrences, for the number of times set in the counter for the number of occurrences of the information to be reached.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 sets a transition flag to enable the next interrupt to perform the display processing (step 069SGS24A), which includes turning the right-side lamp 069SG132 on and off, and sending the right-side LED on notification command and the right-side LED off notification command. After this, it executes the processing in step 069SGS175 to terminate the special symbol stop processing.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-34, the CPU 103, in the display processing, first determines whether the transition flag is set, that is, whether the special symbol stop processing that resulted in a variable display result being a miss was executed during the previous interrupt (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display processing is terminated. If the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182), and the state of the stored time-saving flags A and B is compared with the current state of time-saving flags A and B (step 069SGS183). It is then determined whether either time-saving flag A or time-saving flag B has changed to the ON state (set state) (step 069SGS184).

If either Time-Saving Flag A or Time-Saving Flag B is turned ON, that is, if the system is newly controlled to Time-Saving State A or Time-Saving State B (Step 069SGS184; Yes), the Right-Handed Lamp 069SG132 and Time-Saving Lamp 069SG134 are set to light up, and a Right-Handed LED lighting notification command is sent to the Performance Control Board 12 to terminate the display process (Steps 069SGS185, Steps 069SGS186).

Furthermore, if either Time-Saving Flag A or Time-Saving Flag B has not changed to the ON state (Step 069SGS184; No), it is determined whether either Time-Saving Flag A or Time-Saving Flag B has changed to the OFF state (cleared state) (Step 069SGS187). If either Time-Saving Flag A or Time-Saving Flag B has not changed to the OFF state (Step 069SGS187; N), the display process ends. If either Time-Saving Flag A or Time-Saving Flag B has changed to the OFF state, that is, if the system has been controlled from Time-Saving State A or Time-Saving State B to the normal state (Step 069SGS187; Yes), the Right-Handed Lamp 069SG132 and Time-Saving Lamp 069SG134 are turned off, and a Right-Handed LED Off Notification Command is sent to the Performance Control Board 12, ending the display process (Steps 069SGS188, Step 069SGS189).

Furthermore, in the display control processing (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 should perform the on/off operation of the right-hand shooting lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting in step 069SGS185 or the off setting in step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control should, upon receiving a notification command from CPU 103 to light up the right-hand LED, begin displaying the right-hand notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the text "Right-hand" on the screen of the image display device 5. Upon receiving a notification command from CPU 103 to turn off the right-hand LED, it should terminate the display of the right-hand notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 and the text "Right-hand" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

(Feature section 069SG modified example 3)
In the above embodiment, when the value of the relief time reduction count counter is between 1 and 300, a special count display is shown in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 to indicate that the number of remaining variable displays until relief time reduction is reached is decreasing. However, the embodiment is not limited to this form, and a relief time reduction suggestion effect may be performed that indicates the number of remaining variable displays until relief time reduction is reached is different from the special count display.

First, the presentation configurations in Figures 11-35(A) and (B) are the same as those for the variable display count and special display count (white form) shown in Figures 11-21(A) and (B), so their explanation is omitted. Also, the presentation configurations in Figures 11-35(C) and (D), excluding the relief time reduction indication, are the same as those for the special display count (red form) shown in Figure 11-21(C), so their explanation is omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-35(C), when the rescue time reduction count counter value is between 11 and 30, and the first stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion animation is executed, the first suggestion image (in this example, the first suggestion image 069SG800A, which is related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching rescue time reduction and covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image has a higher display priority than the background image (it appears to be displayed in front because it is on a higher display layer). Therefore, to the player, the visibility of the background image in the area where the first suggestion image is superimposed appears reduced. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310, which includes the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-35(D), when the rescue time reduction count counter value is between 1 and 10, and the second stage of the rescue time reduction suggestion animation is executed, the second suggestion image (in this example, the second suggestion image 069SG800B, which is related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of reaching rescue time reduction and covers the upper half of the background image) is superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image has a higher display priority than the background image (it appears to be displayed in front because it is on a higher display layer). Therefore, to the player, the visibility of the background image in the area where the second suggestion image is superimposed appears reduced. In other words, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310, including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In this embodiment, the background image, including the suggestive images (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) generated by the relief time reduction suggestion effect, is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of special symbols is not being performed. In this way, by changing the display mode of the interface image shown on the image display device 5 screen, regardless of whether the variable display of special symbols is being performed, according to the value of the relief time reduction count counter, it is possible to suggest that the number of remaining variable displays until relief time reduction is reached is decreasing, and the entertainment value can be enhanced.

In this example, we showed an example where suggestive images (first suggestive image, second suggestive image) related to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached are superimposed on the background image as images that change the interface image. However, the system is not limited to this form, and images unrelated to the shutter image when the rescue time reduction is reached may also be superimposed on the background image. For example, effect images with different display areas and colors may be superimposed depending on the value of the rescue time reduction count. For instance, when the rescue time reduction count is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image may be the first area (e.g., 25% of the screen) and the display color may be blue. However, when the rescue time reduction count is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image may be a larger second area (e.g., 50% of the screen) and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various performance elements)
Next, the various effects that the CPU 120 for controlling the effects can execute will be explained based on Figures 11-36 to 11-50. Figure 11-36 is a diagram illustrating the content of various effects. Figure 11-37 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of a countdown予告 (countdown notification). Figure 11-38 is also a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of a countdown notification. Figure 11-39 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of a hold change notification. Figure 11-40 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of a symbol chance notification. Figure 11-41 is a diagram showing an example of the effect display notification. Figure 11-42 shows a table for determining the type of pre-read notification, with (A) to (D) being the table for determining the pre-read notification effect pattern, with (A) to (F) being the table for determining the effect pattern, with Figure 11-44 being a flowchart showing an example of the variable display start setting process, with Figure 11-45 being a flowchart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display. Figure 11-46 shows (A) the table for determining the execution of the reach notification, and (B) to (E) the tables for determining the button notification effect pattern. Figure 11-47 shows (A) to (D) the tables for determining the character notification pattern. Figure 11-48 shows (A) to (D) the tables for determining the movable body movement pattern. Figure 11-49 shows (A) to (D) the tables for determining the movable body notification pattern. Figure 11-50 shows (A) to (C) a diagram to explain the characteristics of each game state.

As shown in Figure 11-36, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute the following pre-announcement effects to predict the probability of a big win in the variable display before execution (the variable display whose execution is pending): a countdown announcement, a pending change announcement, a symbol chance event announcement, and an effect display announcement.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the following types of pre-announcement effects that suggest a jackpot is being controlled in the variable display: a movable object pre-announcement, a character pre-announcement, a reach pre-announcement, and a button pre-announcement.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute a win/loss button animation and a movable body animation as decisive animations to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a winning state in the variable display based on the Super Reach Jackpot variation patterns (SP Reach A to E).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute a post-event presentation in a post-event presentation section that specifically notifies the number of balls to be awarded during a jackpot game state, after the completion of the variable display section, which is where the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display based on the Super Reach Jackpot Variation Pattern (SP Reach A to E) is executed.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute an entry animation that notifies the start of control for each game state by displaying a state start indicator when control of one of the special states—the probability variation state, time-saving state A, or time-saving state B—begins.

(Pre-announcement effect)
Next, the pre-announcement effect will be explained. In this embodiment, in the start-up win determination process of step S101 in Figure 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of a start-up win, stores the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updates the number of reserved items. When a start-up win occurs, random values for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern are extracted and stored as reserved information, and a process is executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random values. After storing the reserved information and the number of reserved items, an effect control command is sent to the effect control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up win, the number of reserved items, the number of reserved items, and the result of the pre-announcement.

The CPU 120 for performance control, in the pre-announcement setting process of step S161 in the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, determines, based on information received from the main board 11, whether or not to execute a pre-announcement performance that suggests the reserved memory stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state. If execution is decided, it also determines the type of pre-announcement performance to execute (for example, whether to use "countdown announcement," "reserved change announcement," "symbol chance announcement," or "effect display announcement," and the performance pattern for each type of announcement).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution of the pre-announcement effect is determined based on the condition that the number of reserved memories is "4," but it may also be possible to determine the execution when the number of reserved memories is other than "4." Also, while the example given shows that the type of pre-announcement effect to be executed is determined to be one of the following: countdown announcement, reserved memory change announcement, symbol chance event announcement, or effect display announcement, the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple announcements may be executed simultaneously.

The "Countdown Announcement" is a feature that executes a countdown sequence of "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" each time a variable display of a hold memory that was not the target of the pre-announcement begins, until the variable display of the hold memory that was the target of the pre-announcement (hereinafter also referred to as the target hold) begins.

In this embodiment, the countdown予告 (preview) animation pattern is determined from one of the following patterns: ending at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", or ending at "0". The expectation level increases in the following order: ending at "3", ending at "2", ending at "1", and ending at "0" (expectation level: ending at "3" < ending at "2" < ending at "1" < ending at "0").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-37(A), when a starting prize is awarded, and a countdown notification is executed and a pattern ending at "0" is determined, after the current variable display ends (see Figure 11-37(B)), when the next variable display begins, character image 069SG100D and countdown display 069SG411 showing "3" are displayed (see Figure 11-37(C)), and the current variable display ends (see Figure 11-37(D)). Then, when the next variable display begins, character image 069SG100C (different from character image 069SG100D) and countdown display 069SG412 showing "2" are displayed (see Figure 11-37(E)), and the current variable display ends (see Figure 11-37(F)).

Next, when the next variable display begins, character image 069SG100A (different from character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C) and a countdown display 069SG413 showing "1" are displayed (see Figure 11-38(G)), and the variable display ends (see Figure 11-38(H)). Then, when the next variable display, i.e., the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach variation pattern), begins, character image 069SG100B (different from character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A) and a countdown display 069SG414 showing "0" are displayed (see Figure 11-38(I)), and the countdown notification ends.

Although not specifically illustrated, if pattern "3" is selected, the countdown announcement ends when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in Figure 11-37(C). If pattern "2" is selected, the countdown announcement ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in Figure 11-37(E). If pattern "1" is selected, the countdown announcement ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in Figure 11-38(G).

Furthermore, the countdown animation patterns are arbitrary, and more than five different patterns may be set. It is also possible to start the countdown from a number other than "3". Additionally, the countdown can be in the order of "0" → "1" → "2" → "3".

The "Reserve Change Notification" is a feature in which the display color of the reserve memory (target reserve) that is the target of the pre-announcement effect changes before it is announced whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In this embodiment, the display patterns for the hold change notification include patterns where the hold display color ultimately becomes "blue," "green," "red," or "gold," and one of these patterns is determined. While detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the hold display color changes (for example, at what timing the change occurs—when a ball is initially awarded, when the hold memory is consumed, or during the variable display period of the target hold; or, if "red" is determined, whether it changes to "red" from the beginning or gradually from "blue" to "green" to "red") can be arbitrarily determined. The expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-39(A), when a starting win occurs and a hold change notification is executed and a "red" pattern is determined, the hold display of the target hold that was the target of the hold change notification is displayed in white, and then the variable display ends. Next, when the next variable display begins, the display color of the target hold changes to "blue" (see Figure 11-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display begins, the display color of the target hold changes from "blue" to "red" (see Figure 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Finally, the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, a super reach variation pattern), begins.

Furthermore, the number of patterns for the pending change notification is arbitrary, and there may be five or more patterns. Also, the pending change is not limited to a color change as described above; it may also change to characters, items, etc.

The "Symbol Chance Prediction" is a feature where, until the variable display of the reserve memory (target reserve) that was the target of the pre-read prediction effect begins, the losing symbols stop in the variable display of the reserve memory that was not the target of the pre-read prediction effect, either as an "even-numbered symbol combination" or an "odd-numbered symbol combination."

In this embodiment, the symbol chance symbol予告 (pre-announcement) has two patterns: one in which the losing symbols stop displaying as an "even-numbered symbol combination" (for example, "264"), and another in which the losing symbols stop displaying as an "odd-numbered symbol combination" (for example, "135"). Based on the variable display result, it is determined whether the losing symbols will be an "even-numbered symbol combination" or an "odd-numbered symbol combination". Furthermore, the symbol combinations of "even-numbered symbols" and "odd-numbered symbols" may be selected from multiple types. Also, the display color of the base display unit 069SG052, which will be described later and constitutes the decorative symbol, can be "blue", "green", "red", or "gold", and one of these patterns is selected. The expectation level is higher when the losing symbols are an "odd-numbered symbol combination" than when they are an "even-numbered symbol combination". Furthermore, the display on the base increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-40(A), when a starting win occurs and the execution and presentation pattern of the symbol chance notification are determined, the variable display ends, and the symbol chance notification starts from the next variable display.

If the losing symbols are determined to be an "even-numbered symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is set to "blue," the losing symbols will stop and be displayed as the even-numbered symbol combination "246," and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "blue" (see Figures 11-40 (B1) and (B2)). On the other hand, if the losing symbols are an "odd-numbered symbol combination" and the base display unit 069SG052 is set to "red," the losing symbols will stop and be displayed as the odd-numbered symbol combination "375," and the base display unit 069SG052 will be displayed in "red" (see Figures 11-40 (C1) and (C2)).

In this embodiment, the decorative design consists of a number display section 069SG051 comprising the numbers "1" through "9," and a base display section 069SG052 displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. The base display section 069SG052 is formed in a roughly rectangular shape, surrounding the numbers "1" through "9" displayed on the number display section 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (e.g., white), with a common display pattern for all numbers ("1" through "9").

Furthermore, the number of patterns for the symbol chance notification is arbitrary, and there may be five or more patterns for the number of symbol combinations and the display color of the base display unit 069SG052. Additionally, character images or decorative images may be displayed on the base display unit 069SG052. For example, individual character images corresponding to each number ("1" to "9") may also be displayed.

The "Effect Display Notification" is a feature in which an effect image is displayed in the lower area of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 when the variable display of a hold memory (target hold) that was not the target of the pre-read notification effect begins, until the variable display of the hold memory that was the target of the pre-read notification effect begins.

In this embodiment, the effect display予告 (preview) has four effect image patterns: blue, green, red, and gold. One of these patterns is selected. While detailed explanations are omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the effect image's display color changes (for example, if red is selected, whether it changes to red immediately or gradually, such as blue → green → red) can be arbitrarily determined. The expectation level increases in the order of blue, green, red, and gold (expectation level: blue < green < red < gold).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-41(A), when a starting prize is awarded, and the effect display notification is executed and the "red" pattern is determined, the variable display ends (see Figure 11-41(B)), and after the next variable display starts (see Figure 11-41(C)), when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the "blue" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the lower area of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figure 11-41(D)). Then, when the next variable display starts, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see Figure 11-41(E)), and when the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the "red" effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the lower area of the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 (see Figure 11-41(F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the variable display of the target hold (for example, the super reach variation pattern), begins, the effect image 069SG420 becomes invisible (see Figure 11-41(G)).

Furthermore, the number of effect display notification patterns is arbitrary, and there may be five or more different patterns. Also, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied according to the level of expectation. Additionally, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display and during other periods.

Next, we will explain the pre-announcement type determination tables A to D used by the CPU 120 for performance control in the pre-announcement setting process of step S161 to determine whether or not to execute a pre-announcement performance that suggests the reserved memory stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and if execution is decided, which pre-announcement performance type to execute. Figure 11-42 shows (A) the pre-announcement performance type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) the pre-announcement performance type determination table B used in the probability variation state, (C) the pre-announcement performance type determination table C used in the time-saving state A, and (D) the pre-announcement performance type determination table D used in the time-saving state B. In the following, random values from 0 to 99 are used as random values for determining each performance type.

As shown in Figure 11-42(A), in the notification effect type determination table A used when the game state is normal, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown Notification," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 50 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown Notification," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 15 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification."

As shown in Figure 11-42(B), in the notification effect type determination table B used when the game state is in a probability variation state, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown Notification," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 5 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown Notification," 5 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 15 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification."

As shown in Figure 11-42(C), in the notification effect type determination table C used when the game state is time-saving state A, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 40 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Reserve Change Notification," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notification."

As shown in Figure 11-42(D), in the notification effect type determination table D used when the game state is time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 70 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Notification." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed."

Thus, when the variable display result of a pre-announcement effect is "miss," the "non-execution" rate increases in the following order: normal state, probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. In other words, it is most likely to be executed in the probability variation state and not executed (least likely to be executed) in time-saving state B. Furthermore, the "countdown announcement" is an announcement that is not executed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, and the "hold change announcement" and "effect display announcement" are announcements that are not executed in time-saving state B.

Here, we compare the determination of the type of pre-announcement effect in three game states where time-saving control is implemented (probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B).

First, the execution rate of pre-announcement effects when the variable display result is "Big Win" is 80% in the probability variation state, 60% in the time-saving state A, and 30% in the time-saving state B. The number of types of pre-announcement effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "Miss" is 40% in the probability variation state, 30% in the time-saving state A, and 0% (not executed) in the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the number of types of pre-announcement effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "Big Win" is "4 types" in the probability variation state, "3 types" in the time reduction state A, and "2 types" in the time reduction state B. The number of types of pre-announcement effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "Miss" is "4 types" in the probability variation state, "3 types" in the time reduction state A, and "0 types (not executed)" in the time reduction state B.

Thus, in Time-Saving State B, the "Symbol Chance Prediction" can only be executed when the variable display result is "Big Win," and no other pre-announcement effects are executed. Furthermore, if the variable display result is "Miss," no pre-announcement effect is executed. In other words, in Time-Saving State B, the execution rate of pre-announcement effects is lower than in the Probability Change State or Time-Saving State A, and the number of selectable effect types is also smaller.

Furthermore, in Time-Saving State B, the "Symbol Chance Symbol Prediction" can be executed as a pre-announcement effect. This is because in Time-Saving State B, variable display patterns with short display times (e.g., ultra-short non-reach patterns) are more likely to be determined. Therefore, when executing a pre-announcement effect in variable display 1, the time is short, making it easy to miss color changes in small reserve display areas, such as the "Reserve Change Prediction." Also, while the "Countdown Prediction" is executed in multiple variable displays, the period for displaying the count in variable display 1 is short, making it difficult to notice the change in the count. In contrast, the "Symbol Chance Symbol Prediction" is executed in multiple variable displays, and the change in the display color of the decorative symbol and the base can be appropriately shown when the decorative symbol stops. Therefore, it can be said to be a suitable pre-announcement effect to execute in Time-Saving State B.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which the pre-announcement effect is not executed when the variable display result is "miss" in time-saving state B. However, the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the pre-announcement effect when the variable display result is "miss" in time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of the pre-announcement effect when the variable display result is "miss" in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, the pre-announcement effect may be executed when the variable display result is "miss" in time-saving state B. Furthermore, if the number of types of pre-announcement effects that can be determined when the variable display result is "miss" is less than that of the probability variation state or time-saving state A, then two or more types of pre-announcement effects may be executed in time-saving state B.

Next, we will explain the performance pattern determination tables A to F used by the performance control CPU 120 when determining the performance pattern of the pre-announcement performance that it has decided to execute. Figure 11-43 shows (A) performance pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) performance pattern determination table B used in the probability variation state, (C) performance pattern determination table C used in the time reduction state A, (D) performance pattern determination table D used in the time reduction state B, (E) performance pattern determination table E used in the normal state, and (F) performance pattern determination table F used in the probability variation state.

As shown in Figure 11-43(A), in the normal game state, the performance pattern determination table A, which is commonly used to determine the performance patterns for the reserve change notification, symbol chance notification, and effect display notification, assigns 10 judgment values to "blue," 20 judgment values to "green," 50 judgment values to "red," and 20 judgment values to "gold" when the variable display result is "jackpot." On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss," assigns 65 judgment values to "blue," 20 judgment values to "green," 10 judgment values to "red," and 5 judgment values to "gold."

As shown in Figure 11-43(B), when the game state is in a probability variation state, the commonly used presentation pattern determination table B for determining the presentation patterns of the reserve change notification, symbol chance notification, and effect display notification results in the following order: If the variable display result is "Big Win," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Blue," 20 to "Green," 50 to "Red," and 20 to "Gold." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 65 judgment values are assigned to "Blue," 20 to "Green," 10 to "Red," and 5 to "Gold."

As shown in Figure 11-43(C), when the game state is time-saving state A, the commonly used presentation pattern determination table C for determining the presentation patterns of the reserve change notification, symbol chance notification, and effect display notification assigns 10 judgment values to "blue," 20 judgment values to "green," and 70 judgment values to "red" when the variable display result is "jackpot." On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss," assigns 70 judgment values to "blue," 20 judgment values to "green," and 10 judgment values to "red."

As shown in Figure 11-43(D), in the performance pattern determination table D used to determine the performance pattern of the symbol chance symbol notification when the game state is time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 90 judgment values are assigned to "Red" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Gold." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," the "Symbol Chance Symbol Notification" is not executed, and therefore no judgment values are assigned to either performance pattern.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-43(E), when the game state is in the normal state, the performance pattern determination table E used to determine the performance pattern of the countdown announcement has the following characteristics: If the variable display result is "Big Win," 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "3," 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "2," 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "1," and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "0." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "3," 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "2," 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "1," and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "0."

As shown in Figure 11-43(F), in the performance pattern determination table F used to determine the performance pattern of the countdown announcement when the game state is in a probability variation state, if the variable display result is "Big Win," 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "3," 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "2," 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "1," and 70 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "0." On the other hand, if the variable display result is "Miss," 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "3," 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "2," 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "1," and 10 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending at "0."

Thus, the presentation patterns for the hold change notification, symbol chance notification, and effect display notification are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold"). Furthermore, the presentation patterns for the countdown notification are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of ending at "3," ending at "2," ending at "1," and ending at "0" (expectation level: ending at "3" < ending at "2" < ending at "1" < ending at "0").

Here, we compare the determination of various preview animation patterns in three game states where time-saving control is implemented (probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B).

Furthermore, the number of possible pre-announcement animation patterns when the variable display result is "Big Win" is "4 types" in the probability variation state, "3 types" in the time-saving state A, and "2 types" in the time-saving state B. The number of possible pre-announcement animation patterns when the variable display result is "Miss" is "4 types" in the probability variation state, "3 types" in the time-saving state A, and "0 types (not executed)" in the time-saving state B.

Thus, in Time-Saving State B, when the variable display result is "Big Win," only one of two patterns, "Red" or "Gold," can be selected for the "Symbol Chance Prediction" animation. Furthermore, when the variable display result is "Miss," neither pattern is selected (not executed) for the "Symbol Chance Prediction" animation. In other words, Time-Saving State B has fewer selectable animation patterns than the Probability Change State or Time-Saving State A.

(Preview production)
Next, the preview effects will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-36, the "movable body preview,""characterpreview,""reachpreview," and "button preview" as preview effects can be executed at predetermined times in the non-reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11-44, the CPU 120 for effect control determines whether or not to execute each type of preview effect, and if execution is decided, the effect pattern of the preview effect to be executed.

The "Movable Body Notification" is a visual effect that suggests a jackpot is being controlled by vibrating the movable body 32 up and down when the variable display starts (see Figure 11-57 (A1) (B1)). The movable body notification has two patterns: a "small vibration pattern" with a small vertical vibration amplitude, and a "large vibration pattern" with a larger vertical vibration amplitude than the small vibration pattern. Depending on the variable display result, either the notification is not executed, or either the "small vibration pattern" or the "large vibration pattern" is determined.

Furthermore, the movable body 32 is capable of moving vertically between the origin position at the top of the display screen of the image display device 5 and the performance position approximately in the center of the display screen, and is capable of falling from the origin position to the performance position due to its own weight. The vibration in the movable body予告 (preview) is a performance effect that causes the movable body 32 to vibrate vertically between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the performance position. Also, the performance patterns are not limited to the above; three or more types may be set.

The "Character Announcement" is a feature that builds anticipation for whether or not a reach will occur by having a predetermined character appear during the period from the start of the variable display until the variable display mode of the decorative symbols becomes a reach mode, displaying the character's lines, and outputting the sound of the displayed lines from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figure 11-57 (A2) (B2)). There are two patterns for the reach announcement: "Line A Pattern," where the character says "Reach?", and "Line B Pattern," where the character says "Maybe a reach!!". Depending on the result of the variable display, either "Not executed," "Line A Pattern," or "Line B Pattern" is determined. The content of the lines is arbitrary and can be anything other than those mentioned above.

Furthermore, the character's dialogue patterns are not limited to those listed above; three or more patterns may be set. Also, while the character type remains the same, it may be possible to select one of several characters depending on the variable display result.

The "Reach予告" (Reach予告) is a feature that, after the variable display of decorative symbols begins, stops displaying the decorative symbols that were being displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L. It then anticipates whether or not a decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L will stop displaying in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, in other words, whether or not a reach pattern will occur (see Figure 11-57 (A3-A5), (B3-B5)).

Specifically, after the variable-display decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L stops, the display of the decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L begins to slow down just before the stop position in the variable-display right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figures 11-57 (A4), (B4)). Then, if a player operation is detected within the predetermined operation validity period after the start of the slow-down display, or if no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, and a reach is not achieved, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L passes the stop position and the next decorative symbol is displayed (see Figures 11-57 (A5), (B5)). If a reach is achieved, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L stops and is displayed at the stop position.

Furthermore, a "reach" pattern refers to a pattern (also called a "reach effect") in which, from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (identification information) until the display result is derived and displayed, all decorative symbols except one (e.g., the left and right symbols) among the combinations of multiple decorative symbols that constitute the jackpot display result (e.g., "333") are displayed in a stopped state, and the variable display of that one decorative symbol (e.g., the middle symbol) is then performed.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when the variation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, determines by lottery whether to execute the reach予告 execution process in step 069SGS278 (described later), regardless of whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result, and sets a performance control pattern (process table) according to the decision. Furthermore, if the variation pattern is non-reach, the game will not enter a reach state after the reach予告 execution. If the variation pattern is SP reach, the game will enter a reach state after the reach予告 execution, and the SP reach performance will be executed.

The "Button Notification" is an effect that occurs when the above-mentioned reach notification is executed, from the time the deceleration display of the decorative symbol with the same number as the one stopped in the left decorative symbol display area 5L in the right decorative symbol display area 5R begins until the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed (see Figure 11-57 (A4) (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that prompts the user to operate the push button 31B from the time the deceleration display of the decorative symbol begins until the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an operation promotion display and a button image resembling the push button 31B. When an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation valid period, or when no operation is detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, the operation promotion display and button image disappear, and the effect ends.

The button notification presentation patterns (operation prompting modes) include a "long-press pattern" that prompts the user to long-press the push button 31B for a predetermined period of time, a "rapid-fire pattern" that prompts the user to repeatedly press the push button 31B for a predetermined period of time, and a "single-press pattern" that prompts the user to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the variable display result, one of the following is determined: no execution, "long-press pattern," "rapid-fire pattern," or "single-press pattern." Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to those described above; four or more types may be set, or two or fewer types may be set.

The prompts for operation will display as follows: "Hold down!" for the "long press pattern," "Rapid tap!" for the "rapid tap pattern," and "One hit!" for the "single hit pattern."

(Decisive performance)
Next, we will explain the decisive performance. As shown in Figure 11-36, the decisive performance is an event that is performed in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern before it is announced whether or not it will be controlled to a jackpot at the end of the SP reach performance (see Figures 11-58 (C4-C8), 11-59 (A10-D3), (B7-D3)), and consists of a "win/loss button performance" that is performed within a predetermined valid operation period and a "movable body performance" that is performed after the "win/loss button performance".

The "Win/Loss Button Presentation" is an action prompting the user to operate the push button 31B until a predetermined operation validity period has elapsed. It begins with the display of an action prompting message consisting of the words "Release!!" or "Press!!" and a button image resembling the push button 31B. The presentation ends when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period has elapsed (see Figures 11-58 (C4), 11-59 (A8-A10), (B7)).

Furthermore, there are two display patterns: a "white pattern" where the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" where the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red. In the "movable body movement pattern determination process" described later, if "Pattern A-1," "Pattern A-2," "Pattern B-1," or "Pattern B-2" is determined, the "white pattern" is determined; if "Pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. Alternatively, either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined based on the variable display result, without relying on the "movable body movement pattern determination process." Also, the display patterns are not limited to those described above; three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body effect" is an effect that indicates whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state based on whether or not the movable body 32 falls from its origin position to the effect position. Specifically, it is executed when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period in the "win/loss button effect," or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period has elapsed. If the movable body 32 falls from its origin position to the effect position, it is indicated that the game is controlled to a jackpot state. If the movable body 32 does not fall from its origin position to the effect position, it is indicated that the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, i.e., that it is a loss (see Figures 11-58 (C6) and 11-59 (D1)).

Furthermore, when the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 built into the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of the enemy character being defeated, or an effect image highlighting the movable body 32, is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. When the movable body 32 does not fall, the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 do not light up, and the images of the enemy character being defeated and the effect images are not displayed.

In this way, the "decisive animation" works as follows: if the variable display result is a jackpot, the win/loss button animation is performed, followed by the execution of the movable body animation, resulting in a jackpot notification. If the variable display result is a loss, the win/loss button animation is performed, but the movable body animation is not executed, and a loss notification is given.

(Post-production)
Next, we will explain the post-event effects. As shown in Figure 11-36, the post-event effects are effects that occur in the post-event effect part after it is announced that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state in the variable display part in which the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is executed, in which the number of balls that are scheduled to be awarded in the jackpot state is announced in a specific way (see Figure 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display during the variable display period of the Super Reach Jackpot variation pattern until the variable display result is announced. The post-event performance part is the period from the end of the variable display part during the variable display period of the Super Reach Jackpot variation pattern until the variable display ends. In other words, the variable display period of the Super Reach Jackpot variation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post-event performance part period. Furthermore, the post-event performance may be executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state until the start of the round game, or during the symbol confirmation period after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display of the Super Reach Jackpot variation pattern.

In the post-event sequence, the allied and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach sequence, along with a display showing the planned number of balls to be dispensed during the jackpot game state, are shown. The planned number of balls to be dispensed increases each time an allied character attacks an enemy character. Next, during a predetermined operation validity period, an operation prompt display consisting of the words "Press!" and a button image resembling push button 31B are displayed. When an operation of push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the allied character defeats the enemy character, and a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500) is displayed on the planned number of balls to be dispensed, announcing the planned number of balls to be dispensed during the jackpot. After the post-event sequence ends, the jackpot game state begins.

(Entry sequence)
Next, we will explain the entry sequences. As shown in Figure 11-36, the entry sequences include an "entry introduction sequence" which is performed before the start of the "probability variation entry sequence" and the "time reduction entry sequence A", a "probability variation entry sequence" which is performed when the control of the probability variation state begins after the end of the jackpot game state, a "time reduction entry sequence A" which is performed when the control of time reduction state A begins after the end of the jackpot game state, and a "time reduction entry sequence B" which is performed when the control of time reduction state B begins because 900 variable displays have been performed in the low probability state without being controlled to the jackpot game state. In addition, a "shutter sequence" (see Figures 11-23(B)(C) and 11-25(B)(C)) is performed before the execution of the "time reduction entry sequence B", that is, before the timing to start the rescue time reduction arrival variation (variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction count counter becomes 0) in which the "time reduction entry sequence B" is performed.

Specifically, the "Probability Change Entry Animation" and "Time Reduction Entry Animation A" are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, while "Time Reduction Entry Animation B" is executed during the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the 900th variable display (rescue time reduction arrival variation), which is when the conditions for starting control of Time Reduction State B are met, have ended.

"Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence A" is a sequence that, after the entry introduction sequence (see Figures 11-63 (A) to (C)) is performed, displays the text "BATTLE RUSH Entry!!" to indicate that control of Time-Saving Mode A has begun (see Figure 11-63 (D)).

The "Probability Change Entry演出" (probability change entry animation) is an animation that signals the start of control of the probability change state after the entry introduction animation (see Figures 11-63 (A) to (C)) is displayed, by showing the words "BATTLE RUSH Entry!!" along with the word "極" (extreme) (see Figures 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

"Time-Saving Mode Entry Sequence B" is a sequence that signals the start of Time-Saving Mode B control by displaying the words "BATTLE RUSH Entry!!" along with "Play 1100" without the entry introduction sequence (see Figures 11-63 (D) and 11-64 (B1-B4)).

Furthermore, for the bonus round entry and time-saving mode entry sequences B, it may be possible to display the text "BATTLE RUSH Entry!!" after displaying the text "Extreme" or "Play 1100".

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be explained. Figure 11-44 is a flowchart of the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS271). If the first variation start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS271; Yes), the various command data and various flags stored in the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special symbol hold memory in the start prize reception command buffer are shifted one buffer number higher (step 069SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in the first special feature hold memory corresponding to buffer number "1-1" is shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-0", the various command data stored in the first special feature hold memory corresponding to buffer number "1-2" is shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-1", the various command data stored in the first special feature hold memory corresponding to buffer number "1-3" is shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-2", and the various command data stored in the first special feature hold memory corresponding to buffer number "1-4" is shifted to be stored in buffer number "1-3".

Furthermore, if the first variation start command reception flag is not in the ON state (is OFF) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether the second variation start command reception flag is ON or OFF (step 069SGS273). If the second variation start command reception flag is not ON (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is terminated. If the second variation start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS273; Yes), the various command data stored in the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special symbol hold memory in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer are shifted one buffer number higher (step 069SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, and therefore it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in buffer number "2-1" of the second special feature hold memory is shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-0," the various command data stored in buffer number "2-2" of the second special feature hold memory is shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-1," the various command data stored in buffer number "2-3" of the second special feature hold memory is shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-2," and the various command data stored in buffer number "2-4" of the second special feature hold memory is shifted to be stored in buffer number "2-3."

After step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274 is executed, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variable pattern specification command from the variable pattern specification command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variable pattern specification command is stored in the variable pattern specification command storage area in response to its reception during the command analysis process (S75) shown in Figure 6, and is erased at the end of the variable display. Note that the erasure of the variable pattern specification command may be performed in response to its reading.

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (i.e., the received display result specification command) (step 069 SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result specified by the display result specification command, and stores the data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. Note that in the command analysis process (S75) shown in Figure 6, the received display result specification command is stored in the display result specification command storage area, and is erased at the end of the variable display. Note that the erasure of the display result specification command may be performed in response to reading.

Furthermore, in this feature unit 069SG, if the received variable display result specification command is a second variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 will, for example, determine the stop symbol from among multiple combinations of even-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", "888"). Also, if the received variable display result specification command is a third variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot B, the stop symbol will be determined from among multiple combinations of odd-numbered symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", "999"). Also, if the received variable display result specification command is a fourth variable display result specification command corresponding to jackpot C, the stop symbol will be determined to be a combination of decorative symbols where three symbols are "7" (jackpot symbol). Furthermore, if the received variable display result specification command is the first variable display result specification command corresponding to a loss, the system will determine a decorative symbol where three symbols are mismatched as the stopping symbols.

Furthermore, in the pre-announcement setting process of step S161 in the performance control process shown in Figure 10, if the performance control CPU 120 decides to execute the aforementioned symbol chance symbol announcement, it determines whether the stopping symbols for the variable display until the variable display of the target hold begins to be an even-numbered symbol combination or an odd-numbered symbol combination.

In determining these stop symbols, the CPU 120 for performance control can, for example, extract a random number to determine the stop symbol and use a stop symbol determination table, which associates data and numerical values indicating combinations of decorative symbols, to determine the stop symbol for the decorative symbols. That is, the stop symbol can be determined by selecting data indicating combinations of decorative symbols corresponding to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions (A) is stored in the command storage area, that is, whether the fluctuation is a rescue time reduction occurrence fluctuation (step 069SGS276A). If it is a rescue time reduction occurrence fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), the shutter performance setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B). If it is not a rescue time reduction occurrence fluctuation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS277. In the shutter performance setting process, the period until the performance starts is set in the shutter performance start waiting timer, and the corresponding shutter performance starts when the performance start waiting timer expires.

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS283. If the variation pattern is not a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach announcement execution decision process is executed (step 069SGS278).

In the process of deciding whether to execute the reach notification, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining whether to execute the reach notification is extracted, and the decision of whether or not to execute the reach notification is made using the reach notification execution decision table shown in Figure 11-46(A).

In the reach notification execution decision table, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), different judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and "execute" for each of the game states: "normal state," "probability change state," "time-saving state A," and "time-saving state B," such that the number of judgment values shown in Figure 11-46(A) corresponds to the number of judgment values.

Specifically, when the game state is "Normal State," 50 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Executed." Similarly, when the game state is "Probability Variation State," 50 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Executed." Furthermore, when the game state is "Shortened Time State A," 60 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 40 judgment values are assigned to "Executed." Finally, when the game state is "Shortened Time State B," 80 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Executed."

Thus, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the probability of triggering the reach notification decreases in the following order: probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability of execution: probability variation state > time reduction state A > time reduction state B).

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration in which the reach notification can be executed with a 20% probability during time-saving state B, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notification may not be executed during time-saving state B.

Returning to Figure 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not the execution of the reach予告 (reach notification) was decided in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A). If it is determined that the execution of the reach notification was not decided (step 069SGS279A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS280. If it is determined that the execution of the reach notification was decided (step 069SGS279A; Yes), the corresponding performance control pattern (process table) for the reach notification is selected (step 069SGS279B), and then the button notification pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button notification pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the button notification pattern is extracted, and the button notification pattern is determined using button notification pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E).

In button notification pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-46(B) to (E), different judgment values are assigned to each pattern—"not executed," "single hit," "rapid press," and "long press"—for cases where the variable display result is "jackpot," "missed reach," or "not a missed reach," such that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-46(B) to (E) corresponds to the number of judgment values.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-46(B), in the button notification pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 40 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 20 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Furthermore, if the variable display result is "missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 15 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press." Furthermore, if the variable display result is "non-missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 5 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-46(C), in the button notification pattern determination table B used when the game state is "probability variation state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 40 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 20 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "long press." If the variable display result is "missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 15 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "long press." If the variable display result is "non-missed reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 5 judgment values are assigned to "single hit," 10 judgment values are assigned to "rapid press," and 15 judgment values are assigned to "long press."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-46(D), in the button notification pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Shortened Time State A," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 40 judgment values are assigned to "One-Shot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Rapid Press," and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Long Press." If the variable display result is "Reach Miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 10 judgment values are assigned to "One-Shot," 5 judgment values are assigned to "Rapid Press," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Long Press." If the variable display result is "Non-Reach Miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 5 judgment values are assigned to "One-Shot," 5 judgment values are assigned to "Rapid Press," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Long Press."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-46(E), in the button notification pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Shortened Time State B," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 90 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "One-Shot." If the variable display result is "Reach Miss," 95 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 5 judgment values are assigned to "One-Shot." Also, if the variable display result is "Miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0," 100 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed."

Thus, when comparing the button notification across the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of the button notification is set to decrease in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (execution rate: probability variation state > time reduction state A > time reduction state B).

In particular, in time-saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0", the variation pattern of non-reach or SP reach is determined. However, the execution rate of reach予告 (reach notification) is low, and even if a reach notification is executed, the button notification will not be executed.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration where, in time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss," a reach予告 (reach notification) is executed but the button notification is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notification may be executed at a lower rate than the execution rate when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss" in the probability variation state or time-saving state A.

Furthermore, while the example given illustrates a configuration where, in time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss," a button notification is executed 5% of the time during the reach notification. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the button notification may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss," regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Furthermore, while a "single-shot" pattern prompting the player to perform a single action may occur in the event of a big win or a near miss, the execution rate is extremely low. Additionally, "rapid-fire" or "long-press" operations, which prompt the player to perform actions over a predetermined valid period—that is, operations that are more cumbersome than the "single-shot" operation—are not encouraged.

Returning to Figure 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS279A that the execution of the reach予告 (reach notification) was not decided (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button notification pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the CPU 120 for performance control executes the character notification pattern determination process (step 069SGS280). In the character notification pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the character notification pattern is extracted, and the character notification pattern is determined using character notification pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D).

In the character prediction pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D), different judgment values are assigned to each pattern—"Not Executed," "Dialogue A (Reach?)," and "Dialogue B (Maybe a Reach!!)"—for cases where the variable display result is a "Big Win" or a "Miss," such that the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-47(A) to (D) corresponds to the number of judgment values.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-47(A), in the character notification pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue B." Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue B."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-47(B), in the character notification pattern determination table B used when the game state is "probability variation state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue B." If the variable display result is "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "dialogue B."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-47(C), in the character notification pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Shortened Time State A," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue A," and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue B." If the variable display result is "Miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue A," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue B."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-47(D), in the character notification pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Shortened Time State B," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 90 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue B." If the variable display result is "Miss," 95 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed" and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Dialogue A." Also, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "Miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed."

Thus, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the probability of character announcements being triggered decreases in the following order: probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (probability of triggering: probability variation state > time reduction state A > time reduction state B).

In particular, in Time-Saving State B, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss," the variable pattern for either a non-reach or SP reach is determined. However, character announcements will not be executed in any of the variable display patterns.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which, when the number of reserved memories is "0" in time-saving state B, the character予告 (character予告) is not executed when the variable display result is "miss." However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character予告 may be executed at a lower rate than the execution rate when the number of reserved memories is "0" in the probability variation state or time-saving state A and the variable display result is "miss."

Furthermore, while the example given illustrates a configuration where, in time-saving state B, if the number of reserved memories is not "0" and the variable display result is "miss," the character予告 (character予告) is executed with a 5% probability, the present invention is not limited to this. Regardless of the number of reserved memories, the character予告 may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss."

Returning to Figure 11-44, after executing the character予告 pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area is a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, i.e., a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS282. If the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), the movable body operation pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the movable body motion pattern is extracted, and the movable body motion pattern is determined using movable body motion pattern determination tables A to D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

In the movable body movement pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D), there is "Pattern A-1" for a big win where the movable body予告 (notification) is not performed and the movable body 32 is dropped in the movable body performance (decisive performance); "Pattern A-2" for a big win where the movable body予告 is a small vibration and the movable body performance drops the movable body 32; "Pattern A-3" for a big win where the movable body予告 is a large vibration and the movable body performance drops the movable body 32; and when the movable body予告 is not performed and the movable body performance of the decisive performance is... For each of the following patterns—"Pattern B-1" for a losing outcome where the moving body 32 does not fall, "Pattern B-2" for a losing outcome where the moving body notification is a small vibration and the moving body effect does not cause the moving body 32 to fall, and "Pattern B-3" for a losing outcome where the moving body notification is a large vibration and the moving body effect does not cause the moving body 32 to fall—different judgment values are assigned for "winning" and "losing" outcomes, respectively, as shown in the judgment values shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-48(A), in the movable body movement pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-48(B), in the movable body movement pattern determination table B used when the game state is "probability variation state," if the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-2," and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern A-3." If the variable display result is "miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1," 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-3."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-48(C), in the movable body movement pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Shortened Time State A," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2," and 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3." If the variable display result is "Miss," 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-2," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-3."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-48(D), in the movable body movement pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Shortened Time State B," if the variable display result is "Big Win," 90 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1," 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2," and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3." If the variable display result is "Miss," 100 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern B-1."

Thus, when comparing the movable body movement patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot across three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern A-2" and "Pattern A-3," where both the movable body notification and the movable body animation are performed, is higher in the probability variation state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1," where the movable body notification is not performed and only the movable body animation is performed, is higher in time-saving state B than in the probability variation state and time-saving state A.

Furthermore, when comparing the movable body movement patterns in the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of "Pattern B-2" and "Pattern B-3," where only the movable body notification is executed, is higher in the probability variation state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B (not executed).

In other words, in time-saving state B, the execution rate of the movable object notification is lower compared to the probability variation state and time-saving state A (execution rate of movable object notification: probability variation state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B).

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in time-saving state B, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1," in which the movable body予告 (notification) is not executed and only the movable body effect is executed, is 90%. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate may be 90% or less, as long as it is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in the probability variation state or time-saving state A. Furthermore, the execution rate when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined in time-saving state B may be 100%.

Returning to Figure 11-44, if step 069SGS281A determines that the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, i.e., a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the performance control CPU 120 executes the movable body予告 pattern determination process (step 069SGS282). In the movable body予告 pattern determination process, a random number (0-99) for determining the movable body予告 pattern is extracted, and the movable body予告 pattern is determined using movable body予告 pattern determination tables A-D corresponding to the game state, as shown in Figures 11-49(A)-(D).

In the movable body notification pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-49(A) to (D), different judgment values are assigned to each of the patterns: "Not Executed," "Small Vibration," and "Large Vibration," depending on whether the variable display result is a "Big Win" or a "Miss." These judgment values are assigned according to the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-49(A) to (D).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-49(A), in the movable body notification pattern determination table A used when the game state is "normal state," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration." Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-49(B), in the movable body notification pattern determination table B used when the game state is "probability variation state," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 10 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration." When the variable display result is "miss," 60 judgment values are assigned to "not executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "small vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "large vibration."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-49(C), in the movable body notification pattern determination table C used when the game state is "Shortened Time State A," when the variable display result is "Big Win," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 30 judgment values are assigned to "Small Vibration," and 60 judgment values are assigned to "Large Vibration." When the variable display result is "Miss," 70 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Small Vibration," and 10 judgment values are assigned to "Large Vibration."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 11-49(D), in the movable body notification pattern determination table D used when the game state is "Shortened Time State B," if the variable display result is "Big Win," only the super reach variation pattern is determined, and therefore no judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed," "Small Vibration," or "Large Vibration." Also, if the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "Miss," and a non-reach variation pattern is determined, 100 judgment values are assigned to "Not Executed."

Thus, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the execution rate of the movable body notification is set to decrease in the order of probability variation state, time reduction state A, and time reduction state B (execution rate: probability variation state > time reduction state A > time reduction state B).

In particular, in the case of time-saving state B, if a non-reach variation pattern is determined, the movable body notification will not be executed, even when the number of reserved memories is "0".

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which the movable body notification is not executed when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body notification may be executed at a lower rate than the execution rate when the number of reserved memories is "0" and the variable display result is "miss" in the probability variation state or time-saving state A.

Furthermore, while the example given illustrates a scenario where the movable body notification is not executed when the number of reserved items is not "0" and the variable display result is "miss" in time-saving state B, the present invention is not limited to this. The movable body notification may also be made executable when the number of reserved items is not "0" and the variable display result is "miss."

Furthermore, if any of the above-mentioned button notification pattern determination processes, character notification pattern determination processes, or movable body notification pattern determination processes determine the execution of a particular animation pattern, the respective notification start waiting timers will be set to indicate the period until the notification starts. The corresponding notification will then begin when the respective notification start waiting timers have expired.

Returning to Figure 11-44, if the variation pattern in step 069SGS277 was a shortened non-reach variation pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach pattern, if the movable body operation pattern determination process in step 069SGS281B was executed, or if the movable body予告 pattern determination process in step 069SGS282 was executed, then in step 069SGS283, the CPU 120 for performance control selects a performance control pattern (process table) corresponding to the variation pattern specification command. Then, the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

Furthermore, the process table contains display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the illumination of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, all arranged sequentially in chronological order and associated with each process data n (numbered from 1 to N).

Next, the CPU 120 for performance control executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L and 8R as performance components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, and operation unit control execution data 1) (step 069 SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a variation pattern on the image display device 5, a command is output to the display control unit 123. Also, to control the on/off operation of the various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, to enable sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the variable display of decorative symbols using a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one with the variation pattern specification command. However, the CPU 120 for performance control may also select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns corresponding to the variation pattern specification command.

Next, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern specification command (step 069SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 30ms. The performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every predetermined time. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal to the image display device 5 corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process ends.

(Visual effects processing during variable display)
Next, Figure 11-45 is a flowchart of the variable display performance processing (step S172) in the performance control process. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer (steps 069SGS301, 069SGS302, and 069SGS303). Also, if various performance start waiting timers are set (it has been decided to perform a preview performance, etc.) or if the preview performance execution flag is on (a preview performance is being executed) (step 069SGS304; Y), the performance control CPU 120 executes various performance processes (step 069SGS305). If both the performance start waiting timers and the preview performance execution flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without performing the performance process in step 069SGS305.

In step 069SGS306, the CPU 120 for performance control checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, it switches the process data (step 069SGS307). That is, it restarts the process timer by setting the next set process timer value in the process table to the process timer (step 069SGS308). It also changes the control state for the performance device (performance components) based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, it executes control of the performance device (performance components) according to the content of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the performance control CPU 120 creates image data for the next display screen of the left, center, and right decorative patterns (the screen to be displayed 30 ms after the previous decorative pattern display change) and writes it to a predetermined area of VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, variable display control of the decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal to the image display device 5 based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as the set background image and image data based on the display control execution data set in the process table. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative patterns in the variation of the decorative patterns are displayed in the image display device 5. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Furthermore, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the CPU 120 for performance control checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it determines whether the confirmation command reception flag, which indicates that a symbol confirmation command has been received, is in the ON state (step 069SGS314). If the confirmation command reception flag is not in the ON state (step 069SGS314; No), the process terminates.

If the variable display time timer has timed out in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the confirmation command reception flag is ON in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), then it is determined whether the right-side LED illumination start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS315). If the right-side LED illumination start command reception flag is ON (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-side LED 069SG031 is illuminated, and the right-side notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start the right-side notification (step 069SGS316). After that, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol win waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

Furthermore, if the flag for receiving the command to start lighting the right-side LED is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether the flag for receiving the command to end lighting the right-side LED is on (step 069SGS317). If the flag for receiving the command to end lighting the right-side LED is on (step 069SGS317; Yes), the lighting of the right-side LED 069SG031 is stopped, and the right-side notification image 069SG400 etc. are hidden to end the right-side notification (step 069SGS318), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated. Furthermore, if the flag for receiving the command to end lighting the right-side LED is not on (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process is terminated.

Although not shown in detail in the diagram, after executing the processes from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol win waiting process (step S173) after the symbol confirmation period, which is determined by the symbol confirmation specification command based on the confirmation command reception flag, has elapsed.

Furthermore, even if the variable display time timer has not expired, the system will switch to a control mode that stops the variation upon receiving a pattern confirmation command. Therefore, for example, even if a variation pattern specification command indicating a long variation time is received due to noise between circuit boards, the variable display of decorative patterns can be terminated at the end of the normal variable display time (when the variable display of special patterns ends).

Furthermore, the process table used for controlling the variable display of decorative patterns contains the process data for the variable display of the decorative patterns. In other words, the sum of the process timer settings for process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative patterns. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n expires in step 069 SGS306, there is no process data to switch (such as display control execution data or lamp control execution data), and the variable display control of the decorative patterns based on the process table terminates.

(Examples of various actions depending on the game state)
Next, we will explain various operation examples for the three game states: time-saving state B, probability variation state, and time-saving state A, based on Figure 11-50. Figure 11-50 is as follows: (A) shows an example of variation operation for each game state, (B) shows an example of performance operation for each game state, and (C) is a diagram to explain the characteristics of time-saving state B.

First, as shown in Figure 11-50(A), we will compare the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three game states: "Shortened Time State B," "Probability Change State," and "Shortened Time State A."

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in "Time-Saving State B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), there are "2" patterns, "Super-Saving Non-Reach" and "SP Reach D", when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3; in "Probability Variation State", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), there are a maximum of "4" patterns, "Saving Non-Reach A", "Non-Reach A", "SP Reach C", and "SP Reach D", when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3; and in "Time-Saving State A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), there are a maximum of "3" patterns, "Saving Non-Reach", "Non-Reach", and "SP Reach E", when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, 2) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 3), and also less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "Probability Change State" (for example, 4).

Furthermore, the number of possible losing patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and probability-changing state, or, if the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A or probability-changing state, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time for the losing variation patterns determined by the CPU 103, in "Time-Saving State B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 7.54 seconds {((7s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, and the average time of the variable display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5s × 97) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 2.205}. Here, assuming that when time-saving state B starts, the first variable display has a reserved memory count of 0, and the variable displays from 2 to 1100 times have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average time of variable display for the losing variable patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54 + (2.205 × 1099)) ÷ 1100 = 2.20985}.

In the "probability variation state," as shown in Figures 11-6(A) and (B), the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 8.2 seconds {((7s × 95) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, and the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3s × 85) + (7s × 10) + (40s × 2) + (25s × 3)) ÷ 100 = 4.8}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after the probability variation state begins has a reserved memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined in the probability variation state is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2 + (4.8 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 4.83}.

In "Time-Saving State A," as shown in Figures 11-7(A) and (B), the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 is approximately 9.15 seconds {((7s × 95) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, and the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3s × 90) + (7s × 5) + (50s × 5)) ÷ 100 = 5.55}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after the start of Time-Saving State A has a reserved memory count of 0, and the 2nd to 110th variable displays have a reserved memory count of 1 to 3, the average display time for the variable patterns for losing outcomes that can be determined in Time-Saving State A is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15 + (5.55 × 109)) ÷ 110 = 5.58}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "miss," the average variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, approximately 2.2 seconds) is less than the average variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, approximately 5.58 seconds), and also less than the average variable display time of the losing variation pattern determined in "Probability Change State" (for example, approximately 4.83 seconds).

Furthermore, in "Time-Saving State B," the average display time for the losing variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 (for example, approximately 7.54 seconds) is less than the average display time for the losing variation patterns determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, approximately 9.15 seconds), and also less than the average display time for the losing variation patterns determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, approximately 8.2 seconds).

Furthermore, in "Time-Saving State B," the average display time for the variable losing patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3 (for example, approximately 2.205 seconds) is less than the average display time for the variable losing patterns determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, approximately 5.55 seconds), and also less than the average display time for the variable losing patterns determined in "Probability-Boosting State" (for example, approximately 4.8 seconds).

According to items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there was a long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot state, the variable displays that were not determined to be controlled to a jackpot state had fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average duration of variable display time. This resulted in a faster rate of variable display processing compared to the probability variation state and time-saving state A, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the average duration of the variable display time for losing patterns increases in the order of time-saving state B, probability-changing state, and time-saving state A, or if the duration in time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A or probability-changing state, the above duration can be changed in various ways.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can select, in "Shortened Time State B", as shown in Figure 11-8(C), there is "1""SP Reach D" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, in "Probability Variation State", as shown in Figure 11-6(C), there is a maximum of "3" patterns, "SP Non-Via", "SP Reach C", and "SP Reach D", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, and in "Shortened Time State A", as shown in Figure 11-7(C), there is a maximum of "2" patterns, "SP Non-Via" and "SP Reach E", when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 1) is less than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 2), and also less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in "Probability Variation State" (for example, 3).

Furthermore, the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and probability variation state, or if the number of time-saving state B is less than at least one of time-saving state A or probability variation state, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time for the jackpot variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in "Time-Saving State B," as shown in Figure 11-8(C), the average time of the variable display time for the jackpot variation pattern that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 40 seconds.

In the "probability variation state," as shown in Figure 11-6(C), the average display time for the variable variation patterns for big wins that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds {((22s × 5) + (55s × 80) + (40s × 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}. Therefore, the average display time for the variable variation patterns for big wins that can be determined in the probability variation state is approximately 51.1 seconds.

In "Time-Saving State A," as shown in Figure 11-7(C), the average variable display time for the jackpot variation patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 62.8 seconds {((22s × 5) + (55s × 95)) ÷ 100 = 62.85}.

In other words, when the variable display result is "Big Win," the average variable display time of the big win variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, approximately 40 seconds) is less than the average variable display time of the big win variation pattern determined in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, approximately 62.8 seconds), and also less than the average variable display time of the big win variation pattern determined in "Probability Variation State" (for example, approximately 51.1 seconds).

According to items (A3) and (A4), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there was a long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot state, the variable displays that were decided to be controlled to a jackpot state have fewer types of variation patterns and a shorter average duration of variable display time. Therefore, the rate at which the variable displays are consumed is faster than in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the average duration of the variable display time for the jackpot variation pattern increases in the order of time-saving state B, probability variation state, and time-saving state A, or if the duration in time-saving state B is shorter than at least one of time-saving state A or probability variation state, the above duration can be changed in various ways.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination rate of non-reach failure variation patterns determined by the CPU 103, in "Time-saving state B", as shown in Figures 11-8 (A) and (B), it is 95% when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3; in "Probability variation state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), it is 80% when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3; and in "Time-saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), it is 70% when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3.

In other words, the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, 97%) is higher than the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 95%), and also higher than the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" in "Probability Change State" (for example, 95%).

According to item (A5), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time was not controlled to the jackpot game state, by setting the variable display mode to a reach mode in the variable display where control to the jackpot game state is not decided, unnecessary anticipation is reduced, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" is 97% in time-saving state B, and 95% in both the probability variation state and time-saving state A, with the percentage decreasing in the order of time-saving state B, probability variation state, and time-saving state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentages may decrease in the order of time-saving state B (e.g., 97%), probability variation state (e.g., 95%), and time-saving state A (e.g., 94%), or the percentages can be changed in various ways as long as the percentage for time-saving state B is higher than at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which the CPU 103 determines a "non-reach miss variation pattern" 97% of the time when the variable display result is "miss" in "Time-Saving State B". However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The CPU 103 may determine a "non-reach miss variation pattern" 100% of the time when the variable display result is "miss" in "Time-Saving State B," meaning that the reach variation pattern may not be determined when the variable display result is "miss" in "Time-Saving State B."

Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss," the loss variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in "Time-Saving State B" (e.g., "Non-Reach A") and the loss variation pattern that can be determined in "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Variation State" (e.g., "Non-Reach A") are common, thereby reducing development costs and program size.

Furthermore, when the variable display result is a "jackpot," the losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "Time-Saving State B" (e.g., "SP Reach D") and the losing variation patterns that can determine in "Probability Variation State" (e.g., "SP Reach D") are the same. This reduces development costs and program size.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50(B), we will compare the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three game states: "Shortened Time State B," "Probability Change State," and "Shortened Time State A."

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution rate of "movable body予告" and "character予告" as big win suggestion effects in the variable display of the losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0, in "Shortened Time State B", as shown in Figure 11-49(D), the execution rate of "movable body予告" is 0% (not executed), and as shown in Figure 11-47(D), the execution rate of "character予告" is 0% (not executed). In "Probability Variation State", as shown in Figure 11-49(B), the execution rate of "movable body予告" is 40%, and as shown in Figure 11-47(B), the execution rate of "character予告" is 30%. In "Shortened Time State A", as shown in Figure 11-49(C), the execution rate of "movable body予告" is 30%, and as shown in Figure 11-47(C), the execution rate of "character予告" is 20%.

In other words, when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State A," and when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Probability Variation State," suggestive effects such as "Movable Body Notification" and "Character Notification" are executed in the variable display. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State B," suggestive effects such as "Movable Body Notification" and "Character Notification" are not executed in the variable display.

According to item (B1), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to a jackpot game state, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided because the variable display of the variable patterns that can be determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach) is not unnecessarily teased by movable body or character announcements.

To explain in more detail, when the control of the probability variation state, time reduction state A, or time reduction state B is initiated, since the game was played with left-handed shooting in the normal state until then, it is possible that there is a reserve memory in the first reserve memory, but there is no reserve memory in the second reserve memory. In other words, when the probability variation state or time reduction state A is initiated upon the first win, or when the control of time reduction state B is initiated after 900 variable displays, in order to gain time to store reserve memories in the second reserve memory, the probability of determining a losing variation pattern when the number of reserve memories is 0 is that the losing variation pattern has a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach pattern (for example, a non-reach with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds). And when a losing variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach pattern is determined, suggestive effects such as "movable body予告" and "character予告" can be executed in that variable display.

However, when the control of Time-Saving State B is initiated, players are likely to have experienced various losing animations during the long period of play. Therefore, if "movable object animations" or "character animations" are also executed in Time-Saving State B, it would be annoying. For this reason, when the variable display is executed in the losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in Time-Saving State B, "movable object animations" and "character animations" are not executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State B," a form in which suggestive effects such as "movable body予告" and "character予告" are not executed in the variable display is illustrated. However, for example, when the variable display is executed in a losing variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State B," it is preferable that the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable body予告" and "character予告" in the variable display be lower than the execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable body予告" and "character予告" in "Probability Change State" and "Time-Saving State A."

Furthermore, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "movable object予告" and "character予告" are executed during the losing variation pattern determined by the losing variation pattern can be changed in various ways, provided that the execution rate of "movable object予告" and "character予告" in time-saving state B is lower than the execution rate of "movable object予告" and "character予告" in at least one of time-saving state A or probability variation state.

Furthermore, in time-saving state B, if the spin pattern is a losing pattern, the "movable object予告" and "character予告" may not be executed, but if the spin pattern is a winning pattern, the "movable object予告" and "character予告" may be executed. This approach enhances the excitement of the game by drawing attention to whether or not suggestive effects such as the "movable object予告" and "character予告" are executed in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, suggestive effects indicating that the game is being controlled to a jackpot state may include "reach announcements" and "button announcements" as anticipatory effects that build excitement about whether or not the variable display mode will be a reach mode (whether or not a reach will be established). By doing so, in the time-saving state B, attention can be drawn to whether or not the "reach announcement" or "button announcement" is executed, thereby increasing the excitement.

Furthermore, based on the variable display results, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestive effects, including a first suggestive effect (e.g., dialogue A or small vibration) and a second suggestive effect (e.g., dialogue B or large vibration) that has a higher probability of controlling the game to a jackpot state than when the first suggestive effect is executed. This allows for increased interest in the game during the shortened time state B by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed.

<Item B2>
When the variable display result is a miss, the number of types of pre-announcement notifications that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine is as follows: In "Shortened Time State B," as shown in Figure 11-42(D), none are determined, so it is "0"; in "Probability Change State," as shown in Figure 11-42(B), it is "4" types: "Countdown Notification,""Reserve Change Notification,""Symbol Chance Notification," and "Effect Display Notification"; and in "Shortened Time State A," as shown in Figure 11-42(C), it is "3" types: "Reserve Change Notification,""Symbol Chance Notification," and "Effect Display Notification."

In other words, in "Time-Saving State B," the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 0) is less than the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 3), and also less than the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 4).

In this embodiment, an example was given in which the number of pre-announcement types that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is zero. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the number of pre-announcement types that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is less than the number of pre-announcement types that the performance control CPU 120 can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Change State," then one or more types of pre-announcement may be executed.

Furthermore, the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" can be changed in various ways, provided that the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Change State" is less than the number of pre-announcement types that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine when the variable display result is a miss.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of "pre-announcement" when the variable display result is a miss, in "Time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D), none of them are executed, so it is "0%", in "Probability change state", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of "countdown announcement", "hold change announcement", "symbol chance announcement", and "effect display announcement" is "40%", and in "Time-saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-42 (C), the total execution rate of "hold change announcement", "symbol chance announcement", and "effect display announcement" is "30%".

In other words, the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" (e.g., 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State A" (e.g., 30%), and also lower than the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Change State" (e.g., 40%).

According to items (B2) and (B3), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there was a long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot state, the variable display in which control to a jackpot state is not decided allows for a smaller number of possible pre-announcement effects, thereby reducing development costs and minimizing unnecessary anticipation from the pre-announcement effects, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the example given is one in which the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is 0%, i.e., the pre-announcement is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Change State," the pre-announcement may be made executable.

Furthermore, if the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is lower than the execution rate of the pre-announcement when the variable display result is a miss in at least one of "Time-Saving State A" or "Probability Change State," then the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, as pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 for performance control can execute in common in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, there is a first pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "blue" pattern of "hold change announcement," "symbol chance announcement," and "effect display announcement"), and a second pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "red" pattern of "hold change announcement," "symbol chance announcement," and "effect display announcement") which has a higher rate of control to the advantageous state than when the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed. Since the rate in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 0%, see Figure 11-43(D)) is lower than the rate in which the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state A and probability variation state (for example, 10%, see Figure 11-43(C)), the player is less likely to be unnecessarily stimulated by the first pre-announcement animation in time-saving state B, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 for performance control can commonly execute in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, there is a first pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "blue" pattern of "hold change announcement," "symbol chance announcement," and "effect display announcement"), and a second pre-announcement animation pattern (for example, the "red" pattern of "hold change announcement," "symbol chance announcement," and "effect display announcement") which has a higher rate of control to the advantageous state than when the first pre-announcement animation pattern is executed. Since the rate in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 90%, see Figure 11-43(D)) is higher than the rate in which the second pre-announcement animation pattern is executed in time-saving state A and probability variation state (for example, 50-70%, see Figure 11-43(C)), the second pre-announcement animation is more likely to be executed in time-saving state B, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, by having the same pre-announcement animation patterns (for example, "symbol chance animation") that the CPU 120 can execute in both the time-saving state A and the probability variation state, and the same pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 can execute in the time-saving state B, development costs and program size can be reduced by not having to set pre-announcement animation patterns that can only be determined in the time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine in time-saving state B, and the same pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine in at least one of time-saving state A and probability-changing state, are common (for example, "symbol chance announcement"). By not setting pre-announcement animation patterns that can only be determined in time-saving state B, development costs and program size can be reduced.

Furthermore, the pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 for performance control can determine in time-saving state B, and the same pre-announcement animation patterns that the CPU 120 can determine in both time-saving state A and probability variation state are common (for example, "symbol chance announcement"). By not setting pre-announcement animation patterns that can only be determined in time-saving state B, development costs and program size can be reduced.

<Item B4>
Regarding the execution rate of "button announcements" as action-promoting effects that encourage player action, in "Shortened Time State B," as shown in Figure 11-46(E), it is "10%" in the case of a jackpot and "5%" in the case of a miss; in "Probability Variation State," as shown in Figure 11-46(C), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "30%" in the case of a missed reach; and in "Shortened Time State A," as shown in Figure 11-46(D), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot and "20%" in the case of a miss. Note that these execution rates are the percentages in which "reach announcements" are executed.

In other words, the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot and 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 80% for a jackpot and 30% for a miss).

According to item (B4), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time was not controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of times the button notification, which is an action-promoting effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B, is executed in the variable display is small, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is exemplified as being lower than the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability-Boosting State." However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, button prompts may not be executed at all in "Time-Saving State B" (execution rate of 0%).

Furthermore, if the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is lower than the execution rate of button prompts per variable display in "Time-Saving State A" or "Probability-Boosting State," the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button notification, regarding the execution rate of the "single-shot pattern" as a first action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform a single action, and the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern" as a second action-promoting effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined period of time, in "Shortened Time State B," as shown in Figure 11-46 (E), the execution rate of the "single-shot pattern" is "10%" in the case of a big win and "5%" in the case of a missed reach, while in the case of the "rapid-fire pattern, long-press pattern," it is "0% (not executed)" in the case of a big win or a missed reach.

In the "probability variation state," as shown in Figure 11-46(C), the execution rate of the "one-shot pattern" is 40% for big wins and an average of 10% for losses. For the "rapid-fire pattern" and "long-press pattern," the execution rate is 40% for big wins and an average of 20% for losses.

In "Time-Saving State A," as shown in Figure 11-46(D), the execution rate of the "One-Shot Pattern" is 40% for big wins and an average of 7.5% for losses. For the "Rapid-Fire Pattern" and "Long-Press Pattern," the execution rate is 40% for big wins and an average of 17.5% for losses.

In other words, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can decide whether to execute the "single-shot pattern" or the "rapid-fire/long-press pattern" in the "probability variation state" and "time-saving state A," while in "time-saving state B," it can decide to execute the "single-shot pattern," but does not decide whether to execute the "rapid-fire/long-press pattern."

Furthermore, the execution rate of "rapid-fire patterns" and "long-press patterns" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, 0% for a jackpot or a miss) is lower than the execution rate of "rapid-fire patterns" and "long-press patterns" per variable display in "Probability-Boosting State" (for example, 40% for a jackpot and 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of "rapid-fire patterns" and "long-press patterns" per variable display in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 40% for a jackpot and 17.5% for a miss).

According to item (B5), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, the need to prompt the player to perform cumbersome operations such as "rapid pressing patterns" and "long-press patterns" that require the player to continuously operate the push button 31B throughout the operation validity period is reduced, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is shown as being able to determine the "one-shot pattern" in "time-saving state B" but not to determine the execution of the "rapid-fire pattern" or "long-press pattern." However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the determination rate of the "one-shot pattern" in "time-saving state B" is lower than the determination rate of the "one-shot pattern" in at least one of "time-saving state A" and "probability change state," the "one-shot pattern" may be made executable.

Furthermore, in time-saving state B, the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes a "button notification" when the variable display result is a jackpot (for example, 10%) is higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes a "button notification" when the variable display result is a miss (for example, 5%). This allows the player to focus on the execution of the "button notification" in time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the overall enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the "button notification" animation patterns include a "single-shot" pattern and "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns, which have a higher probability of controlling the game into a jackpot state than the "single-shot" pattern. While the percentage of times the "single-shot" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (e.g., 10%) is lower than the percentage of times the "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns are executed in time-saving state A or the probability variation state (e.g., 40%), the percentage of times the "single-shot" pattern is executed in time-saving state B may be higher than the percentage of times the "rapid-fire" or "long-press" patterns are executed in time-saving state A or the probability variation state. By doing this, the "single-shot" pattern is more likely to occur when an action-promoting animation is executed in time-saving state B, thus enhancing the overall enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the period during which the "button notification" is executed in Time-Saving State A and Probability-Boosting State is the same as the period during which the "button notification" is executed in Time-Saving State B (for example, the period during which the "reach notification" is executed). By unifying the execution period of the "button notification" across Time-Saving State A, Probability-Boosting State, and Time-Saving State B, development costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, when the CPU 120 for controlling the performance enables the execution of a preparatory performance to accelerate operation (for example, a performance where the push button 31B to be operated is faded in or an effect is displayed before the operation validity period begins, although not specifically shown in the figures), it is preferable that the period during which the preparatory performance to accelerate operation is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state is the same as the period during which the preparatory performance to accelerate operation is executed in the time-saving state B. This reduces development costs and allows for effective notification that the "button announcement" is about to be executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "movable body notification," which is an indicative effect that suggests the game is controlled to a jackpot state, in "Shortened Time State B," as shown in Figure 11-49(D), it is 0% (not executed) in the case of a jackpot or a miss; in "Probability Variation State," as shown in Figure 11-49(B), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 40% in the case of a miss; and in "Shortened Time State A," as shown in Figure 11-49(C), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a miss.

In other words, the execution rate of "movable object notification" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 0% for a jackpot, 0% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of "movable object notification" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 90% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of "movable object notification" per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 90% for a jackpot, 40% for a miss).

According to item (B6), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the number of executions of the movable body予告 (notification) that suggests control to the jackpot game state is reduced, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration where the execution rate of "movable body notification" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is 0%, the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of "movable body notification" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is lower than the execution rate of "movable body notification" per variable display in at least one of "Time-Saving State A" and "Probability Change State," then "movable body notification" may be made executable in "Time-Saving State B."

Furthermore, the percentage of times the "movable body予告" (movable body notification) is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (e.g., 0%) is lower than the percentage of times the "movable body notification" is executed in time-saving state A or probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (e.g., 90%). However, the percentage of times the "movable body notification" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage of times the "movable body notification" is executed in time-saving state A or probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot. By doing this, the level of attention given to the "movable body notification" differs between time-saving state A, probability variation state, and time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the overall enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the percentage of times the "small vibration" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot (e.g., 0%) is lower than the percentage of times the "small vibration" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (e.g., 30%). However, the percentage of times the "small vibration" pattern is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot may be higher than the percentage of times the "small vibration" pattern is executed in time-saving state A or probability variation state when the variable display result is a jackpot (e.g., 30%). By doing this, the level of attention given to the "movable body notification" differs between time-saving state A, probability variation state, and time-saving state B, thereby enhancing the overall enjoyment.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "character予告" (character予告), which is a teasing effect that encourages whether or not to make the variable display a reach, in "Shortened Time State B", as shown in Figure 11-47(D), it is 10% in the case of a big win and 5% in the case of a loss; in "Probability Change State", as shown in Figure 11-47(B), it is 80% in the case of a big win and 30% in the case of a loss; and in "Shortened Time State A", as shown in Figure 11-47(C), it is 80% in the case of a big win and 20% in the case of a loss.

In other words, the execution rate of "character announcements" per variable display in "Shortened Time State B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is lower than the execution rate of "character announcements" per variable display in "Shortened Time State A" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss), and also lower than the execution rate of "character announcements" per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss).

Furthermore, regarding the execution rate per variable display of the "reach予告" (reach notification), which is a teasing effect designed to entice the player to decide whether or not to use a variable display as a reach, as shown in Figure 11-46(A), it is 20% in "Shortened Time State B," 50% in "Probability Change State," and 40% in "Shortened Time State A."

In other words, the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, 20%) is lower than the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 40%), and also lower than the execution rate of "reach announcements" per variable display in "Probability Fluctuation State" (for example, 50%).

According to item (B7), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that the period of time not controlled to a jackpot game state is long, the number of executions of reach announcements and button announcements that build anticipation about whether or not a reach will occur is reduced, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of "character previews" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is exemplified as being lower than the execution rate of "Time-Saving State A" and "Movable Item Previews." However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "character previews" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" may be set to 0%, i.e., not executed. Furthermore, as long as the execution rate of "character previews" per variable display in "Time-Saving State B" is lower than the execution rate of "Time-Saving State A" and "Movable Item Previews," the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

<Item B8>
In a variable display, the CPU 120 for performance control has two movable body operation patterns that can be executed: "Patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first performance execution patterns)" which execute both "movable body announcements" and "movable body performances," and "Pattern A-1 (second performance execution pattern)" which executes only the "movable body performance" without executing the "movable body announcement." When the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" is 90% in "Shortened Time State B" as shown in Figure 11-48(D), 20% in "Probability Change State" as shown in Figure 11-48(B), and 10% in "Shortened Time State A" as shown in Figure 11-48(C).

In other words, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" (for example, 90%) is higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State A" (for example, 10%), and also higher than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Change State" (for example, 20%).

According to item (B8), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to the jackpot game state, if it is decided to control to the jackpot game state, the movable body 32 is less likely to be moved unnecessarily in the movable body予告 (notification) before the movable body effect, in which the jackpot is announced by the dropping of the movable body 32, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" is shown to be lower than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State A" or "Probability Change State." However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Time-Saving State B" may be set to 0%, i.e., not executed at all.

Furthermore, the percentage of times "Patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (First Performance Execution Pattern)" are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A or probability variation state (for example, 80-90%) is higher than the percentage of times "Patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (First Performance Execution Pattern)" are executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B (for example, 10%). Therefore, in time-saving state A and probability variation state, the focus on whether or not the movable body 32 operates can be drawn to enhance the entertainment value.

Furthermore, the frequency of "movable body effects" in time-saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the frequency of "movable body effects" in time-saving state A and probability variation state (for example, 80-90%). Therefore, the movable body 32 is less likely to be operated unnecessarily in time-saving state B, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

<Item B9>
The presentation style of the "post-event presentation," which notifies the number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state when the CPU 120 for performance control is controlled to a jackpot game state in an SP reach presentation, is the same for "Shortened Time State B,""Probability Change State," and "Shortened Time State A," as shown in Figure 11-60.

According to item (B9), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there was a long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot state, the variable displays that were decided to control the game to a jackpot state have fewer types of variable display patterns and a shorter average display time, thereby increasing the rate at which the variable displays are consumed. Furthermore, after the game is notified that it has been controlled to a jackpot state, it is possible to create excitement with the same effects as in time-saving state A and the probability variation state, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the "movable body animation" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state A or probability variation state, and the "movable body animation" executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time-saving state B, are the same (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), which reduces development costs.

Furthermore, the control data used to control the movable LED 208 that illuminates in conjunction with the "post-event effects" in time-saving state A and probability-changing state is the same as the control data used to control the movable LED 208 that illuminates in conjunction with the "post-event effects" in time-saving state B (for example, the illumination control data executed based on the extended command D300), which reduces development costs.

Furthermore, the vibration patterns executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event effects" in time-saving state A and probability-changing state, and the vibration patterns executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post-event effects" in time-saving state B, are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), thereby reducing development costs.

<Item B10>
The CPU 120 for performance control, when the time-saving control is started, displays an entry image 069SG470 (for example, the words "BATTLE RUSH START!!") as a special state start indicator to notify the start of the time-saving control. In the "entry effect" as a special state start effect, when the control of the probability variation state is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the probability variation entry effect. When the control of time-saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect B, and special indicators for playtime, 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, the words "Play 1100"), which are not displayed when the control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A is started, are also displayed (see Figures 11-63 (D), 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to item (B10), in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there is a long period during which the game is not controlled to a jackpot state, the entry animation displays not only the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the probability variation state begins, but also special images for the playtime, 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are not displayed when the control of the probability variation state begins. This enhances the excitement of the start of time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may be capable of determining a special variation pattern with a variable display time that allows for the execution of the "entry animation" during the rescue time reduction variation. This allows for the effective execution of the "entry animation."

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50(C), the differences between "Time-Saving State B," "Probability Change State," and "Time-Saving State A" will be explained.

<Item C1>
As explained in items A1 to A5 shown in Figure 11-50(A), the number of losing and winning variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine is smallest in time-saving state B. Also, the average time of variable display for losing and winning variation patterns is shortest in time-saving state B, and the determination rate of non-reach losses is highest in time-saving state B. Therefore, the average consumption time per variable display in each of the time-saving control states, "time-saving state B,""probability variation state," and "time-saving state A," is fastest in time-saving state B, medium speed in probability variation state, and slow speed in time-saving state A.

Thus, while the shortened time control results in higher fluctuation efficiency than the normal state, among the shortened time state B, the probability variation state, and the shortened time state A, the probability variation state and shortened time state A are controlled via a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, whereas the shortened time state B is controlled via the execution of a predetermined number of variable displays (for example, 900 times) without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state.

Furthermore, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, the variable number of times the time-saving control is executed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in time-saving state B, the variable number of times the time-saving control is executed is the second number, which is greater than the first number (for example, 1100 times).

In other words, in the case of a probability variation state or a time-saving state A, the player can enjoy the reach and various effects while waiting for the next big win, while keeping their investment lower than in the normal state. In contrast, in time-saving state B, there are no big wins, and the game is controlled after a long period of play in a disadvantageous state for the player. Furthermore, considering that the number of variable time-saving control displays is higher than in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, by increasing the efficiency of the fluctuations as described above, it is possible to reduce the number of wasted shots and lower investment, while prioritizing efficiently processing the losing variable displays and hitting a big win in a short period of time over enjoying the effects. This is characterized by suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play.

<Item C2>
Furthermore, as explained in items B1 to B10 shown in Figure 11-50(B), the execution rate of the various pre-announcement effects mentioned above is lowest in time-saving state B, highest in probability-changing state, and medium in time-saving state A.

In other words, during the long period of gameplay before the game enters the shortened time state B, the player is likely to become quite discouraged due to the repeated execution of various pre-announcement effects that result in losses. Therefore, by lowering the execution rate of pre-announcement effects in shortened time state B compared to other game states, the decline in the player's motivation to play due to losing effects can be effectively prevented.

<Item C3>
Thus, compared to other probability variation states and time-saving state A where time-saving control is performed in a similar manner, time-saving state B is characterized by higher fluctuation efficiency and fewer opportunities to be teased by pre-announcement effects, thereby suppressing additional investment and a decline in the desire to play, while allowing players to suitably consume the variable display and wait for a big win.

More specifically, while the average normal reel spin time (the period during which the normal reel spins), the probability of a "normal reel win" in the normal reel game, and the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting entry point (high opening control, high base control) are the same as other probability variation states and time-saving state A, the average special reel spin time (the period during which the special reel spins) is shorter than in other probability variation states and time-saving state A, thereby increasing spin efficiency while reducing the frequency of various effects. Thus, time-saving state prioritizes spin efficiency over visual effects.

Furthermore, by ensuring that the loss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and the loss variable display patterns that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) are common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting variable display patterns that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, by making the loss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) and the loss variable display patterns that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., non-reach, SP reach D) common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting variable display patterns that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled in time-saving state B be shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled in the probability variation state, and that the average duration of the control period controlled in the probability variation state be shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled in time-saving state A. In this way, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided by increasing the rate of variable display consumption due to the shorter average duration of the control period in time-saving state B compared to the probability variation state, while the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by increasing the average duration of the control period in time-saving state A.

Furthermore, the number of losing variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 2) is less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 3), and the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 3) is less than the number of losing variation patterns that can be determined in probability-increasing state (e.g., 4). Therefore, in time-saving state B, the number of determinable losing variation patterns is reduced to prioritize the processing of the variable display, while in probability-increasing state, the number of determinable losing variation patterns is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by making the jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., SP reach D) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., probability variation state) (e.g., SP reach D) common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a variable display pattern that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, by making the jackpot variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., without going through SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., without going through SP) common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the average duration of the control period controlled in time-saving state B be shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled in the probability variation state, and that the average duration of the control period controlled in the probability variation state be shorter than the average duration of the control period controlled in time-saving state A. In this way, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided by increasing the rate of variable display consumption due to the shorter average duration of the control period in time-saving state B compared to the probability variation state, while the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced by increasing the average duration of the control period in time-saving state A.

Furthermore, the number of jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., 1) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2), and the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 2) is less than the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in probability variation state (e.g., 3). Therefore, in time-saving state B, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined is reduced to prioritize the processing of the variable display, while in probability variation state, the number of jackpot variation patterns that can be determined is increased to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, by having the non-reach miss variation patterns (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B and the non-reach miss variation patterns (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability-changing state be common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a non-reach miss that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, since the non-reach miss variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., non-reach) and the non-reach miss variation patterns that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability-changing state (e.g., non-reach) are common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a non-reach miss that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, since the non-reach jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., without going through SP) and the non-reach jackpot variation patterns that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., without going through SP) are common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, since the non-reach jackpot variation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (e.g., without going through SP) and the non-reach miss variation patterns that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variation state (e.g., without going through SP) are common, development costs and program size can be reduced by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can only be determined in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while an example was given where the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in time-saving state B is lower than in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, for example, when the remaining variable display count until the time-saving state B is controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state) falls below a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 50 remaining), the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute may be set to be lower than the execution rate of various effects that the performance control CPU 120 can execute in the normal state. In this case, the execution rate of effect 1 may be lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but lower than the execution rate in time-saving state B (execution rate of effect 1: normal state (remaining count 101 or more) > normal state (remaining count 100 or less) > time-saving state B).

Furthermore, when the remaining number of variable displays until the machine is controlled to time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) in the normal state (low probability/low base state) falls below a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 50 remaining), the contents of items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may change to correspond to time-saving state B. This reduces the inconvenience experienced before the machine is controlled to time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if the remaining number of variable displays until the game is controlled to reach the time-saving state B (rescue time-saving variation) falls below a specific number (for example, 50 or 10 remaining), the probability of executing a low-expectation演出 (for example, SP reach演出 A or a weak pattern予告演出) when the variable display result is a jackpot may be increased.

(Variable display mode of the design)
Next, the variable display modes of the decorative and small symbols will be explained based on Figures 11-51 to 11-55. Figure 11-51 is a timing chart showing the variable display modes of the symbols in (A) the losing shortened non-reach variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, and (B) the losing shortened non-reach variation pattern in time-saving state B. Figure 11-52 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach losing variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A. Figure 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach losing variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A. Figure 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach losing variation pattern in time-saving state B. Figure 11-55 is an example of the performance operation of SP Reach E and SP Reach D.

In this embodiment, each decorative symbol variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R consists of a number display section 069SG051 consisting of the numbers "1" to "9", and a base display section 069SG052 displayed on a lower display layer (back side) than the number display section 069SG051. Meanwhile, the left small symbol, medium small symbol, and right small symbol displayed in the upper left display area 5SL of the image display device 5 each consist only of the numbers "1" to "9", displayed smaller than the decorative symbols. The decorative symbols and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols.

The variable display patterns of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R (for example, non-reach type losing patterns) differ depending on whether the state is normal, probability variation state/time-saving state A, or time-saving state B. Below, the variable display patterns of decorative symbols based on non-reach type losing patterns (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state and probability variation state/time-saving state A will be explained based on the timing chart in Figure 11-51(A), referring to Figures 11-52 and 11-53. Note that the variable display patterns of non-reach type losing decorative symbols are common in the normal state and probability variation state/time-saving state A; therefore, Figure 11-52 will explain the shortened non-reach losing variable display pattern in the probability variation state as an example.

As shown in Figure 11-51(A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display for shortened non-reach misses in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see Figure 11-52(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display of each decorative symbol is the same. Furthermore, each decorative symbol starts its variable display at "low speed," then at timing ta2, after a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes "medium speed," and after another predetermined time has elapsed, at timing ta3, it becomes the maximum speed, "high speed," and after that, it is displayed at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed at the maximum speed, "high speed," from the start timing ta1 of the variable display. Note that the maximum speed of "high speed" for the decorative symbols and the maximum speed of "high speed" for the small symbols may be the same or different.

Next, as the variable display nears its end, the variable display speed of the decorative symbols changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the center decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, at the timing ta4 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figure 11-52(B)). Next, after a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed in which the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see Figure 11-52(C)), the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L at the moment it returns to its original size (see Figure 11-52(D)).

Next, at the timing ta5 when the predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figure 11-52(E)). Then, after a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed where the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size (see Figure 11-52(F)), the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R at the moment it returns to its original size (see Figure 11-52(G)).

Next, at the timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figure 11-53(H)). Then, after a specific operation display (stop display action) is performed where the base display unit 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size (see Figure 11-53(I)), the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C at the timing ta6 when it returns to its original size (see Figure 11-53(J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a temporary stop display mode (e.g., a swaying mode) from the time they are temporarily displayed until they are stopped based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command.

Then, at timing ta7 (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is received), a predetermined time has elapsed since the timing ta6 when the decorative symbol was temporarily displayed in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. At this timing, the left, middle, and right sub-symbols are simultaneously displayed (see Figure 11-53(K)). In this way, the three sub-symbols are simultaneously displayed without any specific action being performed. Also, at timing ta7 when the sub-symbols are displayed, the three decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously displayed.

Then, at timing ta8, after the symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing ta7 when the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the next variable display becomes available.

Next, the variable display patterns of the non-reach type losing decorative symbols in time-saving state B will be explained based on the timing chart in Figure 11-51(B), with reference to Figure 11-54. Since the variable display patterns of the non-reach type losing decorative symbols in time-saving state B are common, Figure 11-54 will explain the variable display patterns of the shortened non-reach losing symbols in time-saving state B as an example.

As shown in Figure 11-51(B), in the time-saving state B, at the start timing tb1 of the variable display for the ultra-shortened non-reach miss, the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5R starts simultaneously (all at once) (see Figure 11-54(A)). In other words, the start order of the variable display for each decorative symbol is the same. Furthermore, each decorative symbol starts its variable display at "medium speed," and after a predetermined time has elapsed, at timing tb2, it reaches its maximum speed, "high speed," and then displays variably at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small symbols are displayed variably at their maximum speed, "high speed," from the start timing tb1. Note that the maximum speed of the decorative symbols ("high speed") and the maximum speed of the small symbols ("high speed") may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C simultaneously (all at once) becomes "medium speed," and at the timing tb3 when the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are simultaneously (all at once) temporarily stopped and displayed, a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R (see Figure 11-54(B)). Note that the variable display speed of the decorative symbols may also go from "high speed" to "low speed" without passing through "medium speed." Next, the base display unit 069SG052 is not enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size in a specific operation display (stop display action). At the timing tb4 (the timing when the symbol confirmation command is received), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the timing tb3 when each decorative symbol was temporarily stopped and displayed, the left, middle, and right small symbols are simultaneously (all at once) stopped and displayed (see Figure 11-54(C)). In this way, the three small symbols are displayed simultaneously without any specific action being indicated. Furthermore, at the timing tb4 when the small symbols are displayed simultaneously, the three decorative symbols that were temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are also displayed simultaneously.

Then, at timing tb5, after the symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from the timing tb4 when the small symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration and deceleration is common to time-saving state B, the probability variation state, and time-saving state A. However, the period in time-saving state B may be shorter than in the probability variation state and time-saving state A. Also, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in time-saving state B than in the probability variation state and time-saving state A. However, this period may be common to time-saving state B, the probability variation state, and time-saving state A.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the stopping display pattern of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is exemplified as being common to the time-saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time-saving state A (the left, center, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a horizontally aligned manner). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a horizontally aligned manner, while in time-saving state B, the left, center, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in different positions in the vertical direction. Thus, the stopping display pattern of the decorative symbols in time-saving state B may differ from that in the probability variation state and time-saving state A.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols, which are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, is exemplified as being common (variable display in the vertical direction) in the time-saving state B, the probability variation state, and the time-saving state A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the probability variation state and the time-saving state A, the symbols may be variably displayed in the vertical direction, while in the time-saving state B, they may be variably displayed in the horizontal direction. Alternatively, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may be reduced and displayed in the display area 5SR, etc., and special effects by ally characters, enemy characters, etc., may be continuously displayed on the display screen. In such cases, the variable display mode in the time-saving state B may differ from the variable display mode in the probability variation state and the time-saving state A.

Thus, the starting order of the variable display of decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same whether it is a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, or in the non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B. However, the time it takes for the decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach maximum speed is shorter in time-saving state B than in probability variation state and time-saving state A (tb1-tb2 < ta1-ta3). Therefore, it is possible to create different impressions for each state and enhance the enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, the stopping order of the variable display of decorative symbols is as follows: in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, if the variation pattern is not a reach, the symbols stop in the order of left → right → middle; and in time-saving state B, if the variation pattern is not a reach, the left, middle, and right symbols stop simultaneously. Therefore, different impressions can be given depending on the state, enhancing the enjoyment.

Furthermore, the stopping order of the variable display of decorative symbols in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is the same whether it is a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state, time reduction state A, or time reduction state B. However, the time between the stopping and display of one decorative symbol in one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, or 5C and the stopping and display of the next decorative symbol may differ depending on whether it is a non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state, time reduction state A, or time reduction state B. Therefore, different impressions can be given for each state, enhancing the enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the variable display of 1, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output is 3 times in the non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, because the left, middle, and right symbols stop at different timings. In the non-reach failure variation pattern in time reduction state B, the sound is output once because the left, middle, and right symbols stop at the same timing. Therefore, it is possible to create different impressions for each state and enhance the enjoyment.

Furthermore, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 may be the same for both the non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, and the non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to create different impressions for each state and enhance the enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stopping action) is performed when the spin pattern is a non-reach failure, whereas in time-saving state B, the specific action display (symbol stopping action) is not performed when the spin pattern is a non-reach failure. Therefore, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, the specific action display enhances the visual effect, while in time-saving state B, the absence of the specific action display allows for smoother variable display.

Furthermore, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is common to both the non-reach failure variation pattern in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, and the non-reach failure variation pattern in time-saving state B. This enhances the visual effect of the specific action display while simultaneously reducing development costs by standardizing the specific action display between the probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the time between the display of the decorative symbols and the display of the smaller symbols is shorter in the non-reach-miss variation pattern in time-saving state B than in the probability variation state and time-saving state A when the non-reach-miss variation pattern occurs {t1 (ta6-ta7) > t2 (tb3-tb4)}. Therefore, smooth variable display can be achieved in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the symbol confirmation period (ta7-ta8), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol stops displaying in variable display 1 until the variable display of the decorative symbol begins in the next variable display, in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, and the symbol confirmation period (tb4-tb5), which is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol stops displaying in variable display 1 until the variable display of the decorative symbol begins in the next variable display, in time reduction state B are common. Therefore, by standardizing the control that takes into account the drawing process until the decorative symbol is completely stopped displaying, development costs can be reduced.

Furthermore, while the specific action display for each decorative design is exemplified as an action display that enlarges to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, the present invention is not limited to this, and the action mode is not limited to the above and can be changed in various ways. Also, in the specific action display, only the base display unit 069SG052 performs the specific action display, and the number display unit 069SG051 does not. This ensures the visibility of the identification information while enhancing the visual effect through the specific action display. However, both the base display unit 069SG052 and the number display unit 069SG051 may also perform the specific action display. Additionally, the specific action mode may differ depending on the decorative design with different numbers.

Furthermore, while the above examples illustrate a configuration where the variable display mode is common to both the shortened non-reach-miss variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach-miss variation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display mode may differ between the shortened non-reach-miss variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach-miss variation pattern.

Furthermore, regarding the decorative patterns in time-saving state B, the display position may be made different between the start and stop of the variable display. This allows the variable display to be displayed effectively even during a short variable display period.

Furthermore, as in this embodiment, instead of accelerating the variable display speed of the decorative pattern until it reaches its maximum speed, the decorative pattern may be changed to a form that is difficult to see (for example, a dark form) during variable display, and then changed back to a normal form when the decorative pattern stops, thereby achieving a variable display with a sense of speed.

Next, the reach-specific action display and the jackpot-specific action display will be explained based on Figure 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the SP Reach E jackpot variation pattern, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55(A)), the decorative symbol is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 11-55(B)), the decorative symbol is displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R at a reduced speed, and the reach announcement and button announcement are executed (see Figure 11-55(C)). If the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, the base display part 069SG052 of the temporarily stopped decorative symbol displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L and the right decorative symbol display area 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returns to its original size, and a reach-specific operation display is performed (see Figure 11-55(D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see Figure 11-55(E)).

Next, although not specifically illustrated, if a jackpot is announced after an SP reach animation, the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see Figure 11-55(F)). Afterward, the base display section 069SG052 of the temporarily displayed decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size, after which a jackpot-specific operation display is performed (see Figure 11-55(G)), and finally the winning decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 11-55(H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the jackpot variation pattern for SP Reach D, the variable display begins (see Figure 11-55(I)), and without displaying the reach pattern, predetermined jackpot combinations of confirmed decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see Figure 11-55(F)). Then, after the jackpot-specific operation display (see Figure 11-55(G)) is performed, the base display section 069SG052 of the temporarily displayed decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size, before the confirmed decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (see Figure 11-55(H)).

Thus, in the case of the SP Reach E variation pattern, a reach-specific action display is possible when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, and a second specific action display is possible when the decorative symbols stop displaying a confirmed decorative symbol that is a predetermined jackpot combination. In the variation pattern of SP Reach E that goes through a reach, both the reach-specific action display and the jackpot-specific action display are executed. However, in the variation pattern of SP Reach D that does not go through a reach, the reach-specific action display is not executed, and only the jackpot-specific action display is executed. Therefore, in SP Reach D, which can be executed in the time-saving state B, there is less unnecessary teasing, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 11-55(I), after the variable display starts, the reach pattern is not displayed, and as shown in Figure 11-55(F), the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 falls may be executed without any operation by the player between the start of the variable display and the temporary stop display of the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols.

(Display pattern for non-reach miss variation)
Next, we will compare the non-reach miss variation patterns. Figure 11-56 is a diagram comparing examples of the performance actions for the non-reach miss variation patterns. Figure 11-57 is a diagram comparing examples of the performance actions for the non-reach miss variation patterns. In the following, detailed examples of specific performance displays that are performed when decorative symbols stop are omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-56, comparing the non-reach miss variation patterns of the shortened system, first, in the "ultra-shortened non-reach" which can be determined in the shortened time state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R stops simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in the "shortened non-reach A" which can be determined in the probability variation state and shortened time state A, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-56 (B1)). Next, the decorative pattern is displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see Figure 11-56 (B2)), the decorative pattern is displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 11-56 (B3)), and the decorative pattern is displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see Figure 11-56 (B4)).

In this shortened non-reach variation pattern, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, the variable display time is "3 seconds," resulting in shortened non-reach A, where the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in the order of left, right, and middle. In contrast, in time-saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds," resulting in ultra-shortened non-reach, where the decorative symbols stop and are displayed simultaneously on the left, right, and middle.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-57, comparing the non-reach failure variation patterns, in "Non-Reach A," which can be determined in the probability variation state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. At this time, a "movable body notification" may be executed, in which the movable body 32 moves up and down (see Figure 11-57 (A1)). Subsequently, before the decorative symbols are displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, or 5R, a "character notification" may be executed, in which a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of text such as "Reach?" may be displayed (see Figure 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 11-57 (A3)), a "reach notification" may be executed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, where the decorative symbol is displayed in a decelerated manner, and a "button notification" may be executed, where a button image 069SG441 resembling the push button 31B and an operation prompt display 069SG442, such as "Press and hold!", are displayed to encourage operation of the push button 31B (see Figure 11-57 (A4)). Afterward, a different decorative symbol from the left one is displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R (see Figure 11-57 (A5)), and without entering a reach state, the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, ending the variable display (see Figure 11-57 (A6)).

Furthermore, the "Non-Reach A" pattern, which can be determined in the time-saving state A (see Figures 11-57 (B1) to (B6)), follows the same flow as the non-reach miss variation pattern, which can be determined in the probability variation state (see Figures 11-57 (A1) to (A6)), so its explanation is omitted.

On the other hand, in "Non-Reach A," which can be determined in time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously (see Figure C1), and then the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R simultaneously stops, ending the variable display (see Figure 11-57 (C2)).

In this way, for non-reach variation patterns, the variable display time is a common "7 seconds" across the probability variation state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. However, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, the execution rate of various effects such as "movable object notification," "character notification," "reach notification," and "button notification" is high, whereas in time-saving state B, the execution rate of these effects is lower (or not executed) compared to the probability variation state and time-saving state A.

(Display method of SP reach variation pattern)
Next, we will compare the super reach variation patterns. Figure 11-58 is a diagram comparing examples of the performance actions of the super reach variation patterns. Figure 11-59 is a diagram comparing examples of the performance actions of the super reach variation patterns. Figure 11-60 is a diagram comparing examples of the performance actions of the post-event performance in the super reach variation patterns.

Comparing the Super Reach variation patterns based on Figures 11-58 and 11-59, first, in the variation pattern of "SP Reach E," which can be determined in Time-Saving State A, the variable display of decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative symbols stop and are displayed in any of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, or 5R, a "character予告" (character announcement) may be executed, displaying a character image 069SG100C and a dialogue display 069SG431 consisting of text such as "It might be a reach!!" (see Figure 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode changes to the "reach" mode (see Figure 11-58 (A3)). Although not specifically shown in the illustrations, "reach announcements" and "button announcements" may be executed when the display enters the reach mode.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440, consisting of a character image and text such as "SP Reach Performance E," is displayed (see Figure 11-58 (A4)). At this time, the decorative symbols, which were variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are reduced in size and displayed in the display area 5SR located in the upper right corner of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle performance" begins, in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other (see Figure 11-58 (A5)).

Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the battle sequence began, the final showdown occurs (see Figures 11-59 (A6) and (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451, resembling the push button 31B, an operation prompt display 069SG452 (such as "Charge Start!"), and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed, and a "win/loss button sequence" is executed as an operation prompt to encourage the player to long-press the push button 31B (see Figure 11-59 (A8)). Furthermore, if a long-press operation by the player is detected within the operation validity period when the operation prompt display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see Figure 11-59 (A9)).

Furthermore, during or immediately preceding the win/loss button animation, a pre-animation (for example, a light-gathering animation where light converges at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) may be performed before the button image 069SG451, which mimics the push button 31B, is displayed. It is preferable that such a pre-animation is not performed in the time-saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the operation prompt display 069SG452 was activated, the display of the operation prompt display 069SG452 changes to "Release!!" to prompt the release of the push button 31B, and the operation time for releasing the operation is displayed on the gauge display 069SG453 (see Figure 11-59 (A10)). Then, at the timing when the release of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or at the timing when the operation valid period has elapsed without the release of the press operation being detected, an image 069SG455 indicating that an allied character has attacked is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see Figure 11-59 (A11)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body animation is executed. The movable body 32 falls from its origin position to the animation position, and a movable body animation image 069SG456 is displayed, consisting of an image indicating that the ally character's attack hit the enemy character and an effect image to highlight the movable body 32. After the movable body 32 falls from its origin position to the animation position (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), a notification image 069SG457 is displayed indicating that the enemy character has been defeated and the ally character has won the battle (see Figure 11-59 (D2)). The confirmed decorative symbols, which are predetermined jackpot combinations, are temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby notifying the player that the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figure 11-59 (D3)).

When a jackpot is announced, as shown in Figure 11-60, the background image switches to the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the planned payout counter display 069SG460, which shows the planned number of balls to be dispensed during the jackpot game state, are displayed, and the post-jackpot animation begins (see Figure 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of an allied character attacking an enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 069SG461 (e.g., "+50") is displayed in response to the attack. The displayed planned ball count is added to the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 (see Figure 11-60 (D5)). When the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (e.g., "300"), a button image 069SG451 resembling a push button 31B, an operation prompt display 069SG452 (e.g., "Press!!"), and a gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the push button 31B (see Figure 11-60 (D6)).

Next, at the moment when a press operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation validity period has elapsed, or at the moment when the operation validity period has elapsed without a press operation being detected, the friendly character attacks, the counter value of the planned ball payout counter display 069SG460 is displayed variably (see Figure 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is displayed as a fade-out (see Figure 11-60 (D8)). Then, the planned ball payout counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750," which is the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed as a pause (see Figure 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of a jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball payout counter display 069SG460 remains unchanged, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state. In the case of a jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball payout counter display 069SG460 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500") (see Figure 11-60 (D10)), and then the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a miss, although not illustrated in detail, the player character's attack does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from its origin position to the animation position, the enemy character is not defeated, the player character loses the battle, and the combination of losing symbols is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, indicating that the variable display result is a miss (see Figure 11-59 (D4)).

Returning to Figure 11-58, in the "SP Reach C" jackpot variation pattern, which can be determined in the probability variation state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (B1)). Next, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect begins, where the display screen becomes black (see Figure 11-58 (B2)). After that, without the variable display mode changing to a reach mode, the same effects as in Figures 11-58 and 50 (A3-A7) are performed (see Figures 11-58 and 50 (B3-B6)). Then, without the effects in Figure 11-59 (A8-A9), the effects similar to those in Figure 11-59 (A10-A11) are performed (see Figure 11-59 (B7-B8)). Finally, the effects in Figures 11-59 (D1-D3) and 11-60 (D4-D10) are performed.

Returning to Figure 11-58, in the "SP Reach D" jackpot variation pattern that can be determined in time-saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously (see Figure 11-58 (C1)). Then, at a predetermined time elapsed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect is initiated where the display screen becomes black (see Figure 11-58 (C2)). After that, without the variable display mode becoming a reach mode, and without the effect in Figure 11-58 (A4) occurring, the same effect as in Figure 11-58 (A5) is performed (see Figure 11-58 (C3)), and without the effect in Figure 11-59 (A8 to A9) occurring, the same effect as in Figure 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see Figure 11-59 (C4 to C5)). Then, the effects shown in Figures 11-59 (D1-D3) and 11-60 (D4-D10) are performed.

(Example of control operation for the Super Reach jackpot variation pattern)
Next, we will compare the control operation examples of the jackpot variation patterns for SP Reach E, C, and D based on Figure 11-61. Figure 11-61 is a timing chart showing control operation examples for SP Reach E, C, and D.

As shown in Figures 11-61(A) to (C), SP Reach E, C, and D consist of a variable display part that performs a variable display of decorative symbols, and a post-event performance part that announces the expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. In the variable display part, when the variable display starts, the aforementioned "movable body announcement," "character announcement," "reach announcement," "button announcement," etc. are performed, and after the reach state is reached, the "battle performance" or "short battle performance" as an SP reach performance is performed. Then, at timing ta1, the "win/fail button performance" as an operation promotion performance is started in the "decisive performance," and then at timing ta2, the "movable body performance" is started. After the results of the "Battle Sequence" and "Short Battle Sequence" are announced, at timing ta3, the predetermined winning combination of symbols is temporarily displayed, and after the winning symbol stop action (see Figure 11-55 (G)) is performed, at timing ta4, the winning combination of symbols is temporarily displayed, and the winning result is announced. Subsequently, post-event sequences are executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) for the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP Reach E, which can be determined in time-saving state A; 40 seconds for SP Reach C, which can be determined in probability variation state; and 25 seconds for SP Reach D, which can be determined in time-saving state B. On the other hand, the time for the post-event performance part (ta5 to ta6) is 15 seconds for SP Reach E, C, and D, respectively.

In other words, while the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) for the variable display part of time-saving state A and probability-changing state differs from the variable display time (25 seconds) for time-saving state B, the variable display time (15 seconds) for the post-event performance part of time-saving state A and probability-changing state is the same as the variable display time (15 seconds) for the post-event performance part of time-saving state B. This allows for differences in the various effects in the variable display part between time-saving state A and probability-changing state and time-saving state B, enhancing the overall effect, while reducing development costs by standardizing the post-event performance part.

Furthermore, while the variable display times (50 seconds, 40 seconds) for the variable display parts in Time-Saving State A and Probability-Boosting State differ from those of the variable display part in Time-Saving State B (25 seconds), the display times for the jackpot-specific action displays in Time-Saving State A and Probability-Boosting State (ta3-ta4) are the same as those for the jackpot-specific action displays in Time-Saving State B (ta3-ta4). This allows for enhanced visual effects by differentiating the various effects in the variable display parts, while simultaneously reducing development costs by standardizing the display times for the jackpot-specific action displays.

Furthermore, the execution period for the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" (ta1 to ta2) is the same for SP Reach C and D, with only SP Reach E being different.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates image data (display data) for displaying the image drawn in the image drawing area of the VRAM area on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area. When performing display processing to output the image data (display data) from the display image creation area as a video signal, it generates extended commands as control information for the movable body (e.g., extended commands DXXXX, SXXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) to operate the movable body 32 and push buttons 31B, and extended commands as control information for the lamps (e.g., extended command BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) to turn the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 on and off), and transmits these to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the extended commands DXXXX and SXXXX, the CPU 120 for performance control initiates operation control of the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable motor 207 and push button 31B of the movable body 32, using an operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXXX and SXXXX. This control is separate from the operation control execution data for the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable motor 207 and push button 31B of the movable body 32 as described in the process data.

Furthermore, based on receiving the extended command BXXX, etc., the CPU 120 for performance control starts control to turn the movable LED 208 on/off using a lighting pattern corresponding to the extended command BXXX, etc. (for example, see the light emission pattern shown in Figure 13-6(B) in the feature section 018SG), separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data for the movable LED 208 described in the process data.

Furthermore, the control data for operating these movable parts 32 and push buttons 31B, as well as the control data for lighting the movable LED 208, are stored in ROM 121.

Here, the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body effect" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state A or probability variation state (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) and the control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body effect" when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state B (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) are common, which reduces development costs.

In this embodiment, an example is given in which extended commands as control information for movable bodies (for example, extended commands DXXXX, SXXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) for operating the movable body 32 and push button 31B are generated separately from extended commands as control information for lamps (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. (where "X" is any number)) for turning the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 on and off). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in a "movable body effect," the on/off control of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, and the control of movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and push button 31B may be executed based on extended command B000 as control information for lamps for turning the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 on and off. In other words, lighting control and operation control can be performed using common control information (extended commands).

Furthermore, the vibration patterns executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "movable body effect" in the "Shortened Time State A" and the "Probability Change State" are the same, as are the vibration patterns executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "Movable Body Effect" in the "Movable Body Effect" in the "Shortened Time State B" when a jackpot is won. This commonality reduces development costs.

Furthermore, the control data used to control the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) that illuminate in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "movable body effect" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or probability variation state, and the control data used to control the movable LED 208 (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) that illuminates in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "movable body effect" in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B, are common, thereby reducing development costs.

Furthermore, by making extension command B000 a common extension command for both movable body motion control and LED lighting control, it becomes unnecessary to separate extension commands for movable body motion control and LED lighting control, thus reducing the program capacity for effect control. If the extension commands used for movable body effects were separated into those for movable body motion control and those for LED lighting control, there would be a risk of one of the extension commands being missed due to a malfunction. However, by unifying them, the movable body effects can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, the effect images displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "movable body effect" when a jackpot is achieved in the time-saving state A or the probability variation state (see movable body effect image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)) and the effect images displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 during the "movable body effect" when a jackpot is achieved in the time-saving state B (see movable body effect image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)) are the same, which reduces development costs.

(Comparison of Super Reach variation patterns and Non-Reach Miss variation patterns)
Next, a comparison between the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach miss variation pattern will be explained based on Figure 11-62. Figure 11-62 is a diagram comparing the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach miss variation pattern.

As shown in Figure 11-62, in the super reach-failure variation pattern, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the stop display is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbols to the stop display in the non-reach-failure variation pattern.

Furthermore, since the variable display period for the non-reach failure variation pattern (tb0 to tb1) is shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols to the reach pattern in the super reach failure variation pattern, the variable display ends in a shorter period than the period until the reach pattern is reached, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in the non-reach-miss variation pattern, the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display (tb0 to tb1) is shorter than the period from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display (tb0 to tb2) in the super-reach-miss variation pattern. Therefore, the variable display of the decorative symbols in a predetermined row ends in a shorter period, providing a desirable time-saving state B.

(Entry sequence)
Next, examples of the animation actions for the entry sequence will be explained based on Figures 11-63 and 11-64. Figure 11-63 shows examples of the animation actions for the entry sequence (A) to (C) and the time-saving entry sequence A (D). Figure 11-64 shows examples of the animation actions for the probability variation entry sequence (A1) to (A4) and the time-saving entry sequence B (B1) to (B4).

As shown in Figures 11-63 (A) to (C), in the "Introductory Scene," the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged in the center of the display screen, and "BATTLE"
The character images 069SG470B that make up "RUSH RUSH!!" are displayed one by one, starting from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 and moving to the center of the display screen.

Then, the "Time-Saving Entry Performance A" is displayed, which consists of effect image 069SG470A, which is displayed at maximum size and changes color, and text image 069SG470B, which consists of the words "BATTLE RUSH Entry!!" gathered in the center of the display screen. This indicates that control of Time-Saving State A has begun.

Furthermore, in the case of the "probability change entry sequence," after the entry image 069SG470 shown in Figure 11-63(D) is displayed, as shown in Figure 11-64(A1), the probability change image 069SG471, which consists of the characters "極" and an effect image and has a predetermined transparency, is displayed on a higher display layer than the entry image 069SG470. It then moves and is displayed while gradually shrinking towards the lower left of the display screen, and its transparency decreases (see Figure 11-64(A2-A3)).

Then, a "probability change entry sequence" is performed, displaying the entry image 069SG472, which consists of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability change image 069SG471, which is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen at the smallest size with 0% transparency. This signals the start of control of the probability change state (see Figure 11-64 (A4)).

Furthermore, in the case of "Time-Saving Entry Sequence B," the "Entry Introduction Sequence" explained in Figures 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed. After the 900th variable display, which fulfills the conditions for starting the control of Time-Saving State B, the symbol confirmation period (e.g., 20 seconds) begins. Then, the entry image 069SG470 shown in Figure 11-63 (D) is displayed. Following this, as shown in Figure 11-64 (B1), a playtime image 069SG473A, consisting of the characters "1100" and an effect image with a predetermined transparency, is displayed on a higher display layer than the entry image 069SG470. It then moves and is displayed while gradually shrinking towards the lower left of the display screen, while its transparency decreases (see Figures 11-64 (B2-B3)).

Then, the "Time-Saving Entry Production B" is performed, displaying entry image 069SG473, which consists of entry image 069SG470, playtime image 069SG473A (consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the smallest size with 0% transparency in the lower left corner of the display screen), and playtime image 069SG473B (consisting of the character "遊"). This indicates that control of time-saving state B has begun (see Figure 11-64 (B4)).

Thus, when control of time-saving state A begins, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in time-saving state entry演出 A. When control of the probability variation state begins, the entry image 069SG472, consisting of entry image 069SG470 and probability variation image 069SG471, is displayed in the probability variation state entry演出. On the other hand, when control of time-saving state B begins, the entry image 069SG470, common to both time-saving state A and probability variation state entry images 069SG470, is displayed in time-saving state entry演出 B. Additionally, special display images for playtime, 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are not displayed when control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A begins, are displayed.

Therefore, in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that there was a long period during which the game was not controlled to a jackpot state, the time-saving state entry animation B displays not only the entry image 069SG470, which is the same as when the control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A begins, but also the playtime image 069SG473B, which is not displayed when the control of the probability variation state or time-saving state A begins, thereby enhancing the excitement of the start of time-saving state B.

[Embodiment 2]
Next, Embodiment 2 of the feature unit 069SG will be described based on Figures 11-65 to 11-69. Figure 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variable pattern determination table as Embodiment 2 of the feature unit 069SG. Figure 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of the variable display start setting process as Embodiment 2 of the feature unit 069SG. Figure 11-67 is a diagram showing the variable display performance pattern determination table. Figure 11-68 is an example of the performance operation of SP Reach D. Figure 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each game state. In this Embodiment 2, the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of Embodiment 1 will not be shown or described in detail, and the differences will be explained mainly.

Figure 11-65 shows, (A) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories in time-saving state B (rescue time-saving state) is 0, (B) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a losing outcome when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, (C) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big win when the number of reserved memories is 0, and (B) a specific example of a variation pattern determination table for a big win when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-65(A), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach. Also, as shown in Figure 11-65(B), in the variable pattern determination table for losses when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to ultra-short non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), in the jackpot pattern determination table for cases where the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP Reach E and 90 determination values are assigned to SP Reach D.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the SP Reach D variation pattern is determined in the probability variation state and the time-saving state A, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "short battle performance" described in Embodiment 1 as the variable display performance. On the other hand, when the variable display of the SP Reach D variation pattern is determined in the time-saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes either the "instant win performance" or the "full rotation performance" described later, instead of the "short battle performance," as the variable display performance.

Furthermore, the variation pattern of SP Reach D, which can be determined in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, is a reach variation pattern in which a "short battle sequence" is executed after the variable display mode changes from the start of the variable display mode to the reach mode. In contrast, the variation pattern of SP Reach D, which can be determined in time-saving state B, is a non-reach variation pattern in which an "instant win sequence" or "full rotation sequence" is executed before the variable display mode changes from the start of the variable display mode to the reach mode.

Next, Figure 11-66 is a part of the flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11-44. In this embodiment, after the CPU 120 for performance control executes the processes in steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 of the variable display start setting process, if it determines in step S069SGS277 that the variable pattern stored in the variable pattern specification command storage area is not a shortened non-reach variable pattern or an ultra-shortened non-reach variable pattern, that is, if the variable pattern is a non-reach variable pattern or a super-reach variable pattern (step 069SGS277; No), it executes the processes in steps 069SGS277A to 069SGS277D before executing the reach announcement execution decision process in step 069SGS278.

Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A). If it is an SP Reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it determines whether the game state is Time-Saving State B (step 069SGS277B). If it determines that the game state is Time-Saving State B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), it executes the variable display performance pattern determination process (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the variable display pattern is extracted, and the variable display pattern is determined using the variable display pattern determination table shown in Figure 11-67.

In the variable display pattern determination table, as shown in Figure 11-67, different judgment values are assigned to the "instant win animation" and "full rotation animation" depending on whether the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" or "jackpot A, B (6R)," so that the number of judgment values shown in Figure 11-67 corresponds to the values assigned to each type.

Specifically, for jackpot types "Jackpot C (10R)," 10 judgment values are assigned to the "instant win animation," and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full reel rotation animation." Furthermore, for jackpot types "Jackpot A, B (6R)," 70 judgment values are assigned to the "instant win animation," and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full reel rotation animation."

Thus, the "instant win animation" and the "full rotation animation," when compared to the three game states excluding the normal state, are variable display animations that are not executed in the probability variation state or the time-saving state A, but are only executable in the time-saving state B. They are executed using the same SP Reach D variation pattern that can be determined in the probability variation state and time-saving state A.

Furthermore, the execution rate of the "instant win animation" is higher for "Big Win A" and "Big Win B (6R)" than for "Big Win C (10R)." Conversely, the execution rate of the "full reel spin animation" is higher for "Big Win C (10R)" than for "Big Win A" and "Big Win B (6R)." In other words, for "Big Win C (10R)," which offers a larger expected payout during the game than "Big Win A" and "Big Win B (6R)," the "full reel spin animation" is executed more frequently than the "instant win animation."

Next, we will explain examples of the "instant win" and "full rotation" animations. When the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, after the variable display starts and the variable display mode changes to a reach mode, a "short battle animation" is executed where the variable display result is announced as a jackpot because the ally character defeats the enemy character in the battle animation (see Figures 11-58 to 11-59). However, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined in time-saving state B, after the variable display starts, an "instant win" or "full rotation" animation is executed where the variable display result is announced as a jackpot without the variable display mode changing to a reach mode.

In the "instant win animation," as shown in Figure 11-65, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously (see Figure 11-68 (A1)). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the confirmed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 11-68 (A2)). Subsequently, in the "decisive animation," without executing an operation-promoting animation that encourages the operation of the push button 31B by displaying a button image resembling the push button 31B, operation-promoting displays such as "Press!!", and a gauge display, a movable body animation image 069SG456 indicating that an attack by an ally character has hit an enemy character is displayed, and a "movable body animation" is executed in which the movable body 32 falls from its origin position to near the middle position (see Figure 11-68 (A3)). Then, the confirmed decorative symbols are temporarily displayed again in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 11-68 (A4)). Afterward, in the post-event performance part, a post-event performance similar to the one described in Figure 11-60 (D4-D10) is executed (see Figure 11-68 (C1-C7)), and the game is controlled to a jackpot state.

As shown in Figure 11-65, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, a blackout effect occurs for a predetermined period of time at the start of the variable display, during which the display screen becomes black (see Figure 11-68 (B1)). Then, in the third background image 069SG330, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously (see Figure 11-68 (B2)). After a predetermined time has elapsed, the full rotation display begins, in which the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are aligned with predetermined jackpot combinations (see Figure 11-68 (B3)). Subsequently, the predetermined jackpot combinations of the confirmed decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see Figure 11-68 (B4)). Subsequently, during the post-event sequence (symbol confirmation period), a post-event sequence similar to the one described in Figure 11-60 (D4-D10) is executed (see Figure 11-68 (C1-C7)), after which the game is controlled to a jackpot state.

Thus, in time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the variable display effect that announces the result as a jackpot is executed as either an "instant win effect" or a "full rotation effect" without going through the reach pattern after the variable display starts. This allows players to enjoy the SP reach effect with peace of mind, without worrying about being teased by the reach effect.

Furthermore, in the "instant win" or "full rotation" sequences, unlike the "button notification" or "win/loss button" sequences described in Embodiment 1, operation-promoting sequences that encourage the operation of the push button 31B, such as displaying a button image resembling the push button 31B, operation-promoting displays such as "Press!!", and gauge displays are not executed. Therefore, in the time-saving state B, the player can efficiently process the variable displays without having to perform any troublesome operation prompts or operations.

(Examples of various actions depending on the game state)
Next, various operation examples for the three game states in this embodiment—Shortened Time State B, Probability Change State, and Shortened Time State A—will be explained based on Figure 11-69. Figure 11-69 is a diagram illustrating various operation examples for each game state. Below, as shown in Figure 11-69, we will compare the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three game states: "Shortened Time State B,""Probability Change State," and "Shortened Time State A."

<Item D1>
First, regarding the proportion of CPU 103 determining SP Reach D jackpot variation patterns that do not go through reach patterns, in "Shortened Time State B", as shown in Figure 11-65(C), the proportion of determining "SP Reach D (instant hit effect or full rotation effect)" that does not go through reach patterns when the number of reserved memories is 0 or 1 to 3 is "90%", in "Probability Variation State", as shown in Figure 11-6(C), the proportion of determining "SP Non-Via A (non-reach)" that does not go through reach patterns when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%", and in "Shortened Time State A", as shown in Figure 11-7(C), the proportion of determining "SP Non-Via A (non-reach)" that does not go through reach patterns when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3 is "5%".

Furthermore, in the probability variation state and time reduction state A, "SP Reach D" is a reach variation pattern in which the "Short Battle Performance" is executed via a reach pattern, and is not a non-reach variation pattern that does not go through a reach pattern.

In other words, the percentage of times a "SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (instant win or full rotation effect)" is determined without going through a reach pattern in time-saving state B (for example, 90%) is higher than the percentage of times a "SP Non-via A jackpot variation pattern" is determined without going through a reach pattern in time-saving state A (for example, 5%), and also higher than the percentage of times a "SP Non-via A jackpot variation pattern" is determined without going through a reach pattern in probability variation state (for example, 5%).

According to item (D1), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to a jackpot game state, by setting the variable display mode to a reach mode in the variable display where control to a jackpot game state has not been decided, the game is controlled to a jackpot game state without being unnecessarily teased, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the proportion of "SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern (instant win or full rotation)" that does not go through the reach pattern in time-saving state B is shown to be higher than the proportion of "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not go through the reach pattern in time-saving state A or probability variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in time-saving state B, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the "SP Reach D variation pattern (instant win or full rotation)" that does not go through the reach pattern may be determined at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation can execute, for example, a "win/loss button presentation" in an SP reach presentation as a presentation that prompts the player to take action, and can execute, for example, a "movable body presentation" in an SP reach presentation as a specific presentation that notifies the variable display result.

Furthermore, in the probability variation state and time-saving state A, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for performance control executes a first performance execution pattern in the "decision performance" of the variable display of SP Reach D, executing the "win/fail button performance" followed by the "movable body performance." On the other hand, in time-saving state B, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the CPU 120 executes a second performance execution pattern in the "instant win performance" of the variable display of SP Reach D, executing the "movable body performance" without executing the "win/fail button performance."

Therefore, when the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the execution rate of the "instant win animation," which executes the "movable body animation" without executing the "win/fail button animation," is as follows: In "Shortened Time State B," as shown in Figure 11-65(C), it is "90%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3; in "Probability Variation State," as shown in Figure 11-6(C), it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3; and in "Shortened Time State A," as shown in Figure 11-7(C), it is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3.

In other words, the execution rate of the "instant win animation" (e.g., 90%) in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern during the shortened time state B, where the "win/loss button animation" is not executed and the "movable body animation" is executed instead, is higher than the execution rate of the "movable body animation" (e.g., 0%) in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern during the shortened time state A, and is also higher than the execution rate of the "movable body animation" (e.g., 0%) in the probability variation state during the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern.

According to item (D2), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to the jackpot game state, the need to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B when it is decided to control to the jackpot game state is reduced, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, the proportion of times the "instant win animation" or "full rotation animation" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern during the time-saving state B is shown to be higher than the proportion of times the "instant win animation" or "full rotation animation" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern during the time-saving state A or the probability variation state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the proportion of times the "instant win animation" or "full rotation animation" is executed in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern during the time-saving state B may be set to 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of reserved memories is 0, the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, "ultra-shortened non-reach" with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortened non-reach A" with a variation time of 3 seconds) is "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "time-saving state B" as shown in Figure 11-65(A), "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "probability variation state" as shown in Figure 11-6(A), and "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "time-saving state A" as shown in Figure 11-7(A).

On the other hand, when the number of reserved memories is 0, the percentage of times the CPU 103 determines a losing variation pattern with a longer variable display time than a shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, or SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds) is "0%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State B" as shown in Figure 11-65(A), "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Probability Variation State" as shown in Figure 11-6(A), and "100%" when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time-Saving State A" as shown in Figure 11-7(A).

In other words, when the number of reserved balls is 0 in the probability variation state or time-saving state A, the CPU 103 can determine a losing variation pattern with a long variable display time to gain time to store reserved balls in the second reserved ball memory (for example, a non-reach variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds). On the other hand, when the number of reserved balls is 0 in time-saving state B, the CPU 103 can determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time than the losing variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, a non-reach A variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds).

According to item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time has passed without being controlled to a jackpot game state, even when the number of reserved memories is 0, a losing variation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened variation pattern (for example, a non-reach variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds) is determined, and the rate of consumption of the variable display does not decrease, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, the type of jackpot can be determined from either "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B," which execute a 6R round game, or "Jackpot C," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" (for example, a larger number of rounds, i.e., a larger expected number of balls that can be won) (see Figure 11-3(D)).

Furthermore, in the time-saving state B, if the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a "full rotation performance" as a special variable display pattern, which involves displaying the jackpot symbols in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time before stopping.

Furthermore, in the SP Reach D jackpot variation pattern, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type, the percentage of times the performance control CPU 120 executes the "Full Rotation Performance" is 90% in "Shortened Time State B" as shown in Figure 11-67, 0% in "Probability Variation State" ("Full Rotation Performance" is not executed) as shown in Figure 11-6(C), and 0% in "Shortened Time State A" ("Full Rotation Performance" is not executed) as shown in Figure 11-7(C).

In other words, the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "full rotation performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state B (for example, 100%) is higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "full rotation performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state A (for example, 0% (not executed)), and also higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "full rotation performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in probability variation state (for example, 0% (not executed)).

According to item (D4), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, considering that a long period of time was not controlled to a jackpot game state, if it is decided to control to jackpot C, which has more rounds and is more advantageous to the player than jackpot A or jackpot B, then the "full rotation effect," a special variable display that is not executed (or has a low execution rate) in the normal state, probability variation state, and time-saving state A, is more likely to be executed, thus providing a suitable time-saving state B.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration in which the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "Full Rotation Performance" 100% of the time when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state B. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. If the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "Full Rotation Performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state B is higher than the percentage of times the CPU 120 for performance control executes the "Full Rotation Performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state A or probability variation state, the execution rate may be less than 100%. Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control may be enabled to execute the "Full Rotation Performance" when "Big Win C (10R)" is determined as the type of big win in time-saving state A or probability variation state.

(Explanation of the modification and application of feature section 069SG)
In the aforementioned feature section 069SG, a form in which a jackpot game state is applied was given as an example of a "favorable state that is advantageous to the player," but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may also include a probability variation state, a minor jackpot game state, a reach state, a pseudo-consecutive performance state, a reserved consecutive win, a chance-up performance, a pre-announcement performance, a time-saving loss, a ceiling time-saving control, and the like.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG illustrates an example of a so-called Type 1 pachinko machine that can be controlled to a probability variation state for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game, the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a pachinko machine that, when the jackpot type is a probability variation jackpot, is controlled to a probability variation state from the end of the jackpot game until the next jackpot is controlled, or a pachinko machine that is controlled to a probability variation state from the end of the jackpot game until the probability variation loss lottery is won. Additionally, a so-called Type 1/Type 2 game machine may be applied, which can be controlled to a jackpot game state when a V-entry occurs triggered by a minor win during the time-saving state after the end of a jackpot game. The gameplay can be modified in various ways.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a configuration in which time-saving state A, probability variation state, and time-saving state B are applied as special states with a higher frequency of variable display execution than non-special states (e.g., normal state), the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more other types of game states may be applied.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, an example was given in which a first special state, controlled when a controlled advantageous state ends from a non-special state (e.g., normal state, low probability/low base state), and a second special state, controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays have been performed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state, are applied as a low probability/high base time-saving state A (first special state) and a time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a high probability/high base probability variation state (first special state) and a low probability/high base time-saving state B (rescue time-saving (second special state)) may also be applied.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a configuration in which a probability variation state is applied as the third special state controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first or second special state ends, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a Type 1 or Type 2 pachinko game machine, a time-saving state different from the time-saving state as the first special state (for example, a time-saving state with more executions (longer control period) than the first special state) may be applied.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, at least one of the first special state, second special state, and third special state may have multiple types of special states with different characteristics, such as the number of times time-saving control is executed or the frequency of variable display execution.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a form where a normal state (low probability/low base state) is applied as a non-special state, the present invention is not limited to this. Any game state with a lower frequency of variable display execution than a special state is acceptable, and is not limited to a low probability/low base state; it may also be a high probability base state, a low probability/high base state, etc.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, the example given illustrates that the time-saving state B (relief time-saving state) as the second special state is controlled on the condition that a predetermined number of variable displays (for example, 900 times) have been performed without being controlled to an advantageous state in a non-special state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Also, it may be controlled when other conditions are met in addition to the above-mentioned conditions.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG illustrates a configuration in which the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved by implementing a control that shortens the average variation time of special symbols in time-saving state B (the period during which the special symbols are varied) compared to the probability variation state and time-saving state A, without changing the average variation time of the normal symbols (the period during which the normal symbols are varied), the probability of getting a "normal symbol win" in a normal symbol game, or the control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize slot (high opening control, high base control) in time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and probability variation state, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) may be further improved by making at least one of the average variation time of the normal symbols (the period during which the normal symbols are varied), the probability of getting a "normal symbol win" in a normal symbol game, or the control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize slot (high opening control, high base control) different from that in probability variation state and time-saving state A in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, the CPU 103 has provided an example of a configuration in which it can determine a first non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A-E Miss") which displays a miss display result after specifying the mode of variable display as a specific mode (e.g., Reach mode), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "Non-Reach Miss") which displays a miss display result without specifying the mode of variable display. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include other types of variable patterns. Furthermore, while examples have been given of configurations that allow for the determination of a variation pattern, such as a first specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach A-C, E Jackpot") which displays a losing result after specifying a variable display mode (e.g., a reach mode), and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "SP Reach D (Instant Win or Full Rotation)", "SP Not Via") which displays a losing result without specifying a variable display mode, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and the first and second specific variable display patterns may include other types of variation patterns not described above.

Furthermore, "specific mode" is not limited to "reach mode," but may include various other modes, such as "chance combination mode (e.g., '133')," "pseudo-consecutive mode (e.g., '122')," "normal reach mode," and "super reach mode."

Furthermore, while the aforementioned feature section 069SG exemplifies the application of "movable body notification" and "character notification" as suggestive effects indicating that the game is being controlled to a jackpot state, the present invention is not limited to these. Any effect that suggests the game is being controlled to a jackpot state may include various other effects, such as stop symbol notification, pseudo-consecutive notification, dialogue notification, operation notification, reach notification, and pre-read notification effects.

Furthermore, while the aforementioned feature section 069SG exemplifies a form in which "countdown notification," "reserve change notification," "symbol chance notification," and "effect display notification" are applied as pre-announcement effects that suggest that the reserve memory stored in the reserve memory will be controlled to a favorable state, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various pre-announcement effects such as "continuous effects" and "premonition effects."

Furthermore, while the aforementioned feature section 069SG exemplifies the application of "button notification" and "win/loss button effect" as action-promoting effects to encourage player action, the present invention is not limited to these, and may include various other effects. Also, "player action" is not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but may include effects that encourage the operation of other operating means (e.g., a touch panel) provided in addition to the push button 31B, or effects that encourage player action (movement) rather than operation.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, "Patterns A-2 and A-3" were applied as examples of first performance execution patterns, where a "win/loss button" as an action-promoting effect is executed, followed by a "movable body effect" as a specific effect. "Pattern A-1" was applied as an example of a second performance execution pattern, where a specific effect is executed without executing an action-promoting effect. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples. Other action-promoting effects, such as a "button notification," may be applied as the action-promoting effect, and effects other than the "movable body effect" (for example, the battle result in an SP reach effect) may be applied as the specific effect.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a configuration in which a "single-hit" operation prompting display is applied as a first action prompting effect to encourage the player to perform a single action, the present invention is not limited to this. It may also prompt the player to perform a single pull, rotation, or back-and-forth operation, rather than simply a single push operation.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a form in which operation prompting displays such as "rapid pressing" and "long pressing" are applied as a second operation prompting effect to encourage the player to perform an operation over a predetermined period, the present invention is not limited to this, and may also prompt operations such as pulling, rotating, or reciprocating over a predetermined period. Moreover, the operation over the predetermined period is not necessarily limited to continuously detected operations, but may also include intermittently performed operations or operations according to a predetermined pattern.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified the application of "character announcements" and "reach announcements" as effects that encourage the user to choose between a specific variable display mode or not, the present invention is not limited to these examples. It may include various effects such as those that encourage the user to choose between a "chance symbol mode" (e.g., "133"), a "pseudo-consecutive win mode" (e.g., "122"), a "normal reach mode," or a "super reach mode."

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG exemplified a form in which the planned number of balls to be dispensed is announced as game value information that can identify the magnitude of the game value granted in a favorable state that is controlled in a specific performance during the post-event performance, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (e.g., 6R or 10R) may be announced. Also, in a state where jackpots are occurring consecutively, such as when a jackpot occurs in a probability variation state, the planned total number of balls to be dispensed, which is the sum of the planned number of balls to be dispensed in the current jackpot and the total number of balls to be dispensed during a predetermined jackpot consecutive period, may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, examples of special state start effects that notify the start of special state control by displaying a special state start indicator when the control of a special state begins were given, including entry introduction effects, probability variation entry effects, time reduction entry effects A, time reduction entry effects B, and shutter effects. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and various other entry effects may be implemented. Also, the presentation modes of each entry effect are not limited to those described above and can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG illustrates a configuration where the probability variation entry animation and the time-saving animation A are separate animations, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variation entry animation and the time-saving animation A may be a single, common entry animation.

Furthermore, while the feature section 069SG illustrates a configuration where the entry introduction sequence is not performed when the time-saving entry sequence B is executed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entry introduction sequence may be performed instead of the shutter sequence. Also, the entry introduction sequence may be performed even when the time-saving entry sequence B is executed. In this case, to eliminate the cumbersome nature of the sequences, it is preferable to use an entry introduction sequence with a shorter duration compared to the sequences performed when the probability variation entry sequence or time-saving entry sequence A is executed.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, an example of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state was illustrated by applying jackpots A and B (first advantageous state) and jackpot C (second advantageous state), which have different numbers of game rounds in the jackpot game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The second advantageous state, which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, may not only be a jackpot where the player has a high advantage in the jackpot game state, such as in the number of game rounds or the number of balls that can be obtained, but also a jackpot where the game state after the jackpot game state ends is advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot with a long time-saving control after the jackpot game state, or a jackpot controlled to a "minor win rush" where the frequency of execution of minor win game states increases after the jackpot ends).

(Explanation of feature section 099SG)
Next, the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 099SG in this embodiment will be described based on Figures 12-1 to 12-22. In this feature section 099SG, the same configuration as the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 069SG will not be shown or described in detail, and the differences will be explained mainly. Furthermore, the feature configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 099SG, which will be described below, can be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature section 069SG.

In the pachinko game machine 1 according to this feature section 099SG, similar to the pachinko game machine 1 shown in Figure 11-1, a left game area is formed to the left of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, through which game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed as a right game area through which game balls can flow down. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to this feature section 099SG, game balls that are weakly launched by the launching device when the game state is the normal state flow down the first path in the left game area, and game balls that are strongly launched by the launching device when the game state is either the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability-changing state flow down the second path in the right game area. Furthermore, some of the game balls flowing down the second path in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second path (to the right of the image display device 5), and a variable display of normal symbols is executed based on the fact that the balls have passed through the gate 41. Then, based on the result of the variable display of the normal symbol being a win (normal symbol win), the second starting prize entry point located on the second path changes from a closed state to an open state, and a game ball becomes possible to enter the second starting prize entry point. Note that in this feature section 099SG, "variable display" may be written as "variable" or "variable display".

Figure 12-1(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11 side in this feature unit 099SG. As shown in Figure 12-1(A), in this feature unit 099SG, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, MR4 for determining the normal display result, and MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable on the main board 11 side. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Jackpot A," "Jackpot B," or "Jackpot C") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "299."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "99".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and it takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

The random value MR5, used for determining the initial value of MR4, is a random value used to determine the initial value of the random value MR4, and takes values in the range of "3" to "23".

Figure 12-1(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special drawing display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this feature unit 099SG, a common special drawing display result determination table is used for both the first and second special drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special drawing display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special drawings.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for special symbol display result determination, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the special feature section 099SG, the special symbol display result determination table assigns a numerical value (determination value) to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" or "miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is normal, time-saving (low probability state), or probability variation (high probability state).

In the special symbol display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot". In the special symbol display result determination table of this feature unit 099SG, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/80.02 in this feature unit 099SG) compared to the probability of determining to control the game state to a jackpot as a "jackpot" when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature unit 099SG). In other words, in the special display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figures 12-1(C1) and 12-1(C2) show examples of the configuration of the jackpot type determination tables stored in ROM 101. Figure 12-1(C1) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the game state with the variable display result of the first special symbol as a "jackpot". Figure 12-1(C2) is a table referenced to determine the jackpot type from jackpot B and jackpot C based on the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the game state with the variable display result of the second special symbol as a "jackpot".

Here, the types of jackpots in the feature unit 099SG will be explained using Figure 12-1(D). In the feature unit 099SG, there are three types of jackpots: Jackpot A, Jackpot B, and Jackpot C, in which time-saving control is executed for up to 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. Furthermore, in these jackpots A, B, and C, if the game ball enters the second large prize slot and then the V prize slot during the first round of the jackpot game state, probability-changing control is executed for up to 110 variable displays after the jackpot game ends.

In this feature section 099SG, the variable V-prize ball device (V-lid) has two open states: a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds). For jackpot A, the variable V-prize ball device is in the short open state during the first round of the jackpot game state. For jackpots B and C, the variable V-prize ball device is in the long open state during the first round of the jackpot game state.

The "Big Win A" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win A," the variable V-prize ball device is in a short-open state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Therefore, the probability variation control cannot be expected to be executed, effectively making it a normal jackpot.

The "Big Win B" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the sixth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win B," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

The "Big Win C" jackpot state is a normal opening jackpot where the second large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state in the first round, and the first large prize slot is opened to a player-favorable state from the second to the tenth round. Furthermore, in "Big Win C," the variable V-prize ball device is in a long-open state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the ball into the V-prize slot. Since this can be expected to trigger the probability variation control, it effectively becomes a probability variation jackpot.

In this embodiment, we have illustrated a configuration with three types of jackpots, A through C. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and there may be two or fewer types of jackpots, or four or more types.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A, and values from 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol), within the range of MR2 determination values from 0 to 299, values from 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B, and values from 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, there is a 50% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, there is a 100% chance that the game ball will be more likely to enter the V-entry slot during the first round of the jackpot game, resulting in both probability variation control and time reduction control being implemented after the jackpot game ends.

In this feature section 099SG, even if a jackpot A occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a short-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot A, it is explained that the ball will not enter the V-zone and the probability variation control will not be executed. Similarly, even if a jackpot B or jackpot C occurs, it is extremely rare for the ball to not enter the V-zone when the V-lid is in a long-open state. Therefore, in the case of jackpot B or jackpot C, it is explained that the ball will enter the V-zone and the probability variation control will be executed.

Furthermore, while the feature section 099SG determines the type of jackpot using MR2, a random value for determining the type of jackpot, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of jackpot may also be determined using MR1, a random value for determining the special display result.

Figure 12-2(A) is a normal symbol win determination table referenced to determine whether the variable display result of the normal symbols is a win (normal symbol win) when the game state is in the normal state, and based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols. Figure 12-2(B) is a normal symbol win determination table referenced to determine whether the variable display result of the normal symbols is a win (normal symbol win) when the game state is in either the time-saving state A, the probability-changing state, or the time-saving state B, and based on the execution of the variable display of the normal symbols.

Furthermore, in this feature section 099SG, time-saving state B refers to a game state that is controlled when the game state is in the normal state (low probability/low base state where neither probability variation control nor time-saving control is executed) and 900 variable displays are executed without being controlled to a jackpot game state. This time-saving state A (low probability/high base state) is executed for a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol win determination table shown in Figure 12-2(A), the random value MR4 used for normal symbol win determination has a range of 3 to 13, with 3 assigned to wins and 4 to 13 assigned to losses. On the other hand, in the normal symbol win determination table shown in Figure 12-2(B), the random value MR4 used for normal symbol win determination has a range of 3 to 12 assigned to wins and 13 assigned to losses. In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, the proportion of normal symbol wins when the game state is either time-saving state A, probability-changing state, or time-saving state B is set higher than the proportion of normal symbol wins when the game state is normal.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-2(C), the reel spin time for regular symbols is set to 60 seconds when the game state is normal, whereas the reel spin time for regular symbols is set to 0.1 seconds when the game state is either time-saving state A, probability-changing state, or time-saving state B. Additionally, as shown in Figure 12-2(D), the opening time of the second starting prize slot when a regular symbol win occurs while the game state is normal is set to 0.1 seconds, whereas the opening time of the second starting prize slot when a regular symbol win occurs while the game state is either time-saving state A, probability-changing state, or time-saving state B is set to 3 seconds.

In other words, in the feature section 099SG, the time-saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time-saving state B, compared to the normal state, have a higher probability of winning with regular symbols, a shorter variable display time for regular symbols, and a longer opening time for the second starting prize slot when a regular symbol win occurs. This makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize slot, meaning the frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is set higher. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The time-saving state A, the probability variation state, and the time-saving state B may also have a higher frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the following conditions compared to the normal state: a higher probability of winning with regular symbols, a shorter variable display time for regular symbols, and a longer opening time for the second starting prize slot when a regular symbol win occurs.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 099SG, similar to the pachinko game machine in feature section 069SG (see Figure 11-1), when the game state is normal, the player can shoot the game ball towards the left game area 2L, allowing the game ball to enter the first starting prize entry point, but it is not possible to enter the second starting prize entry point or the big prize entry point, or to pass through gate 41. However, when the game ball is in either the time-saving state A, the probability-changing state, or the time-saving state B, the player can shoot the game ball towards the right game area 2R, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point and pass through gate 41. Furthermore, when the game state is a jackpot game state, the player can shoot the game ball towards the right game area, allowing the game ball to enter the second starting prize entry point and the big prize entry point, and pass through gate 41.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-12(A), when the game state is normal, the game balls launched towards the left game area 2L are prevented from entering the starting prize area by multiple nails and other components placed on the game board 2. Therefore, the probability of a game ball entering the first starting prize area is approximately 5.5% (provided that the player continuously launches game balls towards the left game area 2L by operating the ball-shooting handle (operation knob) 30). Also, when the game state is normal, even if the player launches game balls towards the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbols after the game ball passes through the gate 41 is extremely long at 60 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting prize area when a normal symbol win occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see Figures 12-2(C) and 12-2(D)). Therefore, game balls entering the second starting prize area are almost impossible.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-12(B), when the game state is either time-saving state A, probability-changing state, or time-saving state B, the game balls launched towards the right game area 2R can pass through gate 41. The variable display time for the normal symbols after passing through gate 41 is short, at 3 seconds. Additionally, the opening time of the second starting prize entry point when a normal symbol win occurs is 3 seconds (see Figures 12-2(C) and 12-2(D)). Therefore, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting prize entry point is approximately 55% (provided that the player continuously launches game balls into the right game area 2R by operating the ball-shooting handle (operating knob) 30).

Figure 12-3 shows the variable patterns used in the variable display of the special symbols of the feature unit 099SG. In this feature section 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-3, the following variation patterns are provided for cases where the variable display result is a miss: ultra-short non-reach miss with a special symbol variation time of 1500ms, shortened non-reach A miss with a special symbol variation time of 3000ms, shortened non-reach B miss with a special symbol variation time of 5000ms, non-reach A miss with a special symbol variation time of 7000ms, non-reach B miss with a special symbol variation time of 12000ms, super reach A miss with a special symbol variation time of 45000ms, super reach B miss with a special symbol variation time of 80000ms, super reach C miss with a special symbol variation time of 4000ms, super reach D miss with a special symbol variation time of 25000ms, and super reach E miss with a special symbol variation time of 50000ms. Furthermore, the variation patterns from Super Reach A (miss) to Super Reach E (miss) are also variation patterns that execute the Super Reach animation during the variable display.

Furthermore, as variation patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot, there are: Super Reach Non-Against A Jackpot, where there is a 7000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is not performed, followed by a 15000ms jackpot notification period (special symbol variation time is 7000ms + 15000ms); Super Reach Non-Bgainst B Jackpot, where there is a 12000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is not performed, followed by a 15000ms jackpot notification period (special symbol variation time is 12000ms + 15000ms); Super Reach A Jackpot, where there is a 45000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is performed, followed by a 15000ms jackpot notification period (special symbol variation time is 45000ms + 15000ms); and 80000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is performed, followed by 1500 The following variations are provided: Super Reach B jackpot, which has a 0ms jackpot notification period (special symbol variation time is 80,000ms + 15,000ms); Super Reach C jackpot, which has a 15,000ms jackpot notification period after a 40,000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is performed (special symbol variation time is 40,000ms + 15,000ms); Super Reach D jackpot, which has a 15,000ms jackpot notification period after a 25,000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is performed (special symbol variation time is 25,000ms + 15,000ms); and Super Reach E jackpot, which has a 15,000ms jackpot notification period after a 50,000ms variable display in which the Super Reach reach animation is performed (special symbol variation time is 50,000ms + 15,000ms). Furthermore, the variation pattern for Super Reach A is a bowling animation where the player's and the enemy's characters bowl to indicate whether or not they have won the jackpot. The variation patterns for Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E are battle animations where the player's and the enemy's characters battle to indicate whether or not they have won the jackpot. The variation pattern for Super Reach D is a short battle animation where the player's and the enemy's characters engage in a battle shorter than the battle animations in Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E to indicate whether or not they have won the jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature unit 099SG is provided with a game control data storage area 099SG150, as shown in Figure 12-4, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 099SG150 shown in Figure 12-4 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 099SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 099SG152, a game control timer setting unit 099SG153, a game control counter setting unit 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 099SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the prize ball entry device 6A and a starting entry (first starting entry) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting entry opening (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data such as the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the upper limit of the amount of hold data (hold data) that can be stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four, regardless of the game state. The hold data stored in the first special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151A indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol is pending. This hold information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) that have not yet started, but where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B and a starting entry (second starting entry) has occurred. As an example, the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting entry opening (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data such as the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the fulfillment of the second starting condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the upper limit of the amount of hold data (hold data) that can be stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151B is always four, regardless of the game state. The hold data stored in the second special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the second special symbol is pending. This hold information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will occur based on the variable display result (special symbol display result) in this special symbol game.

In other words, the feature unit 099SG can store up to four reserved memories as first reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the first reserved memory unit 099SG151A), and up to four reserved memories as second reserved memories (reserved memories that can be stored in the second reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (first reserve information) when the game ball passes through (enters) the first start entry point, and the reserve information based on the fulfillment of the second start entry (second reserve information) when the game ball passes through (enters) the second start entry point, may be stored in a common reserve memory unit, associated with the reserve number. In this case, the start entry point data indicating which of the first or second start entry points the game ball passed through (entered) should be included in the reserve information and stored in association with the reserve number.

Furthermore, during the execution of variable display, the CPU 103 first, if a second special symbol hold memory exists during the normal processing of special symbols (see Figure 6), reads the random values MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B, and then shifts the contents of the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B. In other words, if the CPU 103 stores the random values MR1 to MR3 as the hold memory for hold number 1 in the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B, it reads the values of these random values MR1 to MR3 stored as the hold memory for hold number 1, erases the hold memory for hold number 1, and restores the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 2 as the hold memory for hold number 1, the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 3 as the hold memory for hold number 2, and the hold memory stored as the hold memory for hold number 4 as the hold memory for hold number 3.

Furthermore, if no hold memory is stored in the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special symbol hold memory exists. If the first special symbol hold memory exists, the CPU 103 reads random values MR1 to MR3 from the first special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151A and then shifts the contents of the first special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151A. In other words, if the CPU 103 has the random values MR1 to MR3 stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 1 in the first special figure reserved memory unit 099SG151A, it reads out the random values MR1 to MR3 stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 1, erases the reserved memory for reserved number 1, and restores the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 2 as the reserved memory for reserved number 1, the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 3 as the reserved memory for reserved number 2, and the reserved memory stored as the reserved memory for reserved number 4 as the reserved memory for reserved number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 performs a determination of the variable display result based on the random value MR1 read from the first special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151A or the second special symbol hold storage unit 099SG151B (and if the variable display result is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot based on the random value MR2). After this, in the variation pattern determination process (see Figure 6), it determines the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the game state, the variable display result, and the number of special symbols that execute the variable display.

In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process according to the number of reserved memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the reserved memory immediately before the variation display.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 099SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41 and been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 099SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls pass through the passage gate 41, and stores numerical data such as the random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 099SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether the flag is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags, including the aforementioned payout status flag.

The game control timer setting unit 099SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 099SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 099SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores numerical data representing random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as random values MR2 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

Next, we will explain the variation pattern determination table used when performing the variable display of special symbols. As shown in Figures 12-5 to 12-11, this feature unit 099SG can determine the variation pattern using different variation pattern determination tables depending on the game state at the time the variable display of special symbols is performed and the number of reserved special symbols that will be displayed.

Specifically, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is determined using the miss variation pattern determination table A shown in Figure 12-5(A), from the variation patterns of non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss. In the miss variation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 97 values are assigned to the non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern will be determined to be a non-reach B miss pattern 97% of the time, a super reach A miss pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach B miss pattern 1% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined using the miss variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 12-5(B) from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach B miss, super reach A miss, and super reach B miss. In the miss variation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 97 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach B miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach A miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach B miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is normal, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 special symbols reserved for the variable display, the variation pattern will be determined to be a shortened non-reach B miss 97% of the time, a Super Reach A miss 2% of the time, and a Super Reach B miss 1% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (this is also true when the number of reserved symbols is 0 to 3), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is used to determine the variation pattern from the variation patterns of jackpot B without a super reach, jackpot A with a super reach, and jackpot B with a super reach. In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 10 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot B without a super reach, 40 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot A with a super reach, and 50 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot B with a super reach. In other words, if the game state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern will be determined as the variation pattern for a jackpot B without a super reach 10% of the time, the variation pattern for a jackpot A with a super reach 40% of the time, and the variation pattern for a jackpot B with a super reach 50% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined using the miss variation pattern determination table C shown in Figure 12-6(A) from the variation patterns of non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach miss D. In the miss variation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, then the variation pattern will be determined to be a non-reach A miss pattern 95% of the time, a super reach C miss pattern 2% of the time, and a super reach D miss pattern 3% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 1, then, as shown in Figure 12-6(B), the variation pattern is determined using the miss variation pattern determination table D from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss. In the miss variation pattern determination table D, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 80 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 15 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and there is one special symbol stored in the reserve memory that executes the variable display, then the variation pattern will be determined with an 80% probability to a shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 15% probability to a non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 2% probability to a super reach C miss variation pattern, and with a 3% probability to a super reach D miss variation pattern.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the following variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table E, as shown in Figure 12-6(C): shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss. In the miss variation pattern determination table E, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 special symbols stored in the reserve memory that execute the variable display, then the variation pattern will be determined with a 90% probability to a shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 5% probability to a non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 2% probability to a super reach C miss variation pattern, and with a 3% probability to a super reach D miss variation pattern.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A, super reach C miss, and super reach D miss, using the miss variation pattern determination table F, as shown in Figure 12-6 (D). In the miss variation pattern determination table F, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 95 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 2 values are assigned to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is a probability variation state, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 special symbols stored in the reserve memory that execute the variable display, then the variation pattern will be determined with a 95% probability to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 2% probability to the super reach C miss variation pattern, and with a 3% probability to the super reach D miss variation pattern.

As described above, for variable displays that result in a loss during the probability variation state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display. In other words, in the probability variation state of this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays that result in a loss differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (for variable displays of the first special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A; for variable displays of the second special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is used to determine the variation pattern from the variation patterns of jackpot A (without super reach), jackpot C (with super reach), and jackpot D (with super reach), as shown in Figure 12-7. In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 5 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot A (without super reach), 80 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot C (with super reach), and 15 values are assigned to the variation pattern of jackpot D (with super reach). In other words, if the game state is a probability variation state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, there is a 5% chance that the variation pattern will be determined to be a jackpot A without a super reach, an 80% chance that it will be determined to be a jackpot C with a super reach, and a 15% chance that it will be determined to be a jackpot D with a super reach.

Furthermore, if the game state is Time-Saving State A, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the non-reach A miss and super reach E miss variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table G, as shown in Figure 12-8(A). In the miss variation pattern determination table G, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 95 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is Time-Saving State A, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the non-reach A miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and to the super reach E miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 1, then, as shown in Figure 12-8(B), the miss variation pattern determination table H is used to determine the variation pattern from the shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss variation patterns. In the miss variation pattern determination table H, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 85 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 10 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and there is one special symbol in the reserve memory that executes the variable display, the variation pattern will be determined to be a shortened non-reach A miss pattern 85% of the time, a non-reach A miss pattern 10% of the time, and a super reach E miss pattern 5% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is shortened time state A, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A miss, non-reach A miss, and super reach E miss using the miss variation pattern determination table I, as shown in Figure 12-8(C). In the miss variation pattern determination table I, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 90 values are assigned to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, 5 values are assigned to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the super reach E miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 special symbols in the reserve memory that execute the variable display, the variation pattern will be determined with a 90% probability to the shortened non-reach A miss variation pattern, with a 5% probability to the non-reach A miss variation pattern, and with a 5% probability to the super reach E miss variation pattern.

Furthermore, if the game state is Time-Saved State A, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of Shortened Non-Reach A Miss and Super Reach D Miss, as shown in Figure 12-8(D), using the Miss Variation Pattern Determination Table J. In the Miss Variation Pattern Determination Table J, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 95 values are assigned to the Shortened Non-Reach A Miss variation pattern, and 5 values are assigned to the Super Reach D Miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is Time-Saved State A, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that execute the variable display, the variation pattern is determined to be the Shortened Non-Reach A Miss variation pattern 95% of the time, and to the Super Reach D Miss variation pattern 5% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays that result in a loss in time-saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state A of this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays that result in a loss differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (for variable displays of the first special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A; for variable displays of the second special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, when the game state is Time-Saving State A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the jackpot variation pattern is determined using the jackpot variation pattern determination table C, as shown in Figure 12-9, from the variation patterns of jackpot A (without super reach) and jackpot E (with super reach). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table C, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, five values are assigned to the jackpot A variation pattern (without super reach), and 95 values are assigned to the jackpot E variation pattern. In other words, when the game state is Time-Saving State A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern is determined to be the jackpot A variation pattern (without super reach) with a 5% probability, and to the jackpot E variation pattern with a 95% probability.

Furthermore, if the game state is Time-Saving State B, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of Non-Reach B miss and Super Reach D miss using the Miss Variation Pattern Determination Table K, as shown in Figure 12-10(A). Note that in the Miss Variation Pattern Determination Table I, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 97 values are assigned to the Non-Reach B miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the Super Reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is Time-Saving State B, the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display is 0, the variation pattern is determined to be the Non-Reach B miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and to the Super Reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there is one reserved special symbol that performs the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the ultra-shortened non-reach miss and the super reach D miss variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table L, as shown in Figure 12-10(B). In the miss variation pattern determination table L, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 97 values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern, and 3 values are assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there is one reserved special symbol that performs the variable display, the variation pattern is determined to be the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 97% of the time, and to the super reach D miss variation pattern 3% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 reserved special symbols that perform the variable display, the variation pattern is determined from the ultra-shortened non-reach miss and the super reach D miss variation patterns using the miss variation pattern determination table M, as shown in Figure 12-10(C). In the miss variation pattern determination table M, of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination, 99 values are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern, and 1 value is assigned to the super reach D miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 2 reserved special symbols that perform the variable display, the variation pattern is determined to be the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 99% of the time, and to the super reach D miss variation pattern 1% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that perform the variable display, the variation pattern is determined using the miss variation pattern determination table N, as shown in Figure 12-10(D), using only the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern. In the miss variation pattern determination table N, 100 of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination are assigned to the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is a miss, and there are 3 reserved special symbols that perform the variable display, the variation pattern is determined to be the ultra-shortened non-reach miss variation pattern 100% of the time.

As described above, for variable displays that result in a loss in time-saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display. In other words, in time-saving state B of this feature unit 099SG, the average variable display period for variable displays that result in a loss differs depending on the number of reserved special symbols that execute the variable display (for variable displays of the first special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A; for variable displays of the second special symbol, this is the number of reserved symbols stored in the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B).

Furthermore, if the game state is Time-Saving State B and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern is determined solely as the Super Reach D jackpot variation pattern using the Jackpot Variation Pattern Determination Table D, as shown in Figure 12-11. In the Jackpot Variation Pattern Determination Table D, 100 of the possible values of the random value MR3 used for variation pattern determination are assigned to the Super Reach D jackpot variation pattern. In other words, if the game state is Time-Saving State B and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved balls, the variation pattern is determined to be the Super Reach D jackpot variation pattern with 100% certainty.

Here, the duration values for the feature unit 099SG in the pachinko game machine 1 during the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state will be explained based on Figures 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in Figures 12-13(A) and 12-23, if the average variation time for one variation when the game state is time-saving state A is denoted as the period value α, then the period value α is calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d. Here, A is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state A, a is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state A, B is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state A, and b is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state A. C is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 2; c is the ratio of variation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in said time-saving state A; D is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A; and d is the ratio of variation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in said time-saving state A. Note that the variation display period during which the variation display result is a miss in this feature section 099SG refers to the period from the start timing of the variation display of the special symbols to the end timing of the variation display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-13(B) and 12-23, if the average variation time for one variation when the game state is time-saving state B is denoted as the period value β, then the period value β is calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h. Here, E is the average variation time at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state B, e is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in time-saving state B to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B, F is the average variation time at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state B, and f is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in time-saving state B to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B. G is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B is 2; g is the ratio of variation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 110 variation displays in time-saving state B; H is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B; and h is the ratio of variation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 110 variation displays in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-13(C) and 12-23, if the average variation time for one variation when the game state is a probability variation state is denoted as the period value γ, then the period value γ is calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. Here, I is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in the probability variation state, i is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in the probability variation state to the 110 variation displays in the probability variation state, J is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in the probability variation state, and j is the ratio of the variation display when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in the probability variation state to the 110 variation displays in the probability variation state. K is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state is 2. k is the ratio of spin displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total number of spin displays in the probability variation state of 110. H is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state of 110. l is the ratio of spin displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total number of spin displays in the probability variation state of 110.

Based on Figures 12-13(A) to 12-13(C), substituting the numerical values from this feature into algebraic equations A to L and a to l, we can calculate the period value α in time-saving state A, the period value β in time-saving state B, and the period value γ in probability-changing state. The result shows that period value α is greater than period value β, and period value γ is greater than period value β (α > β, γ > β).

Furthermore, by controlling the game multiple times in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State, we focus on the average variation time when the number of variation displays in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State reaches 1100. As shown in Figures 12-14(A) and 12-23, if the average variation time for 1100 variations when the game state is Time-Saving State A is denoted as the period value α', then the period value α' is calculated using the values of A×a' + B×b' + C×c' + D×d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 0, a' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 0 to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 1, and b' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 1 to the 1100 fluctuation displays in said time-saving state A. C is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 2; c' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the total fluctuation displays of 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state A; D is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A; and d' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the total fluctuation displays of 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-14(B) and 12-23, if the average variation time for one variation when the game state is time-saving state B is denoted as the period value β', then the period value β' is calculated by the value of E × e' + F × f' + G × g' + H × h'. Here, E is the average variation time during time-saving state B when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 and the variation display result is a miss, e' is the ratio of variation displays during time-saving state B when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B, F is the average variation time during time-saving state B when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 and the variation display result is a miss, and f' is the ratio of variation displays during time-saving state B when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B. G is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B is 2; g' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B; H is the average fluctuation time during which the fluctuation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B; and h' is the ratio of fluctuation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-14(C) and 12-23, if the average variation time for one variation when the game state is a probability variation state is denoted as the period value γ', then the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I × i' + J × j' + K × k' + L × l'. Here, I is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in the probability variation state, i' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 0 in the probability variation state to 1100 variation displays in the probability variation state, J is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in the probability variation state, and j' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserve memories is 1 in the probability variation state to 1100 variation displays in the probability variation state. K is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state is 2; k' is the ratio of spin displays during which there are 2 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total of 1100 spin displays in that probability variation state; H is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state is 3; and l' is the ratio of spin displays during which there are 3 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total of 1100 spin displays in that probability variation state.

Based on Figures 12-14(A) to 12-14(C) and Figure 12-23, substituting the values from this feature into the algebraic equations A to L and a' to l', we can calculate the period value α' in time-saving state A, the period value β' in time-saving state B, and the period value γ' in probability-changing state. The result shows that period value α' is greater than period value β', and period value γ' is greater than period value β (α' > β', γ' > β').

Next, let's consider the case where 110 spins are displayed in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State. First, as shown in Figures 12-15(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 spins are performed in Time-Saving State A with 3 second special symbol reserves, the average spin time is denoted as the period value δ. This period value δ is calculated as D × 110. Here, as mentioned above, D is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a miss when 3 second special symbol reserves are stored in Time-Saving State A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-15(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in time-saving state A with 3 reserved second special symbols, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ε. This period value ε is calculated as H × 110. Here, H is the average variation time during time-saving state B when the variation display result is a miss, as described above.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-15(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and performs 110 spins in the probability variation state with 3 reserved symbols in each spin, the average spin time is denoted as the period value ζ. This period value ζ is calculated as L × 110. Here, L is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a loss when the number of reserved symbols in the probability variation state is 3, as described above.

Based on Figures 12-15(A) to 12-15(C), substituting the values from this feature into the algebras D, H, and L respectively, we can calculate the period value δ in time-saving state A, the period value ε in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ in probability-changing state. The result shows that period value δ is greater than period value ε, and period value ζ is also greater than period value ε (δ > ε, ζ > ε).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average variation time when the number of variation displays in each of the following states reaches 1100: Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability Variation State, each controlled multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-16(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saving State A with 3 second special symbol reserve memories per variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value δ'. Then, this period value δ' is calculated as D × 1100. Here, D is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss in Time-Saving State A with 3 second special symbol reserve memories, as mentioned above.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-16(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in time-saving state B with 3 reserved second special symbols, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ε'. Then, this period value ε' is calculated as H × 1100. Here, H is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when 3 reserved second special symbols are stored in time-saving state B, as described above.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-16(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state with 3 reserved symbols in each spin, the average spin time is denoted as the period value ζ'. This period value ζ' is calculated as L × 1100. Here, L is the average spin time during which the spin display result is a loss when 3 reserved symbols are in the probability variation state, as mentioned above.

Based on Figures 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), substituting the values from this feature into the algebras D, H, and L respectively, we can calculate the period value δ' in time-saving state A, the period value ε' in time-saving state B, and the period value ζ' in probability-changing state. The result shows that the period value δ' is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' is greater than the period value ε' (δ' > ε', ζ' > ε').

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-17(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in time-saving state A with 2 special symbol reserve memories per variation, the average variation time value η is calculated as C × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-17(B) and 12-23, when a player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time for the 110 variation displays when the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol is always 2 is denoted as the period value θ. This period value θ is calculated using the value of G × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-17(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the probability variation state with 2 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ι. This period value ι is calculated using the value K × 110.

Based on Figures 12-17(A) to 12-17(C), substituting the values from this feature into the algebras C, G, and K respectively, we can calculate the period value η in time-saving state A, the period value θ in time-saving state B, and the period value ι in probability-changing state. The result shows that the period value η is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι is greater than the period value θ (η > θ, ι > θ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average variation time when the number of variation displays in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state reaches 1100, achieved by controlling each state multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-18(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are executed in time-saving state A with 2 second special symbol reserve memories, the average variation time is denoted as the period value η'. This period value η' is calculated as C × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-18(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with 2 special symbol reserve memories, the average variation time is denoted as the period value θ'. This period value θ' is calculated using the value G × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-18(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state with 2 special symbol reserves, the average spin time is denoted as the period value ι'. This period value ι' is calculated using the value K × 1100.

From Figures 12-18(A) to 12-18(C), substituting the values from this feature into the algebras C, G, and K respectively, we can calculate the period value η' in time-saving state A, the period value θ' in time-saving state B, and the period value ι' in probability variation state. The period value η' is greater than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is greater than the period value θ' (η' > θ', ι' > θ').

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-19(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in time-saving state A with one variation per variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value κ. This period value κ is calculated as B × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-19(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with one variation per variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value λ. This period value λ is calculated using the value F × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-19(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the probability variation state with one variation per variation, the average variation time is defined as the period value μ. This period value μ is calculated using the value of J × 110.

Based on Figures 12-19(A) to 12-19(C), substituting the values from this feature into algebraic equations B, F, and J, we can calculate the duration value κ in time-saving state A, the duration value λ in time-saving state B, and the duration value μ in probability-changing state. The duration value κ is greater than the duration value λ, and the duration value μ is also greater than the duration value λ (κ > λ, μ > λ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average variation time when the number of variation displays in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state reaches 1100, achieved by controlling each state multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-20(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are executed in time-saving state A with one second special symbol reserve memory, the average variation time is denoted as the period value κ'. This period value κ' is calculated as B × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-20(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with one variation per variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value λ'. This period value λ' is calculated using the value F × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-20(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in the probability variation state with one variation per variation, the average variation time is defined as the period value μ'. This period value μ' is calculated using the value J × 1100.

Based on Figures 12-20(A) to 12-20(C), substituting the values from this feature into algebraic equations B, F, and J, we can calculate the period value κ' in time-saving state A, the period value λ' in time-saving state B, and the period value μ' in probability-changing state. The result shows that the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is greater than the period value λ' (κ' > λ', μ' > λ').

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-21(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the time-saving state A with 0 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ν. This period value ν is calculated as A × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-21(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 variations per variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ξ. This period value ξ is calculated as E × 110.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-21(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 110 variations are performed in the probability variation state with 0 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value π. This period value π is calculated as I × 110.

From Figures 12-21(A) to 12-21(C), substituting the values from this feature into algebraic equations A, E, and I, we can calculate the duration value ν in time-saving state A, the duration value ξ in time-saving state B, and the duration value π in probability-changing state. The duration value ν is greater than the duration value ξ, and the duration value π is also greater than the duration value ξ (ν > ξ, π > ξ).

Furthermore, we will focus on the average variation time when the number of variation displays in each of the following states reaches 1100: Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability Variation State, each controlled multiple times. First, as shown in Figures 12-22(A) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are executed in Time-Saving State A with 0 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ν'. This period value ν' is calculated as A × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-22(B) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 variations are performed in the time-saving state B with 0 reserved symbols in each variation, the average variation time is denoted as the period value ξ'. This period value ξ' is calculated as E × 1100.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-22(C) and 12-23, if the player continuously shoots the game ball towards the right game area 2R, and 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state with 0 spins per spin, the average spin time is denoted as the period value π'. This period value π' is calculated as I × 1100.

From Figures 12-22(A) to 12-22(C), substituting the values from this feature into algebraic equations A, E, and I, we can calculate the period value ν' in time-saving state A, the period value ξ' in time-saving state B, and the period value π' in probability-changing state. The result shows that the period value ν' is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π' is greater than the period value ξ' (ν' > ξ', π' > ξ').

Next, Figures 12-24(A) and 12-24(B) show the actual shooting values (number of game balls fired, number of times special figure 1 starts, number of times special figure 2 starts, number of times special figure 1 is displayed, number of times special figure 2 is displayed, total special figure 1 variation time, total special figure 2 variation time) and the design values of the pachinko game machine 1 obtained from these actual shooting values when the pachinko game machine 1 was subjected to a 10-hour test firing in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state. Note that, as shown in Figure 12-24(A), the total test firing time for the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state is less than 10 hours because the remaining time is spent in the jackpot game state. Furthermore, the actual shooting value in the normal state is conditional on continuous launching of game balls into the left game area 2L by operating the ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30, while the actual shooting value in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state is conditional on continuous launching of game balls into the right game area 2R by operating the ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30.

As shown in Figure 12-24(A), in the normal state, the test firing time is 346.08 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 34,580, the number of times the special feature 1 start gate is hit is 1,939, the number of times the special feature 2 start gate is hit is 0, the number of times the special feature 1 variation is displayed is 1,883, the number of times the special feature 2 variation is displayed is 0, the total special feature 1 variation time is 23,840 seconds, and the total special feature 2 variation time is 0 seconds. In the time-saving state A, the test firing time is 77.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 7,676, the number of times the special feature 1 start gate is hit is 0, the number of times the special feature 2 start gate is hit is 4,371, the number of times the special feature 1 variation is displayed is 0, the number of times the special feature 2 variation is displayed is 658, the total special feature 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special feature 2 variation time is 3,548 seconds. Furthermore, in Time-Saving State B, the test firing time was 14.96 minutes, the number of balls fired was 1494, the number of times the balls entered the Special Feature 1 starting gate was 0, the number of times the balls entered the Special Feature 2 starting gate was 821, the number of times the Special Feature 1 variation was displayed was 0, the number of times the Special Feature 2 variation was displayed was 594, the total variation time for Special Feature 1 was 0 seconds, and the total variation time for Special Feature 2 was 954 seconds. In addition, in the Probability Variation State, the test firing time was 116.00 minutes, the number of balls fired was 11515, the number of times the balls entered the Special Feature 1 starting gate was 0, the number of times the balls entered the Special Feature 2 starting gate was 6556, the number of times the Special Feature 1 variation was displayed was 0, the number of times the Special Feature 2 variation was displayed was 987, the total variation time for Special Feature 1 was 0 seconds, and the total variation time for Special Feature 2 was 4387 seconds.

Based on the above actual firing values, the design values for the feature unit 099SG in the pachinko game machine 1 are calculated as follows, as shown in Figure 12-24(B): in the normal state, the number of game balls fired per minute is 99.9 balls/minute, the special feature 1 winning rate is 5.6 balls/minute, the special feature 2 winning rate is 0 balls/minute, the average special feature 1 fluctuation time is 12.661 seconds, and the average special feature 2 fluctuation time is 0 seconds. Furthermore, in the time-saving state A, the number of game balls fired per minute is calculated as 99.9 balls/minute, the special feature 1 winning rate is 0 balls/minute, the special feature 2 winning rate is 56.7 balls/minute, the average special feature 1 fluctuation time is 0 seconds, and the average special feature 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. Furthermore, in the shortened time state B, the number of game balls launched per minute was calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate for Special Feature 1 was 0 balls/minute, the winning rate for Special Feature 2 was 54.8 balls/minute, the average variation time for Special Feature 1 was 0 seconds, and the average variation time for Special Feature 2 was 1.607 seconds. Additionally, in the probability variation state, the number of game balls launched per minute was calculated to be 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate for Special Feature 1 was 0 balls/minute, the winning rate for Special Feature 2 was 56.7 balls/minute, the average variation time for Special Feature 1 was 0 seconds, and the average variation time for Special Feature 2 was 4.445 seconds.

Furthermore, when comparing the winning rates for Special Symbol 2 in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State, only the winning rate for Special Symbol 2 in Time-Saving State B differs. This is due to an error caused by the smaller number of game balls launched in Time-Saving State B compared to the other two states.

Here, the average variation time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in Figure 12-24.

First, as shown in Figure 12-25(A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved first special symbols is 0, the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved first special symbols is 1, and the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a miss when the number of reserved first special symbols is 2 are calculated from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved first special symbols is 0 to 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-5(A)), as follows: 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/100 = 13340 (ms). Furthermore, the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol is 3 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-5(B)): 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/100 = 6550 (ms).

Furthermore, based on the normal state shown in Figure 12-24(A), calculating the percentage of variable displays executed for each case where the number of reserved first special symbols is 0 to 3, we find that, as shown in Figure 12-25(B), the percentage of variable displays executed is 10% when the number of reserved first special symbols is 0, 40% when the number of reserved first special symbols is 1, 40% when the number of reserved first special symbols is 2, and 10% when the number of reserved first special symbols is 3.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-25(C), the average variation time under normal conditions is calculated as 13340 (ms) × 10/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 13340 (ms) × 40/100 + 6550 (ms) × 10/100 = 12661 (ms).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-26(A), in time-saving state A, the average variation time A at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-8(A)) as 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 9150 (ms). The average variation time B at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-8(B)) as 3000 (ms) × 85/100 + 7000 (ms) × 10/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 The average variation time C at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-8 (C)): 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5550 (ms). The average variation time D at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (D)): 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 50000 (ms) × 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

Furthermore, based on the time-saving state A shown in Figure 12-24(A), calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in each case of 0 to 3 reserved second special symbol memories at 110 and 1100 variable displays in time-saving state A, we find that, as shown in Figure 12-26(B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of reserved second special symbol memories is 0 (a and a') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of reserved second special symbol memories is 1 (b and b') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of reserved second special symbol memories is 2 (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of reserved second special symbol memories is 3 (d and d') is 95.4545455%.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-26(C), the average variation time (α and α') for one variation in time-reduced state A is calculated as follows: 9150 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 5550 (ms) × 2.7272727/100 + 5350 (ms) × 95.4545455/100 = 5393.636 (ms).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-27(A), in time-saving state B, the average variation time E at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10(A)) as 5000 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 5600 (ms). The average variation time F at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 1 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10(B)) as 1500 (ms) × 97/100 + 25000 (ms) The average variation time G at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10(C)): 1500 (ms) × 99/100 + 25000 (ms) × 1/100 = 1735 (ms). The average variation time H at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10(D)): 1500 (ms) × 100/100 = 1500 (ms).

Furthermore, based on the time-saving state B shown in Figure 12-24(A), the percentage of variable displays executed in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in time-saving state B, for each case where the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 to 3, is calculated as follows, as shown in Figure 12-27(B): the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 (e and e') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 (f and f') is 1.8181818%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 2 (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 (h and h') is 72.7272727%.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-27(C), the average variation time (β and β') for one variation in time-reduced state B is calculated as follows: 5600 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) × 1.8181818/100 + 1735 (ms) × 24.5454545/100 + 1500 (ms) × 72.7272727/100 = 1607.773 (ms).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-28(A), in the probability variation state, the average variation time I at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6(A)): 7000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 × 3/100 = 82 The average variation time J at which the variation display result is a miss when the second special symbol reserve memory count is 1 is calculated as 00 (ms), and from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special symbol reserve memory count is 1 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) × 80/100 + 7000 (ms) × 15/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 50 The average variation time K at which the variation display result is a miss when the second special symbol hold memory count is 2 is calculated as 00 (ms), and from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special symbol hold memory count is 2 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (C)), it is 3000 (ms) × 90/100 + 7000 (ms) × 5/100 + 40000 (ms) × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 The calculation is 4600 (ms), and the average variation time L at which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 is calculated from the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of reserved second special symbols is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (D)): 3000 (ms) × 95/100 + 40000 × 2/100 + 25000 (ms) × 3/100 = 4400 (ms).

Furthermore, based on the probability variation state shown in Figure 12-24(A), calculating the percentage of variable displays executed in the 110th and 1100th variable displays in the probability variation state for each case where the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 to 3, as shown in Figure 12-28(B), the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 (i and i') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 (j and j') is 0.9090909%, the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 2 (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable displays executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 (l and l') is 95.4545455%.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-28(C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') for one fluctuation in the probability variation state is calculated as follows: 8200 (ms) × 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) × 0.9090909/100 + 4600 (ms) × 2.7272727/100 + 4400 (ms) × 95.4545455/100 = 4445.455 (ms).

From the above, comparing the average fluctuation time per fluctuation in the pachinko game machine 1 in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-29, the average fluctuation time per fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is shorter than the average fluctuation time per fluctuation in time-saving state A (α and α') (α > β and α' > β'). Furthermore, the average fluctuation time per fluctuation in time-saving state B (β and β') is set to be shorter than the average fluctuation time per fluctuation in probability variation state (γ and γ') (γ > β and γ' > β').

Next, we calculate the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are performed in time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are performed in time-saving state B, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are performed in probability-increasing state, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are performed in time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are performed in time-saving state B, and the total average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuation displays are performed in probability-increasing state.

As shown in Figures 12-30(A) and 12-35, if the total average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed in time-saving state A is denoted as the period value χ, then the period value χ is calculated as α (or α') × 110 = 5393.633 (ms) × 110 = 593299.63 (ms). Similarly, if the total average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed in time-saving state B is denoted as the period value ψ, then the period value ψ is calculated as β (or β') × 110 = 1607.773 (ms) × 110 = 176855.03 (ms). Furthermore, if the total average variation time when 110 variation displays are performed during the probability variation state is denoted as the period value ω, then this period value ω is calculated as γ (or γ') × 110 = 4445.455 (ms) × 110 = 489000.05 (ms).

In other words, in this feature section 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B by 110 is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ is also set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in probability-changing state by 110 (χ > ψ and ω > ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-31(A) and 12-36, if the total average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed in time-saving state A is denoted as the period value χ', then the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α') × 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) × 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Also, if the total average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed in time-saving state B is denoted as the period value ψ', then the period value ψ' is calculated as β (or β') × 1100 = 1607.773 (ms) × 1100 = 1768550.3 (ms). Furthermore, if the total average variation time when 1100 variation displays are performed during the probability variation state is denoted as the period value ω', then the period value ω' is calculated as γ (or γ') × 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) × 1100 = 4890000.5 (ms).

In other words, in this feature section 099SG, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B by 1100 is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A by 110, and the period value ψ' is also set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in probability-changing state by 110 (χ' > ψ' and ω' > ψ').

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, with 3 reserved second special symbols. First, as shown in Figure 12-31(A), the period value δ, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A with 3 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as D × 110 = 5350 (ms) × 110 = 588500 (ms). Also, the period value ε, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state B with 3 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as H × 110 = 1500 (ms) × 110 = 165000 (ms). Furthermore, when 110 spins are performed in the probability variation state, with 3 special symbol reserve memories in the second special symbol, the average spin time, represented by the period value ζ, is calculated as L × 110 = 4400 (ms) × 110 = 484000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value δ is greater than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is also greater than the period value ε (δ > ε, ζ > ε).

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed per variation in Time-Saved State A, Time-Saved State B, and Probability Variation State, with 3 reserved second special symbols stored. First, as shown in Figure 12-31(B), the period value δ', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed per variation in Time-Saved State A with 3 reserved second special symbols stored, is calculated as D × 1100 = 5350 (ms) × 1100 = 5885000 (ms). Also, the period value ε', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed per variation in Time-Saved State B with 3 reserved second special symbols stored, is calculated as H × 1100 = 1500 (ms) × 1100 = 1650000 (ms). Furthermore, when 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state, with 3 second special symbol reserve memories, the average spin time, or period value ζ', is calculated as L × 1100 = 4400 (ms) × 1100 = 4,840,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value δ' is greater than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is also greater than the period value ε' (δ' > ε', ζ' > ε').

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, with 2 reserved second special symbols. First, as shown in Figure 12-32(A), the period value η, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A with 2 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as C × 110 = 5550 (ms) × 110 = 610500 (ms). Also, the period value θ, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state B with 2 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as G × 110 = 1735 (ms) × 110 = 190850 (ms). Then, when 110 variations are performed in the probability variation state, with 2 special symbol reserve memories in the second special symbol, the average variation time, i, is calculated as K × 110 = 4600 (ms) × 110 = 506000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-17, the variation value η is greater than the variation value θ, and the variation value i is also greater than the variation value θ (η > θ, i > θ).

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, with 2 reserved second special symbols. First, as shown in Figure 12-32(B), the period value η', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A with 2 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as C × 1100 = 5550 (ms) × 1100 = 6105000 (ms). Also, the period value θ', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state B with 2 reserved second special symbols, is calculated as G × 1100 = 1735 (ms) × 1100 = 1908500 (ms). Furthermore, when 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state, with 2 special symbol reserve memories in the second special symbol, the average spin time, i', is calculated as K × 1100 = 4600 (ms) × 1100 = 5,060,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-18, the spin time η' is greater than the spin time θ', and the spin time i' is greater than the spin time θ' (η' > θ', i' > θ').

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, with one second special symbol reserve memory. First, as shown in Figure 12-33(A), the period value κ, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A with one second special symbol reserve memory, is calculated as B × 110 = 5750 (ms) × 110 = 632500 (ms). Also, the period value λ, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state B with one second special symbol reserve memory, is calculated as F × 110 = 2205 (ms) × 110 = 242550 (ms). Then, when 110 variations are performed in the probability variation state, with one second special symbol held in memory, the average variation time, or period value μ, is calculated as J × 110 = 5000 (ms) × 110 = 550000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SF, as shown in Figure 12-19, the period value κ is greater than the period value λ, and the period value μ is also greater than the period value λ (κ > λ, μ > λ).

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saved State A, Time-Saved State B, and Probability Variation State, with one second special symbol reserve memory being stored for each variation. First, as shown in Figure 12-33(B), the period value κ', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saved State A with one second special symbol reserve memory being stored for each variation, is calculated as B × 1100 = 5750 (ms) × 1100 = 6,325,000 (ms). Also, the period value λ', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saved State B with one second special symbol reserve memory being stored for each variation, is calculated as F × 1100 = 2205 (ms) × 1100 = 2,425,500 (ms). Furthermore, when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the probability variation state, with one second special symbol reserve memory, the average fluctuation time, which is the period value μ', is calculated as J × 1100 = 5000 (ms) × 1100 = 5,500,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SF, as shown in Figure 12-20, the period value κ' is greater than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is also greater than the period value λ' (κ' > λ', μ' > λ').

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state, with the number of second special symbol reserve memories set to 0. First, as shown in Figure 12-34(A), the period value ν, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in time-saving state A with the number of second special symbol reserve memories set to 0, is calculated as B × 110 = 9150 (ms) × 110 = 1,006,500 (ms). Also, the period value ξ, which is the average variation time when 110 variations are performed in time-saving state B with the number of second special symbol reserve memories set to 0, is calculated as E × 110 = 5600 (ms) × 110 = 616,000 (ms). Furthermore, when 110 spins are performed in the probability variation state, with the number of reserved second special symbols being 0, the average spin time, which is the period value π, is calculated as I × 110 = 8200 (ms) × 110 = 902000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in Figure 12-21, the period value ν is greater than the period value ξ, and the period value π is also greater than the period value ξ (ν > ξ, π > ξ).

Furthermore, we will compare the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability Variation State, with the number of reserved second special symbols being 0. First, as shown in Figure 12-34(B), the period value ν', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saving State A with the number of reserved second special symbols being 0, is calculated as B × 1100 = 9150 (ms) × 1100 = 10065000 (ms). Also, the period value ξ', which is the average variation time when 1100 variations are performed in Time-Saving State B with the number of reserved second special symbols being 0, is calculated as E × 1100 = 5600 (ms) × 1100 = 6160000 (ms). Furthermore, when 1100 spins are performed in the probability variation state, with the number of second special symbol reserve memories being 0, the average spin time, which is the period value π', is calculated as I × 1100 = 8200 (ms) × 1100 = 9,020,000 (ms). In other words, in this feature unit 099SE, as shown in Figure 12-22, the period value ν' is greater than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is also greater than the period value ξ' (ν' > ξ', π' > ξ').

In other words, in this feature unit 099SG, when comparing the time required for 110 fluctuation displays in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, as shown in Figure 12-30(A), the time required for these 110 fluctuation displays is set shortest in time-saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). Furthermore, when comparing the time required for 1100 fluctuation displays in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, as shown in Figure 12-30(B), the time required for these 1100 fluctuation displays is also set lowest in time-saving state B (χ’>ψ’, ω’>ψ’).

Furthermore, when comparing the time required to display 110 spins in each of the following states—Time-Saved State A, Time-Saved State B, and Probability-Boosting State—with 110 spins per spin and 0 reserved symbols in the second special symbol memory, as shown in Figure 12-34(A), the time required to display 110 spins is set shortest in Time State B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). Similarly, when comparing the time required to display 1100 spins in each of the following states—Time-Saved State A, Time-Saved State B, and Probability-Boosting State—with 1100 spins per spin and 0 reserved symbols in the second special symbol memory, as shown in Figure 12-34(B), the time required to display 1100 spins is set shortest in Time State B (ν’>ξ’, π’>ξ’).

Furthermore, when comparing the time required to display 110 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 1 spin per spin and 1 second special symbol reserve memory, as shown in Figure 12-33(A), the time required to display 110 spins is set shortest in time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). Also, when comparing the time required to display 1100 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 1100 spins per spin and 1 second special symbol reserve memory, as shown in Figure 12-33(B), the time required to display 1100 spins is set shortest in time state B (κ’>λ’, μ’>λ’).

Furthermore, when comparing the time required to display 110 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 110 spins per spin and 2 second special symbol reserve memory slots, as shown in Figure 12-32(A), the time required to display 110 spins is set shortest in time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). Also, when comparing the time required to display 1100 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 1100 spins per spin and 2 second special symbol reserve memory slots, as shown in Figure 12-32(B), the time required to display 1100 spins is set shortest in time state B (η’>θ’, ι’>θ’).

Furthermore, when comparing the time required to display 110 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 3 second special symbol reserves, as shown in Figure 12-31(A), the time required to display 110 spins is set shortest in time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). Also, when comparing the time required to display 1100 spins in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, with 3 second special symbol reserves, as shown in Figure 12-31(B), the time required to display 1100 spins is set shortest in time state B (δ’>ε’, ζ’>ε’).

In other words, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state of this feature unit 099SG, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 0 second special symbol reserve memory units, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 1 second special symbol reserve memory unit, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 2 second special symbol reserve memory units, and when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 3 second special symbol reserve memory units, time-saving state B is set to have the highest rotation efficiency for special symbols (the shortest average rotation display time required per rotation). Furthermore, even when the player plays without worrying about the number of reserved special symbols in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State (when the variation display for each reserved symbol count is performed 110 or 1100 times at the rates shown in Figures 12-26(B), 12-27(B), and 12-28(B)), Time-Saving State B is set to have the highest variation efficiency for special symbols (the average variation display time required per variation is shortest).

In summary, the pachinko game machine 1 with the feature section 099SG can be controlled to enter a time-saving state B, which has a higher efficiency of special symbol fluctuations than the time-saving state A and probability variation states of conventional pachinko game machines, thereby suppressing a decline in the player's motivation to play.

For example, in conventional pachinko machines, even if, after a jackpot ends, the machine remains in a low-probability state (e.g., normal state (low probability/low base state)) and does not control for another jackpot, and a variable display is shown for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times if the jackpot probability is approximately 1/300, or about three times the denominator of the jackpot probability), it will not be controlled to the time-saving state B as in the pachinko machine 1 of feature section 099SG. At this point, the player has already gone through approximately three times the denominator of the jackpot probability, meaning they continue playing for a long time without a jackpot, and their investment increases. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, requiring further investment, which could significantly decrease the player's motivation to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine 1 with feature section 099SG, where control to time-saving state B is possible, if, after the end of a jackpot, the machine is in a low-probability state (for example, normal state (low probability/low base state)) and a predetermined number of variable displays (for example, approximately 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) occur without being controlled for another jackpot, then the machine is controlled to time-saving state B. This control continues for a specific number of variable displays (for example, 1100 times, or up to approximately 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, having already gone approximately 3 times the jackpot probability without a win, the player has been playing for a long time without a jackpot, and their investment has increased considerably. However, by being controlled to time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed, and the possibility of a jackpot increases, thus preventing a decline in the player's motivation to continue playing.

In particular, in feature section 099SG, since the player has already invested a considerable amount of time and effort by the time the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, time-saving state B functions as a game state that, in a sense, rescues the player by shortening the time until the game state is controlled to a jackpot state by executing the variable display of losing outcomes with the shortest possible variation time.

Furthermore, in the feature unit 099SG, regardless of whether the number of reserved memories is fixed to 0 to 3, the time-saving state B has the highest variation efficiency compared to time-saving state A and the probability variation state. In addition, the execution rate of various effects (for example, pre-announcement effects such as countdown announcements, reserved change announcements, symbol chance eye announcements, and effect display announcements, as well as announcement effects such as movable body announcements, character announcements, reach announcements, and button announcements) described in Figure 11-36 (and the diagram showing the feature points related to Figure 11-36) of the feature unit 069SG is lower than the execution rate of various effects in time-saving state A and the probability variation state (the execution rate of various effects in feature unit 099SG is the same as the execution rate of various effects described in Figure 11-36 of the feature unit 069SG). Therefore, even if a player continues playing for a long time without a big win, and their investment increases, leading to discouragement, if the game is controlled to Time-Saving State B, regardless of whether the number of reserved balls is fixed at 0 to 3, or whether the game is played with the number of reserved balls at 0 to 3, the game can efficiently process the balls with minimal unnecessary excitement, thus providing a suitable Time-Saving State B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-15, 12-17, 12-19, and 12-21, this feature unit 099SG calculates and compares the average fluctuation time in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state by multiplying it by 110. This indicates that the time it takes to process 110 fluctuation displays out of 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (total time for 110 fluctuation displays) is shorter than the time it takes to process 110 fluctuation displays in time-saving state A or probability-changing state. If the time it takes to process 110 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B were the same (or approximately the same) as the time it takes to process 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B, the time it takes to process 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B would be several times longer than the time it takes to process 110 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B. In this case, if the game state is controlled to time-saving state B, the prolonged processing time could cause discomfort or dissatisfaction to the player. Therefore, the present invention aims to provide a pachinko game machine 1 that can suitably control the game state to shortened time state B by increasing the fluctuation efficiency in shortened time state B compared to shortened time state A and the probability variation state, thereby preventing players from feeling dissatisfied when controlled to shortened time state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-16, 12-18, 12-20, and 12-22, the feature unit 099SG calculates and compares the average fluctuation time in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state by multiplying it by 1100. This is because, by being controlled multiple times in time-saving state A and probability-changing state, the fluctuation display in time-saving state A and probability-changing state is executed 1100 times, the same number as the maximum number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B. By comparing the fluctuation times for these 1100 times in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability-changing state, it is shown that time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency, and that it is possible to control the system to time-saving state B appropriately so that the fluctuation display does not cause dissatisfaction to the player.

This design ensures that when the system is controlled multiple times in either the time-saving state A or the probability variation state, and the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state A or the probability variation state is the same as the maximum number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (1100 times), time-saving state B is designed to have the highest fluctuation efficiency. Therefore, even when compared to time-saving state A or the probability variation state, time-saving state B is the most efficient. Thus, the system avoids dissatisfaction with the fluctuations in time-saving state B, and as a result, it optimally controls the system to time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-30(A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B, by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A, by 110. Additionally, the period value ψ is set to be smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variation state, by 110. Therefore, because the fluctuation efficiency of time-saving state B is higher than that of time-saving state A and the probability variation state, the time until the game is controlled to a jackpot state is shortened, reducing player dissatisfaction in time-saving state B. As a result, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided. In particular, as mentioned above, in this feature section 099SG, by increasing the variation efficiency in time-saving state B compared to time-saving state A and probability variation state, the period until control to a jackpot game state is shortened, thereby reducing player dissatisfaction. Furthermore, in time-saving state A and probability variation state (time-saving state A and probability variation state, where variation displays with longer special symbol variation times are more likely to occur than in time-saving state B), predetermined effects that suggest control to a jackpot game state can be executed for an appropriate period of time during the variation display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-30(B), the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B, by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A, by 1100. Additionally, the period value ψ' is set to be smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the probability variation state, by 1100. Therefore, because the fluctuation efficiency of time-saving state B is higher than that of time-saving state A and the probability variation state, the time until the game is controlled to a jackpot state is shortened, reducing player dissatisfaction in time-saving state B. As a result, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided. In particular, as mentioned above, in this feature section 099SG, by increasing the variation efficiency in time-saving state B compared to time-saving state A and probability variation state, the period until control to a jackpot game state is shortened, thereby reducing player dissatisfaction. Furthermore, in time-saving state A and probability variation state (time-saving state A and probability variation state, where variation displays with longer special symbol variation times are more likely to occur than in time-saving state B), predetermined effects that suggest control to a jackpot game state can be executed for an appropriate period of time during the variation display.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-21, the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times) is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times). Additionally, the period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in the probability variation state (110 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-22, the period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (1100 times) is set to be smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (1100 times). Additionally, the period value ξ' is set to be smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display executed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 0 in the probability variation state (1100 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-19, the period value λ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times) is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times). Moreover, this period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in the probability variation state (110 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-20, the period value λ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (1100 times) is set to be smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (1100 times). Moreover, this period value λ' is set to be smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 1 in the probability variation state (1100 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-17, the period value θ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times) is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times). Additionally, the period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in the probability variation state (110 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-18, the period value θ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B. Moreover, the period value θ' is set to be smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when there are 2 second special symbol reserve memories in the probability variation state by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-15, the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times) is set to be smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in time-saving state B (110 times). Moreover, the period value ε is set to be smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in the probability variation state (110 times) in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-16, the period value ε' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in time-saving state B by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B is set to be smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in time-saving state A by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B. Moreover, the period value ε' is set to be smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the losing fluctuation display performed when the number of second special symbol reserves is 3 in the probability variation state by the number of fluctuation displays in 1100 in time-saving state B. Therefore, the fluctuation display in time-saving state B can progress faster than in time-saving state A or the probability variation state, thereby improving the enjoyment of playing in time-saving state B.

Furthermore, the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 099SG is capable of displaying the variation of ordinary symbols in addition to the variation of special symbols, and when the variation of the ordinary symbols results in a win (ordinary symbol win), the game ball can enter the second starting prize slot, which has changed from a closed state to an open state. Moreover, the pachinko game machine 1 is capable of displaying the variation of the first special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting prize slot, and is also capable of displaying the variation of the second special symbol based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting prize slot, and has a first special symbol reserve storage unit 099SG151A and a second special symbol reserve storage unit 099SG151B that can store information on the variation of special symbols that have not yet been displayed as a reserve storage. Both the first special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151A and the second special symbol hold memory unit 099SG151B are set to a maximum of 4 hold memories, and the upper limit of this maximum hold memory number does not change depending on the game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-2(B) and 12-2(D), the probability of a normal symbol win occurring in the normal symbol variation display is the same whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B. Additionally, the opening time of the second starting prize entry point when a normal symbol win occurs is set to a common 3 seconds, regardless of whether the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B. Therefore, when the game state is time-saving state A or time-saving state B, the game balls launched by the launching device towards the second path in the right game area can enter (become prizes) into gate 41 or the second starting prize entry point. Thus, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 099SG, much of the gameplay can be standardized between time-saving state A and time-saving state B, preventing confusion for players due to significant differences in gameplay between time-saving state A and time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in the feature section 099SG, when the game state is either time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or probability-changing state, the average variation time is calculated as the period from the start timing of the variation display of the special symbol to the end timing of the variation display, and the calculated average variation time is multiplied by "110" or "1100", which is the number of variation displays when the game state is either probability-changing state, time-saving state B, or probability-changing state, to calculate each period value. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the average variation time may be calculated as the period from the timing when the game ball is launched, or when the launched game ball enters the starting prize entry, to the end timing of the variation display based on the starting prize entry, and the calculated average variation time is multiplied by "110" or "1100", which is the number of variation displays when the game state is either probability-changing state, time-saving state B, or probability-changing state to calculate each period value. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately obtain the duration values for each game state through measurement.

Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four, regardless of the game state. As shown in Figure 12-13, the period values for each state (Shortened Time State A, Shortened Time State B, and Probability Variation State) are calculated by multiplying the ratio of the variation display performed by each reserved memory number to 110 variation displays by the average variation time of each reserved memory number, and then summing these values. Therefore, an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A, and the period value when the second special symbol variation display is performed in time-saving state A is α, then the period value α is calculated by the value of A × a + B × b + C × c + D × d. Here, A is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 0, a is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 0 to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state A, B is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 1, and b is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 1 to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state A. C is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 2; c is the ratio of variation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in said time-saving state A; D is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A; and d is the ratio of variation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 110 variation displays in said time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α in the above way, an accurate period value α for time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B, and the duration value when the second special symbol's variation display is executed in time-saving state B is β, then the duration value β is calculated by the value of E × e + F × f + G × g + H × h. Here, E is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 0, e is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 0 to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B, F is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 1, and f is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 1 to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B. G is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B is 2. g is the ratio of variation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B. H is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B. h is the ratio of variation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the 110 variation displays in time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, an accurate period value β for time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, and the period value when the second special symbol variation display is executed in that probability variation state is γ, then the period value γ is calculated by the value of I × i + J × j + K × k + L × l. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 0, i is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 0 to the 110 variation displays in that probability variation state, J is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 1, and j is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 1 to the 110 variation displays in that probability variation state. K is the average time during which the spin display result is a miss when there are 2 reserved symbols in the second special symbol state. k is the ratio of spin displays when there are 2 reserved symbols in the second special symbol state to the total of 110 spin displays in that state. L is the average time during which the spin display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved symbols in the second special symbol state. l is the ratio of spin displays when there are 3 reserved symbols in the second special symbol state to the total of 110 spin displays in that state. By calculating the period value γ as described above, an accurate period value γ for the bonus state corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

Furthermore, the maximum number of reserved data (reserved memories) that can be stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 099SG151B is four, regardless of the game state. As shown in Figure 12-14, the period values for each state (Shortened Time State A, Shortened Time State B, and Probability Variation State) are calculated by multiplying the ratio of the variation display performed by each reserved memory number to 1100 variation displays by the average variation time of each reserved memory number, and then summing these values. Therefore, an accurate period value can be obtained corresponding to the number of reserved memories.

In particular, if the game state is time-saving state A, and the period value when the second special symbol variation display is performed in time-saving state A is α', then the period value α' is calculated by the value of A × a' + B × b' + C × c' + D × d'. Here, A is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 0, a' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 0 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state A, B is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 1, and b' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state A is 1 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state A. C is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A is 2; c' is the ratio of the variation display when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state A; D is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A; and d' is the ratio of the variation display when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state A to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state A. By calculating the period value α' in this way, an accurate period value α' for time-saving state A corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the game state is time-saving state B, and the duration value when the second special symbol's variation display is executed in time-saving state B is β', then the duration value β' is calculated by the value of E × e' + F × f' + G × g' + H × h'. Here, E is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 0, e' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 0 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B, F is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 1, and f' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in time-saving state B is 1 to the 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B. G is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B is 2. g' is the ratio of variation displays when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B. H is the average variation time during which the variation display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B. h' is the ratio of variation displays when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in time-saving state B to the total of 1100 variation displays in time-saving state B. By calculating the period value β' as described above, an accurate period value β' for time-saving state B corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

Furthermore, if the game state is a probability variation state, and the period value when the second special symbol variation display is executed in that probability variation state is γ', then the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I × i' + J × j' + K × k' + L × l'. Here, I is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 0, i' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 0 to the 1100 variation displays in that probability variation state, J is the average variation time when the variation display result is a miss when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 1, and j' is the ratio of variation displays when the number of second special symbol reserves in the probability variation state is 1 to the 1100 variation displays in that probability variation state. K is the average time during which the display result is a miss when the number of reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state is 2. k' is the ratio of the display when there are 2 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total number of display spins in 1100 spins in that probability variation state. L is the average time during which the display result is a miss when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state. l' is the ratio of the display when there are 3 reserved second special symbols in the probability variation state to the total number of display spins in 1100 spins in that probability variation state. By calculating the period value γ' as described above, an accurate period value γ' for the probability variation state corresponding to the number of reserved symbols can be obtained.

As described above, in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability variation state of this feature unit 099SG, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 0 second special symbol reserve memory units, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 1 second special symbol reserve memory unit, when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 2 second special symbol reserve memory units, and when 110 or 1100 rotations are performed with 3 second special symbol reserve memory units, time-saving state B is set to have the highest rotation efficiency for special symbols (the shortest average rotation display time required per rotation). Furthermore, even when the player plays without worrying about the number of reserved special symbols in Time-Saving State A, Time-Saving State B, and Probability-Boosting State (when the variation display for each reserved symbol count is performed 110 or 1100 times at the rates shown in Figures 12-26(B), 12-27(B), and 12-28(B)), Time-Saving State B is set to have the highest variation efficiency for special symbols (the average variation display time required per variation is shortest).

Furthermore, in this feature section 099SG, an example was given in which the variation efficiency in time-saving state B is shown to be the highest by comparing the values obtained by multiplying the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 in probability state by 110 or 1100. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the values multiplied by each of the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 in probability state may be values other than 110 or 1099, such as 109 or 1099. The reason for multiplying each of the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state A, the average variation time of 1 in time-saving state B, and the average variation time of 1 in probability state by 109 or 1099 is that the first variation in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and probability state almost always starts with a reserve memory count of 0. Furthermore, if the final five spins in three states—Shortened Time State A, Shortened Time State B, and Probability Change State—or in two states—Shortened Time State A and Probability Change State—are to be longer in special symbol spin time at a higher rate than other spins, then the value may be multiplied by 104, 1094, etc., excluding the first and last five spins of each state (a total of six spins).

(Explanation of feature section 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the feature unit 018SG will be described based on Figures 13-1 to 13-23. Figure 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the feature unit 018SG. Figure 13-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a low base state (A) and a specific example of a variation pattern determination table in a high base state (B). In this feature unit 018SG, the same configuration as that of the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature units 069SG and 099SG will not be illustrated or described in detail, and the differences will be explained mainly. Furthermore, the feature configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature unit 018SG, which will be described below, can be applied to the pachinko game machine 1 of the feature units 069SG and 099SG.

Figure 13-1 shows the variation patterns in the feature unit 018SG. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is a "miss," specifically when the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," as well as to cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or "minor win." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "not a reach" is called the non-reach variation pattern (also called the "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbols is "a reach" is called the reach variation pattern (also called the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to a "jackpot" result is called the jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the super reach variation patterns, multiple normal reach variation patterns, such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ..., may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation rate (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern may be different. Furthermore, while super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to these, and only one type of super reach variation pattern may be provided, similar to the normal reach variation patterns.

As shown in Figure 13-1, the variable display time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, where the reach animation for a normal reach is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern. Furthermore, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period for the super reach β variation pattern is longer (80 seconds) than the variable display period for the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds). On the other hand, the variable display period for the super reach γ miss variation pattern is shorter (40 seconds) than the variable display period for the super reach α miss variation pattern (45 seconds), as it is a miss variation pattern for high base settings, as will be described later.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, instead of first determining the type of variation pattern (e.g., non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc.) and then determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type, the variation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination without first determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, a random value for variation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of variation pattern may be determined first from these random values for variation pattern type determination, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 13-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the method for determining the variation pattern when the game state is the normal state (low base state). When the variable display result is "Big Win" in the normal state (low base state), the Big Win Variation Pattern Determination Table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table from PB1-1 (Variation pattern for Normal Reach Big Win), PB1-2 (Variation pattern for Super Reach α Big Win), and PB1-3 (Variation pattern for Super Reach β Big Win). In the Big Win Variation Pattern Determination Table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values to PB1-2, and 300 determination values to PB1-3. In other words, when the game state is the low base state and the variable display result is "Big Win," the determination rate increases in the order of Normal Reach, Super Reach α, and Super Reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved variable symbols is two or less, the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PA1-1 (variation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach β miss). Specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 to PA2-1, 90 to PA2-2, and 7 to PA2-3.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern for non-reach misses), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach misses), PA2-2 (variation pattern for Super Reach α misses), and PA2-3 (variation pattern for Super Reach β misses). Specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 to PA2-1, 90 to PA2-2, and 7 to PA2-3.

Figure 13-2(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the method for determining the variation pattern when the game state is a time-saving state (high base state). When the variable display result is "Big Win" in the time-saving state (high base state), the Big Win Variation Pattern Determination Table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this Big Win Variation Pattern Determination Table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach big win) and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach γ big win). In the Big Win Variation Pattern Determination Table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, when the game state is a high base state and the variable display result is "Big Win," the determination rate is higher for normal reach, followed by super reach γ.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss," the miss pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table D from PA1-4 (variation pattern for non-reach misses), PA2-1 (variation pattern for normal reach misses), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach γ misses). Specifically, in the miss pattern determination table D, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

(Regarding various performances)
Next, the various effects performed during the Super Reach sequence will be explained based on Figures 13-3 to 13-5. Figure 13-3 shows the execution period of various effects in the winning variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. Figure 13-4 shows the execution period of various effects in the losing variation patterns of Super Reach α, β, and γ. In Figure 13-5, (A) is a diagram to explain the content of the various effects, and (B) is a diagram to explain the character types.

The CPU 120 for controlling the performance (not specifically shown in the diagram) executes a normal reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "N-reach performance") as a variable display performance when the decorative symbols are displayed variably based on a normal reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display. After that, the variable display of the decorative symbols ends without developing into a super reach performance (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP-reach performance").

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern, the variable display of decorative symbols is performed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C during the period from the start of the variable display timing ta0 until a predetermined period has elapsed (ta0 to ta1) (see Figure 13-9 (N1)). Furthermore, the light emission patterns of the game effect lamps 9 and movable LEDs 208 during this period (ta0 to ta1) are set as follows: in the low base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of normal background effects; and in the high base state, the light emission patterns correspond to multiple types of music. By combining the light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of normal background effects and multiple types of music with the light emission patterns corresponding to various SP reach effects, the effect can be enhanced with a variety of light emission patterns.

At timing ta1, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variable display (ta0), the variable display mode is changed to the normal reach display mode, and the "N reach performance" is executed as a variable display performance for a predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). Then, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super reach display mode, and the "SP reach performance" is executed as a variable display performance for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

Thus, the "N-Reach演出" (N-Reach演出) is a common effect executed in both normal reach variation patterns and super reach variation patterns. In the normal reach variation pattern, it ends without developing into the "SP-Reach演出" (SP-Reach演出), while in the super reach variation pattern, it develops into the "SP-Reach演出". Therefore, even in the normal reach variation pattern, players can expect the execution of the "N-Reach演出" to lead to the "SP-Reach演出 A-E" described later.

As shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, "SP Reach Performances A to E" are performances that notify whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, that is, whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss." During the SP Reach Performance period, the "Decision Performance" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in Figure 13-3, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the completion of "SP Reach Performances A to E," the "Post-Event Performance" described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7), after which the variable display ends. Thus, the variable display based on the Super Reach Variation Patterns of SP Reach α, β, and γ consists of a variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of decorative symbols, and a post-event performance part (ta5 to ta7) that notifies the expected number of balls that can be obtained in the jackpot game state after the completion of the variable display part.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13-4, if the variable display result is a miss, the variable display ends at the same time as the "SP Reach Performance A-E" ends. After the notification of a miss ends (ta5-ta5A), the screen returns to the normal background screen with the confirmed decorative symbols of the predetermined reach combinations that are not winning combinations in a temporarily stopped (shaking) state, and this temporary stopped display continues until the symbol confirmation period begins.

Next, we will explain the various effects performed in the Super Reach variation pattern. As shown in Figure 13-5(A), when the variation pattern is the Super Reach α variation pattern, "SP Reach Effect A" is performed as the SP Reach effect. When the variation pattern is the Super Reach β variation pattern, "SP Reach Effect B" or "SP Reach Effect C" is performed as the SP Reach effect. When the variation pattern is the Super Reach α variation pattern, "SP Reach Effect D" or "SP Reach Effect E" is performed as the SP Reach effect.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13-5(B), in "SP Reach Performance B-E" other than "SP Reach Performance A," allied character A-1, allied character A-2 (different from allied character A-1), and enemy character X-1, enemy character X-2 (different from enemy character X-1) can appear. Note that the number of allied and enemy character types is not limited to those listed above; other allied and enemy characters may also appear. Also, even for the same character, the expected outcome may differ depending on the display method.

"SP Reach Performance A" is executed when the SP Reach α variation pattern is determined while the game is in the normal state (low base state). This performance displays a video of a bowling challenge. A "jackpot" is announced if all pins fall down, and a "miss" is announced if none of the pins fall down. Note that the ally characters A-1 and A-2, and enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed in the bowling challenge video.

"SP Reach Performance B" is an effect that can be executed when the SP Reach β variation pattern is determined while the game is in the normal state (low base state). It displays a video of "Battle A," where ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 confront each other in the city. If ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1, a "Big Win" is announced; if ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1, a "Miss" is announced.

"SP Reach演出 C" is an animation that can be executed when the SP Reach β variation pattern is determined while the game is in the normal state (low base state). It displays a video of "Battle A," where ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 confront each other in the city. If ally character A-2 defeats enemy character X-2, a "Big Win" is announced; if ally character A-2 fails to defeat enemy character X-2, a "Miss" is announced.

"SP Reach Performance D" is an effect that can be executed when the SP Reach γ variation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-Saving State A, Probability-Boosting State, or Time-Saving State B (High Base State). This performance displays a video of "Battle B," where ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 confront each other in a wasteland. If ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1, a "Big Win" is announced; if ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-1, a "Miss" is announced.

The "SP Reach Performance E" is a performance that can be executed when the SP Reach γ variation pattern is determined while the game state is either Time-Saving State A, Probability-Boosting State, or Time-Saving State B (High Base State). It displays a video of "Battle B," where ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 confront each other in a wasteland. If ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2, a "Big Win" is announced; if ally character A-1 fails to defeat enemy character X-2, a "Miss" is announced.

Furthermore, the probability of winning is higher with the Super Reach β variation pattern than with the Super Reach α variation pattern. Therefore, the probability of winning is higher with SP Reach B and SP Reach C than with SP Reach A (Probability of winning: SP Reach A < SP Reach B < SP Reach C).

The "decisive performance" is a performance that is executed for a predetermined period (for example, ta3 to ta5) starting from a predetermined time after a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of SP Reach performances A to E (for example, the time ta3 when the final bowling or battle showdown begins near the end of the SP Reach performance). Specifically, it includes a "win/fail button performance" that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B during the operation validity period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, and a "movable body performance" that is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period, or when the operation validity period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot. It is an effect in which the movable body 32 drops from its origin position to the effect position at the timing when the operation of push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period, or at the timing when the operation validity period ends without any detection of push button 31B operation. If the variable display result is a miss, the effect is not executed at the timing when the operation of push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period, or at the timing when the operation validity period ends without any detection of push button 31B operation.

Furthermore, in response to the execution of the movable body effect (the dropping of the movable body 32), the display screen of the image display device 5 displays an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32. In addition, a lighting effect is performed, in which the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9 light up in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow lighting). A vibration effect is also performed, in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. Finally, a sound effect is produced, in which a predetermined sound effect is output.

Furthermore, in SP Reach演出 A, neither ally nor enemy characters are displayed during the bowling match, and therefore no characters are displayed in the movable figure animation either. In contrast, in SP Reach演出 B through E, both ally and enemy characters are displayed during the battle match, and consequently, the enemy characters displayed during the battle match are also displayed in the movable figure animation.

In this way, the "decisive animation" works as follows: if the variable display result is a jackpot, the win/loss button animation is performed, followed by the execution of the movable body animation, resulting in a jackpot notification. If the variable display result is a loss, the win/loss button animation is performed, but the movable body animation is not executed, and a loss notification is given.

"Post-event演出A" is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot while the game state is in the normal state (low base state), after the SP Reach演出A-C has announced that the game state has been controlled to a jackpot state. Specifically, in SP Reach演出A-C, after the confirmed jackpot combinations of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the jackpot confirmation is announced, the re-draw variation part (ta5-ta6) is executed in which the confirmed decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are re-displayed, and the re-draw result part (ta6-ta7) is executed in which the display result is announced when the confirmed decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R after the re-display is executed in the re-draw variation part. The execution period of Post-event演出A (ta5-ta7) is set to "10 seconds".

In this embodiment, during SP Reach sequences A to C, a confirmed symbol consisting of an even-numbered combination (e.g., 666) is temporarily displayed. After the re-variation display begins in the re-draw variation part, a confirmed symbol consisting of either an even-numbered combination or an odd-numbered combination is displayed in the re-draw result part. If a confirmed symbol consisting of an even-numbered combination is displayed in the re-draw result part, it is announced that this is "Big Win A," which will be controlled to a time-saving state A after the end of the big win game state. If a confirmed symbol consisting of an odd-numbered combination is displayed (symbol upgrade), it is announced that this is "Big Win B," which will be controlled to a probability variation state after the end of the big win game state.

Furthermore, in the post-event sequence A of SP Reach sequence A, since no characters appear in SP Reach sequence A, no characters appear in post-event sequence A either. Similarly, in the post-event sequences A of SP Reach sequences B and C, characters appear in SP Reach sequences B and C, but not in post-event sequence A. By doing this, even when SP Reach sequence A, which does not feature characters, is executed, post-event sequence A is executed in a manner that does not feature characters, thereby enhancing the effect of the sequence.

"Post-event performance B" is executed after it is announced in SP reach performances D and E that the game state will be controlled to a jackpot state when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time-saving state A, probability change state, or time-saving state B (high base state). Specifically, in SP reach performances D and E, after the confirmed decorative symbols that are predetermined jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R and the jackpot confirmation is announced, the planned payout addition part (ta5 to ta6) is displayed in accordance with the attack of the enemy character by the ally character that appeared in SP reach performances D and E, and the planned payout notification part (ta6 to ta7) is displayed after the ally character delivers the final blow to the enemy character, the planned payout is stopped and the planned payout is announced, and then the confirmed decorative symbols that are a jackpot combination are stopped and the variable display ends. Furthermore, the execution period for post-event staging B (ta5-ta7) is set at "15 seconds," which is longer than the execution period for post-event staging A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP Reach α is 45 seconds, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP Reach β is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP Reach γ is 40 seconds. In other words, the variable display part period decreases in the order of SP Reach β, SP Reach α, and SP Reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A): SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ).

Furthermore, the time elapsed from the start of variable display to reaching N-reach (ta0-ta1) differs for SP Reach α, β, and γ. The time elapsed from the start of variable display to reaching N-reach (ta0-ta1) for SP Reach γ is shorter than the time elapsed from the start of variable display to reaching N-reach (ta0-ta1) for SP Reach α and β (ta0-ta1; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

Furthermore, the execution period of the N-reach animation (ta1-ta2) differs for SP Reach α, β, and γ. The execution period of the N-reach animation in SP Reach γ (ta1-ta2) is shorter than that of SP Reach α and β (ta1-ta2; SP Reach γ < SP Reach α, β).

Furthermore, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP Reach α, β, and γ differ, becoming longer in the following order: SP Reach γ (SP Reach Performance D, E), SP Reach α (SP Reach Performance A), and SP Reach β (SP Reach Performance B, C) {ta2 to ta5; SP Reach γ (SP Reach Performance D, E) < SP Reach α (SP Reach Performance A) < SP Reach β (SP Reach Performance B, C)}.

Furthermore, the variable display period (40 seconds) of SP Reach γ is shorter than that of SP Reach α (45 seconds) and SP Reach β (80 seconds) (variable display period: SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ). In SP Reach γ (SP Reach演出 D, E), after the decisive performance ends, the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols is displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. The execution period of post-event animation B (ta5-ta7) is longer than the execution period of post-event animation A (ta5-ta7) in SP Reach α (SP Reach animation A) and SP Reach β (SP Reach animations B and C), which is from the end of the decisive animation until the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols is displayed in the respective decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (ta5-ta7; SP Reach γ (15 seconds) > SP Reach α, β (10 seconds)).

Furthermore, the execution period of the "decisive animation" in SP Reach animations A to E (ta3 to ta5) is common to all SP Reach animations A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP Reach animation A = SP Reach animation B = SP Reach animation C = SP Reach animation D = SP Reach animation E). Therefore, the control data for the movable body 32 and movable body LED 208 in SP Reach animations A to E can be standardized, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. In addition, the execution period of the "win/fail button animation" and the "movable body animation" in the "decisive animation" are also common to all SP Reach animations A to E.

Furthermore, the execution period for "Post-Event Performances A and B" in SP Reach α, β, and γ is set to the time from ta5, when the confirmed decorative symbols representing a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification for SP Reach Performances A to E, to ta7, when the confirmed decorative symbols representing the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (the variable display ends) (ta5 to ta7). This makes it easier to recognize the timing of the execution of the post-event performance and increases attention to post-event performances A and B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and "Post-Event Performances A and B" may also be executed during the symbol confirmation period that begins after the confirmed decorative symbols representing the predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, or during the jackpot fanfare period.

Furthermore, the variable display period for SP Reach γ (high base) is shorter than that of SP Reach β (low base) (ta0-ta7: SP Reach γ < SP Reach β). In SP Reach γ, the period from the end of the "movable body animation" (ta4) to the stop display of the predetermined winning combination (ta7) is longer than the period from the end of the "movable body animation" (ta4) to the stop display of the predetermined winning combination (ta7) in SP Reach β (ta4-ta7: SP Reach γ > SP Reach β). By doing this, in SP Reach γ, which is executed with a short variable display period, the impression of the variable display can be enhanced even with a short variable display period by extending the period after the end of the "movable body animation."

Furthermore, the execution period (ta5-ta7) for "Post-Event A" corresponding to each of SP Reach Events A-C is the same for all, and the execution period (ta5-ta7) for "Post-Event B" corresponding to each of SP Reach Events D and E is also the same for all. This makes it easier to reuse the control data for Post-Event Events A and B, especially the character movement control data for Post-Event Event B, thus reducing manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, while the execution period (ta5-ta7) of "Post-event演出 A" corresponding to each of SP Reach演出 A-C is the same, and the execution period (ta5-ta7) of "Post-event演出 B" corresponding to each of SP Reach演出 D and E is also the same, the execution period of "Post-event演出 A" (10 seconds) and "Post-event演出 B" (15 seconds) are different. By making the execution period of Post-event演出 A corresponding to each of SP Reach演出 A-C the same, it becomes easier to standardize the content and control of the effects, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. Additionally, by executing Post-event演出 B with a different execution period, it is possible to prevent Post-event演出 A and B from becoming monotonous, thereby enhancing the effect of the post-event effects.

(Operation patterns of SP Reach演出 A to E and Post-event演出 A and B)
Next, the operation patterns of SP Reach演出 A to E and post-event演出 A and B when the variable display result is a jackpot will be explained based on Figure 13-6. Figure 13-6 shows (A) the character display patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E, (B) the LED lighting patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E, and (C) the BGM and sound effect output patterns in SP Reach演出 A to E.

As shown in Figure 13-6(A), the character display patterns in SP Reach sequences A to E are as follows: During the bowling and battle sequences (ta2 to ta3) in the SP Reach sequences, no characters are displayed in SP Reach sequence A; in SP Reach sequence B, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed; in SP Reach sequence C, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed; in SP Reach sequence D, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed; and in SP Reach sequence E, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 are displayed. Thus, SP Reach sequence A is a sequence where no characters are displayed, while SP Reach sequences B to E are sequences where characters are displayed.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Trigger" in the SP Reach演出 (Special Reach演出), no characters are displayed in SP Reach演出 A through E. However, during the execution period of the "Movable Body Trigger," no characters are displayed in SP Reach演出 A, enemy character X-1 (displayed in the battle confrontation) is displayed in SP Reach演出 B, enemy character X-2 (displayed in the battle confrontation) is displayed in SP Reach演出 C, enemy character X-1 (displayed in the battle confrontation) is displayed in SP Reach演出 D, and enemy character X-2 (displayed in the battle confrontation) is displayed in SP Reach演出 E.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the jackpot confirmation notification in the SP Reach演出 (ta4-ta5), in SP Reach演出 A, no characters are displayed; in SP Reach演出 B, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed; in SP Reach演出 C, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed; in SP Reach演出 D, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed; and in SP Reach演出 E, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 are displayed.

Furthermore, in the re-draw variation part (ta5-ta6) and re-draw result part (ta6-ta7) of the post-event sequence A corresponding to SP Reach sequences A-C, the characters are not displayed in SP Reach sequence A, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are not displayed in SP Reach sequence B, and ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are not displayed in SP Reach sequence C.

Furthermore, in the post-event sequence B corresponding to SP Reach sequences D and E, in the planned ball payout addition part (ta5-ta6) and the planned ball payout notification part (ta6-ta7), SP Reach sequence D displays ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1, while SP Reach sequence E displays ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2.

Thus, in SP Reach演出 A, the characters are not displayed during the bowling match, and therefore are also not displayed in the movable body animation or post-match animation A. However, in SP Reach演出 B through E, the enemy characters who face off against the allied characters in the battle match are displayed in the movable body animation and post-match animations A and B.

In other words, in SP Reach演出 A, an image related to the bowling match (an image with the character hidden) is displayed in the movable body animation before the jackpot confirmation is announced, and in SP Reach演出 B to E, an image related to the battle match (an image of the enemy character being fought) is displayed in the movable body animation before the jackpot confirmation is announced. Therefore, the connection between SP Reach演出 A to E and the movable body animations performed during the performance period of SP Reach演出 A to E can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in SP Reach演出 A, the post-event演出 A displays an image related to SP Reach演出 A (an image where the character is not visible), and in SP Reach演出 D and E, the post-event演出 B displays an image related to SP Reach演出 D and E (images of the ally and enemy characters that were in conflict). Therefore, the connection between SP Reach演出 A, D, and E and the post-event演出 A and B, which are executed after the completion of SP Reach演出 A, D, and E, can be enhanced.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6(B), the light emission patterns of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in SP Reach演出 A-E will be explained. The numbers in parentheses for each pattern (e.g., B100) indicate the extended commands explained in Feature Section 069SG. Furthermore, each of the light emission patterns described below differs from other light emission patterns in at least one of several elements, such as light emission color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting duration, extinguishing timing, extinguishing duration, and flashing cycle. Each light emission pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the bowling and battle sequences in the SP Reach sequences (ta2-ta3), SP Reach sequence A will light up with illumination pattern LP1-1 based on extended command B100, SP Reach sequences B and C will light up with illumination pattern LP1-2 based on extended command B101, and SP Reach sequences D and E will light up with illumination pattern LP1-3 based on extended command B102.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button" sequence in the SP Reach sequence, based on extended commands B200 to B203, one of the common light patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4 will light up in SP Reach sequences A to E. Note that one of the light patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expectation level increasing in the order of LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "movable body animation" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach animation, SP reach animations A to E will light up using a common illumination pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B000. Also, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach animation, SP reach animations A to E will light up using a common illumination pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B300.

Furthermore, in the re-draw variation part of post-event performance A and the planned payout addition part (ta5-ta6) of post-event performance B, SP reach performances A-C will light up with a common light pattern LP4-1 based on the extended command BA00, while SP reach performances D and E will light up with a common light pattern LP4-4 based on the extended command BB00.

Furthermore, in the re-draw result part of post-event performance A and the planned ball payout notification part (ta6-ta7) of post-event performance B, SP Reach performances A-C will light up with a common light pattern LP4-2 based on extended command BA01, or with a common light pattern LP4-3 based on extended command BA02. SP Reach performances D and E will light up with a common light pattern LP4-5 based on extended command BB01, or with a common light pattern LP4-6 based on extended command BB02.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned light emission patterns LP1-1 to LP3, LP2-1 to LP4, LP3-1 to LP3-2, and LP4-1 to LP6 are patterns that emit light in different ways based on the light emission control data described later. A brief overview of each light emission pattern is provided below. The extended commands are indicated in parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern.

As shown in Figure 13-7(A), in "Bowling/Battle," the lighting pattern LP1-1 (B100) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs (frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12) and the LEDs on the game board (movable LED 208) light up in sync with the introduction of the reach title and the video of the bowling match (see Figure 13-10). The lighting pattern LP1-2 (B101) is a pattern in which the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board light up in a color based on the color of the city background, and furthermore, allies A-1/A- 2. This pattern features LEDs on the frame and game board that illuminate in accordance with the actions (attack movements, etc.) of enemy X-1/X-2 (see Figures 13-11 (A2), (A3)). Lighting pattern LP1-3 (B102) features LEDs on the frame and game board that illuminate in a color based on the title screen and the wilderness background, and further illuminates in accordance with the actions (attack movements, etc.) of ally A-1 and enemy X-1/X-2 (see Figures 13-12 (A4), (A5)).

In the "Win/Loss Button Presentation," the lighting pattern LP2-1 (B200) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in accordance with the message "Keep pressing the button to build up power!", and then the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in the default white color (see Figure 13-13). The lighting pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for power-up during button operation (stage 1), and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in "blue" (see Figure 13-13). The lighting pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for power-up during button operation (stage 2), and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in "green" (see Figure 13-13). The lighting pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power-up during button operation (stage 3), and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in "red" (see Figure 13-13). Furthermore, the LP2-2 to LP2-4 lighting patterns are designed to change gradually from blue, green, and red (MAX) depending on the player's long-press operation (the level of the gauge display).

In the "Loss Notification" mode, the LP3-1 (B300) illumination pattern is characterized by low-brightness white light emitted from the frame LEDs and the LEDs on the game board when a "Loss" result is announced. This pattern continues even after the display screen returns to the normal background, until the next spin begins (see Figure 13-16).

In the "Movable Body Performance & Jackpot Notification" feature, the LP3-2 (B000) lighting pattern is such that when "Jackpot" is announced in the result notification, during the movable body performance (first period), the frame LEDs and game board LEDs light up in a color matching the background during the movable body performance; during the movable body performance (second period), the frame LEDs and game board LEDs light up in a rainbow color matching the background image and effect display during the movable body performance; and during the jackpot notification, the frame LEDs and game board LEDs light up in rainbow colors (see Figures 13-14 and 13-15). Furthermore, unlike other extended commands, the extended command (B000) has both operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor drive) to operate the movable body 32, and gradation control data to illuminate the frame LEDs and game board LEDs.

Furthermore, by making extension command B000 a common extension command for both movable body motion control and LED lighting control, it becomes unnecessary to separate extension commands for movable body motion control and LED lighting control, thus reducing the program capacity for effect control. If the extension commands used for movable body effects were separated into those for movable body motion control and those for LED lighting control, there would be a risk of one of the extension commands being missed due to a malfunction. However, by unifying them, the movable body effects can be performed more efficiently.

Furthermore, by using a single extended command to control both the movable body movement and LED lighting, rather than separating the extended commands for "movable body effects" and "jackpot notification," the program size for effect control can be reduced. If the extended commands were separate for "movable body effects" and "jackpot notification," there would be a risk of one of the commands being missed due to a malfunction. However, by using a common command, "movable body effects" and "jackpot notification" can be optimally controlled.

In the "Re-draw Variation/Expected Payout Addition" mode, the LP4-1 (BA00) illumination pattern is one in which the frame LEDs and game board LEDs illuminate in sync with the background animation (spinning) (see Figure 13-17 (F1)). The LP4-4 (BB00) illumination pattern is one in which the frame LEDs and game board LEDs illuminate in a color based on the colors of the space background, and further illuminates in sync with the actions of ally A-1 (such as attack movements) (see Figure 13-18).

In the "Re-draw Result/Scheduled Ball Discharge Notification," the lighting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up when an even number combination (for example, 666) is displayed (see Figure 13-17 (F2)), the lighting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up with higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than the lighting pattern LP4-2 when an odd number combination (for example, 333) is displayed (see Figure 13-17 (F3)), and the lighting pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled ball discharge notification "750". In the first pattern, the frame LEDs and game board LEDs illuminate in conjunction with the "750" display, and the same gradation control data as for "1500" is used until "750" is displayed (see Figures 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)). The illumination pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the planned ball payout notification "1500," and in conjunction with the "1500" display, the frame LEDs and game board LEDs illuminate with higher brightness and a faster gradation cycle than when "750" is displayed, and the same gradation control data as for "750" is used until "1500" is displayed (see Figures 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

Furthermore, during the execution of SP Reach sequences A through E, a jackpot confirmation notification can be performed as a post-sequence sequence effect during the period following the movable body sequence. In the jackpot confirmation notification, regardless of the type of SP Reach sequence A through E, the lighting patterns of the frame LEDs 9L1 through 9L12, 9R1 through 9R12, and the movable body LED 208 are common (for example, lighting pattern LP3-2). Therefore, since the jackpot confirmation notification is performed with a common lighting pattern regardless of the type of SP Reach sequence A through E, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns may differ depending on the type of SP Reach演出 A to E. For example, the lighting pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification for SP Reach演出 A may be the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow illumination) shown in Figure 13-21, the lighting pattern LP3-2 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification for SP Reach演出 B and C may be the rainbow-colored flashing pattern (flash rainbow illumination) shown in Figure 13-22, and the lighting pattern LP3-3 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification for SP Reach演出 D and E may change from the rainbow-colored flashing pattern (flash rainbow illumination) shown in Figure 13-22 to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow illumination) shown in Figure 13-21.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball payout addition part of the post-event presentation B are the same for both SP Reach presentation D and SP Reach presentation E (lighting pattern LP4-4). Since the lighting patterns can also be standardized, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

Furthermore, while the illumination patterns (illumination patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in the planned ball payout notification part of post-event performance B corresponding to SP Reach performance D and SP Reach performance E are common, the illumination patterns (illumination patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in post-event performance A corresponding to SP Reach performance A are different from those (illumination patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 in post-event performance B corresponding to SP Reach performance D and SP Reach performance E. This allows for further reduction of manufacturing costs, and by executing post-event performance A with different illumination patterns, the effect of the post-event performance can be enhanced.

In this embodiment, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button effect" is performed, or when the operation validity period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is a common light emission pattern LP3-2. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 may be illuminated with different light emission patterns depending on the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button effect" is performed. By doing so, the light emission pattern can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13-6(B), regarding the LED lighting pattern in the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出), while SP Reach演出 B and C both use the same lighting pattern LP1-2, for example, SP Reach演出 B could use lighting pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + enemy character X-1's image color, lighting up in accordance with the action), and SP Reach C could use lighting pattern LP1-2-2 (B200: city background color + enemy character X-2's image color, lighting up in accordance with the action). This would allow for the use of common luminance data for a portion of the LED lighting pattern (the city background color portion) in SP Reach演出 B and C, reducing development costs, while using dedicated luminance data for the portions related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, thus creating differences in presentation with minimal cost.

While SP Reach animations D and E both use the same lighting pattern LP1-3, for example, SP Reach animation D could use lighting pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: wasteland background color + enemy character X-1's image color, lighting up in accordance with the action), and SP Reach E could use lighting pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: wasteland background color + enemy character X-2's image color, lighting up in accordance with the action). This would allow for the use of common luminance data for a portion of the LED lighting pattern (the city background color portion) in SP Reach animations D and E, reducing development costs, while using dedicated luminance data for the portions related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2, thus creating a visual difference with minimal cost.

Furthermore, one of the SP reach animations B and C in the low base state and SP reach animations D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach animations D and E) may share a common light emission pattern, while the other (for example, SP reach animations B and C) may have different light emission patterns. This allows for a reduction in the manufacturing cost of one while effectively showcasing the differences in the other animation.

(Gradation control data)
Here, we will briefly explain the control data used to realize the lighting effects. Figure 13-21 is a diagram illustrating the data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a smooth rainbow lighting pattern. Figure 13-22 is a diagram illustrating the data table for lighting the frame LEDs in a flashing rainbow lighting pattern.

As shown in Figure 13-21, the RGB data output to each LED in the frame LED is sparsely specified at 40 msec intervals, with various brightness values corresponding to the seven colors (rainbow colors). The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the smooth rainbow illumination data table, causing the frame lamps to light up smoothly in rainbow colors.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13-22, the RGB data output to each LED in the frame LED includes brightness data corresponding to 20 msec of blackout, interspersed with various brightness data corresponding to the seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps based on the flash rainbow emission data table, causing the frame lamps to light up intensely in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the illumination of each LED. The light emission control table defines, for example, the illumination patterns (illumination patterns LP1-1 to LP2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to LP3, LP4-1 to LP4, etc.), the driver ID, the output terminal number, the electrical components, and the data for generating light emission control, all associated with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emission pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light-emitting driver; the output terminal number stores the number of the output terminal of the light-emitting driver; the electrical components store the electrical components corresponding to the light-emitting driver and the output terminal number (e.g., frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12, movable LED 208, etc.); and the light emission control generation data stores data for controlling the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light-emitting driver, used to generate light emission control data based on the control data format.

Each data set for generating light emission control includes, for example, a data name, format type, address, data transmission cycle, unit emission time, light emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern in the light emission control table; the format type stores identification information ("basic" or "extended") indicating which format to apply (basic format (EX=0) or extended format (EX=1)); the address stores the address to be set in the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver; the data transmission cycle stores the cycle for transmitting light emission control data from the performance control board 12 to the light emitter driver on the lamp board 14; and the unit emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle is described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

The light emission control cycle stores the time unit that constitutes one cycle of light emission control (hereinafter referred to as the "light emission control cycle"). This light emission control cycle differs depending on the type of light emission. Specifically, if the light emission type is "continuous" or "flashing," a time such as "100 ms" can be set, while if the light emission type is "switching" (e.g., special light emission colors (rainbow colors) accompanying changes in multiple colors), a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The format data stores the time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the specified format type. Specifically, the format data defines the light emission sequence and the corresponding Q data corresponding to the RGB values of that sequence.

In this embodiment, the illumination of frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal numbers, RGB color values) expressed in hexadecimal. In color hexadecimal, each RGB component is represented by two digits, totaling six hexadecimal digits (0-F), representing "16 x 16 = 256 gradations." However, in this specification, the two digits for each RGB component are treated as the same value, resulting in a simplified representation of three digits (one for each RGB component). Furthermore, for simplification, the notation "0x" representing hexadecimal is omitted in the illustrations and explanations.

Furthermore, the Q data includes Q data for Group 1, Q data for Group 2, and Q data for Group 3, which are output to the serial-to-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light-emitting driver corresponding to the address. Each group's corresponding Q data stores the RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in that group.

Let me explain in detail. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10 ms," it is specified that data be transmitted from the performance control board 12 to the light-emitting driver every 10 ms. Also, if the unit light emission time is "100 ms," it is specified that the target LED will emit light for a unit light emission time of 100 ms. Furthermore, if the light emission control cycle is "100 ms," the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous," and in order to perform continuous emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is specified as the light emission control cycle.

Furthermore, for example, in the format data, the emission order is defined as "1" through "N". If the Q data (RGB values) for each emission order from "1" to "N" is defined as "0, 0, F", then for all emission orders, the R and G values in the Q data are set to "0" and the B value to "F", resulting in continuous blue emission.

Next, we will explain the control data for achieving color-mixed light emission by controlling the gradation of LEDs. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be directly applied to the Q data of the format data included in the light emission control generation data described above.

Figure 13-22 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is the control data used to perform gradation control to achieve rainbow-colored flashing (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. Note that the gradation control data for frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is the same as that for frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, so it is not shown. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit emission time Δtn, and the right column shows the Q data (RGB value) corresponding to each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 (9L4), ...) expressed in hexadecimal.

Furthermore, in the light emission sequence 2 of the grayscale control data shown in Figure 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 20 ms, and by setting the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 to 12 (9L1 to 9L12) to "0, 0, 0", the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

Furthermore, in the emission sequence 1 of the grayscale control data shown in Figure 13-22, the switching unit emission time Δtn is 30 ms, and the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 3 are "0, 8, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 4 are "0, C, F", the Q data (RGB values) of group 5 are "0, F, D", the Q data (RGB values) of group 6 are "0, F, 9", and the Q data (RGB values) of group 7 are " By setting the Q data (RGB values) of Group 8 to "0, F, 1", Group 9 to "2, F, 0", Group 10 to "6, F, 0", Group 11 to "A, F, 0", and Group 12 to "F, F, 0", the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 each emit different colors of light (different from the light colors in light emission sequence 3).

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to sequentially switch between multiple colors with a short switching unit illumination time Δts, and by intervening with a control that turns off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, it is possible to make it appear to the human eye as if the LEDs are flashing in rainbow colors. Note that the intervening control is not limited to turning the LEDs off; for example, it could be white light, which does not constitute a rainbow. If white light is used, low RGB values such as "1, 1, 1" may be set to avoid interfering with the recognition of the colors that make up the rainbow.

Figure 13-21 illustrates an example of gradation control data, which is the control data used to perform gradation control to achieve rainbow-colored illumination (corresponding to smooth rainbow illumination, illumination pattern LP3-1, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12.

In the grayscale control data shown in Figure 13-21, unlike the grayscale control data shown in Figure 13-21, there is no control to turn off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. Therefore, it can be visually perceived by humans as if the lights are illuminated in rainbow colors. In the illumination sequence 1 of the grayscale control data, the switching unit illumination time Δtn is 40 ms, achieving the same illumination colors as in the illumination sequence 2 of the grayscale control data. Furthermore, even in the grayscale control data, by controlling the illumination colors of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to switch sequentially with multiple colors using a short switching unit illumination time Δts, it can be visually perceived by humans as if the lights are illuminated in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-6(C), the output patterns of background music and sound effects in SP Reach sequences A to E will be explained. Furthermore, each of the sound patterns described below differs from other sound patterns in at least one of several elements, such as volume, tone quality, rhythm, tempo, and musical style. Each sound pattern can be modified in various ways.

During the bowling and battle sequences in the SP Reach sequences (ta2-ta3), the following sound patterns are used: SP Reach Sequence A uses BGM and sound effects with sound pattern BP1-1; SP Reach Sequence B uses BGM and sound effects with sound pattern BP1-2; SP Reach Sequence C uses BGM and sound effects with sound pattern BP1-3; SP Reach Sequence D uses BGM and sound effects with sound pattern BP1-4; and SP Reach Sequence E uses BGM and sound effects with sound pattern BP1-5.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "Win/Loss Button Presentation" in the SP Reach presentation, the same sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output for SP Reach presentations A to E. Note that one of the sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4 is selected based on the variable display result, with the expectation level increasing in the order of BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "movable body animation" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach animation, BGM and sound effects will be output using sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3 in SP reach animations A to E. Also, during the execution period of the "miss notification" in the SP reach animation, the lights will illuminate using the common sound pattern BP3-1 to BP3 in SP reach animations A to E.

Furthermore, in the re-draw variation part of post-event performance A and the planned payout addition part (ta5-ta6) of post-event performance B, SP reach performances A-C are output using sound pattern BP4-1, while SP reach performances D and E are output using sound pattern BP4-4 for background music and sound effects.

Furthermore, in the re-draw result part of post-event performance A and the planned ball payout notification part (ta6-ta7) of post-event performance B, BGM and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-2 or sound pattern BP4-3 for SP Reach performances A-C, and BGM and sound effects are output using sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6 for SP Reach performances D and E.

Furthermore, the above sound patterns BP1-1 to BP4, BP2-1 to BP4, BP0-1 to BP3, BP3-1 to BP3, and BP4-1 to BP4 are patterns that output sound in different ways based on sound control data, and the outlines of each sound pattern are explained below.

As shown in Figure 13-7(B), in "Bowling/Battle", sound pattern BP1-1 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach演出A is introduced, the voice of "Knock down the pins!", and the BGM for SP reach演出A are output (see Figure 13-10), sound pattern BP1-2 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach演出B is introduced, the voice of "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next!", the BGM for SP reach演出B, and battle sound effects are output (see Figure 13-11(A2)), and sound pattern BP1-3 is a pattern in which the voice when the reach title for SP reach演出C is introduced, the voice of "Fight!", and the voice of ally A-1 saying "It'll be decided next!" This pattern outputs the voice of ally A-2 saying "Fight!", the background music for SP Reach演出 C, and battle sound effects (see Figure 13-11 (A3)). Sound pattern BP1-4 outputs the voice used when the reach title for SP Reach演出 D is introduced, the voice saying "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "This will be the final showdown!", the background music for SP Reach演出 D, and battle sound effects (see Figure 13-12 (A4)). Sound pattern BP1-5 outputs the voice used when the reach title for SP Reach演出 E is introduced, the voice saying "Fight!", the voice of ally A-1 saying "This will be the final showdown!", the background music for SP Reach演出 E, and battle sound effects (see Figure 13-12 (A5)).

In the "Win/Loss Button Presentation," sound pattern BP2-1 outputs the voice message "Keep pressing the button to build up power" and the sound effect for power level 0 (see Figure 13-13). Sound pattern BP2-2 outputs the sound effect for power level 1. Sound pattern BP2-3 outputs the sound effect for power level 2. Sound pattern BP2-4 outputs the voice message for power level 3 (MAX) and the sound effect for power level 3 (MAX).

In the "Failure Notification" section, sound pattern BP3-1 outputs a sound effect indicating failure (see Figure 13-16 (H1)), sound pattern BP3-2 outputs ally A-1's defeat (disappointment) voice and battle defeat background music (see Figures 13-16 (H2), (H4), (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 outputs ally A-2's defeat (disappointment) voice and battle defeat background music (see Figure 13-16 (H3)).

In the "Movable Body Animation & Big Win Notification" section, sound pattern BP0-1 outputs the sound effects for the movable body animation, the success sound effect, and the success background music (see Figure 13-15 (E1)). Sound pattern BP0-2 outputs the sound effects for the movable body animation, the victory voice of ally A-1, and the battle victory background music (see Figures 13-15 (E2), (E4), (E5)). Sound pattern BP0-3 outputs the sound effects for the movable body animation, the victory voice of ally A-2, and the battle victory background music (see Figure 13-15 (E3)).

In the "Re-draw Variation/Scheduled Ball Addition" phase, sound pattern BP4-1 outputs the background music for the re-draw variation (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), while sound pattern BP4-4 outputs the background music for the scheduled ball addition, the sound effect for the scheduled ball addition (attack), the voice of ally A-1 for the scheduled ball addition, and the voice "Press!" (see Figure 13-18).

In the "Re-draw Result/Scheduled Ball Release Notification" section, sound pattern BP4-2 outputs the sound effect for even-numbered symbols and the background music for the re-draw result (see Figure 13-17 (F2)). Sound pattern BP4-3 outputs the sound effect for odd-numbered symbols and the background music for the re-draw result (see Figure 13-17 (F3)). Sound pattern BP4-5 outputs the background music for the scheduled ball release notification and the sound effect for 750 (see Figures 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)). Sound pattern BP4-6 outputs the background music for the scheduled ball release notification, the sound effect for 1500, and the MAX voice (see Figures 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

Furthermore, the sound patterns used during the execution period of the movable body effects are common to all types of SP reach effects A through E (sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3), which further reduces manufacturing costs.

In this embodiment, even if the "movable body effect" is executed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button effect" is executed, or when the operation validity period ends without the operation of the push button 31B being detected, the sound patterns during the execution period of the movable body effect are the same sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the sound effect may be output with different sound patterns depending on the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period in which the "win/loss button effect" is executed. By doing so, the sound effect can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operation, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

(The flow of SP Reach sequences A to E)
Next, the flow of SP Reach sequences A to E will be explained based on Figure 13-8. Figure 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP Reach sequences A to E.

As shown in Figure 13-8, in SP Reach α, β, and γ, when the SP Reach animation develops from the N Reach animation, in the case of SP Reach animation A, the bowling start image is displayed as shown in (A1); in the case of SP Reach animation B, the start image of Battle A between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2); in the case of SP Reach animation C, the start image of Battle A between ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3); in the case of SP Reach animation D, the start image of Battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A4); and in the case of SP Reach animation E, the start image of Battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A5). Thus, the animation patterns in the first half of SP Reach animations A to E differ for each of them.

Next, at a predetermined timing towards the end of the SP Reach演出 (SP reach演出), the win/loss button演出 (win/loss button演出) is initiated. Specifically, as shown in (B1), a first operation promotion演出 (performance promotion) that encourages the long-press operation of the push button 31B is initiated. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first operation promotion演出, as shown in (B2), a second operation promotion演出 (performance promotion) that encourages the release operation of the long-press operation of the push button 31B is initiated. Thus, the performance mode of the win/loss button演出 is common to SP Reach演出 A to E.

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, at the timing when the release operation of the long-press operation of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the win/loss button effect, or at the timing when the valid operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long-press operation of push button 31B being detected, an image representing the last throw in bowling or the last hit in battle will be displayed, as shown in (C).

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image indicating that the ball has hit the pin is displayed. In the case of SP Reach演出 B, as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of SP Reach演出 C, as shown in (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of SP Reach演出 D, as shown in (D4), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed. In the case of SP Reach演出 E, as shown in (D5), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position and an image indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. Thus, the presentation style of the movable body effects differs between SP Reach Performance A, SP Reach Performances B and D, and SP Reach Performances C and E.

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 A, a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed as shown in (E1). In the case of SP Reach演出 B, a result image indicating victory in Battle A is displayed as shown in (E2). In the case of SP Reach演出 C, a result image indicating victory in Battle A is displayed as shown in (E3). In the case of SP Reach演出 D, a result image indicating victory in Battle B is displayed as shown in (E4). In the case of SP Reach演出 E, a result image indicating victory in Battle A is displayed as shown in (E5). Note that the presentation of the result notification differs for each of SP Reach演出 A through E.

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 A to C, Post-event演出 A begins, and in the re-draw variation part shown in (F1), an image is displayed showing the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in (E1 to E3) being re-changed. Then, in the re-draw result part shown in (F2) and (F3), the confirmed decorative symbols that represent a predetermined winning combination are stopped and displayed.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出 D, Post-event演出 B begins, and in the planned payout addition part shown in (G1), an image is displayed showing ally character A-1, which was displayed in (A4), attacking enemy character X-1 and adding the planned payout. In the case of SP Reach演出 E, Post-event演出 B begins, and in the planned payout addition part shown in (G2), an image is displayed showing ally character A-1, which was displayed in (A5), attacking enemy character X-2 and adding the planned payout. Subsequently, in the cases of SP Reach演出 D and E, the planned payout notification part shown in (G3) and (G4) displays the planned payout number.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the images shown in (C) (D1 to D5) will not be displayed at the timing when the release operation of the long-press operation of push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period of the hit/miss button effect, or at the timing when the valid operation period has elapsed without the release operation of the long-press operation of push button 31B being detected. In the case of SP Reach effect A, a result image indicating a failed strike will be displayed as shown in (H1). In the case of SP Reach effect B, a result image indicating a loss in Battle A will be displayed as shown in (H2). In the case of SP Reach effect C, a result image indicating a loss in Battle A will be displayed as shown in (H3). In the case of SP Reach effect D, a result image indicating a loss in Battle B will be displayed as shown in (H4). In the case of SP Reach effect E, a result image indicating a loss in Battle A will be displayed as shown in (H5). Furthermore, the presentation of the result notification differs for SP Reach演出 A, SP Reach演出 B and D, and SP Reach演出 C and E.

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 A to E, as shown in (I1), the confirmed decorative symbols for a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called a "missed reach") will stop and be displayed.

(Examples of SP Reach演出 A to E)
Next, examples of the performance operations for SP Reach performances A to E executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be explained based on Figures 13-9 to 13-20. Figure 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of performance operations from the start of the variable display of SP Reach α, β, and γ until it develops into an SP Reach performance. Figure 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for SP Reach performance A. Figure 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for SP Reach performances B and C. Figure 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for SP Reach performances D and E. Figure 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for the win/fail button performance. Figure 13-14 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for the movable body performance. Figure 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for the jackpot notification of SP Reach performances A to E. Figure 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for the loss notification of SP Reach performances A to E. Figure 13-17 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation for the post-performance A. Figure 13-18 shows an example of the staging actions for post-event staging B. Figure 13-19 shows an example of the staging actions for post-event staging B.

In the following explanation, the common animation actions among SP Reach animations A through E will be described together, while different animation actions will be described individually. Furthermore, some of the numbers assigned to each frame (for example, A through I) will correspond to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in Figure 13-8.

As shown in Figure 13-9 (N1), based on the determination of one of the SP Reach α, β, or γ as a variation pattern following the occurrence of a starting prize, the variable display of decorative symbols begins in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, in the following, the active display area 018SG013, which corresponds to the active display area 069SG013 of the feature section 069SG, will display the active display 018SG003, which corresponds to the active display 069SG003; the first reserved display area 018SG011, which corresponds to the first reserved display area 069SG011, will display the reserved display 018SG001, which corresponds to the reserved display 069SG001; and the second reserved display area 018SG012, which corresponds to the second reserved display area 069SG012, will display the reserved display 018SG002, which corresponds to the reserved display 069SG002.

After the variable display starts, as shown in Figure 13-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes a reach mode, a normal reach animation is started as a variable display animation for the decorative symbols. As shown in Figure 13-9 (N3), at a predetermined time elapsed since the reach mode was established, a decorative symbol with a different number than the decorative symbols stopped in decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C. Then, as shown in Figure 13-9 (N4), the variable display in the decorative symbol display area 5C resumes, leading to the SP reach animation.

As shown in Figure 13-10 (A1), when the game progresses to SP Reach演出 A, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the screen are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right display area 5SR, and a reach title image 018SG01A indicating the start of SP Reach演出 A is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP Reach演出 (e.g., SP Reach演出 A), an expectation level display 018SG101 indicating the probability of a big win (e.g., the number of stars), and a content display 018SG102 representing bowling.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-10 (A1-1), image 018SG103 is displayed, indicating that pins are lined up on the bowling lane and the challenge has begun. Then, as shown in Figure 13-10 (A1-2), image 018SG104 is displayed, showing the ball hitting and knocking down the pins. Finally, as shown in Figure 13-10 (A1-3), image 018SG105 is displayed, showing one pin remaining on the bowling lane, the words "One pin left!", and indicating that the next throw will be the last. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP1-1. As a sound effect, voice and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1.

As shown in Figure 13-11 (A2), when the game progresses to SP Reach演出 B, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the screen are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right display area 5SR, and a reach title image 018SG01B is displayed to indicate that SP Reach演出 B has started. The reach title image 018SG01B includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP Reach演出 (e.g., SP Reach演出 B), an expectation level display 018SG101 indicating the probability of a big win (e.g., the number of stars), and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light effect pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect pattern BP1-2.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A2-1), image 018SG202 is displayed, showing a background image 018SG201 representing the city, a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1, indicating that the battle has begun. Then, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A2-2), image 018SG203 is displayed showing ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting. Finally, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A2-3), image 018SG204 is displayed, showing character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final one.

As shown in Figure 13-11 (A3), when the game progresses to SP Reach演出 C, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the screen are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right display area 5SR, and a reach title image 018SG01C is displayed to indicate the start of SP Reach演出 C. The reach title image 018SG01C includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP Reach演出 (e.g., SP Reach演出 C), an expectation level display 018SG101 indicating the probability of a big win (e.g., the number of stars), and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-2. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light effect pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect pattern BP1-3.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A3-1), an image 018SG212 is displayed, indicating the start of a battle. This image includes a background image 018SG201 representing the city, a character image 018SGA2 showing ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 showing enemy character X-2. Then, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A3-2), an image 018SG213 is displayed showing ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 fighting. Finally, as shown in Figure 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 is displayed, including character images 018SGA2 and 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final one.

As shown in Figure 13-12 (A4), when the game progresses to SP Reach演出 D, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the screen are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right display area 5SR, and a reach title image 018SG01D is displayed to indicate the start of SP Reach演出 D. The reach title image 018SG01D includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP Reach演出 (e.g., SP Reach演出 D), an expectation display 018SG101 indicating the probability of a big win (e.g., the number of stars), and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light effect pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect pattern BP1-4.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A4-1), an image 018SG222 is displayed, indicating the start of a battle. This image includes a background image 018SG221 representing a wasteland, a character image 018SGA1 representing an allied character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing an enemy character X-1. Then, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A4-2), an image 018SG223 is displayed showing allied character A-1 and enemy character X-1 fighting. Finally, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 is displayed, including character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1, indicating that the next blow will be the final one.

As shown in Figure 13-12 (A5), when the SP Reach演出 E develops, the decorative symbols displayed in the center of the display screen are reduced in size and displayed in the upper right display area 5SR, and a reach title image 018SG01E is displayed to indicate that SP Reach演出 E has started. The reach title image 018SG01E includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP Reach演出 (e.g., SP Reach演出 E), an expectation display 018SG101 indicating the probability of a big win (e.g., the number of stars), and a content display 018SG102 indicating the ally character A-1. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the light effect pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect pattern BP1-5.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A5-1), an image 018SG232 is displayed, indicating the start of a battle. This image includes a background image 018SG221 representing a wasteland, a character image 018SGA1 representing an allied character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 representing an enemy character X-2. Then, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A5-2), an image 018SG233 is displayed showing allied character A-1 and enemy character X-2 fighting. Finally, as shown in Figure 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 is displayed, including character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2, indicating that the next blow will be the final one.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-13 (B1), when the win/loss button animation starts, a button image 018SG241, which mimics the push button 31B, and an operation prompt display 018SG242, such as "Keep pressing the button to build up power!", are displayed, and an operation prompt animation starts to encourage the long-press operation of the push button 31B. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, voice and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1.

Next, as shown in Figure 13-13 (B1-1), the operation prompt display 018SG242 switches to displaying "Charging Start!", and the power level gauge display 018SG243 and effect image 018SG244 are displayed. When a long press operation is detected, the display patterns of the gauge display 018SG243 and effect image 018SG244 change. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on lighting patterns LP2-2 to 4. As a sound effect, voice and background music are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound patterns BP2-2 to 4.

As shown in Figure 13-13 (B1-2), if a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 will reach MAX, and the operation prompt display 018SG242 will switch to displaying "Power MAX!". However, even if a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period, the gauge display 018SG243 may not reach MAX depending on the variable display result. Furthermore, the manner in which the power level changes may differ depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the win/loss button animation, as shown in Figure 13-13 (B1-3), the operation prompt display 018SG242 switches to display "Release!", prompting the player to release the long press on the push button 31B. Simultaneously, the gauge display 018SG243 switches to display a gauge indicating the remaining valid operation period. Furthermore, the animation operations in Figures 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3) are common to SP Reach animations A to E.

In this embodiment, the win/fail button animation is illustrated by an example in which an operation prompt display for charging power is executed, as shown in Figures 13-13(B1) to 13-13(B1-2). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the above operation prompt display does not necessarily have to be executed.

Furthermore, if the release of the long-press operation of push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period of the win/loss button animation, or if the operation validity period expires without the release of the long-press operation of push button 31B being detected, and the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body animation shown in Figure 13-14 will begin.

During the first period, from the start of the movable body animation until a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 13-14(C), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the animation position, and an attack image 018SG250 indicating the final throw or final hit is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 consists of an object image 018SG250A that mimics the spherical operating part of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows the object moving towards the back of the screen. Furthermore, as the movable body 32 moves from its origin position to the performance position, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in colors matching the background based on the light pattern LP3-2 as a lighting effect; sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound patterns BP0-1-3 as a sound effect; and the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As described above, during the first period of the movable body animation, SP Reach animations A through E will perform animations of the same type. However, during the second period, after the first period ends, SP Reach animations A through E will perform animations of different types, as described below.

As shown in Figure 13-14 (D1), in the case of SP Reach演出 A, during the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an object image 018SG250A and an effect image 018SG250B indicating impact are displayed, along with an impact image 018SG251 showing the object hitting something.

In this embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 illustrates a configuration in which the object (ball) collides with (for example, a pin) is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image showing bowling pins may be displayed in the impact image 018SG251.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of SP Reach演出 B and SP Reach演出 D, during the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG252 is displayed, which includes an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating impact, and a character image 018SGX1 indicating enemy character X1, indicating that the attack hit enemy character X-1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of SP Reach演出 C and SP Reach演出 E, during the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and an impact image 018SG253 is displayed, which includes an object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating impact, and a character image 018SGX2 indicating enemy character X2, indicating that the attack hit enemy character X-2.

Furthermore, during the second period of the movable body performance shown in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display effects, light effects, sound effects, and vibration effects are performed. More specifically, the display and hiding of the effect image 018SG250B are alternated in response to the vibration of the movable body 32 (hidden when the movable body 32 moves upward, displayed when it moves downward, etc.), and as a lighting effect, based on the lighting pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 basically light up in a pattern where orange and red light flows outward from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 in accordance with the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and also light up with a pattern of intense white flashing when the effect image 018SG250B is displayed, as a sound effect, predetermined sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3, and as a vibration effect, the push button 31B vibrates due to the vibration motor 61. Furthermore, in Figures 13-14 (D1) to (D5), a display using a light guide plate display device may be implemented.

Furthermore, in Figures 13-14 (D2-D5), the effect image 018SG250B, displayed in response to the vibration of the movable body 32, is displayed in a color that is common to or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2, which are displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color scheme). This enhances the relationship between the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2, which represent enemy characters, and the effect image 018SG250B, thereby improving the visual effect of the movable body animation.

After the movable body animation ends, a jackpot is announced, as shown in Figure 13-15. Specifically, in the case of SP Reach animation A, as shown in Figure 13-15 (E1), a result image 018SG260A is displayed, indicating success in the bowling challenge. This image includes an image 018SG261 showing fallen bowling pins, a text display 018SG262 indicating "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263. The movable body 32 then moves from the animation position back to its origin position. Additionally, as a light-up animation, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in a smooth rainbow pattern based on the light-up pattern LP3-2. As a sound animation, a victory voice and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-1, and the vibration animation ends.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出B, as shown in Figure 13-15(E2), a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1Z representing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 indicating "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260B is displayed indicating that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in a smooth rainbow pattern based on the lighting pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, victory voices and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration effect ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by a fade-out display. The display of character image 018SGX1Z in this way effectively signals the end of the sequence of events.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出C, as shown in Figure 13-15 (E3), a character image 018SGA2 representing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 indicating "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed, and a result image 018SG260C is displayed indicating that ally character A-2 has won the battle against enemy character X-2, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. In addition, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up in a smooth rainbow pattern based on the lighting pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, victory voices and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-3, and the vibration effect ends. Furthermore, character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is hidden by a fade-out display. The display of character image 018SGX2Z in this way effectively signals the end of the sequence of events.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出 D, as shown in Figure 13-15 (E4), a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1, a text display 018SG262 indicating "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed. A result image 018SG260D is then displayed indicating that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. Additionally, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in a smooth rainbow pattern based on the lighting pattern LP3-2. As a sound effect, victory voices and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出E, as shown in Figure 13-15 (E5), a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2, a text display 018SG262 indicating "Victory!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed. A result image 018SG260E is then displayed indicating that ally character A-1 has won the battle against enemy character X-2, and the movable body 32 moves from the performance position to the origin position. Additionally, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in a smooth rainbow pattern based on the lighting pattern LP3-2. As a sound effect, victory voices and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP0-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E will disappear. As shown in Figure 13-15 (E6), the predetermined winning combination of decorative symbols (e.g., 666) will be temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the word "Big Win" will be displayed, indicating that a big win has been confirmed.

On the other hand, if the release of the long-press operation of push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period of the win/loss button animation shown in Figures 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or if the operation validity period elapses without the release of the long-press operation of push button 31B being detected, and the variable display result is a loss, the movable body animation will not be executed, and a loss confirmation notification will be executed, as shown in Figure 13-16, indicating that a loss has been confirmed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 13-16 (H1), in the case of SP Reach演出 A, the movable body 32 remains in its original position without moving, displaying an image 018SG271 showing the bowling pins that remained standing, and a text display 018SG272 indicating "Failure...", resulting in a result image 018SG270A indicating failure in the bowling challenge. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in low-brightness white based on the lighting pattern LP3-1. As a sound effect, a failure sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-1, and the vibration effect ends.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出 B and SP Reach演出 D, as shown in Figures 13-16 (H2) and (H4), the movable body 32 remains stationary at its origin position and does not move. It displays a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1, and a text display 018SG262 indicating "Defeat...", resulting in a result image 018SG270B indicating that ally character A-1 lost the battle against enemy character X-1. Additionally, as a light effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in low-brightness white based on the light pattern LP3-1. As a sound effect, a failure sound effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出C, as shown in Figure 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 remains stationary at its origin position and does not move. It displays a character image 018SGA2 representing ally character A-2, a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2, and the text display 018SG262 indicating "Defeat...", resulting in a result image 018SG270C indicating that ally character A-2 has lost the battle against enemy character X-2. Additionally, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in low-brightness white based on lighting pattern LP3-1. As a sound effect, a failure sound is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern BP3-3, and the vibration effect ends.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出E, as shown in Figure 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 remains stationary at its origin position and does not move. It displays a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2, and a text display 018SG262 indicating "Defeat...", showing a result image 018SG270E indicating that ally character A-1 lost the battle against enemy character X-2. Additionally, as a lighting effect, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up in low-brightness white based on lighting pattern LP3-1. As a sound effect, a failure sound effect is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on sound pattern BP3-2, and the vibration effect ends.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E disappear, and as shown in Figure 13-16 (H6), a confirmed decorative symbol (for example, 676) of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called a "missed reach") is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing a notification that a loss has been confirmed.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation is announced during SP Reach sequences A through C, the post-event sequence A shown in Figure 13-17 will be executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the predetermined jackpot combination of confirmed decorative symbols (e.g., 666) is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the re-selection variation part shown in Figure 13-17 (F1) begins, in which the decorative symbols are re-displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, background music is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1.

Then, in the re-draw result section shown in Figure 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is Jackpot A (non-probability variation), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the re-variability display, a combination of even-numbered symbols (for example, 666) will be displayed as a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display will end. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 will light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, background music will be output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2.

Furthermore, in the re-draw result section shown in Figure 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is Jackpot B (probability variation), a predetermined time will elapse after the re-variability display begins. A combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333) will then be displayed as a predetermined jackpot combination, and the variable display will end. Additionally, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 will light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-3. As a sound effect, background music will be output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3.

Next, if a jackpot confirmation is announced during SP Reach sequences D and E, the post-event sequence B shown in Figure 13-18 will be executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the predetermined jackpot combination of confirmed decorative symbols (e.g., 666) is temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the planned payout addition part shown in Figure 13-18 (G1-1) displays the background image 018SG280 representing space, the character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1, and the planned payout counter display 018SG281 representing the planned payout amount given in the jackpot game state, and then the post-event performance B begins. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, BGM is output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4.

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 D, as shown in Figure 13-18 (G1), a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX1 representing enemy character X-1 are displayed. An image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in response to the attack, an additional ball payout display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed, and the displayed planned ball payout is added to the counter value displayed in the planned ball payout counter display 018SG281.

Furthermore, in the case of SP Reach演出E, as shown in Figure 13-18 (G2), a character image 018SGA1 representing ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX2 representing enemy character X-2 are displayed. An image of ally character A-1 attacking enemy character X-2 is displayed, and in response to the attack, an additional ball payout display 018SG282 (for example, "+50") is displayed. The displayed planned ball payout is then added to the counter value displayed in the planned ball payout counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in Figure 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 018SG283 resembling the push button 31B, an operation prompt display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation prompt effect is executed to encourage a single press of the push button 31B.

Next, in the case of SP Reach演出 D, as shown in Figure 13-19 (G1-3), when a press operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without a press operation being detected, character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX1 are displayed, ally character A-1 attacks enemy character X-1, and the counter value of the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is displayed variably. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, BGM and sound effects are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5.

On the other hand, in the case of SP Reach演出E, as shown in Figure 13-19 (G1-4), when a press operation of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or when the operation valid period has elapsed without a press operation being detected, character images 018SGA1 and 018SGX2 are displayed, ally character A-1 attacks enemy character X-2, and the counter value of the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is displayed variably. Furthermore, as a lighting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12 and 9R1-9R12 light up based on the lighting pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, BGM, sound effects, and voices are output from speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6.

Then, as shown in Figure 13-19 (G1-5), the character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ showing the attacked enemy character X-2 being blown away and then disappearing into a star are displayed. Simultaneously, the planned ball payout counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750," the planned number of balls that can be obtained in the case of a "6R jackpot") is displayed.

As shown in Figure 13-19 (G3), in the case of jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball payout counter display 018SG281 is not updated, and the game is controlled to the jackpot game state.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 13-19 (G4), in the case of a jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 018SG281 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500"), and then the game is controlled to enter the jackpot game state.

(Special Reach演出 Type Determination Table)
Next, we will describe the SP reach performance type determination table used when determining the SP reach performance type in the SP reach performance type determination process, which is executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 7 when the determined variation pattern is an SP reach variation pattern. Figure 13-20 shows (A) SP reach performance type determination table A, (B) SP reach performance type determination table B, and (C) SP reach performance type determination table C.

In the SP Reach animation type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP Reach animation type is extracted, and the SP Reach animation type is determined using one of the SP Reach animation type determination tables A to C shown in Figure 13-20.

In the SP Reach演出式指定テーブル (SP Reach Performance Type Determination Table), as shown in Figures 13-20(A) to (C), different judgment values are assigned to each SP Reach Performance Type for each of the following: "Big Win C (10R)", "Big Win B (6R)", "Big Win A (6R)", and "Miss". The number of judgment values shown in Figures 13-20(A) to (C) corresponds to the number of judgment values for each SP Reach Performance Type.

If the variation pattern is SP Reach α, the SP Reach演出式決表A Determination Table A shown in Figure 13-20(A) is used. Specifically, for "Big Win B (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PA-1". For "Big Win A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PA-1". For "Miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PA-2".

If the variation pattern is SP Reach β, the SP Reach演出式決表B

In other words, when the SP Reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in a low base state, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot B (6R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)," then SP Reach演出 C is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach演出 B.

Furthermore, if the variation pattern is SP Reach γ, the SP Reach演出式決表C定

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in a high base state, and the jackpot type is "Jackpot C (10R)," which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B (6R)," then SP Reach演出 E is determined at a higher rate than SP Reach演出 D.

(Effects/Mechanisms)
As explained above, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a first specific performance (for example, SP Reach performance B) that displays enemy character X-1 and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state using enemy character X-1, and a second specific performance (for example, SP Reach performance A) that notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state without displaying the enemy character, and when a jackpot is notified in the SP Reach performance, it is capable of executing a "movable body performance" as a special performance during the execution period of the SP Reach performance, and the execution of the movable body performance in SP Reach performance B During the period, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed along with the effect image 018SG250B related to the movement of the movable body 32. During the execution period of the movable body effect in SP Reach effect A, the effect image 018SG250B in the same form as in SP Reach effect B is displayed, while the character image 018SGX1 is not displayed. The light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect is the same light emission pattern LP3-2 whether the movable body effect is executed in SP Reach effect B or in SP Reach effect A.

By doing this, the movement pattern of the movable body 32 and the illumination pattern of the movable body LED 208 can be standardized between SP Reach演出 B, where the enemy character is displayed, and SP Reach演出 A, where the enemy character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. Furthermore, the presence or absence of the enemy character displayed during the execution period of the movable body演出 enhances the connection between the SP Reach演出 and the movable body演出, thereby improving the overall effect.

More specifically, in SP Reach演出 B and SP Reach演出 A, which have different presentation styles, the execution timing and operation style of the movable body 32 are common to both SP Reach演出 and SP Reach演出. However, the effect image 018SG250B is displayed in a style corresponding to each SP Reach演出. This prevents the flow of the SP Reach演出 from being interrupted by the movable body animation.

In this embodiment, an example was given in which SP Reach演出 B was applied as the first specific performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to any of SP Reach Performances C to E.

Furthermore, the execution period of the movable body animation includes a first period and a second period that follows the first period. While the animation style in the first period is common to SP Reach animations B-E and SP Reach animation A (the attack image 018SG250 in Figure 13-14(C) is common), the animation style in the second period differs between SP Reach animations B-E and SP Reach animation A (the image shown in Figure 13-14(D1) differs from the images shown in Figure 13-14(D2-D5)). By doing this, the animation style is common until the first period, further reducing manufacturing costs, while simultaneously enhancing the entertainment value of the SP Reach animation by making it unclear whether it is SP Reach animation B-E or SP Reach animation A until the first period.

Furthermore, as an SP reach animation, it is possible to execute SP reach animation E, which displays enemy character X-2, different from enemy character X-1, and the proportion of times the game is controlled to a jackpot state differs depending on whether SP reach animation B or SP reach animation E is executed. In other words, in a low base state, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern that allows execution of SP reach animation B is 300/997, and in a high base state, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the determination ratio of the SP reach γ variation pattern that allows execution of SP reach animation E is 800/997. Furthermore, in SP Reach演出 C, during the execution period of the movable body effect that is performed when a jackpot is announced, the same effect image 018SG250B as in SP Reach演出 B is displayed, corresponding to the movement of the movable body 32, and the character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X2 is displayed. The light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect performed in SP Reach演出 C is the same light emission pattern LP3-2 as the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body effect performed in SP Reach演出 B.

By doing so, the operating mode of the movable body 32 and the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance can be standardized, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. Furthermore, it is possible to increase the number of SP reach performances with different rates of control to the jackpot state, thereby drawing attention to which SP reach performance will be executed and improving the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in the movable body animation performed during SP Reach animation B, the enemy character X1 displayed in a manner similar to the effect image enhances the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image, thereby increasing the visual effect of the movable body animation.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a performance in which an enemy character is displayed and the player is notified whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state using the enemy character, in a first mode (for example, SP Reach performance B) and a second mode (for example, SP Reach performance D). During the execution period of SP Reach performances B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), the CPU 120 can execute a movable body performance, and during the execution period of the movable body performance, in both SP Reach performance B and SP Reach performance D, the CPU 120 can execute a performance related to the operation of the movable body 32. The character image 018SGX1 is displayed along with a regular effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B). In the case of SP Reach演出 B, instead of post-event演出 B using the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP Reach演出, post-event演出 A is executed without the enemy character being displayed (see Figure 13-17). In the case of SP Reach演出 D, post-event演出 B using the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the SP Reach演出 is executed (see Figures 13-18 and 13-19).

By doing so, the movement patterns of the enemy character and the movable body 32 in the SP Reach演出 B and SP Reach演出 D are standardized, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. Furthermore, by displaying the common enemy character X-1 with different animations, the connection between SP Reach演出 B and D and the movable body animation, as well as between SP Reach演出 B and D and the post-event animations A and B, is enhanced, improving the overall effect of the animations.

More specifically, even in the post-event sequence following the announcement of a confirmed jackpot during the SP Reach sequence, the characters displayed during the SP Reach sequence are used to announce the re-spin result of the decorative symbols and the planned number of balls dispensed. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP Reach sequence, the announcements such as the re-spin result and planned number of balls dispensed are common, while the displayed content corresponds to the type of SP Reach sequence. This allows the sequence from the SP Reach sequence to the post-event sequence to be presented as a continuous sequence.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute a special performance (for example, a performance in which the enemy character X-1 disappears) after the movable body performance executed in the SP Reach performance. In SP Reach performance B, in the jackpot notification before the post-performance A, character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 disappears by fading out (see Figure 13-15 (E2)). In SP Reach performance D, in the post-performance B, special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears into a star after being thrown away (see Figure 13-19 (G1-5)). By doing this, the timing of the execution of the special performance changes depending on the type of SP Reach performance, thereby improving the performance effect.

In this embodiment, examples of special effects were given, such as an effect where the defeated enemy character X-1 disappears due to a fade-out display, or an effect where the attacked enemy character X-2 is knocked away and then disappears into a star. However, the present invention is not limited to these examples. Enemy characters may also disappear due to a frame-out display, or an image indicating that they have disappeared (e.g., a star or effect image) may be displayed. Furthermore, the effects can be varied in any way that changes the appearance of the character, even if it doesn't completely disappear, such as by increasing transparency, decreasing brightness, or distorting the image.

Furthermore, when SP Reach β (Big Win Variation Pattern) is determined in a low base state and SP Reach演出 B is executed, the probability of it being controlled to "Big Win B (6R)" (Second Advantageous State), which is more advantageous to the player than "Big Win A (6R)" (First Advantageous State), is 30%. Similarly, when SP Reach γ (Big Win Variation Pattern) is determined in a high base state and SP Reach演出 D is executed, the probability of it being controlled to "Big Win C (10R)" (Second Advantageous State), which is more advantageous to the player than "Big Win B (6R)" (First Advantageous State), is 40%. This approach allows players to focus on whether SP Reach演出 B or D will be executed, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control is capable of executing a first specific performance (e.g., SP Reach performance D) that displays enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state using enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1, and a second specific performance (e.g., SP Reach performance E) that displays enemy character X-2, which is different from enemy character X-1, and ally character A-1 and notifies whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state using enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1. When a movable body performance is executed in SP Reach performance D, the CPU 120 displays and operates the enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 that were displayed in SP Reach performance D. By doing so, it is possible to execute a post-event animation B that notifies the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, which is controlled by the SP Reach animation D. Furthermore, when a movable body animation is executed in the SP Reach animation E, by displaying and operating the enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 shown in the SP Reach animation E, it is possible to execute a post-event animation B that notifies the expected number of balls to be awarded in the jackpot game state, which is controlled by the SP Reach animation E. At least the operation mode of ally character A-1 is common to both the post-event animation B corresponding to SP Reach animation D and the post-event animation B corresponding to SP Reach animation E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19).

By doing this, using the same ally character in both the SP reach animation and the post-animation animation reduces manufacturing costs while also making the relationship between the two animations easier to understand, thereby enhancing the overall effect.

Furthermore, since the background image 018SG280, which represents space, is common to both the post-event B of SP Reach演出 D and the post-event B of SP Reach演出 E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), the background image can also be standardized, further reducing manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, since ally character A-1 is common to both the post-event B of SP Reach演出 D and the post-event B of SP Reach演出 E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), special characters can also be standardized, further reducing manufacturing costs.

Furthermore, in the post-event sequence B corresponding to SP Reach sequence D, images of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously. Similarly, in the post-event sequence B corresponding to SP Reach sequence E, images of enemy character X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting are displayed simultaneously (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19). Because each character is displayed simultaneously, the impact of the post-event sequence B is enhanced, improving the overall effect of the sequence.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance can execute the following post-event performances: a first post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) related to SP Reach Performance D when a movable body performance is executed in SP Reach Performance D; a second post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance B) related to SP Reach Performance E when a movable body performance is executed in SP Reach Performance E; and a third post-event performance (e.g., post-event performance A) related to SP Reach Performance A when a movable body performance is executed in SP Reach Performance A. The proportion of the game being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on whether SP Reach Performance D, SP Reach Performance E, or SP Reach Performance A is executed.

In other words, when the SP Reach γ jackpot variation pattern is determined in a high base state, the probability of being controlled to "Jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40% when SP Reach演出 D is executed, and 60% when SP Reach演出 E is executed. When the SP Reach β jackpot variation pattern is determined in a low base state, the probability of being controlled to "Jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 100% when SP Reach演出 A is executed.

By doing this, not only is a big win announced through the SP Reach animation, but the percentage of the game being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which SP Reach animation is performed. This effectively increases the player's attention to the SP Reach animation, thereby enhancing the enjoyment of the game.

In the above embodiment, the first post-event sequence related to the first specific sequence is shown as the display of the ally and enemy characters that were shown in SP Reach Sequence D, thereby relating the first post-event sequence to the first specific sequence; the second post-event sequence related to the second specific sequence is shown as the display of the ally and enemy characters that were shown in SP Reach Sequence E, thereby relating the second post-event sequence to the second specific sequence; and the third post-event sequence is related to the third specific sequence because the ally and enemy characters are not displayed in SP Reach Sequence A and post-event sequence A. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the third post-event sequence related to the third specific sequence may be shown as the display of the characters that were shown in SP Reach Sequence, thereby relating the third post-event sequence to the third specific sequence.

In other words, a post-event performance related to a specific performance is a performance in which at least some of the performance modes are common to the display mode in the specific performance. If the common performance mode is that a character is displayed or not displayed, the type of character displayed in the specific performance and the post-event performance may differ. Furthermore, there may be four or more types of specific performances and post-event performances.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first and second specific effects are exemplified as being executable in a low base state, and the third specific effect as being executable in a high base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The first, second, and third specific effects may all be executable in a low base state, or they may all be executable in a high base state. In other words, the first, second, and third specific effects may be any effects that can be determined regardless of the game state.

Furthermore, as a third specific effect, it may be possible to execute SP Reach effect F (for example, a battle effect with enemy character X-3, different from enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state. In this case, the proportion of times a jackpot C (10R) is controlled may be SP Reach effect F (50%) > SP Reach effect E (35%) > SP Reach effect D (15%). Note that the post-event effect C (third post-event effect) performed when a jackpot is announced in SP Reach effect F may have a longer duration than post-event effects A and B.

Furthermore, in the SP Reach演出 F described above, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body effect shown in Figure 13-6(B) is preferably the same light emission pattern LP3-2 as SP Reach Effects A to E, and the sound pattern of the movable body effect shown in Figure 13-6(C) is preferably the same sound patterns BP0-1 to BP3 as SP Reach Effects A to E.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, examples were given of a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, such as an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, a 10R jackpot C with a larger planned number of balls dispensed), or an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, jackpots B and C that are controlled to a probability variation state after the jackpot ends). However, the present invention is not limited to these examples, and the second advantageous state may include states in which the number of balls dispensed, the number of game rounds, the control period of the probability variation state, time reduction state, or minor jackpot state, the probability variation fall rate, etc., are more advantageous than the first advantageous state. It may also include advantageous states in which the jackpot game state or the presentation after the jackpot game state ends are more advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, when applying the pachinko game machine 1 of feature section 018SG to the pachinko game machine 1 of feature sections 069G and 099G, for example, it is possible to apply SP reach performance A in feature section 018SG to SP reach A and B in feature sections 069G and 099G, apply SP reach performances B and C in feature section 018SG to SP reach C in feature sections 069G and 099G, and apply SP reach performances D and E in feature section 018SG to SP reach D in feature sections 069G and 099G.

(Explanation of the modification and application of feature section 018SG)
In the aforementioned feature section 018SG, an example was given in which a jackpot game state is applied as an advantageous state for the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a minor jackpot game state, a time-saving state (high base state), a probability variation state, etc., may also be applied.

Furthermore, while the aforementioned feature section 018SG illustrates an example of a movable body using the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to this. Other movable bodies besides the movable body 32 provided on the game board, or movable bodies provided on the game machine frame 3, may also be used.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a configuration in which SP reach sequences A to E, which indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state, are applied as specific sequences to notify whether or not the game is controlled to a favorable state, the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach sequences, post-event sequences, etc., may also be applied.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a form in which enemy characters X-1 and X-2, who confront allied characters A-1 and A-2, are applied as specific or special characters, the present invention is not limited to this. Other enemy characters, or other characters that do not confront allied characters, may also be applied. Characters consisting of live-action images of people may also be used.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a configuration in which allied characters A-1 and A-2 confront enemy characters X-1 and X-2 as special characters, the present invention is not limited to this. Other allied characters, or other characters that do not confront enemy characters, may also be applied. Characters consisting of live-action images of people may also be used.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a form in which SP reach sequences A to E are applied as specific sequences in which a special character (ally character) confronts a specific character or a special character (enemy character), the present invention is not limited to this. The special character, specific character, or special character may be multiple allied or enemy characters who cooperate with each other without confronting each other, or multiple characters that do not confront each other at all.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG illustrates a configuration in which a movable body effect is applied as a special effect to operate the movable body and illuminate the light-emitting element, the present invention is not limited to this, and effects to operate movable bodies other than the movable body 32 may also be applied. Also, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, in the aforementioned feature section 018SG, the timing of the execution of the movable body effect was set to occur before the announcement of a confirmed jackpot in the later stages of SP Reach effects A to E, but this can be changed in various ways, such as during the middle stages of SP Reach effects A to E. Also, while the movable body effect could be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, it may also be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the player's operation.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG illustrates a configuration in which, in the movable body performance, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1-9L12, 9R1-9R12 light up, sound effects are output, and the push button 31B vibrates in response to the movement of the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to this. The invention may also enable the execution of a light guide plate illumination performance using a light guide plate device in response to the movement of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emission pattern of the light guide plate device be common to SP reach performances A-E, similar to the light emission pattern of the LEDs.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified an example where the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect image may be related to the movement mode of the movable body 32 (e.g., vibration) (e.g., an effect image representing impact), or it may be an effect image that emphasizes the vibrating movable body 32.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a configuration in which a post-event performance is applied after a movable body performance as a special performance, it includes post-event performance A, which performs a re-variable display of the confirmed decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and post-event performance B, which announces the planned number of balls awarded in the jackpot game state, which was announced using the ally and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the above post-event performances as long as it is an effect performed after a special performance. For example, it may also be possible to apply jackpot performances performed in the jackpot game state or minor win performances performed in the minor win game state.

Specifically, in the above embodiment, a post-event performance B was executed to announce the planned number of balls awarded in the announced jackpot game state before the variable display ended. However, it may also be possible to execute a post-event performance announcing the planned number of balls awarded in the announced jackpot game state during the fanfare period between the start of the jackpot game state and the start of the round game, or during the round interval between game rounds.

Furthermore, in the feature section 018SG, while the post-event presentation B exemplified a form in which the expected number of balls to be awarded in a jackpot is specifically announced as game value information that can identify the magnitude of the game value awarded in a jackpot game state that is controlled by SP reach presentations D and E, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds or the like may also be announced.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG exemplified a form in which the planned number of balls to be awarded in a jackpot game state, which is controlled by SP reach sequences D and E, is announced in the post-event presentation B, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when jackpots occur consecutively for a predetermined number of times (e.g., two times), the total number of balls acquired from the first jackpot game state to the present may be announced instead of, or in addition to, the planned number of balls. Moreover, when the planned number of balls is being added in the planned number addition part of the post-event presentation B, or when the planned number of balls is being announced in the planned number announcement part, it may be possible to announce that the total number of balls has exceeded a predetermined number (e.g., 2500 balls, 5000 balls, 7500 balls, 10000 balls, etc.).

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG illustrates a configuration in which the types of allied and enemy characters in SP Reach sequences A to E differ, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body sequence and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The background image, the types and execution rates of various pre-announcement sequences such as chance-up sequences, the battle confrontation period, the character operation mode and display mode, etc., in SP Reach sequences A to E may differ according to the variable display results. Even in this case, it is preferable that the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body sequence and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG illustrates a configuration where the execution period of the planned ball payout addition part and the planned ball payout notification part in the post-event performance B is the same for SP reach performances D and E, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The execution period of the planned ball payout addition part and the planned ball payout notification part may be varied depending on the type of jackpot, i.e., the size of the planned ball payout.

Furthermore, while the feature section 018SG illustrates SP reach effects A to C as executable in a low base state, and SP reach effects D and E as executable in a high base state, the present invention is not limited to this. The various specific effects (SP reach effects) described above may all be executable in a low base state, or they may all be executable in a high base state. In other words, they may be executable in any type of game state.

The features 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings. However, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment uses a pachinko game machine 1 as an example of a game machine, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines, where a predetermined number of game balls are circulated within the game machine, and the number of balls lent in response to player requests and the number of prize balls awarded for winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, points or scores are awarded to the player instead of game balls, and these awarded points or scores represent the game value.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, this method can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of individually identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

Furthermore, when different effects are performed in the first and second special states, it is preferable to differentiate the sound and lamp illumination patterns. For example, multiple light-emitting means may be provided, and the brightness and light intensity or illumination patterns may be changed according to the game state. In this case, the illumination pattern will be selected from multiple data tables based on the variation pattern. Moreover, demo effects may be performed using multiple light-emitting elements with various illumination patterns, not only during variation but also during demo displays when no variation is occurring. When performing effects such as displaying company names, warnings, or introducing characters during the demo screen, it is conceivable that a predetermined character will take action. Furthermore, it is also conceivable to change the transparency of demo effects and identification information. The specific details are explained below.

The embodiments for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the following examples.

[Form 1]
The gaming machine of form 1-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the demonstration display brightness data table (Figures 31, 32, 51, 52, 53, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step design, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 2]
The gaming machine of type 2-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the normal state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the normal state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the special state background display to the demonstration display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the special state background display to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 31, 32, 51, 52, 53, 55, 56, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the demonstration display in a step-by-step manner, allows attention to be drawn to the changes rather than starting everything at once, making the start of the demonstration display noticeable and resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in form 2-1,
The luminance data initially used in the demonstration display luminance data table is data that emits light in a different color than the final luminance data used in the normal state background display luminance data table and the final luminance data used in the special state background display luminance data table (Figures 93, 97, 101, 105, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that the color of the last luminance data during normal background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display, and the color of the last luminance data during special background display differs from the color of the first luminance data during demonstration display. As a result, the color change of the light-emitting means is more noticeable when the demonstration display starts in each state, making it easier to understand that the demonstration display has started, and consequently enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 3]
The gaming machine of form 3-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first and second periods, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for background display and the luminance data table for demonstration display (Figures 42, 51, 52, 55, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 4]
The gaming machine of type 4-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display.
During the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state, the luminance data table for displaying the background in the special state, and the luminance data table for displaying the demonstration.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (Figures 42, 51, 52, 55, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could lead players to mistakenly believe that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode in both the normal and special states, it is possible to prevent players from being misled in either state, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 5]
The gaming machine of type 5-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means, a second light-emitting means, and a third light-emitting means.
The third light-emitting means is a light-emitting means provided in correspondence with the performance operation means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a first scene and a second scene,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the first scene corresponding to the first scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a luminance data table for the second scene corresponding to the second scene.
In the first scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the first scene and the luminance data table for the second scene.
In the second scene during the second period, the third light-emitting means is controlled using the first luminance data table (Figures 42, 51, 52, 55, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature means that switching the mode of the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means could mislead the player into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means. Therefore, by keeping the mode constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 5-2 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
One luminance data table is different from the luminance data table used when a promotional effect is performed to prompt the operation of the performance control means, and the luminance data constituting the one luminance data table has less luminance change than the luminance data constituting the promotional effect luminance data table (Figures 110 to 118, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, one brightness data table is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the operation of the performance control device is being prompted. This prevents players from mistakenly believing that the operation of the performance control device is being prompted, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-3 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first luminance data table is characterized by being composed of luminance data for turning off the lights.
According to this feature, since one brightness data table consists of brightness data for turning off the lights, it is possible to prevent players from mistakenly thinking that they are being prompted to operate the performance control device, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

The gaming machine of form 5-4 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The first light-emitting means is provided on the game board,
The second and third light-emitting means are provided in the game frame (Figure 49, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although the light-emitting means corresponding to the performance control means are provided on the game frame, by managing them separately from other light-emitting means provided on the game frame using a different brightness data table, it is possible to suitably design the system to prevent players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the performance control means, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

The gaming machine of form 5-5 is the gaming machine described in form 3-1, form 4-1, and form 5-1,
The display means displays an indication that the device is starting up after the power is turned on.
The light emission control means is,
At a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display brightness data table.
The third light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table at a timing related to displaying an indication that the display means is activated (Figures 60, 62, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for illumination using a luminance data table even before the background display is activated, enabling verification of the illumination mechanism's functionality at startup. Subsequently, the illumination pattern can be seamlessly transitioned to the customer waiting mode, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 6]
The gaming machine of type 6-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, a scene displaying a warning, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a different scene from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which text introducing the gaming machine is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene, the luminance data table for the title name display, and the luminance data table for the warning display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table (Figure 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.

The term "company name" includes the names of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the gaming machine in question.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. However, since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings should be emphasized, each can be highlighted by using dedicated illumination to differentiate it from other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-2 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
There are other scenes between the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene.
In other scenes, a different luminance data table is used (Figure 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows a common brightness data table to be used for both the first model introduction scene and the second model introduction scene, enabling optimal light emission without increasing capacity, and consequently, optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 6-3 is the gaming machine described in form 6-1,
The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the company name display scene (10 seconds). The execution period for the model introduction scene, including the first and second model introduction scenes (30 seconds), is greater than the execution period for the warning display scene (5 seconds).
A key feature of this system is that the company name and warning text may appear at times other than during the demonstration.
This feature allows for longer emphasis on scenes introducing the machine or displaying the title name, which are only shown during demonstrations, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 7]
The gaming machine of type 7-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a scene different from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for the company name display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the first brightness data table.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the company name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the text display of the company name related to the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 42, 44, 45, 104-111, and 132).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey company names, using brightness data linked to the display animation allows for emphasis compared to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 8]
The gaming machine of type 8-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned first model introduction scene is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned second model introduction scene is a different scene from the aforementioned first model introduction scene, and is a scene in which the text introducing the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period and the second model introduction scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table different from the luminance data table for displaying the title name.
The aforementioned brightness data table for the title name display scene includes brightness data that is linked to the animation of the title name text display on the gaming machine.
The first brightness data table does not include brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the first model introduction scene, nor brightness data linked to the animation of the text display introducing the gaming machine in the second model introduction scene (Figures 42, 44, 45, 104-111, and 132).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. In particular, to convey the model name, the brightness data is linked to the display animation, allowing it to be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 9]
The gaming machine of type 9-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the title name display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the title name display scene corresponding to the title name display scene.
In the warning display scene during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the warning display scene corresponding to the warning display scene.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for corporate name display scenes is a more emphasized mode than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for warning display scenes.
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the title name display scene is more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the luminance data table for the warning display scene (Figure 41, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the transmission of information through text displays in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated illumination is used for each. In particular, the illumination patterns for company names and machine titles are emphasized compared to warning scenes, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-2 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for corporate name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, and the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for title name display scenes are more emphasized than the modes in which the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned brightness data table for warning display scenes, are any of the following: (1) modes with frequent flashing; (2) modes with many colors lit; (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used (Figure 41, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for emphasis on the company name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 9-3 is the gaming machine described in form 9-1,
The mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the corporate name display scene is characterized by being more emphasized than the mode of the light-emitting means controlled using the aforementioned luminance data table for the title name display scene.
This feature allows for greater emphasis on the company name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and consequently enabling more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 10]
The gaming machine of form 10-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene showing the company name and a scene introducing the product model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the model introduction display scene corresponding to the model introduction display scene.
The plurality of luminance data constituting the luminance data table for the corporate name display scene are luminance data configured to be emitted by the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means.
The multiple luminance data sets that constitute the luminance data table for the aforementioned model introduction scene are luminance data configured such that the first light-emitting means emits light, but the second light-emitting means does not emit light (Figures 42, 103 to 111).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are made to illuminate, and in the scene where the model is introduced, the first light-emitting means illuminates but the second light-emitting means does not. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.
The gaming machine of form 10-2 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene introducing the first model, and a scene introducing the second model.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the company name display scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using a brightness data table for the company name display scene corresponding to the company name display scene.
In the first model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the first model introduction display scene corresponding to the first model introduction display scene.
In the second model introduction scene during the second period, the first light-emitting means is controlled using a luminance data table for the second model introduction display scene corresponding to the second model introduction display scene.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using a single luminance data table during the first model introduction scene in the second period and the second model introduction scene in the second period.
According to this feature, although there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display, in the scene where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the scenes where the first and second models are introduced, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scene where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 11]
The gaming machine of form 11-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow luminance data table.
When a specific effect is performed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow luminance data table used during the second period and the rainbow luminance data table used when the specific effect is performed are common luminance data tables (Figures 41, 44, 45, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 12]
The gaming machine of form 12-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
When a specific performance that can be executed in the normal state and a special performance that can be executed in the special state are executed, the light-emitting means is controlled using the rainbow brightness data table.
The rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the normal state, the rainbow brightness data table used in the second period after the first period following the end of gameplay in the special state, and the rainbow brightness data table used when specific effects that can be performed in the normal state and special effects that can be performed in the special state are performed are all common brightness data tables (Figures 41, 44, 45, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more spectacular demonstration display by setting the light emission pattern to rainbow. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the light emission pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be performed in normal conditions and special effects that can be performed in special conditions, the system does not require increased capacity, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

The gaming machine of form 12-2 is the gaming machine described in form 12-1,
The aforementioned specific effects and special effects are characterized by being effects that definitively inform the player that they will be controlled to a favorable state.
According to this feature, the luminance data table used for effects that are guaranteed to be controlled to a favorable state is also used for demonstration displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 13]
The gaming machine of form 13-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene that includes a title name display scene,
The aforementioned title name display scene consists of a main title name display part that displays the main title name of the gaming machine, and a subtitle name display part that subsequently displays the subtitle name of the gaming machine.
The light emission control means controls the light emission means using a luminance data table for the subtitle name display part corresponding to the subtitle name display part at the timing of switching from the main title name display part to the subtitle name display part.
The luminance data table for the subtitle name display part is a luminance data table that uses multiple luminance data to cause the light-emitting means to emit light in a manner that is linked to the animation of the subtitle name's text display (Figure 42, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order, and the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed. By illuminating the lighting means in conjunction with the display animation of the subtitle name, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 14]
The gaming machine of form 14-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name, a scene displaying the title name, and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the text of the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed with animation.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed in animation when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the company name associated with the gaming machine is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the gaming machine.
The animated display of the game machine's title is more emphasized than the animated display of warning text when playing the game machine (Figures 133, 134, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the use of text displays to convey information in multiple scenarios. To emphasize each type of information, such as company names, machine titles, and warnings, dedicated display animations are used for each. In particular, emphasizing the display animations for company names and machine titles compared to warning scenes allows for greater emphasis on these elements, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 15]
The gaming machine of form 15-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a title display scene and a warning display scene.
The aforementioned title name display scene is a scene in which the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned title name display scene, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed as an animation at a predetermined display position.
After that, the title name of the gaming machine is displayed in text with animation.
In the aforementioned warning display scene, warning text for playing the gaming machine is displayed with animation at a designated display position.
Subsequently, warning text messages regarding gameplay are displayed without animation (Figures 133, 134, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the game title, attention is drawn to the title, while by not using lingering animations for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 16]
The gaming machine of form 16-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display includes a warning display scene,
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The aforementioned warning display scene consists of a first warning display part that displays a warning text for the first event, and a second warning display part that displays a warning text for the second event.
The background color of the text in the first warning display part is different from the background color of the text in the second warning display part (Figures 46, 47, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention to different events by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 17]
The gaming machine of form 17-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned demonstration display consists of a scene displaying the company name and a scene displaying a warning.
The aforementioned company name display scene is a scene in which the company name related to the gaming machine is displayed in text.
The aforementioned warning display scene is a scene in which warning text is displayed when playing the gaming machine.
The background color of the text displayed in the company name display scene is different from the background color of the text displayed in the warning display scene (Figures 46, 47, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for increased attention when switching between displaying the company name and warnings by using different background colors, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

[Form 18]
The gaming machine of form 18-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period has ended, the background display will be shown again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the background display (Figures 63, 64, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents an unpleasant feeling after the demonstration display ends, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 19]
The gaming machine of form 19-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, the background display of the normal state will be displayed again.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display will be displayed again.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the normal state background display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the brightness data table for the demonstration display to the brightness data table for the normal state background display.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the special state background display, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table for the special state background display (Figures 63 to 65, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature, which involves switching the control of the light-emitting means first and then starting the background display in a step-by-step design, prevents a negative aftertaste when the demonstration display ends. Furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp's illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 20]
The gaming machine of form 20-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information (Figures 66 to 71, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn enables prompt notification that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 21]
The gaming machine of form 21-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the special state, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the special state background display brightness data table corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display in the special state has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state (Figures 66 to 71, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the starting conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 22]
The gaming machine of form 22-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the termination of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the first start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information.
When the second start condition is met while the demonstration display is being displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the luminance data table for the demonstration display to the luminance data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information (Figures 66 to 71, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control, as the system switches control of the light-emitting means first, regardless of which starting condition is met. This switching of the light-emitting means quickly signals that the starting condition has been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in a more efficient customer waiting control system.

[Form 23]
The gaming machine of form 23-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 38, 67, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the switching from the demonstration display to be completed before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, thereby indicating that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 24]
The gaming machine of form 24-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display in the normal state has ended, the normal state background display is displayed.
During the first period after the variable display in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
In the normal state, if the start condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the normal state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
In the aforementioned special state, if the activation condition is met while the demonstration display is shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information in the special state before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 38, 67, 137, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for the completion of the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, in both normal and special states. This signals that the activation conditions have been met and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 25]
The gaming machine of form 25-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the first special identification information,
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the second special identification information,
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the first activation condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the display is switched from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the first special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
When the demonstration display is shown and the second activation condition is met, the display switches from the demonstration display to a variable display of the performance identification information corresponding to the second special identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value (Figures 38, 67, 137, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by completing the switch from the demonstration display before the transparency of the performance identification information increases, regardless of which activation condition is met, regardless of which activation condition is met.

[Form 26]
The gaming machine of form 26-1 is,
A gaming machine that can display variable special identification information when the starting conditions are met,
Launching operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display has ended, the background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the display will switch from the demonstration display to the background display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the firing operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the background display (Figures 72, 73, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn signals that the demonstration display has ended due to the operation of the firing mechanism. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 27]
The gaming machine of form 27-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display luminance data table.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a demonstration display luminance data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
When the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 74 to 76, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, which in turn promptly signals that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 28]
The gaming machine of form 28-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of providing gaming services,
Menu operation means,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, a demonstration display is shown.
If the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is being shown, the system switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using a brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
When the menu is displayed, the light-emitting means is controlled using a menu display brightness data table corresponding to the menu display.
In the normal state described above, when the menu operation means is operated while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the menu display.
In the aforementioned special state, when the display means is showing the demonstration display, if the menu operation means is operated, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the menu display brightness data table before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the menu display (Figures 74 to 76, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for switching the control of the light-emitting means first, both in normal and special states. This switching of the light-emitting means allows for prompt notification that the menu operation means has been operated and the demonstration display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 29]
The gaming machine of form 29-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
After the second period ends, the switching display is shown, and then the background display is shown.
If an interrupt condition is met while the demonstration display is being shown, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 63 to 76, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for a more abrupt transition when a demonstration display ends due to the passage of time, by inserting a switching display. Conversely, when a demonstration display ends due to an interruption condition, it appears to switch abruptly without an inserting switching display. This contrast highlights the fact that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 30]
The gaming machine of form 30-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned normal state has ended, a switching display is shown, and then the background display of the aforementioned normal state is shown.
After the second period in the aforementioned special state has ended, the switching display is shown, and then the special state background display is shown.
When the demonstration display is shown in the normal state, if the interrupt condition is met, the system will switch from the demonstration display to the normal state background display without displaying the switching display.

When the demonstration display is displayed in the aforementioned special state, if the interrupt condition is met, the system switches from the demonstration display to the special state background display without displaying the switching display (Figures 63 to 76, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for optimal customer waiting control by contrasting the two events: in normal and special states, the termination of a demonstration display due to the passage of time is prevented from appearing abrupt by inserting a switching display; and the termination of a demonstration display due to an interruption condition is made to appear abrupt without inserting a switching display.

[Form 31]
The gaming machine of form 31-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
If a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After power is turned on, the background display is displayed without showing the guidance message regarding the performance adjustment at the time the background display starts.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is displayed.
If a power outage occurs and a power-on process is performed that involves initialization,
After the power is turned on, the background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment at the timing when the background display starts.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the background display starts, and the background display is then displayed (Figures 57 and 58).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature suggests that the setup process before a gaming parlor opens can be either a hot start (power on without initialization) or a cold start (power on with initialization). In either case, the staff can check the display in the following order: checking the background display after power-on, checking the demonstration display, and checking the guidance display, thus increasing the efficiency of the checks. Furthermore, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding the adjustment of the presentation from the moment the game starts, providing players with a suitable gaming environment, and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 32]
The gaming machine of form 32-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, the normal state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned special state, the special state background display is shown,
In the aforementioned normal state, if a power outage occurs and the power is restored,
After power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
After that, a demonstration display will be shown.
Subsequently, the guidance display is displayed at the timing when the normal state background display starts, and the normal state background display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special condition, if a power outage occurs and then the power is restored,
After the power is turned on, the guidance display regarding the performance adjustment is not displayed at the timing when the special state background display starts, and the special state background display is displayed.
After that, the aforementioned demonstration display is shown,
Subsequently, the guidance display is shown at the timing of the start of the display of the special state background display, while the special state background display is displayed (Figures 59 to 62, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
Based on these characteristics, there are two possible states for the setup of a gaming parlor before it opens: a normal state and a special state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in during startup, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background is displayed again afterward, it is highly likely that the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display starts, when the gaming parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will be the one with the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

[Form 33]
The gaming machine of form 33-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has finished,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, a special state background display is shown, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the special state background display is shown.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 52 to 57, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the end of a variation, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, effective customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 34]
The gaming machine of form 34-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the performance adjustment, the normal background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed while the normal background display is shown.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The normal state background display is displayed without displaying the guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the normal state background display is displayed while displaying the guidance display.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the normal state background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without the aforementioned guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended,
The special status background display is displayed without displaying the aforementioned guidance display, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the special status background display is displayed while the guidance display is displayed.
Subsequently, the demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is shown while the special status background display is shown (Figures 52 to 57, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, after the change in the first special identification information in either the normal state or the special state has ended, and even after the change in the second special identification information has ended, the guidance display is not immediately displayed after the change has ended, preventing unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, and as a result, effective customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 35]
The gaming machine of form 35-1 is
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
The aforementioned display means is
After the variable display ends,
Without displaying a guidance message regarding the production adjustment, the background display is shown, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the guidance message is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying a specific animation.
Subsequently, a demonstration display is shown, and after the display period of the demonstration display has elapsed, the guidance display is displayed superimposed on the background display by displaying the specific animation (Figures 52 to 57, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature prevents unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments by not immediately displaying guidance after the end of a variation. Once the demonstration display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display encourages players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Furthermore, when displaying guidance immediately after switching from the demonstration display to the background display, using the same animation as when displaying guidance after the end of a variation allows for appealing that guidance has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 36]
The gaming machine of form 36-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the second specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the demonstration display is shown after the second specified period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 52, 55, 60, 62, 136, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be annoying as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. After the power is turned on, it is the store staff, not the players, who are present, so setting a shorter time allows the store staff to quickly check the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 37]
The gaming machine of form 37-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display has finished and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specific period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 52, 55, 58, 136, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the fluctuation ends, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 38]
The gaming machine of form 38-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, a demonstration display is shown after a first specific period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after the power is restored, the first specified period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, followed by a power-on process that includes initialization. After the second specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is shown.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization is performed, the second specific period elapses, causing the demonstration display to be shown.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 58, 60, 62, 136, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 39]
The gaming machine of form 39-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Equipped with display means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
In the aforementioned normal state, after the variable display ends and a first specific period has elapsed, a demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display ends and a predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned special state, after the variable display has ended and the first specified period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed, and after the demonstration display has ended and the predetermined period has elapsed, the demonstration display is displayed again.
In the aforementioned normal state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after a second specific period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after a predetermined period has elapsed.
In the aforementioned special state, a power outage occurs, and after power-on with initialization, the demonstration display is displayed after the second specified period has elapsed, and after the demonstration display has finished, the demonstration display is displayed again after the predetermined period has elapsed.
The first specified period is longer than the second specified period (Figures 52, 55, 58, 136, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, if the demonstration display is shown immediately after the end of a variation, it may be bothersome as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time is set. Cold start (power on with initialization) is the initial starting method that must be performed when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By making the demonstration display appear immediately, the staff of the gaming parlor can quickly check the demonstration display and become more familiar with the introduced machine. Furthermore, by making the period after the demonstration display is shown once in all situations—after the end of a variation in normal mode, after the end of a variation in special mode, and after a cold start—the demo movie can be shown stably, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 40]
The gaming machine of form 40-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued (Figures 78 to 80, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay, whether during background display or demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 41]
The gaming machine of form 41-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 78 to 81, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature ensures that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay is carried over and executed regardless of whether the game is in a normal or special state, whether it is during background display or demonstration display. This allows for stable notification of specific errors and, as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 42]
The gaming machine of form 42-1 is,
A gaming machine capable of displaying variable information for the first special identification information when the first starting condition is met, and displaying variable information for the second special identification information when the second starting condition is met,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a background display is shown.
During the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, the background display is displayed.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the variable display of the second special identification information, the demonstration display is displayed.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
In the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If a specific error occurs during the variable display of the first special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has ended, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the first special identification information has finished, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during the variable display of the second special identification information, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has ended, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the variable display of the second special identification information has finished, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued (Figures 78 to 81, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for stable notification of specific errors by ensuring that the lamp notification of specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special identification information and the variable display of the second special identification information is carried over and executed during both background display and demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 43]
The gaming machine of form 43-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for different primary colors in the luminance data between the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for demonstration displays. This enables the system to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 44]
The gaming machine of form 44-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
The brightness data constituting the background display brightness data table and the brightness data constituting the specific error brightness data table have different proportions of colors (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for background display to have different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 45]
The gaming machine of form 45-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the completion of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the normal state background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table have different proportions of colors.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors have different proportions of colors (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for normal state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for specific errors and the luminance data table for special state background display to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern of the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 46]
The gaming machine of form 46-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The brightness data for the demonstration display and the brightness data for the specific error have different proportions of colors (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for demonstration displays to have different main colors, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 47]
The gaming machine of form 47-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The colors that make up the majority of the background display brightness data and the specific error brightness data are different (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data for specific errors and the luminance data for background display to have different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 48]
The gaming machine of form 48-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the normal state background display brightness data corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The colors that make up the majority of the normal state background display luminance data and the specific error luminance data are different.
The brightness data for displaying the special state background and the brightness data for specific errors have different proportions of colors (Figures 48, 91-102, 123-125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for normal state background display, and by configuring the luminance data to use different main colors for luminance data for specific errors and luminance data for special state background display, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the emission pattern during background display, regardless of whether it is a normal or special state, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 49]
The gaming machine of form 49-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the demonstration display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for demonstration displays, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 50]
The gaming machine of form 50-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the background display luminance data table and the luminance data constituting the specific error luminance data table are configured to have different light emission operation modes that are visible to the player (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 51]
The gaming machine of form 51-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the normal state background display brightness data table corresponding to the normal state background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, if the specific error has not occurred, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the specific error has not occurred during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table.
If the specified error occurs during gameplay in the normal state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the brightness data table for the specified error corresponding to the specified error.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
If the specific error occurs during gameplay in the special state, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the first period after the game in the special state has ended, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error has not been resolved during the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the special state, the control of the light-emitting means using the specific error brightness data table is continued.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that are visible to the player.
The luminance data constituting the luminance data table for displaying the special state background and the luminance data constituting the luminance data table for specific errors are configured to have different light emission operation patterns that the player can see (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for normal state background display, and the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ between the brightness data table for specific errors and the brightness data table for special state background display, so that it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the background display, regardless of which background display is being used, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 52]
The gaming machine of form 52-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the second period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the demonstration display brightness data corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the second period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for demonstration display.
The luminance data for demonstration display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light emission means and the light emission operation mode of the second light emission means are different as seen by the player (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for specific errors and the brightness data for demonstration displays, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during the demonstration display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 53]
The gaming machine of form 53-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
The light-emitting means includes a first light-emitting means and a second light-emitting means.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the background display brightness data corresponding to the background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data.
The luminance data for background display and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ between the brightness data for specific errors and the brightness data for background display, it is possible to suggest that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 54]
The gaming machine of form 54-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
There is a normal state and a special state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the normal state background display is shown.
During the first period after the game in the aforementioned special state has ended, the special state background display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the normal state, a demonstration display is shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period after the end of the game in the aforementioned special state, the demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If no specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the normal state background display corresponding to the normal state background display.
In the first period after the end of gameplay in the special state, if the specific error has not occurred, the first light-emitting means and the second light-emitting means are controlled using the brightness data for the special state background display corresponding to the special state background display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during the first period after the end of gameplay in the normal state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state.
If the specific error occurs during the first period after the end of the game in the special state,
The first light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data corresponding to the specific error.
The second light-emitting means is controlled using the luminance data for displaying the special state background.
The luminance data for displaying the background in the normal state and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player.
The luminance data for displaying the special state background and the luminance data for specific errors are configured such that the light emission operation mode of the first light-emitting means and the light emission operation mode of the second light-emitting means are different as seen by the player (Figures 48, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player is configured to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in the normal state. By configuring the movement of the light-emitting means shown to the player to differ depending on whether the brightness data for a specific error is used or the brightness data for displaying the background in a special state, it is possible to indicate that a specific error has occurred based on the light-emitting pattern during background display, regardless of whether the state is normal or special, and as a result, suitable customer waiting control can be performed.

[Form 55]
The gaming machine of form 55-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
During the second period, when the specified error occurs, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for the demonstration display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 48, 77, 78, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows for seamless demonstrations of the game balls, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. When the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the light emission mode of the light emission means is switched to a mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This enables the demonstration display to be shown without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result, enables optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 56]
The gaming machine of form 56-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
If the aforementioned specific error occurs during gameplay, the light-emitting means is controlled using the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the said specific error.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the first period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
Subsequently, if the specific error is not resolved during the second period, control of the light-emitting means using the brightness data table for the specific error is continued.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, whether the number of game media exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit or the number of game media not exceeding the number of unpaid media are distributed to the dispensing unit, the detection means switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display and controls the light-emitting means at a timing related to the detection of the first distributed game media (Figures 48, 77, 78, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature allows the background display to be shown quickly and seamlessly, regardless of the number of game balls dispensed to the payout unit. As soon as the detection sensor detects the first game ball, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This enables standardization of processing and, as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

[Form 57]
The gaming machine of form 57-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the second period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specified error occurs during the second period, and a specified period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for the demonstration display (Figures 48, 77, 78, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the demonstration display. This allows the demonstration display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Form 58]
The gaming machine of form 58-1 is,
A gaming machine that is playable,
A dispensing unit that dispenses game tokens,
The dispensing section is provided with a detection means for detecting game media,
Display means and
Light-emitting means and
It comprises a light emission control means,
If the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met, but the detection means does not detect the game medium, resulting in undispensed game mediums, a specific error occurs.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
If the specific error does not occur during the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
If the specific error does not occur during the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
During the first period, if the conditions for dispensing a game medium are met and the detection means does not detect a game medium for a predetermined period of time, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the background display brightness data table to the specific error brightness data table corresponding to the specific error.
When the specified error occurs during the first period, and a specified period shorter than the predetermined period has elapsed since the detection means detected the game medium, the system switches from the brightness data table for the specified error to the brightness data table for background display and controls the light-emitting means (Figures 48, 77, 78, 91 to 102, 123 to 125, etc.).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, while a state where the detection means does not detect anything may indicate a specific error, it could also be due to a ball delay or other issues. Therefore, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is not immediately switched. When a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the light-emitting means is immediately switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any unnaturalness, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Basic explanation)
First, we will explain the basic configuration and control of pachinko machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a typical pachinko machine).

Next, an embodiment for implementing the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described below based on the drawings. In the following description, the front side of Figure 14 will be considered the front (front, front view) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be considered the rear (rear, back view) side. The description will be based on the up, down, left, and right directions when viewing the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the front. In this embodiment, the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 refers to the surface facing the player playing the game. Furthermore, in the explanation of each step in the flowchart, for example, "Step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1" or "004SGS1," and "Normal Reach" may be abbreviated as "N Reach," and "Super Reach" as "SP Reach."

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
Figure 14 is a front view of the pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of its main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game surface, and a game machine frame (frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls, which serve as the game medium, are launched from a predetermined ball launching device and fired into this game area.

Furthermore, "variable display" of special symbols refers to, for example, the display of multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/shrinking one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and the regular symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or regular symbols are displayed in an updated manner. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are displayed in a scrolling or updated manner, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/shrinked. Note that variation also includes the display of a symbol blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is displayed as a stopped display (also called derivation or derivation display, etc.) (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may also be expressed as variable display or simply variable.

Furthermore, the special symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display device 4A are also referred to as "first special symbols," and the special symbols displayed variably in the second special symbol display device 4B are also referred to as "second special symbols." Additionally, a special symbol game using the first special symbols is called a "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbols is called a "second special symbol game." Furthermore, only one type of special symbol display device is required for the variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (electroluminescence) display, and displays various visual effects. The image display device 5 may also consist of a projector and a screen. Various visual effects are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers) that serve as decorative identification information distinct from the special symbols is performed in synchronization with the first and second special symbol games. Here, in synchronization with the first or second special symbol game, the decorative symbols are displayed variably (e.g., vertical scrolling or updating) in the left, center, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, respectively. The synchronous execution of the special symbol games and the variable display of decorative symbols are collectively referred to simply as "variable display."

Furthermore, the upper left corner of the display screen (display area) of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5S for displaying the first reserved memory number (for example, the number "0"), the second reserved memory number (for example, the number "4"), and small symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols. The small symbols are displayed variably in accordance with the variable display of the decorative symbols.

Furthermore, the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, reserved display, small symbols, error display (not shown) indicating an error state in the pachinko machine 1, the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 (see Figure 34) prompting the player to shoot to the right, and the remaining time-saving display 004SG202 (see Figure 34) indicating the remaining time-saving rounds, etc., may be displayed in front of (on a higher layer than) the performance images such as characters. This prevents the performance images from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory count, second reserved memory count, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, decorative symbols may be displayed behind (on a lower layer than) the performance images. This prevents the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images.

The above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are being displayed in a variable form. For example, it is displayed in a variable form by a certain operation in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5. Because the fourth symbol is displayed in a variable form, even if the decorative symbols are difficult to recognize, such as when the display content including the variable display of the decorative symbols momentarily disappears from the screen, or when the movable body 32 obscures all or part of the screen of the image display device 5, it becomes possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable form. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the first variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the second variable display start command, operates the image display device 5 to perform the variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol.

Furthermore, the symbols displayed on the fourth symbol display device, which is installed in a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable prize ball device 7, which is a designated location on the game board 2), such as the first special symbol LED and the second special symbol LED, are also referred to as the fourth symbols.

The lower part of the screen of the image display device 5 is provided with display areas (special symbol hold memory display area 5U, active display area 5F) for displaying a hold display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is currently being executed. The hold display and active display are collectively referred to as variable display-compatible displays corresponding to the variable display. In this embodiment, a special symbol hold memory display area 5U is provided common to both the first and second special symbols. However, a first special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the first hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the first special symbol is pending, and a second special symbol hold memory display area, which displays the second hold display representing a variable display whose execution for the second special symbol is pending, may be provided separately.

A first reserve indicator 25A and a second reserve indicator 25B, each composed of multiple LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first reserve indicator 25A displays the first reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs. The second reserve indicator 25B displays the second reserve memory count based on the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a prize ball device 6A is provided, and to the right of the prize ball device 6A, a variable prize ball device 6B is provided.

The prize ball entry device 6A forms a first starting prize entry opening, which is kept in a constant open state, allowing game balls to enter at all times, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the first special game may be started.

The variable prize ball device 6B (a standard electric mechanism) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see Figure 15). The variable prize ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric mechanism having a movable piece that can be opened and closed. When the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable piece is in the upright position, resulting in a closed state where no game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable piece of the variable prize ball device 6B is in the tilted position, resulting in an open state where game balls can enter the second starting prize opening (this is also said to be the second starting prize opening being in the open state). When a game ball enters the second starting prize opening, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 3) are dispensed, and the second special game may be started. Furthermore, the variable prize ball device 6B is not limited to those described above, as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

General prize slots 10 are provided at predetermined locations on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 14, three locations in the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable prize ball device 6B) and are kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when a ball enters any of the general prize slots 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10) are dispensed as prize balls.

Between the prize ball device 6A and the variable prize ball device 6B, a special variable prize ball device 7 with a large prize opening is provided. The special variable prize ball device 7 includes a large prize opening door driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 15), forming a large prize opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric mechanism) is in the off state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, preventing game balls from entering (passing through) it. On the other hand, in the special variable prize ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the on state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, making it easier for game balls to enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14) are dispensed as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize slot, more prize balls are dispensed than when a game ball enters, for example, the first starting prize slot, the second starting prize slot, or the general prize slot 10.

The entry of a game ball into any of the prize-winning slots, including the general prize-winning slot 10, is also referred to as "winning a prize." In particular, winning a prize in the starting slots (first starting prize-winning slot, second starting prize-winning slot) is also called a "starting prize."

A standard symbol display unit 20 is provided at a predetermined location on the game board 2 (in the example shown in Figure 14, the lower left of the game area). For example, the standard symbol display unit 20 consists of a 7-segment LED and displays a variable representation of multiple types of standard symbols as general identification information, distinct from special symbols. Standard symbols are represented by lighting patterns such as numbers "0" through "9" or "-". The standard symbols may also include a pattern where all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of standard symbols is also called a standard symbol game.

To the right of the image display device 5, a passage gate 41 is provided through which the game ball can pass. The game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41.

Below the regular symbol display unit 20, a regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is provided. The regular symbol hold indicator unit 25C is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of regular symbol hold memories (the number of regular symbol games currently in a pending state) by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is equipped with windmills and numerous obstacle pins that change the direction and speed of the game balls. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet for game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3. Side lamps 9b are provided to the left and right of the main lamp 9a, surrounding the game area. A button lamp 9e is provided below the game board 2. These main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and button lamps 9e provided on the gaming machine frame 3 are also referred to as "frame lamps."

A movable body 32, which operates according to the effects, is provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2 (above and below the image display device 5 in Figure 14). The movable body 32 is equipped with a movable body lamp 9d. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided near the special variable prize ball device 7 on the game board 2, and a decorative lamp 9f is provided on the left side of the game board 2. These attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, and decorative lamp 9f on the game board 2 are also referred to as "board lamps." These main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are sometimes collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9. Note that these main lamps 9a, side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, button lamps 9e, and decorative lamps 9f are composed of LEDs (see Figure 49). Further details about the various lamps will be described later.

A ball-launching handle (operating knob) 30 is provided at the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3. This handle is operated by the player or other user to launch the game balls towards the game area using a ball-launching device.

A ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, for holding (storing) game balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls dispensed by a designated ball dispenser so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a dispensing section (ball supply tray) separate from the upper tray, from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A, which can be grasped and tilted by the player, is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is equipped with a trigger button that the player can press. Operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see Figure 15).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, allowing the player to perform predetermined instruction operations by pressing it. Operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see Figure 15).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of how the game progresses)
The player rotates the ball-shooting handle 30 on the pachinko game machine 1, launching the game ball towards the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the regular symbol game is started using the regular symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the execution of the previous regular symbol game (i.e., the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the regular symbol game based on that passage cannot be executed immediately), the regular symbol game based on that passage is held up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this regular symbol game, if a specific regular symbol (a regular symbol that results in a win) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Win." On the other hand, if a regular symbol other than the regular symbol that results in a win (a regular symbol that results in a loss) stops and is displayed, the display result for the regular symbol becomes "Regular Symbol Loss." When a "Regular Symbol Win" occurs, the variable prize ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time (the second starting prize entry point becomes open).

When a game ball enters the first starting prize entry opening formed in the prize ball entry device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second starting prize entry opening formed in the variable prize ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

Furthermore, if a game ball enters (wins) the starting entry slot during the execution of a special feature game, or during the period when the game is controlled to a jackpot state as described later (i.e., if a starting entry occurs but the special feature game based on that entry cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special feature game based on that entry will be suspended until a predetermined maximum number of entries (for example, 4) are reached.

In the special feature game, if a specific special symbol (a winning symbol, such as "7," although the actual symbol may differ depending on the type of win described later) stops and is displayed as a guaranteed special symbol, it results in a "jackpot." If a special symbol other than the winning symbol (a losing symbol, such as "-") stops and is displayed, it results in a "miss."

After the display result in the special game is "Big Win," the game is controlled to a "Big Win Game" state, which is advantageous for the player.

During a jackpot, the large prize winning slot formed by the special variable prize ball entry device 7 opens in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls entering the large prize winning slot reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9 balls), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize winning slot can be open in one round, and is hereinafter referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize winning slot remains open is called a round (round game). During a jackpot, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined maximum number of times (e.g., 15 times or 2 times).

In a jackpot state, players can win prize balls by getting them into the jackpot slot. Therefore, a jackpot state is advantageous for the player. The more rounds there are in a jackpot state, and the longer the maximum opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Furthermore, each "jackpot" has a designated jackpot type. For example, multiple types of opening mechanisms for the jackpot entry point (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot (normal state, time-saving state, probability-increasing state, etc.) are provided, and the jackpot type is determined accordingly. There may also be jackpot types that award many prize balls, types that award few prize balls, or types that award almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability-increasing state, depending on the type of jackpot.

In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (time-saving control) is implemented that shortens the average special symbol variation time (the period during which the special symbols vary) compared to the normal state. In the time-saving mode, a control mechanism (high-open control, high-base control) is also implemented that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize entry point, such as by shortening the average normal symbol variation time (the period during which the normal symbols vary) or increasing the probability of a "normal symbol win" in the normal symbol game. Since the time-saving mode improves the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol), it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the probability variation state, in addition to the time-saving control, probability variation control is implemented that increases the probability of the displayed result being "Big Win" compared to the normal state. The probability variation state is even more advantageous for the player because it improves the efficiency of special symbol variations and makes "Big Win" more likely.

The time-saving mode and the probability-increasing mode continue until one of the following termination conditions is met first: either a predetermined number of special symbol games have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun. When the termination condition is the predetermined number of special symbol games played, it is also called a "count-restricted time-saving mode" (count-restricted time-saving mode, count-restricted probability-increasing mode, etc.).

The "normal state" refers to any game state other than advantageous states such as the jackpot state, the time-saving state, or the probability-increasing state. It is a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to the same settings as its initial state (for example, when a system reset is performed, or when a predetermined recovery process is not executed after power-on).

The state in which probability variation control is being performed is also called the high probability state, and the state in which probability variation control is not being performed is also called the low probability state. The state in which time reduction control is being performed is also called the high base state, and the state in which time reduction control is not being performed is also called the low base state. Combining these, the time reduction state is sometimes called the low probability high base state, the probability variation state is called the high probability high base state, and the normal state is called the low probability low base state. A state that is both high probability and low base is also called the high probability low base state.

Furthermore, the game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the jackpot entry point) during a jackpot game state. For example, when a game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to enter a probability variation state after the jackpot game state.

(Regarding the progress of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or enhance the excitement of the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. These effects are described below. These effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of such displays, they may also be performed using sound output from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting and extinguishing of game effect lamps 9, the operation of movable parts 32, or any effect device that includes some or all of these.

As a performance effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, designated as "left," "center," and "right," begin displaying variable decorative symbols in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. At the timing when the display result (also called the confirmed special symbol) is displayed in the first or second special symbol game, the confirmed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols, is also displayed (derived).

During the period from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the mode of variable display of decorative symbols may become a predetermined "reach" mode (a reach is achieved). Here, a "reach" mode refers to a mode in which, when the stopped display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 constitutes part of the jackpot combination described later, the variable display of decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped continues.

Furthermore, a reach animation is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach pattern occurring during the variable display of decorative symbols. In pachinko machine 1, multiple types of reach animations are executed, each with a different probability (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special symbol game or the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols) resulting in a "jackpot." Reach animations include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is "Big Win," the image display device 5 displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols as the result of the variable display of decorative symbols (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols is "Big Win"). For example, identical decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are aligned and displayed on predetermined active lines in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

If it's a "probability-increasing jackpot" where the game state is controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, odd-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line. If it's a "non-probability-increasing jackpot (normal jackpot)" where the game state is not controlled to a probability-increasing state after the jackpot state ends, even-numbered decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also called probability-increasing symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also called non-probability-increasing symbols (normal symbols). After a reach pattern is reached with non-probability-increasing symbols, an upgrade animation may be performed that ultimately results in a "probability-increasing jackpot."

If the display result of the special game is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may not become a reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination (also called "non-reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "non-reach miss"). Also, if the display result is "miss," the variable display mode of the decorative symbols may become a reach mode, and then the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols may be a confirmed decorative symbol of a predetermined reach combination that is not a winning combination (also called "reach miss") (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols will be "reach miss").

The Pachinko game machine 1 can perform various effects, including displaying the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays). Other effects, such as a prediction effect that foreshadows the probability of a jackpot, are performed during the variable display of decorative symbols. These prediction effects include those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the currently running variable display, and those that foreshadow the probability of a jackpot in the variable display before execution (variable displays whose execution is pending). As a pre-read prediction effect, the machine may also perform an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display-compatible displays (such as hold displays and active displays) to a mode different from the normal mode.

Furthermore, the image display device 5 may perform a pseudo-consecutive display effect by temporarily pausing the display of the decorative pattern during its variable display and then resuming the variable display, thereby making a single variable display appear as if it were multiple variable displays.

Even during a jackpot game, a jackpot-related animation is performed to indicate the jackpot state. This animation may include an announcement of the number of rounds or an upgrade animation indicating an increase in the value of the jackpot state.

Furthermore, when, for example, a special game is not being played, a demo image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer-waiting demo is performed).

(Circuit board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15, as shown in Figure 15. In addition, various other boards are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, such as a payout control board 004SG030, an information terminal board, and a launch control board. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also installed. The term "various control boards" is a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductive patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on an electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17. By operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V from an external power source like a commercial power supply can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components, including the main board 11 and various control boards such as the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting AC to DC, and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (e.g., DC 12V or DC 5V).

The main board 11 is the main control board and has the function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special symbol games (including management of held symbols), execution of regular symbol games (including management of held symbols), jackpot game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a single-chip microcomputer and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and a real-time clock 106.

The CPU 103 controls the progress of the game (implementing the functions of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as the variable patterns described later, the performance control commands described later, and various tables referenced when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains its contents for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is interrupted, either partially or entirely. Alternatively, all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 continuously counts and updates numerical data representing various random values (game-specific random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. These game-specific random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (i.e., updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal pattern hold indicator 25C, etc., and solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed through or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start switch (first start switch 22A and second start switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signals indicates that the passage or entry of a game ball has been detected.

The switch circuit 110 receives reset signals, power-off signals, and clear signals from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal used to stop the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal turns off when the predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and turns on when the period during which the predetermined power supply voltage remains below the predetermined value exceeds the power-off reference time. The clear signal turns on, for example, in response to a press operation on the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (for example, signals to turn on solenoids 81 and 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81 for the regular electric mechanism and solenoid 82 for the large prize door.

The payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a payout device 004SG031, which is driven to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 3, 5, 10, 15, etc.) to the player based on the receipt of a payout signal, and a game ball detection sensor 004SG032, which is installed in the payout passage (not shown) through which the game balls dispensed by the payout device 004SG031 pass. The board can stop the operation of the payout device 004SG031 according to the pattern of the game ball detection signal received from the game ball detection sensor 004SG032.

Furthermore, the payout control board 004SG030 is connected to a handle sensor 004SG034 for detecting the amount of operation performed by the player, and a touch ring 004SG035 (touch sensor) for detecting whether the player is gripping the ball-shooting handle 30. Based on the signals input from these sensors, the payout control board 004SG030 controls the launching device 004SG033, which is capable of launching game balls onto the game board 2. Signals indicating whether the touch ring 004SG035 is detected, and signals indicating that a game ball has been launched by the launching device 004SG033, are input from the payout control board 004SG030 to the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies performance control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the performance control board 12 as part of the control of the game's progress. The performance control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the performance control board 12. These performance control commands include, for example, commands specifying various decision results from the main board 11 (e.g., display results of the special feature game (including the type of jackpot), the variation pattern used when executing the special feature game (details described later)), the game status (e.g., start and end of variable display, opening status of the jackpot opening, occurrence of a jackpot, number of reserved balls, game state), and the occurrence of errors.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11. It receives performance control commands and executes performances (various performances corresponding to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable parts 32, error notifications, and power outage recovery notifications) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, ROM 121, RAM 122, display control unit 123, random number circuit 124, and I/O 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control executes the program stored in the ROM 121, and together with the display control unit 123, performs processing to execute the performance (processing to realize the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining which performance to execute). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 121 (data such as various tables) is used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation may also instruct the display control unit 123 to execute the presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when player operation is detected, and which appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 is equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the effects based on the effect execution instructions from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123, based on the execution instructions for the performance control CPU 120, supplies video signals corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5, thereby displaying the performance image on the image display device 5. It also performs display processing, outputting image data from the display image creation area of the VRAM region specified in the display register as a video signal. In this embodiment, the display image creation area and the drawing area switch with each V-blank. Therefore, drawing is performed in the area allocated as the drawing area in one V-blank, and then in the next V-blank, it switches to the display image creation area, so the image data drawn in the previous V-blank is displayed, while drawing continues in the other area during that time.

Furthermore, the display control unit 123 generates an image for display on the image display device 5 by superimposing (combining) multiple layers. Therefore, the VRAM area contains a layer image drawing area for drawing and arranging the images of each layer, and a display image creation area for generating an image for display on the image display device 5 by further superimposing (combining) the images drawn and arranged in each layer image drawing area. Note that each layer has the concepts of upper, middle, and lower levels; images from higher layers have a higher display priority on the image display device 5, while images from lower layers have a lower display priority.

The VRAM area contains a Layer 1 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 1 images, a Layer 2 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 2 images, and a Layer 3 image rendering area for rendering and positioning Layer 3 images. Additionally, the VRAM area also contains a displacement image creation area for creating displacement images and a display image creation area.

The displacement image creation area is the area where the image drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area and the image drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to create the image to be displaced, and then the displacement image is applied to this image to create the displacement image.

The display image creation area is the area where images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area, images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area, and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are superimposed (combined) to form a display image for display on the image display device 5.

Furthermore, images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area are set to have the highest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: high), images drawn and placed in the Layer 2 image drawing area are set to have a lower display priority than images drawn and placed in the Layer 1 image drawing area in the image display device 5 (display priority: medium), and images drawn and placed in the Layer 3 image drawing area are set to have the lowest display priority in the image display device 5 (display priority: low). In other words, Layer 1 is the upper layer with the highest image display priority, Layer 2 is the middle layer with a lower image display priority than Layer 1, and Layer 3 is the lower layer with the lowest image display priority.

The Layer 1 image drawing area is a drawing area for drawing images to display a first interface image, which includes a special symbol hold memory display area 5U that clearly displays the first and second special symbol hold memory counts, at the bottom of the display screen of the image display device 5, and a second interface image, which includes small symbols smaller than the decorative symbols on the display screen and a hold memory count display, at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5.

The Layer 2 image drawing area is a drawing area located in the center of the display screen of the image display device 5, where the left, center, and right decorative patterns are drawn in order to perform variable display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the Layer 3 image rendering area is a rendering area that renders the background display in order to display the background display across the entire display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the image displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 can be generated by superimposing the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 1 image drawing area (Layer 1 image), the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 2 image drawing area (Layer 2 image), and the images drawn and arranged in the Layer 3 image drawing area (Layer 3 image). In particular, as mentioned above, the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area (first interface image and second interface image) have the highest display priority and are therefore displayed as the topmost image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 2 image drawing area (decorative patterns) have a lower display priority than the images drawn in the Layer 1 image drawing area and are therefore displayed as the middle layer image on the image display device 5. The images drawn in the Layer 3 image drawing area (background display) have the lowest display priority and are therefore displayed as the bottom layer image on the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area is set to 0% so that when superimposed, the overlapping areas of the upper image and the lower image are not visible to the player. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the situation, the transparency of the images drawn and placed in each image drawing area may be set to a value higher than 0%, and images that are displayed transparently or temporarily hidden may be provided on the display screen of the image display device 5.

The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound specification signal (a signal specifying the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal specifying the on/off mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to synchronize sound output with the display of the performance image and to turn the game effect lamp 9 on/off. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or the drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving speakers 8L and 8R. Based on the specified audio signal, it drives speakers 8L and 8R and outputs the audio specified by the audio signal from speakers 8L and 8R.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9. Based on the lamp signal, it drives the game effect lamp 9 and turns it on/off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the on/off status of the lamp.

Furthermore, the control of audio output, lamp on/off (supply of sound specification signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals to operate the movable body 32, etc.) may be performed by the performance control CPU 120.

The random number circuit 124 keeps an updatable count of numerical data representing various random values (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. These random numbers for effects may be updated by the effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for receiving performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound specification signals, lamp signals).

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As in the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or the sub-boards of machine 1 may be configured to have multiple functions.

Figure 16(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command used in this embodiment. The performance control command is, for example, a two-byte structure, where the first byte indicates MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "0", and the first bit of the EXT data is also "0". Note that the command form shown in Figure 16(A) is just an example, and other command forms may be used. Also, in this example, the control command consists of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or three or more.

In the example shown in Figure 16(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variation pattern specification command that specifies the variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, corresponding to the variable display of special symbols in the special game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and it can be any value that is arbitrarily set according to the instructions given by the performance control command. Note that different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern specified in the variation pattern specification command.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, a performance control command that specifies variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the determination result (pre-determined result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot," and the determination result (jackpot type determination result) of which of several types of jackpots to use if the variable display result is a "jackpot."

In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 16(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result specification command that indicates a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot A", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot B", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "probability variation jackpot C", as well as the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is the fifth variable display result specification command, which notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "Big Win" and the big win type will be "Non-Probability Variation Big Win," as well as the big win type determination result.

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stopping (confirmation) of the variation of decorative symbols in the "left," "center," and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Command 9000H is a power-on specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine 1 has performed a cold start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 pressed (power-on with initialization)). A cold start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the data is initialized without restoring the data from before power-on, and the game machine is made capable of performing various processes. Command 9200H is a power-out recovery specification command that specifies that the pachinko game machine has performed a hot start (power was turned on with the clear switch 92 not pressed (power-on without initialization)). A hot start refers to a state in which, when power is turned on, the game machine is made capable of performing various processes based on the backed-up data. Since a hot start does not involve initialization, it is also called a power-on without initialization. Command 95XXH is a game state specification command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1. Depending on the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1, different EXT data is set using the game state specification command. For example, command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variation control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is the second game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variation control is not (low probability high base state, time-saving state). Command 9502H is the third game state specification command corresponding to a game state in which both time-saving control and probability variation control are performed (high probability high base state, time-saving probability variation state). Note that the time-saving probability variation state is sometimes simply referred to as the "probability variation state". Command 96XXH is an error specification command that specifies that an error has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 and that the error has been cleared.

Command A0XXH is a win start command (also called the "fanfare command") that specifies the display of a visual effect indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a jackpot opening notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening is open during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a jackpot opening after notification command that indicates the period during which the jackpot opening has changed from open to closed during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a win end command that specifies the display of a visual effect at the end of a jackpot game.

In the win start and win end commands, different EXT data may be set depending on the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command. Alternatively, in the win start and win end commands, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the big prize slot open notification command and the big prize slot after opening notification command, different EXT data may be set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds executed in the jackpot state described later (e.g., "0" to "10").

Command B100H is a first-start-entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A has been met, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed through (entered) the first start-entry

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory count notification command that notifies the first reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory count notification command that notifies the second reserved memory count in order to identify the number of reserved special symbols. The first reserved memory count notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when a first start-up-entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being met when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up-entry Furthermore, the first and second reserved memory count notification commands may be sent in response to the start of the special game execution when either the first or second start condition is met (i.e., when the reserved memory count decreases). Command E100H is a customer-waiting demo specification command that specifies the execution of a customer-waiting demo (demo performance). Command F100H is a frame status display specification command that specifies the status of each input port (including the on/off state of the touch ring 004SG35).

Instead of sending the first and second pending memory count notification commands, a total pending memory count notification command may be sent to notify the total number of pending memories. That is, a total pending memory count notification command may be used to notify of an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 16(A) are just examples, and the system may omit some of these commands, use different commands in place of these, or add other commands. For example, a command to notify the number of prize balls dispensed based on each prize ball entering a prize slot, a gate passage notification command to notify when a game ball has passed through gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of variable display rounds for which probability variation control or time reduction control is performed may be provided.

Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the random values counted on the main board 11. As shown in Figure 17, on the main board 11, numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special display result, MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and MR4 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. Note that other random values may be used to enhance the game's effectiveness. These random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game-specific random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data that represents some or all of these random values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may use a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and update various numerical data via software to count numerical data that represents some of the random values MR1 to MR4.

The random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is used to determine whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state by treating the variable display result, such as a special symbol, as a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "65536." The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type ("Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," or "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot") when the variable display result is a "jackpot." For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "100."

The random value MR3 used for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of several pre-defined types, and takes values in the range of "0" to "997".

The random value MR4 used for determining the result of the regular symbol display is a random value used to determine whether the variable display result in the regular symbol game using the regular symbol display unit 20 is a "regular symbol win" or a "regular symbol loss," and it takes values in the range of "3" to "13," for example.

Figure 18 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for both the first and second special figures. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special figures.

The display result determination table is a table referenced in special symbol games using the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. Before the confirmed special symbol resulting in a variable display is derived and displayed, this table determines, based on the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result, whether or not to control the game into a jackpot state as a "jackpot."

In the display result determination table, a numerical value (determination value) is assigned to the special symbol display result of "Big Win" or "Miss," depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is the normal state, the time-saving state (low probability state), or the probability variation state (high probability state).

In the display result determination table, the table data showing the determination value compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determination data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the display result determination table, when the game state is a probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are assigned to the special symbol display result of "jackpot" than when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variation state (high probability state) in which probability variation control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" is higher (approximately 1/30 in this embodiment) compared to the probability of determining to control the special symbol display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" when it is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). In other words, in the display result determination table, the determination data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state, such that when the game state of the pachinko machine 1 is a probability variation state (high probability state), the probability of determining whether or not to control it to a jackpot state is higher compared to when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 19(A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, the jackpot type determination table is referenced to determine the jackpot type from several types based on the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result should be controlled to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the jackpot type determination table, depending on whether the special symbol that was variably displayed (variable display) in the special symbol game was a first special symbol (special symbol game using the first special symbol display device 4A) or a second special symbol (special symbol game using the second special symbol display device 4B), a numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 used for jackpot type determination is assigned to one of several types of jackpots, such as "non-probability variation jackpot," "probability variation jackpot A," "probability variation jackpot B," or "probability variation jackpot C."

Here, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained using Figure 19(B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set as follows: "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," in which probability variation control and time reduction control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot," in which only time reduction control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 10 times (so-called 10 rounds) and this is repeated. On the other hand, the jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. The jackpot game state resulting from "Probability-increasing Jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 2 times (so-called 2 rounds) and this is repeated. In addition, the jackpot game state resulting from "Non-Probability-increasing Jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the special variable ball entry device 7 is changed to a first state advantageous to the player 5 times (so-called 5 rounds) and this is repeated. Therefore, "Bonus Win A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) bonus win, "Bonus Win B" as a 5-round (5R) bonus win, and "Bonus Win C" as a 2-round (2R) bonus win.

The probability variation control and time-saving control that begin after the end of the jackpot game state of probability variation jackpot A to probability variation jackpot C are terminated on the condition that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state. Furthermore, the time-saving control that begins after the end of the jackpot game state of a non-probability variation jackpot is terminated on the condition that 100 variable displays are completed, or that the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state before the completion of the 100 variable displays. Therefore, if the next jackpot is one of probability variation jackpots A to probability variation jackpot C, the probability variation control and time-saving control are executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called continuous jackpot state where jackpot game states occur continuously without going through the normal state. In other words, the probability variation state in this embodiment is a game state that continues until the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of variable displays, while the time-saving state in this embodiment is a game state that is controlled to the normal state by executing 100 variable displays if the variable display result is not a jackpot. Therefore, the time-saving state is also a game state that is controlled when a winning streak is about to end.

In the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 19(A), the assignment of determination values to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot A," "Probability Variation Jackpot B," "Probability Variation Jackpot C," and "Non-Probability Variation Jackpot" differs depending on whether the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol. That is, when the variable-display special symbol is the first special symbol, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds. On the other hand, when the variable-display special symbol is the second special symbol, no determination values are assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C." This configuration allows for different rates of determining the jackpot type to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which have fewer rounds, depending on whether the first start condition for starting a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is met, or whether the second start condition for starting a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is met. In particular, in special symbol games using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is never controlled to be "Probability Variation Jackpot B" or "Probability Variation Jackpot C," which result in fewer rounds. Therefore, for example, in game states where game balls are more likely to enter the second starting entry point formed by the variable prize ball entry device 6B due to high-opening control associated with time-saving control, frequent occurrences of jackpot states with fewer prize balls can be avoided, thus preventing a decrease in game enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the example setting of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 19(A), the assignment of determination values for the "non-probability variation" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game. Therefore, the probability of a non-probability variation jackpot and the probability of a probability variation jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first or second special symbol game.

Therefore, as mentioned above, just as the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol, the assignment of judgment values for "Probability Variation Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first or second special symbol. For "Probability Variation Jackpot A," which has a large number of rounds, it is set to be more likely to be determined when it is a special game of the second special symbol than when it is a special game of the first special symbol.

Furthermore, even in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a different range of predetermined judgment values than those used in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". For example, in the case of a special feature game using the second special feature, a smaller judgment value than in the case of a special feature game using the first special feature may be assigned to the jackpot types "Probability Variation Jackpot B" and "Probability Variation Jackpot C". Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special feature game using the first or second special feature, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 20 shows the variation patterns in this embodiment. In this embodiment, multiple variation patterns are pre-prepared to correspond to cases where the variable display result is "miss," specifically when the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" and when it is "a reach," and also to cases where the variable display result is "jackpot." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "not a reach" is called the "not a reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "not a reach miss variation pattern"). The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the decorative symbol's variable display mode is "a reach" is called the "reach variation pattern" (also referred to as the "reach miss variation pattern"). Furthermore, the "not a reach variation pattern" and the "reach variation pattern" are included in the "miss variation pattern" corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss." The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "jackpot" is called the "jackpot variation pattern."

The jackpot variation patterns and reach variation patterns include normal reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a normal reach is executed, and super reach variation patterns, where the reach animation of a super reach is executed. In this embodiment, one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Furthermore, in this embodiment, three types of super reach variation patterns are provided: super reach (no pseudo-consecutive wins), super reach (one pseudo-consecutive win), and super reach (two pseudo-consecutive wins), but the present invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of super reach variation patterns, or two or fewer types, may be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the Super Reach variation patterns include: a variation pattern (PB1-2) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-2) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (no pseudo-consecutive spins); a variation pattern (PB1-3) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-3) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (one pseudo-consecutive spins); and a variation pattern (PB1-4) where the variable display result is a jackpot and a variation pattern (PA2-4) where it is a miss, as a variation pattern for Super Reach (two pseudo-consecutive spins).

As shown in Figure 20, the special symbol variation time for the normal reach variation pattern in this embodiment, during which the reach animation is performed, is set to be shorter than that for the super reach variation pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of Super Reach, Normal Reach, and Non-Reach. Therefore, in both the Normal Reach and Super Reach variation patterns, the longer the special symbol variation time, the higher the probability of winning a jackpot.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type may be determined.

Figure 21 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected is different depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed, the number of reserved items, the game state, etc.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 21, if the variable display result is a non-probability-changing jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table A from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 at a rate of 35%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 40%.

Furthermore, if the variable display result is a probability variation jackpot A to C, the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this table B from PB1-1 (variation pattern for normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) jackpot). More specifically, in the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 10%, PB1-3 at a rate of 20%, and PB1-4 at a rate of 70%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is one or less, then the miss variation pattern determination table A is selected, and using this miss variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-1 (variation pattern for no shortened non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern for super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), PA2-3 (variation pattern for super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss), and PA2-4 (variation pattern for super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effects) miss). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table A, PA1-1 is determined at a rate of 50%, PA2-1 at a rate of 40%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 2, then the miss variation pattern determination table B is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table B, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table B, PA1-2 is determined 60% of the time, PA2-1 30% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a low-base state (normal state), the variable display result is a miss, and the number of reserved variable symbols is 3, the miss variation pattern determination table C is selected. Using this miss variation pattern determination table C, the variation pattern is determined from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach miss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) miss variation pattern). More specifically, in the miss variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined 70% of the time, PA2-1 20% of the time, PA2-2 5% of the time, PA2-3 3% of the time, and PA2-4 2% of the time.

Furthermore, if the game state is a high-base state (short-time state or probability-increasing state), the losing variation pattern determination table D is selected, and the variation pattern is determined using this losing variation pattern determination table D from PA1-3 (shortened non-reach loss variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach loss), PA2-2 (super reach (no pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach (one pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach (two pseudo-consecutive effect) loss variation pattern). More specifically, in the losing variation pattern determination table C, PA1-3 is determined at a rate of 80%, PA2-1 at a rate of 10%, PA2-2 at a rate of 5%, PA2-3 at a rate of 3%, and PA2-4 at a rate of 2%.

In this embodiment, the variable display result is illustrated as determining the variation pattern according to the type of jackpot when the result is a jackpot. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selection ratio of any of the multiple jackpot variation patterns (PB1-1 to PB1-4) may be varied regardless of the type of jackpot, for example, depending on the game state. By doing so, the variable display is performed with a variation pattern suitable for the game state, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game.

The RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in Figure 2 may be a backup RAM, where part or all of its contents are backed up by a backup power supply generated on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is interrupted, part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 will be preserved for a predetermined period (until the capacitor acting as the backup power supply discharges and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, i.e., the control state of the game control means (such as the special symbol process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls should be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is the data necessary to restore the control state to what it was before the power outage occurred, based on that data, when power is restored after a power outage or the like. Furthermore, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress of the game.

Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data storage area 004SG150, as shown in Figure 22, which is a region for storing various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data storage area 004SG150 shown in Figure 22 includes a first special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151A, a second special symbol hold storage unit 004SG151B, a regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C, a game control flag setting unit 004SG152, a game control timer setting unit 004SG153, a game control counter setting unit 004SG154, and a game control buffer setting unit 004SG155.

The first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the first starting entry opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, resulting in a starting entry (first starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

The second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B stores hold data for special symbol games (special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in order of winning, where a game ball has passed through (entered) the second starting entry opening formed by the variable prize ball device 6B, resulting in a starting entry (second starting entry), but the game has not yet started.

As an example, the first special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151A associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the first starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of win, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Furthermore, the second special symbol hold memory unit 004SG151B associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls enter the second starting prize slot (the order in which the game balls are detected), and stores numerical data representing the random value MR1 for variable display result determination, the random value MR2 for win type determination, and the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition when the game ball passes through (enters), as hold data until the number of stored data reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

Thus, the reserved data stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151A and the second special symbol reserved memory unit 004SG151B indicates that the execution of the special symbol game using the first special symbol or the special symbol game using the second special symbol is reserved. This reserved information allows for the determination of whether or not a jackpot will be achieved based on the variable display results (special symbol display results) in these special symbol games.

In this embodiment, when the reserved information (first reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the first start condition (when the game ball passes through the first start prize entry opening) and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the fulfillment of the second start prize (when the game ball passes through the second start prize entry opening) are stored in separate reserved storage units in association with reserved numbers, the variable display based on the second reserved storage information is executed with priority over the variable display based on the first reserved information.

The regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C stores hold information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display unit 20, even though a game ball has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol hold storage unit 004SG151C associates the hold number with the order in which the game balls are detected by the gate switch 21, and stores numerical data such as a random value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result, extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game balls, as hold data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 004SG152 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose state can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 004SG152 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating whether it is on or off for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 004SG153 is equipped with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 004SG153 stores data indicating the timer values for each of several types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 004SG154 is equipped with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores data indicating the count values for each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 may also be equipped with a random counter for counting some or all of the random numbers used for the game, which can be updated by the CPU 103 via software.

The random counter in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154 stores random values not generated by the random number circuit 104, such as numerical data representing random values MR1 to MR4, as random count values. The numerical data representing each random value is updated periodically or irregularly in response to software execution by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count values may update the random count values independently of the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or it may update the random count values by applying predetermined processing, such as scrambling or arithmetic processing, to all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

The ROM 121 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 stores not only the program for performance control, but also various data tables used to control performance operations. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data that constitutes multiple judgment tables prepared for the performance control CPU 120 to perform various judgments, decisions, and settings, as well as pattern data that constitutes various performance control patterns.

As an example, ROM 121 stores a performance control pattern table containing multiple types of performance control patterns used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the performance operations of various performance devices (e.g., image display device 5, speakers 8L, 8R, game effect lamps 9 and decorative LEDs, performance models, etc.). The performance control patterns consist of data indicating the control content, corresponding to various performance operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The performance control pattern table should contain, for example, performance control patterns for when the special symbol is displayed, pre-announcement performance control patterns, and various other performance control patterns.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 2 is provided with a performance control data storage area 004SG190, as shown in Figure 23(A), which is a region for storing various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data storage area 004SG190 shown in Figure 23(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 004SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 004SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 004SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 is equipped with multiple types of flags whose status can be updated according to the performance operation status, such as the display status of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, or performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 004SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 is equipped with multiple types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 004SG192 stores data indicating the timer values for each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 is equipped with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 004SG193 stores data indicating the count value for each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 is equipped with various buffers for temporarily storing data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of several types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the data constituting the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A, as shown in Figure 23(B), is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting unit 004SG194. The start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the first special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") and a storage area corresponding to the first special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0"). Furthermore, the start-up winning command buffer 004SG194A is provided with a storage area corresponding to the maximum value of the total number of reserved memories in the second special feature reserve memory (for example, "4") (areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") and a storage area corresponding to the second special feature during variable display (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0"). When a starting prize is awarded at the first or second starting prize slot, two commands—a starting slot entry designation command (either the first or second starting slot entry designation command) and a reserved memory count notification command (either the first or second reserved memory count notification command)—are sent as a set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the starting prize award reception command buffer 004SG194A are allocated to store these starting slot entry designation commands and reserved memory count notification commands separately for the first and second special symbol reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted one by one to higher positions, as described later, when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest-level reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins. Furthermore, the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0," which store the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition was met, are cleared during the special symbol win waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

The CPU 120 for performance control stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the first special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A when a win occurs at the first start entry slot. Similarly, when a win occurs at the second start entry slot, the CPU 120 stores commands in the first empty entry (the entry with the lowest buffer number) corresponding to the second special symbol hold memory in the command buffer 004SG194A. During a win, commands from the start entry slot designation command to the hold memory count notification command are transmitted sequentially. Therefore, upon command reception, the start entry slot designation command and the hold memory count notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the last digits "0" through "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first or second special symbol hold memory, respectively.

As shown in Figure 23(B), the commands stored in the start-up prize-receiving command buffer 004SG194A are changed each time a variable display of decorative symbols is started. The commands stored in the entry corresponding to the previously completed variable display hold memory (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0") are deleted, and the contents of the entries stored in the entry corresponding to the hold memory of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the hold memory of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in Figure 23(B), when the variable display of the decorative symbols of the first special symbol hold memory is completed, each command stored in buffer number "0" is deleted, each command stored in buffer number "0" is shifted to buffer number "0", each command stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" is shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "0", and each command stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3", respectively. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the variable-display pending memory at that time.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power is supplied to the pachinko game machine 1, the game control microcomputer 100 starts up, and the main game control processing is executed by the CPU 103. Figure 24 is a flowchart showing the main game control processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the main game control process shown in Figure 24, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to disabled (step S1). Next, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). These initial settings include setting the stack pointer, setting the registers of built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to an accessible state.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are met (step S3). The recovery conditions are met when the clear signal is in the off state, backup data exists, and the backup RAM is functioning correctly. When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, for example, if the clear switch on the power supply board 17 is pressed, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery conditions are not met. The backup data only needs to be storable in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors are checked or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery conditions are met (Step S3; Yes), the recovery process (Step S4) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The recovery process in Step S4 sets the work area based on the contents of RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state is restored to what it was when the power supply was interrupted. For example, if the special symbols were changing, it is sufficient that the special symbol changes can be resumed from the state before the interruption.

Furthermore, if the recovery conditions are not met (Step S3; No), the initialization process (Step S6) is executed, followed by the random number circuit setting process (Step S8). The initialization process in Step S6 includes a clear process that clears the flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102. The execution of the clear process sets initial values in the work area.

After the random number circuit setting process (step S8) is executed, the CPU 103 sets the registers of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt is periodically triggered at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms) (step S9), and enables the interrupt (step S10). Then, the loop process begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (e.g., 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

The CPU 103, which has executed the main game control processing, receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of Figure 25. Upon starting the game control timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 25, the CPU 103 first performs a predetermined switch process to determine whether detection signals have been received from various switches, such as the gate switch 21, the first start switch 22A, the second start switch 22B, and the count switch 23, via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error processing, the CPU 103 diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1 and, if necessary, generates a warning based on the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output process, the CPU 103 outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.), start information (information indicating the number of start-up wins, etc.), and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the game entered a probability variation state, etc.), which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output processing, the main board 11 performs a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the random numbers used for gameplay via software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process processing (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, the execution and management of special symbol games, control of the jackpot game state, and control of the game state are realized.

Following the special symbol processing, the normal symbol processing is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol processing each time a timer interrupt occurs, enabling the execution and management of the normal symbol game based on detection signals from the gate switch 21 (based on the passage of a game ball through the gate 41), as well as the opening control of the variable prize ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol win." The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of normal symbol holds is displayed by lighting the normal symbol hold display 25C.

After the normal pattern processing is executed, the following may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing: processing when a power outage occurs, processing for dispensing prize balls, etc. Then, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set to transmit performance control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, the set performance control commands are transmitted to a sub-control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, interrupts are enabled, and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Figure 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the process performed in step S25 shown in Figure 25 as part of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first performs the start prize determination process (step S101).

In the start-up prize determination process, the occurrence of a start-up prize is detected, and a process is executed to store the reserved information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and update the reserved memory count. When a start-up prize occurs, a random value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. Alternatively, a process may be executed to predict the display result and variation pattern based on the extracted random value. After storing the reserved information and the reserved memory count, a transmission setting is made to send a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the occurrence of a start-up prize, the reserved memory count, and the prediction judgment results. The performance control command for a start-up prize, thus set for transmission, is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process is completed, by executing the command control process in step S27 shown in Figure 25.

After executing the start-up prize determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special symbol process flag in RAM 102. In each of the special symbol process processes (steps S110 to S117), transmission settings are made to send the corresponding performance control command to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on a random value for determining the display result, it is determined (pre-determined) whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol will be a "jackpot," and if so, the type of jackpot, before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1," and the special symbol normal processing ends. In this embodiment, the special symbol game using the second special symbol is executed with priority over the special symbol game using the first special symbol (also called special symbol 2 priority processing). Furthermore, the system may store the order in which the game balls enter the first and second starting prize slots, and ensure that the conditions for starting the special game are met in that order (also known as "sequential execution").

When making various decisions based on random values, the various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which the decision values compared with the random values are assigned to the decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, the various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "1". This variation pattern setting process includes determining one of several variation patterns using a random value for variation pattern determination, based on a pre-determined result such as whether the display result should be "jackpot" or not. When the variation pattern is determined during the variation pattern setting process, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process terminates.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special feature game (special feature variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not a reach occurs, etc.), and the content of the effects during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach effect, etc.). It is also called the variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes setting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to vary the special symbols, and measuring the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. When the elapsed time since the special symbols began to vary reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process terminates.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes stopping the variation of the special symbols on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and setting the display to stop (derive) the confirmed special symbol that will be the display result of the special symbols. If the display result is "Big Win", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is "Miss", and the game is controlled in a time-saving state or a probability variation state, and the end of the number of spins is achieved, the game state is also updated. Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

Step S114, the pre-jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "4". This pre-jackpot opening process includes settings to start round execution and open the jackpot opening in the jackpot game state, based on factors such as the display result being "jackpot". When opening the jackpot opening, a solenoid drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door. At this time, for example, the maximum opening period and the maximum number of rounds executed are set, corresponding to the type of jackpot. Once these settings are complete, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-jackpot opening process ends.

Step S115, the jackpot opening process, is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening was opened, and determining whether it is time to return the jackpot opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When returning the jackpot opening to the closed state, the process includes stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door, then updating the value of the special feature process flag to "6", and ending the jackpot opening process.

Step S116, the post-jackpot opening processing, is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "6". This post-jackpot opening processing includes determining whether the number of rounds in which the jackpot opening is open has reached the set upper limit, and setting the game to terminate the jackpot state if the upper limit is reached. If the number of rounds has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "5". If the number of rounds has reached the upper limit, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "7". Once the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the post-jackpot opening processing ends.

The jackpot termination process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special feature process flag is "7". This jackpot termination process includes waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the duration of the ending sequence (a visual effect indicating the end of the jackpot game state) has elapsed, and various settings for initiating probability variation control and time reduction control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When these settings are completed, the value of the special feature process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot termination process ends.

(Starting point prize determination process)
Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the start-up prize determination process (S101) shown in Figure 26. In the start-up prize determination process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the first start-up switch 22A is ON or OFF based on a detection signal from the first start-up switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start-up prize opening formed by the prize ball device 6A (004SGS101). At this time, if the first start-up switch 22A is ON (004SGS101; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the first special feature reserve memory count, which is the number of reserved memories for a special feature game using the first special feature, is at a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory count) (004SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to identify the first special feature reserve memory count by, for example, reading the first reserve memory count value, which is the stored value of the first reserve memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved first special symbols stored in 004SGS102 is not at the upper limit (004SGS102; N), for example, the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 is set to "0" (004SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off (004SGS101; N), or when the number of reserved special symbols has reached its upper limit (004SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is turned on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B, which is provided in correspondence with the second start port formed by the variable prize ball device 6B (004SGS104). In this case, if the second start port switch 22B is on (004SGS104; Y), the second special symbol reserved number, which is the number of reserved special symbols for a special symbol game using the second special symbol, is determined to be at a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit number of reserved symbols) (004SGS105). The CPU 103 can determine the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol by reading the second reserved ball count value, which is the value stored in the second reserved ball count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154. If the number of reserved balls in the second special symbol is not the upper limit (004SGS105; N), the CPU 103 sets the value stored in the start-up buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 004SG155 to "2" (004SGS106).

After executing either process 004SGS103 or 004SGS106, the number of reserved special symbols, corresponding to the value stored in the start-up buffer, is updated by adding 1 (004SGS107). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the first reserved symbol count value is added by 1, while when the start-up buffer value is "2", the second reserved symbol count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the first start-up entry-level slot and the first start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the first special symbol is met. The second reserved symbol count value is updated to increase by 1 when a game ball passes through (enters) the second start-up entry-level slot and the second start condition corresponding to the special symbol game using the second special symbol is met. At this time, the total number of reserved symbols is also updated by adding 1 (004SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, can be updated by adding 1.

After executing the processing in 004SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 004SG154, representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern (004SGS109). The numerical data representing each of these extracted random values and the start gate buffer value are stored as hold information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special symbol hold storage unit (004SGS110).

The numerical data representing the random values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols or decorative symbols is a "jackpot," and further, if the variable display result is a "jackpot," to determine the type of jackpot. The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern, including the variable display time of the special symbols or decorative symbols. The CPU 103 executes the processing of 004SGS109 to extract numerical data representing all of the random values used to determine the variable display pattern, including the variable display result and variable display time of the special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the processing of 004SGS110, the transmission settings for the start-up entry designation command are performed according to the start-up buffer value (004SGS111). For example, when the start-up buffer value is "0", the settings for transmitting the first start-up entry designation command are made to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the first start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Conversely, when the start-up buffer value is "2", the settings for transmitting the second start-up entry designation command are made to the performance control board 12 by storing the storage address of the second start-up entry designation command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer. The start-up entry designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 25.

Following the processing of 004SGS111, the CPU 103 configures the settings for sending a pending memory count notification command to the performance control board 12 (004SGS113), for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory count notification command table in ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. The pending memory count notification command thus configured is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special symbol process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing shown in S27 in Figure 25.

After executing the process in 004SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "0" (004SGS114). If the start port buffer value is "0" (Y in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS115), and then the process proceeds to 2390SGS104. Conversely, if the start port buffer value is "2" (N in 004SGS114), the start port buffer is cleared, its stored value is initialized to "0" (004SGS116), and then the start port entry process is terminated. This ensures that even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start port entry of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of valid start ports from both can be reliably completed.

(Special pattern processing as usual)
Figure 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S110 of Figure 26 as a normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 28, the CPU 103 first determines whether the number of reserved second special symbols is "0" (step 004 SGS 141). The number of reserved second special symbols is the number of reserved special symbol games using the second special symbol displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the process of step 004 SGS 141, the second reserved symbol count value stored in the game control counter setting unit is read, and it is determined whether the read value is "0" or not.

If the number of reserved symbols in the second special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS141 (step 004SGS141; N), the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read out from the second special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS142, the second special feature hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the second special feature hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the second special feature hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the second special feature hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS143).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 004SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0" (step 004SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". The number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is the number of reserved special symbol games using the first special symbol, as displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 004SGS145, the game control counter setting unit reads the first reserved symbol count value stored in the first reserved symbol counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 004SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 004SGS141 that the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS141 is "0", and it determines whether the number of reserved special symbols in step 004SGS145 is "0". As a result, special symbol games using the second special symbol are started with priority over special symbol games using the first special symbol.

Furthermore, the execution of the special feature game using the second special feature is not limited to prioritizing the execution of the special feature game using the first special feature. For example, the execution of the special feature game may be initiated in the order in which the game ball enters (passes through) the first and second starting prize entry points and a starting prize is generated. In this case, it would suffice to provide a table that stores data that can identify the order in which starting prizes occurred, and to determine whether to start the execution of the special feature game using the first or second special feature from that stored data.

If the number of reserved symbols in the first special symbol storage unit is not "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; N), then numerical data representing the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern are read from the first special symbol storage unit as reserved data corresponding to reserved symbol number "0" (step 004SGS146). The numerical data read at this time can be temporarily stored, for example, in a variation random number buffer.

Following the processing in step 004SGS146, the first special symbol hold memory count value and the total hold memory count value are updated by subtracting 1, thereby updating the first special symbol hold memory count and the total hold memory count, and updating the data in the first special symbol hold memory unit. Specifically, the hold data representing random values MR1 to MR3 stored in the first special symbol hold memory unit in entries lower than hold number "0" (for example, entries corresponding to hold numbers "2" to "4") are shifted one entry at a time to higher (step 004SGS147).

Afterward, the variable special pattern designation buffer value, which is the value stored in the variable special pattern designation buffer, is updated to "0" (step 004SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 004SGS149.

In step 004SGS149, the display result determination table shown in Figure 18 is selected and set as the table used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbols, the special symbol display result, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data representing the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the determination value assigned to each special symbol display result, "jackpot" or "miss", to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 004SGS150). In step 004SGS150, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (probability change state) where the probability change flag is on, then if the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (probability change state), it is determined to be a "jackpot", and if not, it is determined to be a "miss". Furthermore, if the probability variation flag is off and the machine is in a low probability state (low probability, low base state in this feature), the random value MR1 used for determining the special symbol display result will be judged as a "jackpot" if it falls within the range of 1 to 219, and as a "miss" otherwise.

Thus, in the display result determination table selected in step 004SGS149, different determination values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability). Therefore, in the processing of step 004SGS150, depending on whether the game state when the variable display such as the special symbol game starts is in a high probability state, different determination data (determination values) are used to determine whether the special symbol display result is a "jackpot." As a result, when the game state is in a high probability state, the probability of determining a "jackpot" is higher than when it is in a low probability state.

If it is determined in step 004SGS150 that it is a "jackpot" (step 004SGS150; Y), the jackpot flag is turned ON (step 004SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 19(A) is selected and set as the table used to determine one of several jackpot types (step 004SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the system determines which of the several jackpot types it is based on whether the numerical data representing the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches the determination value assigned to each of the jackpot types in the jackpot type determination table: "non-probability jackpot," "probability jackpot A," "probability jackpot B," or "probability jackpot C" (step 004SGS154).

In step 004, the type of jackpot is determined by the processing of SGS154. This determines whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability, high base state) or a probability variation state (high probability, high base state), which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. This is determined before the confirmed special symbol is derived as a variable display result. The determined jackpot type is then stored by setting the jackpot type buffer value, which is the value stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (step 004, SGS155), in accordance with the determined jackpot type. For example, if the jackpot type is "non-probability variation jackpot" which corresponds to a non-probability variation jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation A" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot A, it should be set to "0". If it is "probability variation B" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot B, it should be set to "2". If it is "probability variation C" which corresponds to probability variation jackpot C, it should be set to "3". After processing in step 004SGS155, proceed to step 004SGS156.

Furthermore, if it is determined that the result is "incorrect" in step 004SGS150 (step 004SGS150; N), the process in step 004SGS156 is executed without executing the processes in steps 004SGS152 to 004SGS155.

In step 004SGS156, the CPU 103 sets a confirmed special symbol in accordance with the prior determination result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot state (whether or not the jackpot flag is turned on) and the determination result of the jackpot type when the game is in a jackpot state. For example, in accordance with the prior determination result that the special symbol display result is a "miss", the special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss, is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the special symbol display result is determined to be a "jackpot" in step 004SGS150a, and the jackpot type in step 004SGS154 is "probability variation jackpot A", the special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot B", the special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-probability-increasing jackpot," the special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Also, if the jackpot type is a "probability-increasing jackpot C," the special symbol showing the number "0" is set as the guaranteed special symbol. Note that these guaranteed special symbols are just examples; other guaranteed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as guaranteed special symbols.

After setting the confirmed special symbol in step 004SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 004SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

Furthermore, if the number of reserved special symbol game entries using the first special symbol is "0" in step 004SGS145 (step 004SGS145; Y), the system performs a predetermined demo display setting (step 004SGS158) before ending the normal special symbol processing. This demo display setting determines whether a performance control command (customer-waiting demo specification command) specifying a demonstration display (demo screen display), such as displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5, has been sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. If the customer-waiting demo specification command has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated. If it has not been sent, the system performs the necessary settings to send the customer-waiting demo specification command before terminating the demo display setting.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be explained. When the performance control board 12 receives power voltage from the power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the main performance control process as shown in the flowchart of Figure 29. When the main performance control process shown in Figure 29 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a predetermined initialization process (step S71), which includes clearing the RAM 122, setting various initial values, and setting the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12.

Subsequently, a determination is made as to whether the timer interrupt flag is on or off (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) based on, for example, the CTC register setting. If the timer interrupt flag is off at this time (step S73; No), the process in step S73 is repeatedly executed while waiting.

Furthermore, on the performance control board 12, in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals, an interrupt occurs to receive performance control commands from the main board 11. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 turns ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets to interrupt disable. However, if a CPU that does not automatically set to interrupt disable is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt disable instruction (DI instruction). In response to the interrupt caused by the performance control INT signal turning ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt processing. In this command reception interrupt processing, the performance control command is received from a predetermined input port among the input ports included in I/O 125 that receives control signals transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The performance control command received at this time is stored, for example, in a performance control command reception buffer provided in RAM 122. Subsequently, the CPU 120 for performance control sets itself to enable interrupts and then terminates the command reception interrupt processing.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to the off state (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, various performance control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 on the main board 11 and stored in the performance control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read performance control commands are performed. For example, to allow the performance control process to confirm which performance control command was received and what the performance control command identifies, the read performance control command is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in RAM 122 is turned on. Furthermore, if the performance control command identifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, various performance devices are controlled, such as the display operation of performance images on the display screen of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. Furthermore, the control content of the performance operations using the various performance devices is determined, decided, and set according to the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process in step S76, a random number update process for performances is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the random numbers used for performances on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Furthermore, after the random number update process for performances (step S77), a demo performance control process (step S78) for executing a demo performance in the pachinko game machine 1, a background display update process (step S79) for updating the background display shown on the image display device 5 to another background display, and a menu display process (step S80) for displaying a menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state are executed. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to step S73.

Furthermore, in the background display update process of this embodiment, one of the following is selected and displayed: the first background display 004SG081 corresponding to the first performance mode, the second background display 004SG082 corresponding to the second performance mode, and the third background display 004SG083 corresponding to the third performance mode. The first background display 004SG081 can be displayed when the game state is the normal state, the second background display 004SG082 can be displayed when the game state is the low probability high base state, and the third background display 004SG083 can be displayed when the game state is the high probability high base state.

The menu display process includes, in addition to displaying the menu screen on the image display device 5 in the game standby state, further processing to adjust the volume output from speakers 8L and 8R, and to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the game effect lamp 9, in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, etc., while the menu screen is displayed.

Furthermore, in the demo performance control processing, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, set a timer, such as a customer-waiting demo performance start timer, based on the receipt of a customer-waiting demo specification command, and start the customer-waiting demo performance when the timer expires without the variable display starting. If the variable display starts while the customer-waiting demo performance start timer is operating or while the customer-waiting demo performance is running, the customer-waiting demo performance start timer should be cleared, the customer-waiting demo performance should be interrupted, and the display on the image display device 5 should be switched to the variable display of decorative patterns.

(Performance control process processing)
Figure 30 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of Figure 29 as part of the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 30, the performance control CPU 120 first performs a hold display update process (step S161) which updates the hold memory display (first hold display 004SG101 and second hold display 004SG102) in the special hold memory display area 5U of the image display device 5 to a display corresponding to the contents of the start-winning received command buffer 004SG194A, such as a shift display. After the hold display update process is executed, one of the processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed, for example, according to the value of the performance process flag provided in RAM 122.

Furthermore, in step S161, a pre-announcement setting process may be executed together with the above-mentioned hold display update process. This process involves determining, deciding, and setting for executing a pre-announcement effect (for example, an effect that changes the display color of the hold display) based on the performance control command transmitted from the main board 11 when a prize is awarded upon start.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process to determine whether or not to start the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5, based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display results and variation patterns identified by the performance control command, the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols (confirmed decorative symbols), the mode of the variable display of decorative symbols, and the presence or absence of various performances such as reach performances and various予告 (pre-announcement) performances, as well as their mode and start timing, are determined. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute performances) is set, reflecting these determinations. Afterward, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process ends. Upon receiving the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of decorative symbols, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, drive the movable body 32, output sound and sound effects from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14, and performs various effect controls during the variable display of decorative symbols. After performing these effect controls, the CPU 120 stops displaying the confirmed decorative symbols, which are the display result of the decorative symbols, in response to, for example, when an exit code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or when a command is received from the main board 11 specifying that the confirmed decorative symbols should be stopped displaying. When the confirmed decorative symbol is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3," and the variable display performance processing ends.

The special symbol win waiting process in step S173 is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special symbol win waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has received a performance control command from the main board 11 specifying the start of the jackpot game state. If it receives a performance control command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, it updates the value of the performance process flag to "4". If it does not receive a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state and the waiting time for such a command has elapsed, it determines that the display result in the special symbol game was "miss" and updates the value of the performance process flag to its initial value of "0". After updating the value of the performance process flag, the special symbol win waiting process terminates.

The jackpot animation processing in step S174 is executed when the value of the animation process flag is "4". In this jackpot animation processing, the animation control CPU 120 sets, for example, an animation control pattern corresponding to the animation content in the jackpot game state, and executes various animation controls in the jackpot game state based on that setting. Furthermore, in the jackpot animation processing, in response to receiving, for example, a command from the main board 11 specifying the termination of the jackpot game state, the value of the animation process flag is updated to "5", which corresponds to the ending animation processing, and the jackpot animation processing terminates.

The ending sequence processing in step S175 is executed when the value of the sequence process flag is "5". In this ending sequence processing, the sequence control CPU 120 sets sequence control patterns corresponding to events such as the end of a jackpot game state, and executes various sequence controls for the ending sequence at the end of the jackpot game state based on these settings. Afterward, the value of the sequence process flag is updated to its initial value of "0", and the ending sequence processing ends.

(Demo performance control processing)
Next, the operation of the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained. Figures 31 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step S78 of Figure 29. In the demo performance control process, the CPU 120 for performance control first determines whether or not the demo movie display is currently running (step 004 SGS 501). Whether or not the demo movie display is currently running is determined by whether or not the demo movie running flag, which indicates that the demo movie display is currently running, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie is not currently being displayed, then it is determined whether or not the menu is currently displayed (step 004SGS502). Whether or not the menu is currently displayed is determined by whether or not the "menu displayed" flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is not currently displayed, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not (step 004SGS503). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is on or not is determined by whether the touch ring on flag, which indicates that the touch ring 004SG035 is on, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is not on, it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start (step 004SGS504). Whether or not the system is waiting for the demo movie to start is determined by whether or not the demo movie start waiting flag, which indicates waiting for the demo movie to start, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is not waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received (step 004SGS505). Whether or not a customer-waiting demo specification command has been received is determined by whether or not the customer-waiting demo specification command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the customer-waiting demo specification command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer waiting demo specification command has been received, a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer to measure the time until the demo movie display starts (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer to measure the time until the guidance display starts (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag indicating that guidance display is waiting to start is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the performance control main process returns.

If it is determined in step 004SGS505 that a customer-waiting demo designation command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received (step 004SGS507). Whether or not a power-on designation command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-on designation command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the power-on designation command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has been received, the timer value for the demo movie start wait timer is set to approximately 60 seconds (30000) (step 004SGS508), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), the timer value for the guidance display start wait timer is set to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS507 that a power-on command has not been received, it is determined whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received (step 004SGS509). Whether or not a power-down recovery command has been received is determined by whether or not the power-down recovery command reception flag, which indicates the receipt of the power-down recovery command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has not been received, the demo performance control process terminates and the system returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS509 that a power outage recovery command has been received, the system sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 90 seconds (45000) as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS510), sets the demo movie start wait flag (step 004SGS511), sets a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), sets the guidance display start wait flag (step 004SGS513), terminates the demo performance control process, and returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS504 that the system is waiting for the demo movie to start, it is determined whether or not termination condition E2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS514). Whether or not termination condition E2 has been met is determined by whether or not the starting prize award command reception flag, which indicates the reception of the starting prize award command, is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is met, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS514 that termination condition E2 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E3 is met, i.e., whether the touch ring 004SG035 is ON or OFF (step 004SGS515). Whether termination condition E3 is met or OFF is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035, which is specified by the frame state display specification command, has changed from OFF to ON.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS515 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS517). Whether termination condition E4 is met is determined by whether the control of the menu display started in the previous menu display process in step 80.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS517 that termination condition E4 is not met, the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS523), and it is determined whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start (step 004SGS524). Whether or not the system is waiting for the guidance display to start is determined by whether or not the guidance display start wait flag is set.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the system is waiting for the guidance display to start, the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS525), and it is determined whether the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 30 seconds have elapsed since the guidance display start waiting timer began counting (step 004SGS526).

If, in step 004SGS526, it is determined that the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is 0, the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS527), the guidance display is started (step 004SGS528), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS524 that the guidance display is not waiting to start, or if it is determined in step 004SGS526 that the timer value of the guidance display start waiting timer is not 0, then it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is 0 or not, that is, whether a specified time (60 seconds, 90 seconds, or 120 seconds) has elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie start waiting timer (step 004SGS529).

If, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is not 0, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if, in step 004SGS529, it is determined that the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is 0, the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS530), the demo movie execution flag is set (step 004SGS531), a timer value equivalent to approximately 55 seconds (27500) is set as the demo movie timer value for measuring the time until the demo movie display ends (step 004SGS532), the demo movie display is started (step 004SGS533), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS501 that the demo movie display is in progress, it is determined whether any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, i.e., whether a start-up prize has been awarded, the touch ring 004SG035 has been turned on, or the menu display has started (step 004SGS534).

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that none of the termination conditions E2 to E4 are met, the timer value of the demo movie timer is deducted by 1 (step 004SGS535), and it is determined whether the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0 or not, that is, whether 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of timing by the demo movie timer (step 004SGS536).

If step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is not 0, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if step 004SGS536 determines that the timer value of the demo movie timer is 0, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS537), the demo movie start waiting flag is set (step 004SGS538), the timer value of the demo movie start waiting timer is set to a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) (step 004SGS539), the guidance display starts (step 004SGS540), the demo performance control process terminates, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS534 that any of the termination conditions E2 to E4 have been met, the demo movie execution flag is cleared (step 004SGS541), the timer value of the demo movie timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS542), the demo movie display is terminated (step 004SGS543), and it is determined whether or not termination condition E3 has been met, i.e., whether or not the touch ring 004SG035 is on (step 004SGS544).

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 is not met, then it is determined whether termination condition E4 is met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS545).

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 is not met, i.e., termination condition E2 is met, the demo performance control process terminates and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS544 that termination condition E3 has been met, the touch ring on flag is set (step 004SGS516), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS545 that termination condition E4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS502 that the menu is being displayed, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS546).

If, in step 004SGS546, it is determined that termination condition 2 is met, i.e., the menu display ends due to a starting prize, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS547), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS546 that termination condition 2 is not met, it is determined whether the menu display has finished (step 004SGS548). Whether the menu display has finished is determined by whether the control of the menu display was completed in the previous step S80 menu display process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has not finished, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS548 that the menu display has finished, the menu display flag is cleared (step 004SGS549), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the main performance control process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS503 that the touch ring 004SG035 is ON, it is determined whether or not termination condition 2 has been met, i.e., whether or not a starting prize has been awarded (step 004SGS550).

If it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has been met, the demo performance control process is terminated and the process returns to the main performance control process. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 004SGS550 that termination condition 2 has not been met, it is determined whether termination condition 4 has been met, i.e., whether the menu display has started (step 004SGS551).

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 is not met, it is determined whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not (step 004SGS552). Whether the touch ring 004SG035 is off or not is determined by whether the detection state of the touch ring 004SG035 has changed from on to off due to the frame state display specification command.

If, during step 004SGS552, it is determined that the touch ring 004SG035 is off, the touch ring on flag is cleared (step 004SGS553), a timer value equivalent to approximately 120 seconds (60000) is set as the demo movie start wait timer (step 004SGS506), the demo movie start wait flag is set (step 004SGS511), a timer value equivalent to approximately 30 seconds (15000) is set as the guidance display start wait timer (step 004SGS512), the guidance display start wait flag is set (step 004SGS513), the demo performance control process ends, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

If it is determined in step 004SGS551 that termination condition 4 has been met, the menu display flag is set (step 004SGS518), the demo movie start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS519), the timer value of the demo movie start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS520), the guidance display start wait flag is cleared (step 004SGS521), the timer value of the guidance display start wait timer is cleared to 0 (step 004SGS522), the demo performance control process is terminated, and the process returns to the performance control main process.

(Type of performance mode)
Next, the types of performance modes will be explained based on Figure 34. Figure 34 shows the configurations of the first performance mode (A1) and (A2), the second performance mode (B1) and (B2), and the third performance mode (C1) and (C2).

As shown in Figure 34(A1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in a low-base state (for low-base state) consist of: a number display section 004SG051 consisting of a circular number base section and the numbers "0" to "9" displayed on the front of the number base section; a character display section 004SG052 displaying 10 types of characters corresponding to each of the numbers "0" to "9" in the number display section 004SG051 (not all characters are shown); an information display section 004SG053 consisting of a rectangular information base section and information about the characters displayed on the front of the information base section (for example, the character's name in this embodiment); and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG054 that surrounds the number display section 004SG051, the character display section 004SG052, and the information display section 004SG053.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 004SG053 is shown to display the name of the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various other information related to the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 (for example, the character's nickname, personality, battle level, items owned by the character, etc.) may be displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 34(B1) and (C1), the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R when the game state is in the high-base state (for the high-base state) consist of a number display section 004SG061 consisting of the numbers "0" to "9", and a roughly rectangular base display section 004SG064 that surrounds the number display section 004SG061. The decorative symbols for the high-base state do not have character display sections or information display sections like the decorative symbols for the low-base state.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 displays the first and second reserved memory counts, as well as a small symbol (fourth symbol) corresponding to the decorative symbol. The small symbols consist of the numbers "0" through "9" displayed in the small symbol display areas 5SL, 5SC, and 5SR, respectively, and each number corresponds to a decorative symbol. In this embodiment, while the numbers of the decorative symbols and the small symbols correspond, it is not necessarily required that all the numbers of both symbols correspond. For example, the numbers of the small symbols may be fewer than the numbers "0" through "9" of the decorative symbols, ranging from "1" to "5," or they may be different symbols or figures from the numbers of the decorative symbols.

As shown in Figure 34, the CPU 120 for controlling the game's presentation is capable of executing one of the following presentation modes: a first presentation mode (see Figures 34(A1) and (A2)), a second presentation mode (see Figures 34(B1) and (B2)), and a third presentation mode (see Figures 34(C1) and (C2)). The first presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, low base state. The second presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a low probability, high base state, and the third presentation mode is an execution mode that can be executed when the game state is controlled to a high probability, high base state.

As shown in Figure 34(A1), in the first performance mode, decorative symbols for the low base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the first background display 004SG081, which depicts a daytime city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(A2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (first scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the display area 5S located in the upper left of the image display device 5 screen displays the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, and small symbols. The special symbol reserved memory display area 5U and the active display area 5F located at the bottom of the image display device 5 screen display the first reserved display 004SG101 and the second reserved display 004SG102, which correspond to variable displays whose execution is pending, and the active display 004SG103, which corresponds to variable displays that are currently being executed. Note that the first reserved memory count, the second reserved memory count, small symbols, the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5F are displayed in all performance modes, and therefore their explanation will be omitted below.

As shown in Figure 34 (B1), in the second performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the second background display 004SG082, which depicts a city scene at dusk, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34 (B2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by rotation in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, rotating around a rotation axis that faces vertically.

For example, in the second display mode, the decorative pattern has a first face and a second face opposite the first face. The first face displays the preceding decorative pattern (for example, the "3" pattern). On the other hand, when the first face is facing forward, it is not possible to determine whether the subsequent decorative pattern (for example, the "4" pattern) is displayed on the second face. In other words, because the base display section 004SG064 has low transparency (is opaque), it is not possible to see through the decorative pattern displayed on the second face from the front (to see it through the decorative pattern from the front).

Furthermore, the decorative patterns are rotatable in one direction (for example, clockwise or counterclockwise in a plan view). By rotating in the order of the first face, second face, first face, second face, and so on, the numbers increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and the display of "0" through "9" is repeated. In other words, the rotation of the decorative patterns is performed by looping the display of the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Furthermore, the upper right portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right. The lower left portion of the image display device 5 screen displays a time-saving control remaining display 004SG202 (in this example, the words "XX times remaining," where XX = 0 to 100) indicating the number of times the time-saving control will be executed.

As shown in Figure 34(C1), in the third performance mode, decorative symbols for the high base state are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the third background display 004SG083, which depicts a night city scene, is displayed as the background for the decorative symbols. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 34(C2), the variable display of the decorative symbols is performed by a scrolling display (third scrolling display) that moves linearly from top to bottom across the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

For example, each decorative symbol is displayed in the frame from the top edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards, then moves linearly downwards and is displayed out of the frame from the bottom edge of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R downwards. Also, when the preceding decorative symbol that is displayed in the frame (for example, the "3" symbol) passes the decorative symbol stopping position set in the vertical center of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the following decorative symbol (for example, the "4" symbol) is displayed in the frame and moves downwards. In other words, when the preceding "3" symbol is passing the stopping position, the preceding "2" symbol and the following "4" symbol are not visible, but after the preceding "3" symbol has passed the stopping position, the preceding "3" symbol and the following "4" symbol become visible. In this way, the decorative patterns increase in the order of "0," "1," "2," "3," and so on, returning to "0" after "9," and repeating the increment from "0" to "9." In other words, the decorative patterns from "0" to "9" are displayed in a loop in each decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby executing the scrolling display of the decorative patterns.

Furthermore, the upper right corner of the image display device 5 screen displays a right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 consisting of a right arrow and the words "Right-Hand Shooting" to inform the player to shoot to the right.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns and sub-patterns have different variable display modes. For example, during the period when decorative patterns are displayed by high-speed scrolling, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed from the top edge of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R until it is displayed from the bottom edge. In other words, a predetermined period of time is required for a single decorative pattern to be displayed and for that decorative pattern display to end. On the other hand, during the predetermined period, the sub-patterns of losing combinations are switched (updated) and displayed multiple times (for example, five times).

Furthermore, in the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in the first and third performance modes, and the rotating display in the second performance mode, the variable display speed changes from low to high when the variable display starts and changes from high to low when the variable display stops. In other words, the variable display speed is variable, while the small symbols are displayed at a constant speed from the start to the stop of the variable display.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control is shown as an example of a configuration in which it can execute a first performance mode, a second performance mode, and a third performance mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute four or more types of performance modes. In particular, it may be possible to execute multiple types of performance modes corresponding to a single game state (for example, a low probability, low base state).

(Examples of operation of each part when variable display starts)
Next, examples of the operation of each part at the start of variable display will be explained based on Figures 35 to 38. Figure 35 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the first performance mode. Figure 36 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols following Figure 35. Figure 37 is a diagram showing the flow of variable display of decorative symbols in the third performance mode. Figure 38 is a timing chart showing the state of each part at the start of variable display in the first performance mode (A) and the second and third performance modes (B).

Furthermore, in the following diagrams representing the display screen of the image display device 5, lines other than solid lines (for example, dashed lines or dotted lines) and arrows without labels do not represent images displayed on the screen, but are used to explain the movement of images, etc.

(Example of variable display operation in the first performance mode)
First, we will explain, based on Figures 35 and 36, examples of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the first performance mode.

Figure 35(A) shows the state in the first performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still being displayed variably. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2").

Next, as shown in Figure 35(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 35(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins, while the variation start action of the decorative symbols begins in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area. Furthermore, a shift display is started in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 35(D)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins to move horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 35(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 35(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 35(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the next variable display corresponding to the first pending display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins.

As shown in Figure 35(E), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 004SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the action (character reversal) of the decorative symbol displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is completed, and the upward action begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 35(F), downward movement begins, and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 35(F), the decorative pattern displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R completes its (character inversion) and begins its upward movement. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 35(G), it begins to move downward and the scrolling display starts.

Next, as shown in Figure 35(G), the action of the decorative pattern displayed in the central decorative pattern display area 5C (character reversal movement) ends and the upward movement begins. Once the upward movement is complete, as shown in Figure 35(H), the downward movement begins and scrolling display starts.

Thus, as the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins and the variable display of the small symbols begins, the variable display of the ornamental symbols that are currently displayed in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L, the right ornamental symbol display area 5R, and the middle ornamental symbol display area begins in that order. However, the scrolling display of the ornamental symbols displayed in ornamental symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display ends) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity. Furthermore, from the start of the shift display until the end of the shift display, although the decorative symbols do not scroll, a variation start action is performed in which the characters reverse, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display has started. The operation mode of the variation start action can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, when scrolling display begins, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increase in scrolling speed (movement speed) from low to medium to high speed. Simultaneously, the transparency of the images gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency becomes approximately 90%. For example, the decorative pattern in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, as shown in Figures 35(F) and (G), starts at low speed immediately after the variable display begins, progresses through medium speed as shown in Figure 35(H), and then becomes high speed as shown in Figures 36(I), (J), and (K). As the transparency increases with speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually identify each decorative pattern at high speeds. Furthermore, as shown in Figures 35(G) to 36(K), the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbols in the central decorative symbol display area 5R are initially displayed at a low speed, then at a medium speed, and finally at a high speed, while a fade-out display is performed where the transparency increases with acceleration.

(Example of variable display operation in the third performance mode)
Next, an example of the operation of each part when the variable display of decorative symbols begins in the third performance mode will be explained based on Figure 37.

Figure 37(A) shows the state in the third performance mode where the decorative symbols, which were scrolling in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, are temporarily stopped at their respective stopping positions. At this point, the variable display of the special symbols has not yet finished, and the decorative symbols are in a temporarily stopped state; therefore, the small symbols displayed in display area 5S are still in variable display mode. Furthermore, the active display area 5F shows the active display 004SG103 corresponding to this variable display, and the special symbol hold memory display area 5U shows two first hold displays 004SG101 (first hold memory count "2"). Also, the small symbols and the right-hand shooting notification image 004SG201 are displayed superimposed on the decorative symbols, on a higher layer (in front of them). (See Figure 37(A))

Next, as shown in Figure 37(B), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and the small symbols stop displaying a losing combination, the active display 004SG103 corresponding to the completed variable display is erased from the active display area 5F, and an erase effect 004SG110 is displayed to emphasize that the active display 004SG103 has been erased.

As shown in Figure 37(C), when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, is started, the variable display of the small symbols begins. However, because the base state is high, the decorative symbol variation start action (see Figure 37(A)) is not performed. Also, a shift display begins, in which the two first held displays 004SG101 move toward the active display area 5F.

Specifically, the first held display 004SG101 begins moving diagonally upward to the left, then moves diagonally downward to the left in a parabolic arc, moving from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, where it is displayed as the active display 004SG103 (see Figure 37(C)). Furthermore, the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the second display area from the left, begins moving horizontally to the left (shift display) in conjunction with the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left (see Figure 37(C)), moving from the second display area from the left to the first display area (shift display) (see Figure 37(D)).

Furthermore, the erase effect 004SG110 displayed in Figure 37(B) will continue to be displayed for a while even after the variable display corresponding to the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, has started.

As shown in Figure 37(C), when the shift display, which moves the first held display 004SG101 from the first display area from the left to the active display area 5F, is completed, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins (see Figure 37(D)). In the high base state, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously.

Thus, when the variable display corresponding to the first held display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left, begins, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols that are stopped in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins simultaneously. However, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R does not begin until the shift display, in which the first held display 004SG101 displayed in the first display area from the left moves to the active display area 5F, is completed.

In other words, the scrolling display begins only after the first held display 004SG101 has completed its movement to the active display area 5F (the shift display has ended) and is displayed as the active display 004SG103. Therefore, the player can recognize the start of the variable display based on the held display without any sense of incongruity.

Furthermore, when scrolling begins, the scroll speed (movement speed) of the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually increases from low speed to medium speed to high speed. In proportion to the increase in display speed, the transparency of the image also gradually increases, and at high speed, a fade-out display is executed where the transparency reaches approximately 90%. For example, as shown in Figures 37(E) and 37(F), the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are initially displayed at low speed, then progress to medium speed as shown in Figure 37(G), and finally to high speed as shown in Figure 37(H). Since the transparency also increases with increasing speed, at high speed, it becomes extremely difficult to visually distinguish each decorative pattern.

In this embodiment, the transparency of the decorative pattern is set to a first value (0%) when the pattern is stationary, and gradually increases when variable display starts, finally reaching a second value (90%) during high-speed scrolling display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Specifically, the first value is the minimum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is clearly visible. For example, if the pattern is most clearly displayed when the transparency is 5%, the first value may be set to 5% instead of 0%. Similarly, the second value is the maximum value of the transparency, and should be any value at which the decorative pattern is almost invisible. For example, if the pattern is almost invisible when the transparency is 100%, the second value may be set to 100% instead of 90%. In short, the first and second values can be changed in various ways.

As explained above, in the low base state, when the CPU 120 for performance control is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs the action to start the variation of the decorative symbols and prevents the scrolling display of the decorative symbols from starting until the shift display that switches the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, to the active display area 5F as the active display 004SG103 is completed.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. It is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command). Therefore, even when variable displays are executed based on different types of variable display patterns, a common shift display is performed, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in a low base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it performs a change start action for the decorative symbols and does not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F. On the other hand, in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it does not perform a change start action for the decorative symbols. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and in a high base state, when the performance control CPU 120 is performing a hold shift display in conjunction with the start of variable display, it may perform a change start action for the decorative symbols and not start the scrolling display of the decorative symbols until the first hold display 004SG101, which was displayed in the first display area from the left in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, is switched to display as an active display 004SG103 in the active display area 5F.

By doing this, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, a shift display is performed, switching the corresponding hold display to an active display. Furthermore, while the shift display is active, a variation start action is performed, causing the decorative symbols to operate in a manner different from the moving display. This allows for effective use of the time required for the shift display. Additionally, since the variation start action is performed when the shift display is active in a high-base state (which is more advantageous than a low-base state), it enhances the excitement of starting the variable display of the decorative symbols in the high-base state.

Furthermore, even in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 can execute variable display of decorative symbols based on the variable pattern specification command transmitted from the main board 11 during the performance control process processing in step S76. Since it is possible to perform a common shift display whether the variable display is executed based on a first type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a non-reach variable pattern specification command) or a second type of variable pattern specification command (e.g., a reach variable pattern specification command), a common shift display is performed even when variable displays based on different types of variable display patterns, thus reducing the number of shift display patterns.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a configuration is illustrated in which, after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the order of left, right, and center begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. As long as the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begins after the shift display that switches the held display corresponding to the variable display to the active display upon the start of the variable display of the special symbol has finished, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols displayed in any one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may begin while the shift display is in operation.

(Operational behavior of each part when variable display starts)
As shown in Figure 38(A), in the first performance mode, when the number of reserved symbols is "2" or less and a variable display based on the non-reach failure variation pattern PA1-1 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins, and the variation start action is performed in the order of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbols in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the decorative symbols in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C, after which the scroll display begins. In addition, a shift display of the reserved symbols is performed, and after the shift display ends, the scroll display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A21 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the timing for stopping the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R approaches, the decorative patterns in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, the right decorative pattern display area 5R, and the central decorative pattern display area 5C gradually decelerate and become slow-moving displays. As the speed decreases, the transmittance (transparency) also decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period is the same for all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the central decorative symbol display area 5C are displayed in that order, temporarily stopping. During the temporary stop display, a variable stop action is performed, and the loop action is repeatedly executed. After the variable display ends and the small symbols are displayed in a stopped state, the loop action for the decorative symbols ends and they are displayed in a stopped state. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Next, as shown in Figure 38(B), in the second and third performance modes, when a variable display based on the shortened non-reach miss variation pattern PA1-3 is executed, the small symbols are rapidly displayed in a variable manner as the variable display of the special symbols begins. Simultaneously, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R begin rotating or scrolling without any variation start action. Furthermore, a shift display of the hold display is performed, and after this shift display ends, the scrolling display of the decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R begins.

Furthermore, the decorative patterns in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R gradually accelerate to high-speed display after scrolling begins, and their transparency increases proportionally to the speed, resulting in a fade-out display. This fade-out display period A23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

As the stopping time approaches for decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative patterns in these areas simultaneously and gradually decelerate, becoming slow-speed displays. Simultaneously, the transparency (transparency) decreases in proportion to the decrease in speed, resulting in a fade-in display. This fade-in display period B23 is common to all decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Subsequently, the decorative symbols in display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R all stop and are displayed simultaneously. In other words, the variable stop action and loop action seen in the first and second performance modes are not executed; the variable display simply ends, and the decorative symbols, along with the smaller symbols, stop and are displayed. After a symbol confirmation period (for example, 500ms), the next variable display becomes available.

Furthermore, the fade-out display period A21 when scrolling is performed in the first performance mode is longer than the fade-out display period A23 when rotation display is performed in the second performance mode or when scrolling display is performed in the third performance mode (fade-out display period A23 < fade-out display period A21. See Figures 38(A) and (B)).

Furthermore, in the first performance mode, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 38(A). Similarly, in the second and third performance modes, regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the appearance will be as shown in Figure 38(B).

(Example of SP Reach animation operation)
Next, an example of the operation of the SP Reach演出 (SP reach animation) will be explained based on Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a low base state. Figure 40 is a diagram showing the flow of the SP Reach animation in a high base state. In Figure 40, an example of the operation of the reach animation in the third animation mode is explained, but the same reach animation may be performed in the second animation mode, or a different reach animation may be performed.

As shown in Figure 39(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a low base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether to execute a step-up performance in which multiple characters appear in stages, and whether to display a specific step-up performance display pattern (see Figure 39(B)) in which the background display becomes rainbow-colored at a predetermined step in the step-up performance, indicating a confirmed jackpot. If the execution of the step-up performance and the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern are decided, the step-up performance is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, and the specific step-up performance display pattern is displayed at the predetermined step (see Figure 39(B)). If it is decided not to execute the step-up performance, or if it is decided to execute the step-up performance but the display of the specific step-up performance display pattern is not decided, a step-up performance display pattern that does not include a rainbow background is displayed.

Next, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 39(C)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title, and the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 39(D)). In the SP reach performance, a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081, which is the normal background display, and represents space corresponding to the SP reach performance (see Figures 39(E) and (F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different modes depending on the type of SP reach performance.

Next, from the moment the battle concludes until a predetermined valid operation period has elapsed, the operation prompt display 004SG071, consisting of the words "Press!!" prompting the user to press the push button 31B, and a button display 004SG072, which mimics the push button 31B, are displayed to initiate the operation (see Figure 39(G)).

Then, when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, or when no operation is detected and the operation validity period expires, the operation prompt display 004SG071 and the button display 004SG072 disappear, and the process ends. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the movable body lamp 9d lights up in a predetermined color, the movable body 32 descends from the origin position to the performance position, an effect display 004SG073 emphasizing the movable body 32 is displayed, and a predetermined performance sound effect is output, indicating that the game has been controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 39(H)).

Next, after a result display (not shown) indicating that the allied character has won the battle against the enemy character is displayed, the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP Reach演出 is displayed as the background display. After the combination of symbols that guarantee a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed (see Figure 39(I)), as the SP Reach演出 ends, the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, the combination of symbols that guarantee a jackpot (for example, "222") is temporarily displayed, after which the small symbols and each decorative symbol are displayed, and the jackpot display result is derived and displayed (see Figure 39(J)).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, the movable body 32 does not descend from the origin position to the performance position. Instead, the result notification display 004SG078, indicating that the ally character lost the battle against the enemy character, is displayed (see Figure 39(K)). Then, in the notification performance, when the fourth background display 004SG084 corresponding to the SP reach performance is displayed as the background display, a combination of symbols that is not a winning combination (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed (see Figure 39(L)).

Then, as shown in Figure 39(M), upon the end of the notification animation (SP Reach animation), the fourth background display 004SG084 disappears and the first background display 004SG081 is displayed. While the first background display 004SG081 is displayed, a combination of symbols that results in a loss (for example, "232") is temporarily stopped and displayed. After that, the small symbols and each decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the loss result is derived and displayed (see Figure 39(M)).

Next, as shown in Figure 40(A), when a variable display based on a super reach variation pattern is initiated in a high base state, the performance control CPU 120 determines, based on the variable display result, whether or not to display a specific cut-in performance display pattern (see Figure 40(D)) in which a specific character appears and the background display becomes a rainbow pattern indicating a confirmed jackpot, and stores the determination result.

Then, after the decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the decorative symbol with the same number as the one temporarily displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is temporarily displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the variable display pattern of the decorative symbols becomes a predetermined reach pattern, initiating the reach animation (see Figure 40(B)). At this time, the decorative symbols are displayed at high speed in the middle decorative symbol display area 5C.

Next, after the variable display mode changes to the reach mode, the reach title display 004SG070, which indicates the type of SP reach performance, is displayed, notifying the reach title. Then, the SP reach performance (for example, a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) begins as a notification performance to indicate whether or not the game is controlled to a jackpot state (see Figure 40(C)).

Here, if a specific cut-in animation display pattern is determined at the start of the variable display, the reach title display 004SG070 will be displayed, and then the cut-in animation will begin with the specific cut-in animation display pattern (see Figure 40(D)). If it is determined that the cut-in animation will not be performed, or if it is determined that the cut-in animation will be performed but the display of the specific cut-in animation pattern is not determined, a cut-in display with a background color other than rainbow will be displayed.

Furthermore, during the SP Reach演出 (SP Reach演出), a fourth background display 004SG084 is displayed, which is a different image from the first background display 004SG081 (normal background display) and represents space corresponding to the SP Reach演出 (see Figures 40(E) and 40(F)). Note that the fourth background display 004SG084 may be an image with different characteristics depending on the type of SP Reach演出.

Furthermore, the flow in Figures 40(G) to (M) is almost identical to that in Figures 39(G) to (M), except for the third background display 004SG083 for the high base in Figures 40(J) and (M). Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, the CPU 120 for performance control can execute a specific step-up performance with a rainbow background in a low base state (see Figure 39(B)) and a specific cut-in performance including a rainbow background in a high base state (see Figure 40(D)) as a specific performance to announce a confirmed jackpot. Although the backgrounds of the specific step-up performance and the specific cut-in performance are both rainbow-colored, their display patterns differ; however, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and side lamps are the same. In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps and side lamps based on a common brightness data table (common table), thus reducing the data capacity required for illumination.

(Customer waiting demo performance [Demo movie display])
Next, the customer waiting demo presentation will be explained based on Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41 shows (A) the start and end conditions for the demo movie display, and (B) the configuration of the demo movie display. Figure 42 shows an example of the operation of each part during the demo movie display. Figure 43 is a transition diagram of the customer waiting demo presentation. Figure 44 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 45 shows an example of the operation of the demo movie display. Figure 46 shows an example of the display of (A) the first scene (company name), (B) the fourth scene (warning 1), and (C) the fourth scene (warning 2). Figure 47 is a diagram comparing the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning 1 and 2), the number of reserved memories, and the small symbols.

The "customer waiting demo effect" is an effect used by the effect control CPU 120 to notify the player that the game is in a waiting state, meaning it is not currently playing any games (e.g., variable display, jackpot games, or minor jackpot games). This is primarily achieved by displaying a demo movie on the image display device 5 (see Figures 44 and 45).

The demo movie display, which shows a different background than the one displayed during gameplay, is intended to inform players that a machine is vacant and not currently being played. It consists of scenes such as a company name indicating the company associated with the machine, a machine introduction scene explaining the story, characters, effects, and specifications of the pachinko machine, a machine introduction scene displaying the title and subtitle of the pachinko machine, and a warning scene before gameplay, outlining important points to remember while playing. Furthermore, the demo movie display can be modified in various ways; for example, the machine introduction scene may include explanations of effects and machine specifications.

As shown in Figures 41(A) to 43, the "customer waiting demo performance" (hereinafter also referred to as demo movie display or demonstration display) is started when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following start conditions S1 to S6 have been met. Specifically, start condition S1 is met when one hour (for example, 120 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command output from the main board 11 upon the end of the variable display; start condition S2 is met when two hours (for example, 60 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-on designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on accompanied by initialization; and start condition S3 is met when three hours (for example, 90 seconds) have elapsed since receiving the power-up recovery designation command output from the main board 11 due to power-on without initialization. The conditions are met as follows: Start condition S4 is met when the fourth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the touch sensor (touch ring 004SG035) turned off; Start condition S5 is met when the fifth hour (e.g., 120 seconds) has elapsed since the menu screen display ended; and Start condition S6 is met when the sixth hour (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display, which has gone through conditions S1 to S5, ended (from the second week onwards, similar to condition S6, the demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the customer waiting demo performance ends).

Furthermore, the "demo movie display" terminates when the performance control CPU 120 determines that any of the following termination conditions E1 to E4 have been met. Specifically, termination condition E1 is met when the end time (e.g., 55 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display started; termination condition E2 is met when a start-up win occurs; termination condition E3 is met when the touch ring 004SG035 is detected as being ON; and termination condition E4 is met when the menu screen display start operation is performed.

Furthermore, even when the demo movie is not being displayed, if the above termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the timer is being set for the 1st to 6th hours during the waiting period for the above start conditions to be met (demo movie start waiting period), the timer will be stopped. Subsequently, when the above start conditions S1, S4, and S5 are met, the timer will be reset (re-set).

Furthermore, during the waiting period for the demo movie to start, the demo movie display is not shown. However, menu guidance display 004SG401 and volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed on the various background displays as guidance for adjusting the effects (see Figures 50 (A4) and 136).

Furthermore, the guidance displays for adjusting the effects may include not only menu guidance displays 004SG401, which guides the operation of push button 31B to display a menu screen that allows for the customization and reset of various effects functions such as the vibration function, V-flash function, auto button function, and effects mode provided on push button 31B, and volume/brightness guidance displays 004SG402, which guides the operation of buttons for adjusting volume and brightness, but also guidance displays for adjusting effects functions other than those mentioned above.

Furthermore, if termination condition E3 is met, termination condition E2 is almost never met. In other words, since the ball-hitting handle 30 must be operated for a starting prize to occur, termination condition E3 is generally met before termination condition E2. However, in the following irregular cases, termination condition E2 may be met without termination condition E3 being met.

Irregular Case 1: If a "grape" (a ball jam between the pins) occurs, the player calls a staff member. However, if the demo movie starts playing before the staff member arrives, and then the grape is cleared, resulting in a starting win, the demo movie ends without the player operating the ball-shooting handle 30. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Irregular Case 2: If a malfunction occurs in CPU 103 or the CPU 120 for performance control, and the CPU 120 for performance control cannot confirm the touch sensor's ON state, a starting win may occur even though the touch sensor's ON state cannot be confirmed. Therefore, termination condition E2 is met instead of termination condition E3.

Furthermore, termination condition E3, which is met when the touch sensor is on, does not necessarily need to be set as a termination condition. In such cases, the demo movie display will not end with steering wheel operation alone; rather, termination condition E2 will be met and the demo movie display will end when a starting prize is awarded.

As shown in Figure 41(B), the demo movie display consists of four scenes: Scene 1 to Scene 4. Specifically, Scene 1 is the "Company Name" part (Company Name Part), which displays the names and slogans of the companies involved in the development, manufacturing, and sales of the product (see Figures 44(A) and (B)).

The second scene consists of "Machine Introduction 1" to "Machine Introduction 3" parts (Machine Introduction 1 to 3 parts) which introduce the story of the performances that take place in the pachinko game machine. In "Machine Introduction 1" part (Machine Introduction 1 part), the allied characters and their names that appear in the performance are displayed (see Figures 44 (C) to (F)). In "Machine Introduction 2-1" part (Machine Introduction 2-1 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 44 (G) and (H)). In "Machine Introduction 2-2" part (Machine Introduction 2-2 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 44 (J) and (K)). In "Machine Introduction 2-3" part (Machine Introduction 2-3 part), the confrontation scene between the allied characters and enemy characters and the narration text are displayed (see Figures 45 (M) to (O)). In the "Model Introduction 3-1" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-1" section and the "Model Introduction 2-2" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 45(I)). Similarly, in the "Model Introduction 3-2" section, between the "Model Introduction 2-2" section and the "Model Introduction 2-3" section, the cut-in displays of allied characters are shown without text (see Figure 45(L)).

The third scene consists of a "Machine Name Main Title" section (Main Title Section) and a "Machine Subtitle" section (Subtitle Sections 1 and 2), which display the main title of the pachinko machine (see Figures 45(P) to (V)). The "Machine Main Title" section displays the main title, "FEVER POWERRFUL," while the "Machine Subtitle" section displays the subtitle, "II/All Together Ver."

Furthermore, the "Main Title Name" is the main theme of the pachinko machine 1, a concise expression of its theme. The "Subtitle Name" is the secondary title of the pachinko machine 1, and can be supplementary information added to the main title (for example, "II" indicating it's the second installment, or the heading "All Together Ver."). The content can be changed in various ways.

The fourth scene consists of a "Warning 1" part (Warning 1 Part) and a "Warning 2" part (Warning 2 Part) that provide warnings to the player (see Figures 45 (W) to (X)). Specifically, "Warning 1" part displays warnings to prevent excessive gaming, while "Warning 2" part displays warnings to prevent physical accidents caused by the pachinko machine.

As shown in Figure 42, the demo movie display shows various demo images in the order of the first scene, second scene, third scene, and fourth scene after the start condition is met. The display period tb2a for the first scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2a = 10 seconds), the display period tb2b for the second scene is approximately 30 seconds (tb2b = 30 seconds), the display period tb2c for the third scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2c = 10 seconds), and the display period tb2d for the fourth scene is approximately 10 seconds (tb2d = 5 seconds), so the display period tb for one demo movie display is approximately 55 seconds (tb2 = 55 seconds). Then, as shown in Figure 43, if the first demo movie display ends without the termination conditions E2 to E4 being met during the display of the demo movie, that is, if the first demo movie display which started with the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5 ends with termination condition E1, the system proceeds to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6 hours) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is considered met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the demo movie display termination conditions E2 to E4 are met.

During the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden, and the display of the reserved memory count and small symbols is maintained (see Figures 44 and 45). While this embodiment illustrates a configuration where the reserved memory count and small symbols are displayed during the demo movie display, the present invention is not limited to this, and the reserved memory count and small symbols may be hidden during the demo movie display.

Furthermore, during the period when the demo movie is displayed on the image display device 5, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the illumination of the panel lamps (attacker lamp 9c, movable body lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f) and frame lamps (main lamp 9a and side lamp 9b) based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table described later: customer waiting demo), while controlling the illumination of the button lamp 9e based on the brightness data table for white illumination (default) that does not correspond to the demo movie display (lamp data table described later: button white illumination). Also, while background music is not output from speakers 8L and 8R, music for the demo movie display may be output.

The brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration) consists of multiple brightness data tables (grandchild tables described later).

For details, the main lamp 9a, which constitutes the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (the lamp data table described later: customer waiting demonstration), has brightness data tables corresponding to the period of the company name section, the period of the model introduction section 1 to the period of model introduction sections 2-3, the period of the main title section, the period of subtitle section 1, the period of subtitle section 2, and the period of warning section 1 to the period of warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding brightness data table for each period.

Furthermore, the system includes luminance data tables (grandchild tables, described later) for the side lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable lamps 9d, and decorative lamps 9f that constitute the luminance data tables for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data tables, described later: customer waiting demonstrations). These tables correspond to the periods of the company name section, the model introduction 1 section, the model introduction 2-1 section, the model introduction 3-1 section, the model introduction 2-2 section, the model introduction 3-2 section, the model introduction 2-3 section, the main title section, the subtitle section 1, the subtitle section 2, and the warning section 1 to warning section 2. Light emission control is performed based on the corresponding luminance data table for each period.

Furthermore, the control using the luminance data table during the period when the demo movie is displayed will be described in detail later.

(Example of demo movie display operation)
Next, we will explain the operation examples of the demo movie display based on Figures 44, 45, and 132 to 134. Figure 132 shows examples of the operation of text display and illumination patterns in each scene, from (A1) to (A4). Figure 133 shows examples of the operation of the first scene (A), the third scene (B), and the fourth scene (C). Figure 134 is a comparison table showing the text animation display.

Furthermore, an example of the expression used to indicate the display method in the following explanation is provided.
"Fade-out display" increases the transparency of the displayed image over time, while "fade-in display" decreases the transparency of the displayed image over time.

"Animated display" refers to a dynamic display (video display) that creates movement by changing the visibility of at least a part of the image compared to the image one frame earlier. This change in visibility is achieved by altering at least one of the following: position, size, color, or transparency, compared to the image one frame earlier. In other words, "animated display" includes not only displays involving image displacement, such as "moving display," "rotating display," "enlarging display," "shrinking display," "frame-in display," and "frame-out display," but also displays that do not involve image displacement, such as "fade-out display" and "fade-in display," where the display characteristics, such as color tone, change. In this embodiment, the number of still images (frames) displayed in one second of video is 30, meaning the frame rate is 30 FPS.

"Still display" is the opposite of "animated display." It refers to a non-dynamic display (still image display) where the visibility of the image does not change compared to the previous frame, resulting in no change in the display format whatsoever.

Furthermore, an example of an expression used to describe the light emission pattern in the following explanation will be provided.
"Wave lighting" is a light emission pattern that sequentially changes the brightness of the brightness data. Compared to the flashes described below, the change in brightness between each data point is smaller. For example, the brightness of the lamp increases at a predetermined interval, the color changes at a predetermined interval, or a predetermined color moves within the light emission area. It is also used when simply keeping the lamp lit continuously would be a dull element of the effect, or when you want to emphasize the image display device 5 or other elements more than the lamp, as in the flashes described below, and you want the lamp to not stand out too much.

"Flash" is a light emission pattern that alternates between high-luminance data and low-luminance data (including off). By varying the intensity of the light, it can significantly alter the brightness perceived by the player, and is a light emission pattern used for emphasis.

The "Rainbow" pattern is commonly used when the display shown in Figure 39(B) is executed in a low base state, and when the effect shown in Figure 40(D) is executed in a high base state. In this embodiment, a rainbow wave pattern is used, which creates a wave-like illumination by sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors. However, a rainbow flash pattern may also be used, where low-brightness (including off) brightness data is alternately used between the brightness data while sequentially changing the brightness data of seven colors.

As shown in Figures 44(A) and (B), when the conditions for starting the demo movie display are met, the display of the first scene begins. Note that, as will be described later, depending on the start conditions, a transition display may be shown before the display of the first scene begins. In the first scene, a background display for the company name 004SG301 consisting of white text is displayed, and a company name display 004SG302, mainly consisting of a blue company slogan display 004SG302A and a company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing transparency and fades in, making it appear as if the company name display 004SG302 is moving from the back to the front of the display screen. The display area 5S in the upper left of the display screen remains showing the number of reserved symbols and small symbols. In this way, even when the decorative symbols are not displayed, the small symbols are still displayed, allowing the player to recognize that the variable display is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, in the first scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302. For example, as the transmittance of the company name display 004SG302 decreases, the brightness of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may increase or their color may change.

To explain in detail using Figure 133(A), first, the company name display 004SG302 is displayed in a "small" size in the center of the screen. Then, for approximately 3 seconds, it gradually enlarges while fading in and decreasing in transparency (see Figure 133(A1)). When it reaches the designated position, a bounce display is shown, where the company name display 004SG302 appears to have hit a wall and bounced back before reappearing in the designated position (see Figure 133(A2)). After that, it remains statically displayed in the designated position in the center of the screen for approximately 4 seconds (see Figure 133(A3)), and then fades out for 1 second (see Figure 133(A4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 132 (A1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash white when the company name display 004SG302 is displayed, and then illuminate in white. This white flash at the start of the demo movie display emphasizes the start of the company name display 004SG302 display. Then, the brightness increases in conjunction with the company name display 004SG302 fading in while expanding (white fade-in illumination), flashes white in conjunction with the bound display of the company name display 004SG302, then illuminates in white, and finally decreases in conjunction with the fade-out display (white fade-out illumination).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 1" part of the second scene begins to display, the ally characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and the text displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D showing the names of each character will sequentially fade in (animate display), and the effect display 004SG502 will be displayed in the background (see Figures 44(C) to (F)). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 132(A2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will light up in the color corresponding to each character before lighting up white, in accordance with the appearance of each character and the fade-in display of their names.

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-1" part of the second scene begins to display, the enemy character 004SG510A, which appears in various scenes, is displayed in animation, and the text "The enemy is rampaging through the city!" 004SG511A fades in (animates) (see Figures 44(G) and (H)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-1" part begins to display, the background display 004SG503 showing the city and the ally character 004SG500A are displayed, and a cut-in display showing the ally character flying through the city to the scene is shown (see Figure 44(I)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-2" section of the second scene begins to display again, the allied character 004SG500A, the enemy character 004SG510A, and the text display 004SG511B, which reads "Protect the city from the enemy!", are faded in (animated display) (see Figures 44(J) and (K)). Then, when the "Machine Introduction 3-2" section begins to display, the allied character 004SG500A is enlarged, and a cut-in display with the effect display 004SG504 in the background is shown (see Figure 44(L)).

Next, when the "Machine Introduction 2-3" section of the second scene begins to display again, an image of allied character 004SG500A and enemy character 004SG510A fighting, along with the text "Don't lose!" (004SG511C), fades in (animates) (see Figures 45(M) to (N)). Afterward, all allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D, along with the text "All together!" (004SG511D), fade in (animates) (see Figure 45(O)).

Furthermore, while the animations for the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A in the second scene involve actions such as enlarging, shrinking, and fighting, the various text displays 004SG501A-004SG501D and 004SG511A-004SG511D use animations that result in less noticeable changes in visibility compared to the animated displays of the allied characters 004SG500A-004SG500D.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 132 (A2), in the second scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash green when "Model Introduction 3-1" and "Model Introduction 3-2" are displayed, but basically they are lit in a white wave pattern. The lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) rarely (or never) changes in conjunction with the animation display (fade-in display) of various character displays 004SG501A to 004SG501D and 004SG511A to 004SG511D. Rather, the lighting pattern (e.g., on, flashing, off, color, brightness, etc.) often changes in conjunction with the dynamic animation display of friendly characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy characters 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, and punching.

Specifically, for example, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) may light up, flash, or change color in accordance with the movements of allied characters 004SG500A to 004SG500D and enemy character 004SG510A, such as running, jumping, or punching.

In the second scene, the main lamp 9a is controlled to be off, but the main lamp 9a may also be made to change its illumination pattern, similar to the other panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

Next, when the third scene begins to display, the effect display 004SG505 appears in the background, and the main title name display 004SG520A, consisting of the words "FEVER POWERFUL" and a cloud-shaped background, is displayed in the center of the display screen (default display position) in a "small" size. Then, it gradually enlarges while decreasing its transparency and fades in (animates), making it appear as if the main title name display 004SG520A is moving from the back to the front of the display screen (see Figures 45(P) to (R)).

Next, the model subtitle name display 004SG520B, consisting of the letters "II," is displayed in "extra-large" size to the right of the model main title name display 004SG520A (the default display position). It then fades in, slightly shrinking and decreasing in transparency, and bounces in "large" size to the right of "FEVER POWERRFUL" (the default display position) (see Figures 45(S) to (T)).

Furthermore, the subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", is displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the main title name display 004SG520A (the standard display position). It then shrinks slightly and moves to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the standard display position), bouncing back to "large" size (see Figures 45(U) to (V)).

Furthermore, in the third scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) basically light up in a rainbow (rainbow-colored) wave pattern, and the lighting pattern changes in conjunction with the animation display of the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C. In particular, in the "Machine Subtitle Name" section, when the machine subtitle name display 004SG520C, 004SG520C moves and bounces to the designated display position, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) flash (blink).

Using Figure 133(B), the display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520C, consisting of the text "All Together Ver.", will be explained in detail. After being displayed in "extra-large" size in the center in front of the main title name display 004SG520A (the designated display position) (see Figure 133(B1)), it will move to the bottom of "FEVER POWERFUL" (the designated display position) while slightly shrinking over approximately 0.5 seconds, bouncing and displaying in "large" size (see Figure 133(B2)), and then remaining static at the designated display position for 0.5 seconds (see Figure 133(B3)). Subsequently, the entire model title name display 004SG520, consisting of the main title name display 004SG520A and the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C, will gradually and slowly enlarge (animated) over approximately 1.5 seconds (see Figure 133(B4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 132 (A3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination) when the main title name display 004SG520A is shown, and when the subtitle name display 004SG520B and subtitle name display 004SG520C are shown, they flash white in conjunction with the enlargement/reduction (animation) display, and then illuminate in a rainbow pattern (rainbow wave illumination).

Next, when the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins to display, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is shown, and the fall prevention display 004SG312 fades in (animates) in the center of the screen (see Figure 45(W)). Then, when the "Warning 2" part begins to display, the display switches to a black warning background display 004SG321, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is shown (see Figure 45(X)).

Using Figure 133(C), the display of the "Warning 1" part will be explained in detail. When the display of the "Warning 1" part of the fourth scene begins, a dark green warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 is displayed at the designated display position in the center of the screen, fading in (animated display) for 0.5 seconds (see Figures 133(C1) and (C2)). Subsequently, after the transparency of the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 becomes 0% (see Figure 133(C3)), it is displayed statically for 2 seconds (see Figure 133(C4)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 132 (A4), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not flash white in conjunction with the fade-in display of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 in the "Warning 1" and "Warning 2" parts, but instead continuously illuminate in a white wave pattern in the fourth scene.

Furthermore, in the fourth scene, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) do not change their illumination pattern (e.g., on, blinking, off, color, brightness, etc.) in conjunction with the fade-in display (animation display) of the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312. Therefore, the anti-immersion indicator 004SG312 is not displayed more prominently than the company name display 004SG302, the main title name display 004SG520A, and the subtitle name displays 004SG520C and 004SG520C.

(Comparison of display methods for each scene)
Next, based on Figure 41(B), and referring to Figures 44 and 45, we will compare the display modes of the image display device 5 for each scene during the demo movie display.

<Display Pattern at the Start of Text Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), Scene 3 (Model Main Title, Model Subtitle), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), various texts are displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), various texts are not displayed with a fade-in (animated) effect.

<Text Animation Display (Degree of Visibility Change)> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the animation display shows a "large" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1, 2), the animation display shows a "medium" degree of visibility change. In Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the animation display shows a "small" degree of visibility change. However, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 3) and Scene 4 (Warning 2), the text display is not animated.

<Text Size> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Model Title), the text is initially displayed in "Small" size before being enlarged to "Large" size. In Scene 4 (Warning 1 & 2), the text is initially displayed in a consistent "Small" or "Medium" size. Furthermore, in Scene 2 (Model Introduction 1 & 2), the text is displayed in "Medium" size, and in Scene 3 (Model Subtitle), the subtitle text is initially displayed in "Extra Large" size before being reduced to "Large" size.

<Background Color> In the first scene (company name), the background color is white; in the second scene (model introductions 1-3), the background color is a color corresponding to the story; in the third scene (main model title, sub-model title), the background color is a color corresponding to the title; and in the fourth scene (warning 1), the warning 1 part is dark blue, and the warning 2 part is black.

Furthermore, regarding text display, for example, animations tend to be more emphasized than non-animated text; greater changes in visibility during animations result in greater emphasis than small changes in visibility; and text with more colors is more emphasized than text with fewer colors.

As shown in Figure 41(B), the animation of the company name display 004SG302, which consists of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, displayed in the first scene (company name), involves the text fading in, then bouncing, and expanding in size. In contrast, the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, displayed in the fourth scene (warning 1), fades in, but its size remains "medium" and does not change. Therefore, the animation of the company name display 004SG302 is more emphasized than the animation of the anti-collision display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the animation displays of the main title name 004SG520A, subtitle name 004SG520B, and 004SG520C show the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then expanding, contracting, or moving in size. In contrast, the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312 shown in the fourth scene (warning 1) simply shows the text fading in to a predetermined position, and then does not expand, contract, or move in size. Therefore, the animation display of the company name 004SG302 is considered to be more emphasized than the animation display of the anti-immersion display 004SG312, meaning that the degree of change in the visibility of the text is greater.

Here, we compare the text animation displays in the first scene (company name), the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), and the fourth scene (warning 1) based on Figures 133 and 134.

As shown in Figure 134, in the first scene (company name), the company name display 004SG302 is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of the display (see Figure 133 (A1)), bounces when it reaches the specified position (see Figure 133 (A2)), and remains static after reaching the specified position (see Figure 133 (A3)). In the third scene (machine main title name), the machine main title name display 004SG520A is displayed with an enlarged fade-in at the start of the display, then remains static when it reaches the specified position (see Figures 45 (P) to (R)), and enlarges after reaching the specified position (see Figure 133 (B4)). In the third scene (model subtitle name), the model subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are enlarged and then reduced at the start of display (see Figures 133 (B1) and (B2)), displayed statically at the designated position (see Figure 133 (B3)), and enlarged after the designated position (see Figure 133 (B4)). In the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 fades in at the start of display (see Figures 133 (C1) and (C2)), displayed statically at and after the designated position (see Figures 133 (C3) and (C4)).

In other words, the degree of emphasis in the display is as follows: Company Name ≥ Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning. Warnings only use a fade-in display at the start of the display, and there is no animation at or after the designated display position, resulting in a low degree of emphasis. On the other hand, the company name uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and at the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings. Similarly, the model title (main, sub) also uses animation at two points: at the start of the display and after the designated display position, resulting in a higher degree of emphasis than warnings.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, machine title, and warnings—dedicated animations can be used for each. Among these, emphasizing the animations for the company name and machine title compared to the warning scene (Warning 1) effectively highlights these elements, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in the third scene (main title name, subtitle name), the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C are faded in to their designated positions, and then animated to enlarge, shrink, or move their size. In contrast, in the fourth scene (warning 1), the anti-addiction display 004SG312 is faded in to its designated position, and then displayed without any animation to enlarge, shrink, or move its size.

In this way, by adding a lingering animation to the display of the machine title, attention is drawn to the title, while by avoiding the lingering animation for warnings, the text can be read clearly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Comparison of company names and warning display styles)
Here, we compare the display patterns of the first scene (company name), the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2), the number of reserved items, and the small symbols, based on Figures 46 and 47.

As shown in Figure 46(A), in the first scene (company name), the background display 004SG301 for the company name is displayed, and the company name display 004SG302, consisting of the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B, is displayed in the center of the screen. The display area 5S located in the upper left of the display screen displays the number of reserved items and small symbols.

As shown in Figure 46(B), in the fourth scene (Warning 1), a warning background display 004SG311 is displayed, and an anti-addiction display 004SG312 is animated and displayed in the center of the screen. The anti-addiction display 004SG312 consists of a heading display 004SG313 with the text "Pachinko and pachislot are games to be enjoyed in moderation," and a horizontally elongated rectangular heading frame display 004SG314 that serves as the background for the heading display 004SG313.

As shown in Figure 46(C), in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG321 is switched to display, and the accident prevention display 004SG322 is also displayed. The accident prevention display 004SG322 consists of a first accident prevention display 004SG322A and a second accident prevention display 004SG322B.

The first accident prevention display 004SG322A consists of an illustration 004SG323A showing a situation where a player hits their head on the protruding part at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, a heading display 004SG324A consisting of the words "Caution: Head Overhead," a detailed warning display 004SG325A consisting of the words "The top protrudes. Please be careful not to hit your head," a warning mark 004SG326A consisting of a triangular mark with an exclamation mark inside, and a attention mark display 004SG327A consisting of an "x" mark.

The second accident prevention display 004SG322B consists of an illustration 004SG323B showing a situation where a player's fingers may get caught in the gap between the stick controller 31A and the casing, a heading 004SG324B with the words "Caution: Finger Pinching," a detailed warning 004SG325B with the words "The stick is moving. Please be careful not to pinch your hands or fingers," a warning mark 004SG326B with an exclamation mark inside a triangular mark, and a attention mark 004SG327B with a downward arrow.

As shown in Figure 47, in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A has medium-sized text and is chromatic (blue), the company logo display 004SG302B has large-sized text and is chromatic (blue), and the background display for the company name 004SG301 is achromatic (white).

In Scene 4 (Warning 1), the text of the heading display 004SG313 is medium-sized and achromatic (white), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue). Furthermore, the border of the heading frame display 004SG314 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the background for the text display of the heading display 004SG313 includes not only the warning background display 004SG311, which covers the entire display screen, but also the heading frame display 004SG314, which is provided on a portion of the display screen.

In Scene 4 (Warning 2), the illustration display 004SG323A is large in size and achromatic (white) in color; the text of the heading display 004SG324A is medium in size and achromatic (white); the text of the detailed warning display 004SG325A is small in size and achromatic (white); the warning mark 004SG326A is medium in size and chromatic (yellow); the attention mark display 004SG327A is small in size and chromatic (red); and the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Furthermore, the "Warning Marks 004SG326A and 004SG326B" are marks that assist in making headlines that draw the player's attention more prominent, while the "Attention Marks 004SG327A and 004SG327B" are marks that assist illustrations that indicate areas that players should focus on. Unlike text, these are displayed as single marks, so it is preferable that they be chromatic in color to stand out more than the achromatic headline text.

The number of reserved symbols and the small symbols are specified as "small" in size and achromatic (black) in color.

As shown in Figures 46(A) and 47, comparing the display of the company name display 004SG302 with the number of reserved items and small patterns in the first scene (company name), the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B have larger font sizes, use more display colors, and have higher saturation and brightness in their color tones compared to the number of reserved items and small patterns. Therefore, the company slogan display 004SG302A and the company logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the number of reserved items and small patterns.

In this embodiment, the reserved memory count and small design elements are exemplified as being achromatic (black). However, they may also be chromatic. Even in such cases, the corporate slogan display 004SG302A and the corporate logo display 004SG302B can be displayed more prominently than the reserved memory count and small design elements if they satisfy at least one of the following conditions: larger font size, more display colors used, or higher saturation and brightness.

Next, as shown in Figures 46(B), (C) and 47, comparing the anti-intrusion display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1) with the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), the warning background display 004SG311 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 which forms the background of the heading display 004SG313 is chromatic (dark blue), while the warning background display 004SG321 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the warning text in Warning Part 1 and Warning Part 2, the system can increase attention when switching from Warning Part 1 to Warning Part 2, which are warnings about different issues such as preventing excessive engrossment and preventing physical accidents. As a result, it enables more effective customer waiting control.

Next, comparing the company name display 004SG302 in the first scene (company name), the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 in the fourth scene (warning 1), and the accident prevention display 004SG322 in the fourth scene (warning 2), we see that the background display 004SG301 for the company name in the company name display 004SG302 is achromatic (white), while the warning background display 004SG311 in the drowsiness prevention display 004SG312 is chromatic (light blue), the heading frame display 004SG314 is chromatic (dark blue), and the warning background display 004SG321 in the accident prevention display 004SG322 is achromatic (black).

Thus, by using different background colors for the text display in the first scene (company name) and the fourth scene (warning 1, warning 2), the visual distinction between the company name and the warnings increases attention when the display switches, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, while this embodiment illustrates a configuration where the background colors of the text displays for the company name background display 004SG301, the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 are all different, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. It is sufficient that the background color of at least one of the text displays among the warning background display 004SG311, the heading frame display 004SG314, and the warning background display 004SG321 differs from the background color of the text display for the company name background display 004SG301.

(Comparison of lighting patterns in each scene)
Next, based on Figure 41(B), we will compare the illumination patterns of the lamps in each scene during the demo movie display, referring to Figures 44 and 45.

<Synchronization with Text Animation Display> In Scene 1 (Company Name), Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), and Scene 4 (Warning 1), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the text animation display (fade-in display). However, in Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in conjunction with the character animation display (not synchronized with the text animation display).

<Emphasis Level> In Scene 1 (Company Name) and Scene 3 (Main Title Name, Subtitle Name), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "high" emphasis level. In Scene 2 (Machine Introduction 1-3), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "medium" emphasis level. In Scene 4 (Warning 1, 2), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) will illuminate with a "low" emphasis level.

"Emphasis" refers to the degree of emphasis in the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e). For example, flashing (blinking), i.e., when the interval between color changes in the luminance data is short, results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than wave lighting, where the interval between color changes in the luminance data is long. A larger number of lit lamps results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit lamps. A larger number of lit colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a smaller number of lit colors. A higher proportion of chromatic colors results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than a lower proportion of chromatic colors. Rainbow lighting results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than non-rainbow lighting. Higher luminance results in a higher emphasis (more emphasis) than lower luminance.

Specifically, referring to Figure 132 based on Figure 41(B), the emphasis level for the first scene (company name) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the second scene (model introductions 1-3) is "medium" because while there is a green flash, it is not linked to the text animation display. The emphasis level for the third scene (main model title, sub-model title) is "high" because a white flash is used in conjunction with the text animation display. The emphasis level for the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) is "low" because it is not linked to the text animation display.

In other words, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying a warning, and also higher when displaying the title than when displaying a warning. Furthermore, because the company name has more light changes linked to the animation than the model title, the intensity of the lights is higher when displaying the company name than when displaying the model title. Therefore, the order of intensity of the lights is: Company Name > Model Title (Main, Sub) > Warning.

Furthermore, since multiple panel lamps and frame lamps are provided in multiple locations, when comparing the degree of emphasis between the light emission of a first lamp (consisting of multiple lamps) and the light emission of a second lamp (consisting of multiple lamps), it is sufficient to compare the average light emission pattern of the entire first lamp with the average light emission pattern of the entire second lamp, rather than comparing the emphasis of a single first lamp with a single second lamp.

In the third scene of the <Rainbow> sequence (main title name, subtitle name), specifically in the "subtitle name" section (for example, Figures 45(P) to (V)), the panel lamps and frame lamps illuminate in a rainbow pattern. The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is the same rainbow luminance data table (common table described later (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used in the aforementioned step-up effect (see Figure 39(B)) and cut-in effect (see Figure 40(D)).

<Specific Light Emission> In the third scene (title name), only in the designated frames of the machine's subtitle name (for example, Figure 45(S), (U)), the panel lamps and frame lamps will emit a white flash (specific mode). The luminance data table used at this time (the sub-table described later) is a different luminance data table for subtitle 1 and subtitle 2 than the main title luminance data table used for the machine's main title name, and it emits a white flash (specific mode) in conjunction with the text animation display.

As shown in Figure 41(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 42) is used from the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), and in the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 42) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) is used in the first scene (corporate name). The brightness data table for Introduction 2 (a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 of the model introduction) includes brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the company name display 004SG302 shown in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), and does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (model introduction 2-2).

As described above, while the demo movie display includes multiple scenes where information is conveyed through text, the company name information is particularly important. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, it can be emphasized in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

As shown in Figure 41(B), in the second scene (model introduction 2-1), a different luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 42) is used, as is the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts). In the second scene (model introduction 2-2), the same luminance data table for introduction 2 (grandchild table corresponding to model introduction 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3 parts) (see Figure 42) as in the second scene (model introduction 2-1) is used, and the luminance data table for the main title (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the luminance data table for subtitle 1, and the luminance data for subtitle 2 are used. The tables (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the main title name display 004SG520A and the subtitle name displays 004SG520B and 004SG520C displayed in the third scene (main title name and subtitle name). The brightness data table for introduction 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3) does not include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511A indicating "The enemy is rampaging in the city!" in the second scene (introduction 2-1), nor does it include brightness data linked to the fade-in display (animation display) of the text display 004SG511B indicating "Protect the city from the enemy!" in the second scene (introduction 2-2).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie display where information is conveyed through text, we particularly want to convey the model name. By using brightness data linked to the display animation, we can emphasize it in comparison to other text displays, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) (see Figure 42) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) (see Figure 42). Similarly, the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title luminance data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 luminance data table, and subtitle 2 luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) (see Figure 42) is more emphasized (more emphasized) than the configuration of panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning luminance data table (grandchild tables corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts).

Specifically, the first scene (company name) has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. Similarly, the third scene (main title and subtitle of the device) also has a high level of emphasis because it uses a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display. However, the fourth scene (warning signs 1 and 2) does not use a white flash in conjunction with the text animation display, resulting in a low level of emphasis.

As described above, the demo movie display includes multiple scenes that convey information through text. To emphasize each piece of information—such as the company name, model title, and warnings—dedicated lighting can be used for each. Specifically, by emphasizing the lighting patterns in the scenes displaying the company name and model title compared to the warning scenes, these elements can be highlighted, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts), and the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), subtitle 1 brightness data table, and subtitle 2 brightness data table (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle 1 and 2 parts) are emphasized more than the modes in which the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are emphasized more than the modes in which the warning brightness data table (grandchild table corresponding to the warning 1 and warning 2 parts) are emphasized if they are (1) modes with frequent flashing, (2) modes with many illuminated colors, (3) modes with a large number of light-emitting means used, or (4) modes with high brightness. This allows for emphasis on the corporate name and model title, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the corporate brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) is emphasized more than the configuration of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) controlled using the main title brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to the main title part), the sub-title 1 brightness data table, and the sub-title 2 brightness data table (a sub-table corresponding to sub-title 1 and 2 parts). This allows for greater emphasis on the corporate name, making it easier for players to understand which company is associated with the gaming machine, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) while the demo movie is being displayed. When step-up effects (see Figure 39(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 40(D)) are executed, the Rainbow Brightness Data Table (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) is used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). The Rainbow Brightness Data Table used during the demo movie display (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle parts 1 and 2) and the Rainbow Brightness Data Table used when step-up effects (see Figure 39(B)) or cut-in effects (see Figure 40(D)) are executed (grandchild tables corresponding to the step-up and cut-in effects) are common Brightness Data Tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more visually appealing. Furthermore, by using the same brightness data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the brightness data table used for specific effects performed during gameplay (e.g., step-up effects and cut-in effects), the capacity is not increased, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the low-base state (normal state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle 1 and 2 parts), the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used during the demo movie execution period (second period) after the demo movie start waiting period (first period) following the end of gameplay in the high-base state (special state) (grandchild tables corresponding to the title part and subtitle 1 and 2 parts), and the luminance data table for the rainbow effect used when step-up effects (see Figure 39(B)) (specific effects) that can be executed in the low-base state (normal state) and cut-in effects (see Figure 40(D)) that can be executed in the high-base state (special state) are all common luminance data tables (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)).

In this way, by setting the illumination pattern to rainbow during the demonstration display, the demonstration display can be made more spectacular. Furthermore, by using the same luminance data table for setting the illumination pattern to rainbow as the luminance data table used for specific effects that can be executed in normal conditions and special effects that can be executed in special conditions, the capacity is not increased, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the step-up animation (see Figure 39(B)) (specific animation) that can be executed in the low base state (normal state) and the cut-in animation (see Figure 40(D)) that can be executed in the high base state (special state) are animations that definitively notify that the game is being controlled to a jackpot state. Since the brightness data table (common table (XD___L～_RAINBOW_01)) used for animations that definitively indicate control to a jackpot state is also used for demonstration displays, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved as a result.

Furthermore, the luminance data table for subtitle 1 and the luminance data table for subtitle 2 (grandchild tables corresponding to subtitle parts 1 and 2) are luminance data tables that use multiple luminance data to illuminate the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in a manner that is linked to the animation display of the model subtitle name display 004SG520B and 004SG520C.

In this way, the main title name and subtitle name are displayed in that order. Since the title name of the gaming machine is completed when the subtitle name is displayed, the title name of the gaming machine can be emphasized by illuminating the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) in conjunction with the subtitle name display animation, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 42, the multiple luminance data sets constituting the company name luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the company name part) are luminance data configured to illuminate the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means), the panel lamp, and the side lamp 9b (first light-emitting means). The multiple luminance data sets constituting the introduction luminance data table (a sub-table corresponding to the model introduction 1, model introduction 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, model introduction 3-1, and 3-2 parts) are luminance data configured to illuminate the side lamp 9b and the panel lamp, but not the main lamp 9a.

As described above, there are multiple scenes in which information is conveyed through text display. In the scene displaying the company name, both the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) and the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) are illuminated. In the scene introducing the model, the panel lamp and side lamps 9b (first light-emitting means) illuminate, but the main lamp 9a (second light-emitting means) does not. This relatively emphasizes the first scene in which the company name is displayed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, the first light-emitting means is described as the panel lamp and side lamp 9b, and the second light-emitting means as the main lamp 9a. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the frame lamps may be used as the second light-emitting means that does not emit light in the second scene, and at least one of the panel lamps may be used as the first light-emitting means.

Furthermore, as a variation, the CPU 120 for performance control may control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second scene's machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction 1 part), control the first light-emitting means (e.g., panel lamp) in the second machine introduction part using a brightness data table for introduction 2 (a grandchild table corresponding to machine introduction parts 2-1, 2-2, and 2-3), and control the second light-emitting means (e.g., frame lamp) in both machine introduction 1 and machine introduction 2 using a single brightness data table (a grandchild table).

As described above, while there are multiple scenes in the demo movie where information is conveyed through text display, in the scenes where the company name is displayed, both the first and second light-emitting means are set to emit light in a dedicated emission mode. In the parts 1 and 2 of the product introduction, the first light-emitting means emits light in a dedicated emission mode, while the second light-emitting means emits light in a common emission mode. This allows the scenes where the company name is displayed to be relatively emphasized, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control may, in the first part of the second scene's machine introduction, control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a single brightness data table for machine introduction 1 (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the corporate name part), the machine main title brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the main title part), the machine subtitle brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second subtitle parts), the warning 1 brightness data table, and the warning 2 brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first and second warning parts). In the second part of the second scene's machine introduction 2, the same single brightness data table (a grandchild table corresponding to the first part of machine introduction) may be used to control the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

As described above, there are multiple scenarios where information is conveyed through text displays. Since information such as company names, model titles, and warnings need to be emphasized, using dedicated illumination for each allows for greater emphasis compared to other text displays, ultimately enabling more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the company name display scene (10 seconds), and the execution duration of the machine introduction scene (including parts 1 and 2) is 30 seconds longer than the execution duration of the warning display scene (5 seconds). The company name and warning text may be displayed at times other than during the demo movie. By making the machine introduction scene and title display scene, which are only shown during the demo movie, longer and more prominent, a suitable customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, it is possible to display company names and warning text even when the demo movie is not playing. For example, the company name and warning text may be displayed during the ending period after the jackpot round ends, or the same text displayed during the demo movie may be displayed. In this case, the display time may be set shorter than during the demo movie to avoid disrupting the tempo of the jackpot and high base state.

(Lighting patterns of lamps corresponding to the game state)
Next, the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state will be explained based on Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a diagram showing the lamp illumination patterns corresponding to the game state. Figure 49 shows (A) a diagram indicating the arrangement of lamps in a pachinko game machine, and (B) a schematic diagram of (A).

As shown in Figure 48, the panel lamps and frame lamps on the pachinko game machine 1 are configured to illuminate in different ways depending on the state of the pachinko game machine 1, for example, when an initialization notification is issued due to a cold start, when it is controlled to a low base state, when it is controlled to a high base state, when a demo movie is displayed, and when an error notification (described later) is issued.

Specifically, during the initialization notification period, the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification) is used, and the panel lamp, main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, and button lamp 9e flash red.

In low-base mode, the standard background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b illuminate in a wave pattern with "blue" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e illuminates in "white."

In the low-probability, high-base state (time-saving state), the brightness data table for the time-saving background (lamp data table: background time-saving) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "green" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". Furthermore, in the high-probability, high-base state (probability variation state), the brightness data table for the probability variation background (lamp data table: background probability variation) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamp 9b light up in a wave pattern with "purple" as the main color, and the button lamp 9e lights up in "white". In the following, these brightness data tables for the time-saving background and the brightness data table for the probability variation background may be collectively referred to as the high-base background brightness data table (or high-B background brightness data table).

During the demonstration (demo movie display) period, a customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) is used. The panel lamps, main lamp 9a, and side lamps 9b change their illumination patterns with "white" as the primary color, while the button lamp 9e lights up in "white".

During the error notification period, an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) is used. The panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in a color corresponding to the state (low base state, high base state, demo effect), while the main lamp 9a flashes red and the button lamp 9e illuminates white.

Furthermore, the "main color" refers to the color that forms the base of the overall color scheme for each period. For example, it may be the color with the highest occupancy rate in terms of illumination time and illumination area (number of lamps) during each period. Other colors may also be emitted. Additionally, it may include multiple colors with different luminance, lightness, and saturation within a given hue. If the main color is "blue," then any similar shades of "blue" may be used.

For example, let's explain analogous colors based on Figure 135. Colors have three attributes: hue, lightness (luminance, brightness), and saturation (vividness). "Analogous colors" include: 1. Combinations of colors that are adjacent in hue and share the same tone (luminance, lightness, and saturation); 2. Combinations of colors with the same hue but different tones; and 3. Combinations of colors that differ only in lightness or saturation.

To explain the example of "1. Combinations of colors that are adjacent in hue and have the same tone (luminance and saturation)" based on Figures 135 (A) and (B), if we arrange the three primary colors of light—red (R) [F00], green (G) [0F0], and blue (B) [00F]—at 120-degree intervals in a color wheel of a predetermined number of colors (24 in this case), then each set of three colors will be non-analogous. Colors with a hue difference within a range of 30 to 60 degrees on this color wheel are considered "analogous," and are not limited to combinations of adjacent colors on the color wheel.

For example, if red (R) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) and a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to red (R). If green (G) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) and a 30-degree range towards yellow (Y) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to green (G). If blue (B) is the base color, colors within a 30-degree range towards cyan (C) and a 30-degree range towards magenta (M) (total 60 degrees) are considered analogous to blue (B). Therefore, even if the number of colors on the color wheel is less than 24 or more than 24, combinations of colors with a hue difference within a 30-60 degree range on the color wheel can be considered "analogous colors."

Furthermore, it is preferable that the same color family includes combinations of colors that fall under warm colors such as red and yellow, cool colors such as blue and purple, and neutral colors such as green and purple, which are intermediate between warm and cool colors.

As shown in Figure 49(A), the board lamps include the attacker lamp 9c built into the special variable prize ball device 7 located in the lower right of the game board 2, the movable lamp 9d built into the movable body 32 located at the top of the image display device 5, and the decorative lamp 9f built into the decorative body located on the left side of the image display device 5. Note that other lamps (for example, lamps built into prize devices) may also be included as long as they are provided on the game board 2.

Furthermore, the frame lamps include the main lamp 9a located at the top of the gaming machine frame 3, the side lamps 9b located on the left and right sides, and the button lamps 9e located on the push button 31B. Note that other lamps located on the gaming machine frame 3 (for example, lamps built into the ball-shooting handle 30, speakers 8L, and 8R) may also be included.

Furthermore, the attacker lamp 9c of the control panel is composed of multiple LEDs, the movable lamp 9d is composed of multiple LEDs, the decorative lamp 9f is composed of multiple LEDs, the main lamp 9a is composed of multiple LEDs, the side lamp 9b is composed of multiple LEDs, and the button lamp 9e is composed of multiple LEDs.

Furthermore, Figure 49(B) is a schematic diagram showing the arrangement of the various lamps shown in Figure 49(A). For convenience of explanation, the schematic diagram shown in Figure 49(B) may be used in subsequent explanations.

(Customer waiting demo performance begins, variation stopped version)
Next, the flow from when the variable display stops until the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 50 to 55 and Figure 136. Figure 50 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance is initiated after the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state has ended (A1) to (A8). Figure 51 shows the main parts of Figure 50 (A4) to (A5). Figure 52 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 53 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a low base state. Figure 54 shows an example of operation of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state (B1) to (B8). Figure 55 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 56 is a timing chart showing the flow of the customer waiting demo performance in a high base state. Figure 57 shows an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance begins after the pachinko game machine has started up with a cold start (power on with initialization). Figure 58 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a cold start until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 59 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start (power on without initialization) in a low base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 60 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a low base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 61 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state and the customer waiting demo performance begins. Figure 62 is a timing chart showing the sequence from when a pachinko machine starts up with a hot start in a high base state until the customer waiting demo performance begins.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of how the customer waiting demo sequence works when the game state is in a low base state, based on Figures 50 to 53.

As shown in Figures 50 and 52, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, if the execution of a pre-announcement effect or a reach effect has been decided (see Figure 50(A1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During the variable display, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin with a blue wave illumination based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate in white based on the default brightness data table. Additionally, the speakers 8L and 8R output the normal background BGM. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the illumination control and BGM output are adjusted according to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 50 (A2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start timer (120 seconds), marking the beginning of the first waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 50 (A3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 50 (A4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 50 (A5) to (A8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern is initiated to be primarily white, and the button lamps 9e continue to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding the button lamp 9e).

For details, as shown in Figure 51 (A4), during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the first background display 004SG081. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue in a wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the first background display 004SG081 switches to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) switches to the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from blue wave lighting to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 51 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of the losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out (see Figure 51 (A42)), the demo movie display begins (see Figure 51 (A5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, the CPU switches the brightness data table from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 52, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo performance start condition S1 was met, the fade-out display (switching display) of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns is started, and after the display screen whites out, the display of the company name display 004SG302 is started. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the normal background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the normal background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 50 (A5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, by switching the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before the fade-out display described above occurs, it is possible to prevent causing discomfort to the player (see Figures 51 (A31), (A32), and 52).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf for delaying the start of the demo movie display is approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 52, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the first background display 004SG081 and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), along with the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 50 (A4)). Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table, and light emission control is performed based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). The button lamps 9e are controlled based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 136).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 50 (A3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), as explained in Figure 51, the performance control CPU 120 switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the first background display 004SG081 during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the low base state (variable display shows stopped). During the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period, it displays a demo movie. During the first customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). During the second customer waiting period, it controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). Meanwhile, during both the first and second customer waiting periods, it controls the illumination of button lamps 9e using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), which is different from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the button lamp 9e in a fixed state, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

For details, as described above, when using the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are illuminated and flashed in conjunction with the display mode of the demo movie. For example, if button lamp 9e lights up when an operation prompt display encouraging the operation of push button 31B is shown during a performance introduction scene, there is a possibility that the player may misunderstand and perform unnecessary operations. Therefore, the button lamp 9e is kept in a fixed mode.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 53, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a low base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 52. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of the operation of the customer waiting demo when the game state is in a high base state, based on Figures 54 to 55.

As shown in Figures 54 and 55, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in the high base state, if the execution of a pre-announcement effect or a reach effect has been decided (see Figure 54(B1)), these effects will be executed (though not specifically shown in the illustrations). During the variable display, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden.

Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background high-broadcast (or lamp data table: background time-saving)) for probability variation (or time-saving), and the button lamp 9e continues to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Also, the background music for high-B backgrounds is output from speakers 8L and 8R. When a pre-announcement or reach animation is performed, a brightness data table for the pre-announcement or reach animation (a lamp data table corresponding to the pre-announcement or reach animation) is set, and the lighting control and background music output are performed in a manner appropriate to the animation.

Next, when the variable display ends and a losing combination of symbols (for example, "326") is displayed (see Figure 54 (B2)), the CPU 103 sends a demo waiting command, and the CPU 120 for performance control starts the demo movie start waiting timer (120 seconds), marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). The BGM output is stopped, but it may be configured to fade out after a predetermined time has elapsed since the end of the variable display.

If 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 54 (B3)). Once it moves to the right and animates to its designated position, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 54 (B4)).

After another 90 seconds have elapsed, and 120 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S1 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 54 (B5) to (B8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamp 9e continues to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

In order to start displaying the demo movie, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) displayed on the screen to display the demo movie for the demo performance. This allows the CPU to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

For details, during the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the display screen shows a combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) as the background of the third background display 004SG083. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a wave pattern of purple (or green) based on the high-B background brightness data table for probability variation (or time reduction) (lamp data table: background time reduction, or lamp data table: background probability variation).

Next, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, before the display switches from the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) to the demo movie display, the fade-out display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) begins, the transmittance of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG084) and the combination of losing confirmed symbols (decorative symbols) gradually increases, and the brightness data table for high B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the brightness data table for customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from purple or green wave lighting to a white-based illumination pattern (see Figures 51 (A41), (A42)). Then, after the transparency of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols) approaches 100% and the display screen whites out, the demo movie display begins (see Figure 54 (B5)).

In this manner, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG0833 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the end of gameplay in the high base state (the variable display shows a stopped display), and displays the demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the end of the first customer waiting period. Then, before switching the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance, the CPU switches the brightness data table for the high base state (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Therefore, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the demo movie display, the design allows users to focus on the changes rather than starting everything at once, making them aware of the start of the demo movie display, and ultimately enabling optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the start condition S1 for the demo performance is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the display of the demo movie. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command BF01, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the display of the demo movie. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command BF01 corresponding to the display of the demo movie, the display control unit 123 waits for a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) to elapse before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns displayed on the display screen to the display of the demo movie for the demo performance. Therefore, as shown in Figure 54, when a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the start condition S1 of the demo performance was met, the CPU 120 for performance control starts the fade-out display (switching display) of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern, and starts displaying the company name display 004SG302 after the display screen has whited out. In other words, when the demo performance start condition S1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to switch the display content from the high-base background display to a demo movie display that includes a fade-out display (switching display) of the high-base background display. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as a demo movie starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo start condition S1 was met.

Therefore, the demo movie display begins after a predetermined period tf has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the company name display 004SG302 (see Figure 54 (B5)) for the demo movie display begins after the predetermined period tf and the display switching period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the customer-waiting demo of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns switch to the demo movie display.

In this way, by switching the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) before the fade-out display described above occurs, it is possible to prevent causing discomfort to the player (see Figures 51 (A31), (A32), and 55).

In this embodiment, the predetermined period tf is set to approximately 0.3 seconds, but it may be longer than 0.3 seconds and can be varied in various ways. Furthermore, while a fade display was used as the switching display, other scene change displays may be used, or the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern may be maintained without using a fade display or similar.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, if 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display without the demo termination condition being met, the first demo movie display ends based on the determination that the demo performance termination condition E1 has been met. Then, the display screen shows the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the combination of losing symbols (decorative symbols), as well as the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402, and the second first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins (see Figure 50 (A4)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps switch from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the illumination control is performed based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), while the button lamps 9e are illuminated based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Thus, after the demo movie display ends due to the fulfillment of the demo performance termination condition E1, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeated for subsequent attempts until any of the demo performance termination conditions E2 to E4 are fulfilled. Furthermore, from the second attempt onward, based on the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns are displayed. Along with the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns, the animation display (frame-in display) of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begins. The demo movie display starts 30 seconds after the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) (see Figure 136).

Furthermore, the animation display (frame-in display) for the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 from the second time onward is the same as the animation display (frame-in display) for the first time (see Figure 54 (B3)).

Furthermore, when transitioning from the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) to the second customer waiting period (demo movie period), the performance control CPU 120 switches from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) before switching the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols displayed on the display screen to the demo movie display for the demo performance. It then starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) during the first customer waiting period (first period) after the game in the high base state has ended (the variable display shows a stopped display), displays a demo movie during the second customer waiting period (second period) after the first customer waiting period has ended, and controls the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the second customer waiting period. During the waiting period, the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is controlled using a brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration). Meanwhile, during the first and second customer waiting periods, the illumination of button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination), which is different from the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demonstration).

Thus, by switching the state of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B in response to the start of the demo movie display, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by keeping the state of the button lamp 9e constant, it is possible to prevent such misunderstandings and, as a result, enable optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, by maintaining a consistent configuration for the button lamp 9e in both the low-base and high-base states, it is possible to prevent misunderstandings in either state, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the background of the high probability B (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the brightness data table for the company corresponding to the first scene (grandchild table corresponding to the company name part) during the first scene of the second customer waiting period (for example, the first scene (company name), etc.), the brightness data table for introductions 1 to 3 corresponding to the second scene (machine introductions 1, 2-1 The control panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) are controlled using a sub-table corresponding to parts 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2. In the first scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit), which is different from the corporate brightness data table (sub-table corresponding to the corporate name part) and the brightness data tables for introductions 1-3 (sub-tables corresponding to parts 1, 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, 3-1, and 3-2). In the second scene during the second customer waiting period, button lamp 9e is controlled using the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Thus, by switching the mode of the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B, there is a possibility that the player may be misled into thinking that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B. Therefore, by maintaining a consistent mode, this misunderstanding can be prevented, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is different from the brightness data table used when the promotional animation (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking) is executed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. The brightness data constituting the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) exhibits less brightness variation than the brightness data constituting the promotional animation brightness data table (lamp data table: button white blinking, lamp data table: button red blinking).

By doing this, the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit) is composed of brightness data that is less emphasized than when the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the push button 31B is being prompted to be pressed, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the default brightness data table may be configured to consist of brightness data for turning off the button lamp 9e. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing they are being prompted to press the push button 31B, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, although the button lamp 9e corresponding to the push button 31B is provided on the gaming machine frame 3, it is managed separately from the other main lamps 9a and side lamps 9b provided on the gaming machine frame 3. This design prevents players from mistakenly believing that they are being prompted to operate the push button 31B, and as a result, allows for optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 52, in the low base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 50(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 55, in the high base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol has finished, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 54 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since the player may have left their seat after the demo movie display ends, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages a more suitable playing environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 56, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other reason in a high base state, the process of the demo movie display starting after the variable display ends is the same as when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 55. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 53, in the low base state, after the variable display of the second special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 50(A2)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while the first background display 004SG081 is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 56, in the high base state, after the variable display of the first special symbol ends due to an irregular win or the like, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and instead displays the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 54 (B2)), and then displays the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

In this way, even after the variable display of the first special symbol in both the low-base and high-base states has ended, and even after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display has ended, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, since there is a possibility that the player has left their seat after the demo movie display has ended, prompting for performance adjustments immediately after switching from the demo movie display to the background display encourages the player to play in a suitable gaming environment, resulting in effective customer waiting control.

<Cold Start>
Next, an example of operation when the customer waiting demo performance starts after the pachinko game machine 1 has been started up with a cold start (power-on with initialization) will be explained based on Figures 57 to 58.

As shown in Figures 57(C1) and 58, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started in a cold start, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B start to light up, and at the timing when the performance control CPU 120 receives a power-on specification command and a first game state background specification command from the CPU 103, the display of the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the initialization display 004SG610 starts in place of the startup preparation display 004SG600 (see Figure 57(C2)), and initial operation control such as confirmation operation of the movable body 32 starts (not shown). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin flashing red based on the initialization notification brightness data table (lamp data table: initialization notification), and the initialization notification sound starts outputting from speakers 8L and 8R. At the same time, the demo movie start waiting timer (60 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, after 10 seconds have elapsed since receiving the power-on command and the first game state background command, the initialization process is complete. The initialization display 004SG610 ends, and the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 57 (C3)). At this time, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden. Also, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light). Furthermore, the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R is stopped.

Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo ending condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 will appear in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 57 (C4)), move to the right to its designated position, and animate. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will appear in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 57 (C5)).

After another 30 seconds have elapsed, and 60 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S2 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 57 (C6) to (C9)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table.

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 50-52 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (Low Base State)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 59 to 60.

As shown in Figures 59 (D1) and 60, when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start in a low base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after the startup timing, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. At the same time, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the button lamps 9e begin to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. Also, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins to count, and the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) begins.

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the first game state background specification command from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the first background display 004SG081 begins (see Figure 59 (D2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 59 (D3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 59 (D4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this determination, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figures 59 (D5) to (D8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table. Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the illumination pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to illuminate white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lit).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 50-52 for the low-base state; therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

<Hot Start (High Base Condition)>
Next, an example of operation when the pachinko game machine 1 starts up with a hot start (power-on without initialization) in a low base state and then the customer waiting demo performance begins will be explained based on Figures 61 to 62.

As shown in Figures 61(E1) and 62, when the pachinko game machine 1 is started up with a hot start in a high base state, the image display device 5 starts displaying the startup preparation display 004SG600 from the startup timing. Three seconds after startup, the special symbol lamps constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B begin to light up. Simultaneously, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Button lamp 9e begins to light up in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white lighting), and the BGM output from speakers 8L and 8R stops. At the same time, the demo movie start waiting timer (90 seconds) begins, marking the start of the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period).

Next, two seconds after the CPU 120 for performance control receives the power outage recovery command and the second and third game state background specification commands from CPU 103, the startup preparation display 004SG600 on the image display device 5 ends, and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) begins (see Figure 61(E2)). At the same time, initial operation control, such as the confirmation operation of the movable body 32, begins (not shown). Next, if 30 seconds have elapsed since the demo movie start waiting timer began without the demo end condition being met, the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed in the frame from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 61(E3)), moves to the right to the predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 61(E4)).

After another 60 seconds have elapsed, and 90 seconds have passed since the demo movie start timer began without the demo end condition being met, it is determined that the demo performance start condition S3 has been met. Based on this, the customer-waiting demo performance begins, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are hidden on the display screen, the demo movie is displayed, and the second customer-waiting period (demo performance period) begins (see Figure 61 (E5) to (E8)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switch from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). Based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), control of the light emission pattern, primarily white, begins, and the button lamps 9e continue to light up white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white light).

Furthermore, the subsequent steps are the same as those shown in Figures 54-56 for the high-base state, therefore, detailed explanations of each step will be omitted.

As shown in Figures 60 and 62, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and then a hot start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance display) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) start to be displayed, but will instead display the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figures 59 (D2) and 61 (E2)), and will then display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the start timing of the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 58, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 and a cold start is performed, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 57 (C3)) without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup scenarios: a hot start (power on without initialization) and a cold start (power on with initialization). In either startup scenario, parlor staff can verify the display by checking the background display, demo movie display, and guidance display after power-on, thus improving the efficiency of the verification process. Furthermore, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, if a background display is shown, it will be the background display that also shows the guidance display. This allows for clear guidance regarding performance adjustments from the moment players start playing, providing them with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, after a hot start or cold start, the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, followed by the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 before the demo movie display begins. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the demo movie display may begin after the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed, without the display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 58 and 60, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a low base state, and then the power is restored, the performance control CPU 120 will display the first background display 004SG081 without displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figures 57(C3) and 59(D2)), and then display the demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 will be displayed at the start timing of the first background display 004SG081, while simultaneously displaying the first background display 004SG081.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 61, if a power outage occurs in the pachinko game machine 1 while it is in a high base state, and then the power is turned on, the performance control CPU 120 will not display the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 (guidance displays) related to performance adjustment at the timing when the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) begins, and will instead display the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 61 (D2)), and then will display a demo movie. After the demo movie display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed at the timing of the start of the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), while the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed.

Thus, before a gaming parlor opens, there are two possible startup states: a low base state and a high base state. To allow players to confirm which state the parlor is in, the system avoids displaying guidance messages in the background to avoid interference. If the background reappears afterward, it's highly likely the state has already been confirmed. Therefore, by displaying guidance messages from the moment the background display begins, when the parlor opens and welcomes players, the background display will show the guidance message. This allows for clear guidance regarding adjustments to the game's presentation from the start of play, providing players with a suitable gaming environment and ultimately enabling effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, after the variable display ends, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are not displayed, and the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed. After a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 are displayed with a specific animation (fade-in display), thereby displaying the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) The first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) are displayed superimposed on the first background display 004SG081 and the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). This is achieved by displaying the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 using the same animation (frame-in display) as the first menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402.

In this way, by not immediately displaying a guidance message after the variable display ends, it is possible to prevent unnecessary prompting of performance adjustments. Furthermore, by prompting performance adjustments immediately after the demo movie display ends and the display switches from the demo movie to the background, it is possible to encourage players to play in a suitable gaming environment. Additionally, by using the same animation as when the guidance message is displayed immediately after the demo movie display switches to the background, it is possible to appeal to players that the guidance message has been displayed without incurring additional costs, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In this embodiment, a frame-in display is used as an example for the animation display of the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction of movement, movement speed, display position, etc., are not limited to those described above. Furthermore, other forms of animation display, such as fade-in display, moving display, or zoom display, may also be used.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 52, 55, 60, 62, and 136, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power outage recovery command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via hot start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 90 seconds (third specific period tc4, tc5).

Thus, after the variable display ends, immediately displaying the demo movie could be inconvenient if the players haven't changed yet. Therefore, a longer duration of 120 seconds is set for TC1 and TC2. However, after a hot start, since it's not the players but the arcade staff present, a shorter duration of 90 seconds is set for TC4 and TC5. This allows the staff to quickly check the demo movie, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 52, 55, 58, and 136, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since the power-on specification command was received based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up in a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1 and tc2) is longer than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie display is shown immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer time, TC1 and TC2 = 120 seconds, is set. After a cold start (power-on with initialization), since this is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter time, TC3 = 60 seconds, is set so that the demo movie display is shown immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie display and become more familiar with the introduced machine, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 58, 60, 62, and 136, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc4) have elapsed since receiving a power restoration command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the low base state; displays a demo movie after 90 seconds (third specific period tc5) have elapsed since receiving a power restoration command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a hot start in the high base state; displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the low base state; and displays a demo movie after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) have elapsed since receiving a power-on command based on the pachinko machine 1 starting up via a cold start in the high base state. In this case, 90 seconds (the third specified period tc4, tc5) is a longer period than 60 seconds (the second specified period tc3).

Thus, a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial starting method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor. By ensuring that the demo movie is displayed immediately, parlor staff can quickly review the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine, resulting in more effective customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 52, 55, and 58, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a demo movie after 120 seconds (first specific period tc1) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the low base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) have elapsed since the demo movie display ended, displays the demo movie again after 120 seconds (first specific period tc2) have elapsed since the variable display ended in the high base state, displays the demo movie again after 30 seconds (a predetermined period) has elapsed since the demo movie display ended, and so on, in the low base state of the pachinko game machine 1 Based on the fact that the machine started up in a cold start state, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. Based on the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 started up in a cold start state in a high base state, a power-on command was received, and after 60 seconds (second specific period tc3) elapsed, a demo movie was displayed. After the demo movie display ended, 30 seconds (a predetermined period) elapsed, and the demo movie was displayed again. In this case, 120 seconds (first specific periods tc1, tc2) is a longer period than 60 seconds (third specific period tc3).

Thus, if the demo movie is displayed immediately after the variable display ends, it may be inconvenient as the players may not have changed yet. Therefore, a longer period of 120 seconds (first specific period tc1, tc2) is set. Since a cold start (power-on with initialization) is the initial start method required when a gaming machine is introduced to a gaming parlor, a shorter period of tc3 = 60 seconds is set so that the demo movie is displayed immediately. This allows the parlor staff to quickly check the demo movie and become more familiar with the installed machine. Furthermore, by ensuring that the demo movie is displayed once in all situations—after the variable display ends in a low base state, after the variation ends in a high base state, and after a cold start—and then the period until the demo movie is displayed again is consistent, the demo movie can be shown stably, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 60 and 62, after starting up via hot start, a startup preparation indicator 004SG600 is displayed to indicate that startup is in progress (see Figures 59(D1) and 61(E1)). At the timing associated with displaying this startup indicator, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). At the timing associated with displaying the startup preparation indicator 004SG600, the button lamps 9e are controlled using a default brightness data table (lamp data table: white button illumination).

In this way, by using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to illuminate the system even before the background display is shown, it is possible to confirm that the panel lamps and frame lamps are functioning correctly at the startup stage. Subsequently, the system can seamlessly transition to the illumination pattern for customer waiting, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(Time elapsed since the end of the demo performance while waiting for customers)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends due to the passage of time will be explained based on Figures 63 to 65. Figure 63 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 64 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a low base state. Figure 65 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends due to the passage of time in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo sequence ends after a certain amount of time has elapsed while the game is in a low-base state, based on Figures 63 and 64.

As shown in Figures 63 and 64, in the low-base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when the end condition E1 is met (i.e., 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display), the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6th hour) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is assumed to be met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 63(A), when the second warning part of the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is shown, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based emission pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the system switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 63(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 63(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 63(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, at which point the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 63(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background display, including the fade-out display (switching display). However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the normal background begins after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 63(C) and 64).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the CPU 120 for performance control. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the CPU 120 for performance control starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the normal background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative impression after the demo display ends, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period following the end of the variable display in the low base state, and using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) during the first customer waiting period following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state. Before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG081, it switches control from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background display.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of what happens when the customer waiting demo performance ends after a certain amount of time has passed while the game is in a high-base state, based on Figures 63 and 65.

As shown in Figures 63 and 65, in a high base state, if the first demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S5 was met, ends when the end condition E1 is met (i.e., 55 seconds have elapsed since the start of the demo movie display), the system transitions to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period). Subsequently, if 30 seconds (6th hour) have elapsed since the transition to the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period), the start condition S6 is assumed to be met, and the demo movie display starts again. From this point onward, the first customer waiting period (demo movie start waiting period) and the second customer waiting period (demo movie period) are repeatedly executed until the end conditions E2 to E4 of the demo movie display are met.

For details, as shown in Figure 63(A), when the second warning part of the fourth and final scene of the demo movie display is shown, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based emission pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, when the termination condition E1 for the first demo movie display is met, the brightness data table switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins (see Figure 63(B)).

Next, when a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E1 was met, a fade-out display (switching display) begins in which the accident prevention display 004SG322 of the warning part 2 of the fourth scene gradually changes to black and blends in with the black warning background display 004SG321 (see Figure 63(C)). Then, after the display screen turns black and blacks out, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen (see Figure 63(D)), moves to the right to a predetermined position and is displayed as an animation, and then the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 63(E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E1 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, regarding the display content, it starts switching control to switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), which includes a fade-out display (switching display), and the background display of decorative symbols. However, the display of the fade-out display (switching display) as the high-B music background starts after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E1 was met (see Figures 63(C) and 65).

In detail, when the termination condition E1 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the background display of the decorative symbols. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern background display after a predetermined period tg (tg1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the background display begins after a predetermined period tg has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) switched. In particular, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns begins after the predetermined period tg and the switching display period have elapsed. Therefore, visually, the illumination control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) for the high-B music background begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, and then starting the high-B background display, a gradual design is employed. This prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) using a brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) during the second customer waiting period after the first customer waiting period has ended following the end of the variable display in the high base state, and controls them using a brightness data table for high B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) during the first customer waiting period after the second customer waiting period has ended following the end of the second customer waiting period in the high base state, and then switches from demo movie display to third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082). Before switching the display, the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Similarly, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082), the system switches and controls from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) is switched first, followed by the start of the background display. This step-by-step design prevents a negative aftertaste at the end of the demo movie display, and furthermore, the state can be quickly communicated to the player through the lamp illumination pattern, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display starts based on the fulfillment of any of the start conditions S1 to S5, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display switched from the background to the demo movie display. Conversely, when the demo movie display ends based on the fulfillment of the end condition E1, the menu guidance display 004SG401 and the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 begin to be displayed when the display switches from the demo movie to the background display.

(End of demo performance while waiting for customers. Start of prize-winning version.)
Next, the flow when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a starting win will be explained based on Figures 66 to 71. Figure 66 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with a starting win in a low base state (A) to (E). Figure 67 shows details of the display modes in Figure 66 (A) to (G). Figure 68 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a low base state. Figure 69 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a low base state. Figure 70 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the second starting win in a high base state. Figure 71 is a timing chart showing the flow when the demo movie display ends with the first starting win in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
First, we will explain an example of how the game works when the game state is in a low base state and the customer waiting demo performance ends with the first start win, based on Figures 66 to 68.

As shown in Figures 66 to 68, in a low base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of the first start prize (start of variable display of the first special symbol) that occurred during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 66(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first start-up win occurs while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, and termination condition E2 is met, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 66(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 66(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from demo movie display to normal background (variable display) display and variable display of decorative symbols. However, the normal background display and variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figures 66(C) and 68).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display and the variable display of decorative patterns after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, as shown in Figure 67(A), when the first start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 67(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the first reserved display 004SG101 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Following this, a shift display begins, moving the first reserved display 004SG101 to the active display area 5F (see Figures 67(C) and (D)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 67(C) to 67(E), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the first hold display 004SG101, displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F—that is, until the hold display shift is complete. During this time, the scrolling display will not begin, and each character will perform a variation start action. A variation start action includes actions such as the character displayed in the character display unit 004SG052 moving its face or body or changing its expression on the base display unit 004SG054, which are different from scrolling displays.

Then, once the hold display shift display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling in the order of left, right, and center (see Figure 65(F)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high, and a fade-out display begins. The image transparency gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 65(G) and 68). Note that in the low base state (first performance mode), regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated, the display will be as shown in Figure 67.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination mode of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) has switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081 and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the demo (lamp data table: demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, extending over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the first start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 69, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a low base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in a low base state, as shown in Figure 68. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

<High base condition>
First, we will explain an example of the operation when the customer waiting demo performance ends with a second start win while the game state is in a high base state, based on Figure 70, with reference to Figures 66 and 137.

As shown in Figure 70, in a high base state, if the demo movie display, which started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E2, that is, the occurrence of a second start win (start of variable display of the second special symbol) during the demo movie, the demo movie display ends and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 66(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the second scene introduction part 1 of the demo movie is displayed, if a second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in purple (or green) waves (see Figure 66(B). In Figure 66(B), blue waves are lit). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins, and the variable display of the decorative symbols begins (see Figures 66(C) to (E)).

In other words, when the termination condition E2 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols. However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 66(C)).

More specifically, when the termination condition E2 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns, and after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the variable display of decorative patterns. Therefore, as shown in Figure 137(A), when the second start-up win occurs and termination condition E2 is met while the first part of the introduction of the second scene in the demo movie is being displayed, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the purple (or green) wave lighting of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begins. Meanwhile, the demo movie display is maintained and the variable display of the small symbols begins until a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met (see Figure 137(B)).

Next, after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E2 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and decorative symbols begins. Simultaneously, the second reserved display 004SG102 is displayed in the special symbol reserved memory display area 5U. Then, a shift display begins, moving the second reserved display 004SG102 to the active display area 5F (see Figure 137(C)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 137(C) to 137(D), the decorative symbols temporarily displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C will remain temporarily displayed in these areas until the second hold display 004SG102, displayed in the special symbol hold memory display area 5U, moves to the active display area 5F—that is, until the hold display shift is complete. However, in the high base state, the character variation start action is not executed (see Figure 38(B)).

Then, once the hold display shift display is complete, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C begin scrolling simultaneously on the left, right, and center (see Figure 137(E)). Once scrolling begins, the scrolling speed (movement speed) gradually increases in the order of low, medium, and high speed, and a fade-out display begins. The image transparency (transparency) gradually increases in proportion to the increase in display speed, reaching approximately 90% at high speed (see Figures 137(F) and (G)).

Furthermore, in the high base state (second and third performance modes), the appearance will be as shown in Figure 137 regardless of whether the variable display of the first or second special symbol is initiated.

Therefore, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the system switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the scrolling display of decorative patterns.

In other words, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state when the first start condition is met while the demo movie display is shown, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state. Furthermore, when the demo movie display is shown in the high base state and the second start condition is met, the CPU 120 controls the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state, before switching the display from the demo movie display to the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)).

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first in the high base state, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for a quick indication that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in both the low-base and high-base states, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) can quickly signal that the first or second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are positioned around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the second start condition has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 71, the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the first special symbol begins due to an irregular win or other event in a high base state is the same as the process by which the demo movie display ends when the variable display of the second special symbol begins in a high base state, as shown in Figure 70. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) by switching from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the first special symbol when a first start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown. Similarly, when a second start win occurs while the demo movie display is being shown, the CPU 120 switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) before switching from the demo movie display to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In this way, regardless of which type of starting prize win occurs, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the switching of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) allows for quick notification that a starting prize win has occurred and the demo movie display has finished, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%) that is higher than the first value. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, the CPU switches the display from the demo movie to the variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

In this way, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative patterns increases, it is possible to signal that a starting win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control displays a scrolling display of decorative symbols so that the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from a first value (e.g., 0%) to a second value (e.g., 90%), which is higher than the first value, when a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a low base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. When a first or second start win occurs while the demo movie is displayed in a high base state, the display switches from the demo movie to a variable display of decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, in both low-base and high-base states, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a first or second win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, even if the variable display of the small symbols begins upon the occurrence of the first or second starting win, the transparency of the decorative symbols will not change while the decorative symbols are performing their variation start action. Therefore, the display will switch from the demo movie to the background display for the variable display of the decorative symbols before the transparency of the decorative symbols changes from its initial value.

Furthermore, the CPU 120 for performance control, when a first starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the first special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%. Similarly, when a second starting win occurs while the demo movie is displayed, switches the display from the demo movie to a variable display of the decorative symbols corresponding to the second special symbol before the transparency of the decorative symbols reaches 90%.

Thus, regardless of whether a first or second start-up win occurs, by completing the switch from the demo movie display before the transparency of the decorative symbols increases, it is possible to signal that a start-up win has occurred and the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - steering wheel operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with steering wheel operation will be explained based on Figures 72 to 73. Figure 72 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 73 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with steering wheel operation in a low base state.

<Low base condition>
The following explanation describes an example of how the demo sequence ends when the player is operating the handle while the game is in a low-base state, based on Figures 72 and 73. Note that while the explanation below describes an example where the demo sequence ends when the player is operating the handle while the game is in a low-base state, the explanation for how it ends when the player is operating the handle while the game is in a high-base state is almost identical, with only the background display and lamp data changing to those for a high-base state; therefore, the explanation is omitted here.

As shown in Figures 72 and 73, in the low base state, if the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E3 is met, that is, when the display is terminated based on the handle operation, the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative pattern begins.

For details, as shown in Figure 72(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if steering wheel operation is detected and termination condition E3 is met, the system switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 72(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E3 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu guidance display 004SG401 is framed in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to a predetermined position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 72(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E3 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background (symbol stop) display. However, the normal background display and decorative symbols begin at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E3 was met (see Figures 72(C) and 73).

In detail, when the termination condition E3 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to specify the normal background display. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 begins controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background display. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background display, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background display after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the decorative patterns begin after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, this means that the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative patterns, and guidance displays.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects operation of the ball-hitting handle 30 while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the ball-hitting handle 30 has been operated and that the demo movie display has ended, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, extending over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E3 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

(End of customer waiting demo performance - Menu operation version)
Next, the process when the customer waiting demo performance ends with menu operation will be explained based on Figures 74 to 75. Figure 74 shows examples of operation when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state (A) to (C). Figure 75 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a low base state. Figure 76 is a timing chart showing the process when the demo movie display ends with menu operation in a high base state.

<Low base condition>
An example of how the game operates when the customer waiting demo sequence ends by opening the menu display while the game is in a low base state will be explained with reference to Figures 74 to 76.

As shown in Figures 74 and 75, in the low base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 was met, ends based on the meeting of the end condition E4, that is, the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 74(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the first part of the introduction to the second scene in the demo movie is displayed, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the system switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background), and the blue wave illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins (see Figure 74(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and decorative patterns begins, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 (see Figure 74(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. However, the normal background display and menu display 004SG410 start only after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 74(C) and 75).

In detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the performance control CPU 120 first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 sends an extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B10E, the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, after sending the extended command B10E corresponding to the normal background and menu display 004SG410, the display control unit 123 switches the demo movie display to the normal background and menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the first background display 004SG081 and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the normal background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the first background display 004SG081, decorative symbols, and menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the normal background display and menu guidance display 004SG401.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

<High base condition>
An example of the operation when the customer waiting demo sequence ends by opening the menu display while the game is in a high base state will be explained with reference to Figures 74 and 76.

As shown in Figures 74 and 76, in the high base state, when the demo movie display, which was started when any of the start conditions S1 to S6 is met, ends when the end condition E4 is met, that is, when the menu display 004SG410 is opened (hereinafter also referred to as the menu operation), the demo movie display ends and the display of the third background display 004SG083 (shown as the first background display 004SG081 in Figure 74) and decorative patterns begins, and the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of them. Note that the operation to open the menu display 004SG410 is defined as the operation of the push button 31B while the menu guidance display 004SG401 is displayed, but other operations such as the stick controller 31A may also be used.

For details, as shown in Figure 74(A), during the demo movie, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) illuminate in a white-based light pattern based on the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), while the button lamp 9e illuminates in white based on the default brightness data table (lamp data table: button white illumination).

Then, for example, when the introduction part 1 of the second scene in the demo movie display is shown, if a menu operation is detected and termination condition E4 is met, the brightness data table for the customer waiting demo (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) switches to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern (they are blue in Figure 74(B)). Next, when a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since termination condition E4 was met, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the decorative pattern begins. Simultaneously, the volume/brightness indicator 004SG402 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen. Furthermore, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) (see Figure 74(C)).

In other words, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control switches from the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e). At the same time, it starts switching control to change the display content from the demo movie display to the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082). However, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 start at least after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the termination condition E4 was met (see Figures 74(C) and 76).

In more detail, when the termination condition E4 is met, the CPU 120 for performance control first outputs a command to the display control unit 123 specifying the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Accordingly, the display control unit 123 transmits an extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 to the performance control CPU 120. Upon receiving the extended command B11D (or B121), the performance control CPU 120 starts controlling the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410. Meanwhile, the display control unit 123, after transmitting the extended command B11D (or B121) corresponding to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410, switches the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 after a predetermined period th (th1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed.

Therefore, the display of the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410 begins after a predetermined period th has elapsed since the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) have switched. Visually, the illumination control for the high-B background of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) begins before the demo movie display ends and the display switches to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In other words, when the CPU 120 for performance control detects an operation to display the menu display 004SG410 via the push button 31B while the demo movie display is shown, it switches from the brightness data table for customer-waiting demos (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) to the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) before switching the display from the demo display to the third background display 004SG083 (or second background display 004SG082) and the menu display 004SG410.

In this way, by switching the control of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) first, the system can quickly signal that the demo movie display has ended due to the operation of push button 31B to display the menu guidance display 004SG401, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

In particular, the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) are arranged around the display screen of the image display device 5, which displays the demo movie, and extend over a wider area than the display screen itself. This makes the change in illumination pattern easily noticeable to the player, allowing for quick notification that the termination condition E4 has been met and the demo movie display has ended.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an example was given in which a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) was applied as the brightness data table for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) for the menu. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a brightness data table with a different light emission pattern from the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) may be set as the brightness data table for the menu.

(End of customer waiting demo when the interruption condition is met)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie, if an interrupt condition is met, that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation) are met, or 1 (time elapsed) is met, it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out display or the like which would normally be displayed as a switching display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

More specifically, when the performance control CPU 120 is displaying a demo movie in a low base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the normal background display without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display. Similarly, when the demo movie is displaying in a high base state, if an interrupt condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start winning), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—it will switch from the demo movie display to the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) without displaying a fade-out or other transitional display.

Thus, by using a transition display to prevent the demo movie display from appearing abruptly when it ends due to the passage of time, and by using a transition display to make the demo movie display appear abrupt when it ends due to an interruption condition, the contrast between these events makes it particularly clear that the display ended abruptly, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the demo movie display is shown, if an interruption condition is met—that is, if any of termination conditions 2 (start win), 3 (handle operation), 4 (menu operation), or 1 (time elapsed) are met—the fade-out display that would normally be displayed as a switching display is not shown. Instead, the menu display 004SG410 is displayed in front of the first background display 004SG081 or the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) from the demo movie display. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When any of termination conditions E2 to E4 are met while the demo movie display is shown, the menu display 004SG410 may be displayed as a background display without showing a switching display.

(Customer waiting demo performance ends - Error occurred version)
Next, we will explain the case where an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance, based on Figures 77 to 80. Figure 77 is a timing chart showing an example of normal operation of the payout device upon winning a prize (A), and a timing chart showing an example of erroneous operation of the payout device upon winning a prize (B). Figure 78 is a diagram showing an example of operation when a ball failure error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance. Figure 79 is a diagram for explaining priority layers. Figure 80 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a low base state. Figure 81 is a diagram showing the flow when an error occurs during the customer waiting demo performance started in a high base state.

First, let's explain one of the errors: the ball failure error. The ball failure error occurs when the payout control unit operates the payout device 004SG031, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 fails to detect a game ball.

In detail, as shown in Figure 77(A), when the conditions for prize ball payout are met, such as when a prize is won, the payout device 004SG031 performs a payout operation (for example, the rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 5 balls), and the game balls are dispensed into the payout passage. If all 5 game balls are detected by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 after the payout operation has started, the CPU 103 considers the payout to have been successful and terminates the payout process. Therefore, the error display 004SG700 (see Figure 78(B)), consisting of a mark and the text "Ball failure error," will not be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the main lamp 9a will not flash in the error manner described later.

Next, as shown in Figure 77(B), when a payout operation (e.g., rotation of a sprocket (not shown)) is performed by the payout device 004SG031 to dispense a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 5 balls) in response to a winning combination, the CPU 103 determines whether the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls while there are undispensed balls (e.g., 3 of the 5 game balls are not detected) for a period of time equal to the first determination period tl (e.g., tl = 5 seconds). If the CPU determines that no game balls were detected during this first determination period tl, that is, that no game balls were detected while there were undispensed balls, then the payout was deemed unsuccessful. The CPU then continues a retry operation, repeatedly executing the payout operation to dispense 5 game balls and the game ball detection check within the first determination period tl until the number of undispensed game balls (e.g., 5 balls) is detected.

Furthermore, if five game balls are not detected even after the third retry operation during this retry period—that is, if the period during which no game balls are detected while undispensed balls exist continues for the second judgment period tm (for example, 15 seconds, including the first judgment period tl)—the CPU 103 determines that there may be a problem such as insufficient supply of game balls to the dispensing device 004SG031, a malfunction of the dispensing device 004SG031, or a ball jam in the dispensing passage. It then sends an error designation command indicating a ball shortage error and continues the retry operation.

Meanwhile, the CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving an error specification command, switches the main lamp 9a to a red flashing light for error notification, while maintaining the previous illumination pattern for the panel lamps and side lamps 9b. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (for example, tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error specification command, an error display 004SG700 (see Figure 78(B)) is displayed on the display screen to provide error notification.

Furthermore, after the CPU 103 sends an error specification command indicating a ball-out error, when it detects the first game ball through a retry operation, it sends an error specification command to the performance control CPU 120 indicating that the ball-out error has been cleared. In other words, even if there are two or more unpaid balls, when a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the first judgment period tl or the second judgment period tm has elapsed since the first game ball was detected through the retry operation, an error specification command indicating the clearing of the ball-out error is sent. This allows the error notification to be terminated quickly without waiting for all unpaid balls to be detected. Also, when a predetermined period tk (e.g., tk = 3 seconds) has elapsed since receiving the error clearing specification command, the error display 004SG700 is erased from the display screen, and the error notification is terminated.

Furthermore, if unpaid balls remain after sending the error specification command to clear the error, a retry operation will be initiated again. If the number of unpaid game balls is not detected even after the third retry operation has completed, an error specification command indicating a ball shortage error will be sent again, and the aforementioned error notification will be resumed by the performance control CPU 120.

<Low base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurred during the variable display of the first special symbol, which was started in a low base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figures 78 to 80.

As shown in Figures 78 to 80, when the variable display of the first special symbol begins in the low base state, the first background display 004SG081 is displayed in the background (see Figure 78(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a blue wave pattern based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and the button lamps 9e maintain white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 79, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set the error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 78(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 79, basically, the normal layer has a normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamps and frame lamps set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, etc.) set in the normal layer.

Next, as shown in Figure 78(C), after a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error occurred and the main lamp 9a switched to flashing red, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen.

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its designated position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 78(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b switches to the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), and control of the light emission pattern based on white begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 78(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 78(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 78(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 78(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a low base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol (initiated in a low base state) and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 78. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during variable display, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the notification of specific errors that occur during gameplay (e.g., a bulb failure error) is carried over and executed regardless of whether the background display or the demo movie is being shown, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

<High base condition>
Next, we will explain an example of operation when a bulb failure error that occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, which was started in a high base state, continues even after the demo movie display has started, based on Figure 81 and with reference to Figure 78.

As shown in Figure 81, in the high base state, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the third background display 004SG083 (or the second background display 004SG082) is displayed in the background (see Figure 78(A)). Furthermore, the panel lamps and frame lamps begin to light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern based on the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), and the button lamp 9e maintains a white illumination based on the default brightness data table.

Next, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives an error specification command indicating a bulb failure error during variable display, it continues to control the illumination of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) based on the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). However, for the main lamp 9a, as shown in Figure 79, it switches to red flashing illumination control in order to set error brightness data (lamp data table: error) as the brightness data corresponding to the main lamp 9a of the priority layer (see Figure 78(B)).

Here, as shown in Figure 79, basically, the normal layer has a high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) corresponding to the panel lamp and frame lamp set according to the state. On the other hand, the priority layer, which takes precedence over the normal layer, has an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) set when an error occurs as described above. Then, by using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) preferentially over the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer to output brightness data to the LED driver, the main lamp 9a will blink red. During this time, the performance control CPU 120 continues to update the timer value without stopping the timing of the light emission control using the brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) set in the normal layer.

Next, after a bulb failure error occurs and the main lamp 9a switches to flashing red, a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) elapses. Then, the error display 004SG700 is displayed on the priority display layer in front of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen (see Figure 78(C)).

Subsequently, when the variable display ends and the decorative symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the menu guidance display 004SG401 appears frame-in from the lower left edge of the display screen, moves to the right to its designated position, and is displayed as an animation. Then, the volume/brightness guidance display 004SG402 appears in the lower left corner of the display screen (see Figure 78(D)). During this time, the error display 004SG700 and the red flashing of the main lamp 9a continue.

Furthermore, when the demo movie display start condition S1 is met, the high-B background brightness data table corresponding to the panel lamp and side lamp 9b (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) switches to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and control of the light emission pattern based on white begins. Even after the demo movie display starts, the error display 004SG700 and the red blinking of the main lamp 9a continue (see Figure 78(E)). Subsequently, the demo movie display starts after a predetermined period tf (tf1 = 0.3 seconds) has elapsed since the demo movie display start condition S1 was met (see Figure 78(F)).

Subsequently, when the bulb failure error is cleared at a predetermined timing during the demo movie display, the main lamp 9a switches to light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) in the normal layer. As a result, the main lamp 9a also begins light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) corresponding to the demo movie display (see Figure 78(G)). At this time, since the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) was also performed in the normal layer, it is possible to start the light emission control based on the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) from a predetermined point in the demo movie display. Furthermore, when a predetermined period tk (tk1 = 3 seconds) has elapsed since the bulb failure error was cleared, the error display 004SG700 is erased (see Figure 78(G)).

Furthermore, although not illustrated in detail, the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol (initiated by an irregular win, etc.) in a high base state and continues after the demo movie display begins is similar to the process when a bulb failure error occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol (initiated in a high base state) and continues after the demo movie display begins, as shown in Figure 81. Therefore, a detailed explanation is omitted here.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol in a low base state, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol in a high base state, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using an error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Subsequently, if the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU 120 continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for bulb failure errors that occur during variable display, regardless of whether the display is low-base or high-base, is carried over and executed during background display and demo movie display, stable bulb failure error notification can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the first special symbol, the CPU 120 for performance control controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If a bulb failure error (specific error) occurs during the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) corresponding to the bulb failure error. If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the first customer waiting period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If the bulb failure error is not resolved during the second period, the CPU continues to control the main lamp 9a using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error).

In this way, by ensuring that the lamp notification for specific errors occurring during the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol is carried over and executed during both background display and demo movie display, stable notification of bulb failure errors can be achieved, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstrations (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error). Specifically, white is the dominant color in the luminance data table for customer waiting demonstrations, while red is the dominant color in the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the main color in the luminance data to differ between the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, blue is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background), while red is the dominant color in the luminance data that constitutes the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 48).

By configuring the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the dominant colors differ between the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error), and also between the luminance data constituting the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) is blue, while the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 48). Furthermore, the dominant colors in the luminance data constituting the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) are green (for time reduction) or purple (for probability change), while the dominant color in the luminance data constituting the error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) is red (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) to use different main colors in the brightness data, and by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) to use different main colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the background display, regardless of which background is being displayed. As a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: shortened background, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 48).

By configuring the luminance data for errors (lamp data table: error) and the luminance data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to use different primary colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during the demo movie display, thereby enabling optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during background display, if no bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) have different proportions of colors (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to use different primary colors in the brightness data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

In this embodiment, an example was given in which, when an error notification is performed, the light emission control is performed by flashing red light based on an error brightness data table set in the priority layer. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when an error notification is performed, the light emission control may be performed based on dedicated error brightness data (grandchild data) that causes a dedicated error notification lamp to flash red.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error is announced, the main lamp 9a of the frame lamps is used to control the illumination for the error announcement. Since the error lamp is illuminated to alert the arcade staff, the main lamp 9a is positioned at the highest point of the frame lamps, where it is not obscured by the player and is most easily noticed by the staff. However, side lamps 9b or other lamps may also be used.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has ended, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). Furthermore, the system controls the side lamps 9b and panel lamps. If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the colors that occupy a larger proportion differ between the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the luminance data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, and by configuring the luminance data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and error luminance data table (lamp data table: error) to use different main colors in the luminance data, it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the light emission pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data used in the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are configured to produce different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) that are visible to the player. Specifically, the luminance data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) uses a white-based illumination pattern, while the luminance data table for errors (lamp data table: error) uses a red flashing pattern (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the brightness data table for customer waiting demos (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and the panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The brightness data constituting the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the brightness data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to result in different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave pattern, the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave pattern, while the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking pattern (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the movement of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the luminance data for the normal background (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Similarly, the luminance data for the high-B background (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the luminance data for the error background (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) visible to the player. Specifically, the normal background luminance data table (lamp data table: normal background) uses a blue wave illumination, the high-B background luminance data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) uses a purple (or green) wave illumination, and the error background luminance data table (lamp data table: error) uses a red flashing light (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). In addition, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and if no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), and if a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), and the luminance data constituting the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the luminance data constituting the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) are configured to produce different illumination patterns for the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) that the player can see. Specifically, the brightness data table for normal backgrounds (lamp data table: normal background) displays a blue wave pattern, the brightness data table for high-B backgrounds (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)) displays a purple (or green) wave pattern, and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) displays a red blinking pattern (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the system to show different behaviors of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) to the player using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high-B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, resulting in optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, the brightness data table for the customer-waiting demo (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo) and the brightness data table for errors (lamp data table: error) are configured to have different illumination patterns for the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and the side lamps 9b, as seen by the player. Specifically, in the customer-waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer-waiting demo), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamps 9e) illuminate in a white-based illumination pattern, while in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b illuminate in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo), it is possible to indicate that an error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during the demo movie display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the lighting patterns of the main lamp 9a, the panel lamps, and side lamps 9b, as seen by the player, are configured to differ between the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced time background, lamp data table: probability variation background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in blue wave, green wave, or purple wave patterns. In the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a flashes red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in patterns corresponding to the state (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: probability change background), it is possible to indicate that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, if no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background). If a bulb failure error occurs during background display in the low base state, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the low base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during background display in the high base state, the main lamp 9a and side lamps 9b and panel lamps are controlled using the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability variation (or lamp data table: background time reduction)). If a bulb failure error occurs, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). If no bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a, side lamps 9b, and panel lamps are controlled using the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo). If a bulb failure error occurs during the demo movie display period after the variable display in the high base state has finished, the main lamp 9a is controlled using the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). The luminance operation patterns of the main lamp 9a and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b as seen by the player are different for the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)) and the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error). Specifically, in the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) light up in a blue wave pattern; in the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: probability variation background (or lamp data table: reduced time background)), they light up in a purple (or green) wave pattern; and in the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error), the main lamp 9a blinks red, and the panel lamps and side lamps 9b light up in a pattern corresponding to the state (see Figure 48).

In this way, by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the normal background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background), and by configuring the operation of the panel lamps and frame lamps (excluding button lamp 9e) shown to the player to differ between the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) and the high B background brightness data table (lamp data table: background probability change (or lamp data table: background time reduction)), it is possible to suggest that a bulb failure error has occurred based on the illumination pattern during background display, and as a result, appropriate customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned light emission patterns refer to light emission patterns that allow the player to perceive some kind of movement. These include, for example, flashing (alternating between on and off) and flickering (haze) (a pattern involving changes in brightness, such as a change from RGB: 700 to RGB: 400). On/off states without changes in brightness are not included in the light emission patterns. For example, in the case of flickering (haze), it is preferable that the brightness of the specific light emission means differs from the previous brightness data, assuming that the second brightness data is used after the first brightness data. For example, during the first brightness data xms, a specific light emission means is set to the first brightness (RGB is 100) (or the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors constitutes the first combination), and during the second brightness data yms, a specific light emission means is set to the second brightness (RGB is A00) (or the combination of brightness values for the first, second, and third colors constitutes the second combination)...

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the second customer waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination patterns of the panel lamps and frame lamps are switched to an illumination pattern corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any unnaturalness, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met, but the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect any game balls, resulting in undispensed game balls, a ball shortage error occurs. When a ball shortage error occurs during the first waiting period, the CPU 120 for performance control, regardless of whether the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031 (dispensing unit) exceeds the number of undispensed balls or whether the number of game balls supplied does not exceed the number of undispensed balls, switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background, lamp data table: increased background probability) at a timing related to the detection of the first (1st) game ball supplied by the game ball detection sensor 004SG032, and controls the panel lamps and frame lamps.

In this way, regardless of the number of game balls supplied to the dispensing device 004SG031, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detects the first game ball, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is switched to an illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, standardizes the processing, and as a result enables optimal customer waiting control.

Furthermore, during the second customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 has not detected any game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball failure error occurs during the second customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the customer waiting demo brightness data table (lamp data table: customer waiting demo) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the demo movie display. This allows the demo movie to be displayed without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

Furthermore, during the first customer waiting period, if the conditions for dispensing game balls are met and the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect game balls for the duration of the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl), the system switches from the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps. Also, if a ball failure error occurs during the first customer waiting period, and a specific period (e.g., 1 second) shorter than the second judgment period tm (or first judgment period tl) has elapsed since the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 detected a game ball, the system switches from the error brightness data table (lamp data table: error) to the background brightness data table (lamp data table: normal background, lamp data table: reduced background time, lamp data table: increased background probability) to control the panel lamps and frame lamps.

Thus, when the game ball detection sensor 004SG032 does not detect a ball, there is a possibility of a ball failure error, but there is also a possibility of ball delay, etc. Therefore, instead of immediately switching the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp, when a game ball is detected, the illumination mode of the panel lamp and frame lamp is immediately switched to the illumination mode corresponding to the background display. This allows the background display to be shown without any sense of incongruity, and as a result, optimal customer waiting control can be achieved.

[Mechanism of output to LED driver (lamp driver)]
Figure 82 is a diagram illustrating the mechanism of output to the LED driver. In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 mounted on the performance control board 12 outputs brightness data to the LED driver (also referred to as the lamp driver) to turn on/flash/turn off one or more of the LEDs included in the game effect lamp 9. Hereafter, the control of turning on/flashing/turning off of lamps such as LEDs performed by the performance control CPU 120 will also be referred to as lamp control. Based on the brightness data received from the performance control CPU 120, the LED driver adjusts the current flowing to each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 that is the target of lamp control in order to turn on/flash/turn off each lamp. Each game effect lamp 9 turns on/flashes/turns off based on the current adjusted by the LED driver.

More specifically, the ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a lamp data table containing brightness data for controlling each game effect lamp 9. The lamp data table includes an error lamp data table used when an error occurs, an SP reach lamp data table used during a super reach, and a background lamp data table.

Furthermore, the background lamp data table includes a normal background lamp data table used in the normal state (normal background shown in Figure 90), a fanfare background lamp data table used in the fanfare state where a fanfare effect is performed, a jackpot background lamp data table used during rounds in the jackpot game state, an ending background lamp data table used in the ending state where an ending effect is performed to announce the end of the jackpot game state, a probability variation background lamp data table used in the probability variation state (probability variation background shown in Figure 90), a time-saving background lamp data table used in the time-saving state (time-saving background shown in Figure 90), and a waiting customer lamp data table used in the waiting customer state (waiting customer demo shown in Figure 90).

Each of the background lamp data tables described above is used without overlap. Depending on which of the multiple game states—normal state, fanfare state, jackpot state, ending state, probability variation state, time reduction state, and waiting state—is being controlled, one of the background lamp data tables is used. In other words, the performance control CPU 120 uses one of the background lamp data tables for each game state being controlled and outputs brightness data based on that background lamp data table to the LED driver. As a result, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled according to the game state being controlled.

Furthermore, a priority order is defined for the use of each of the error lamp data tables: the SP reach lamp data table, and the background lamp data table. Specifically, as shown in Figure 82, the priority order for use is highest for the error lamp data table, followed by the SP reach lamp data table, and then the background lamp data table.

For example, when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in the normal state and the game progresses to a super reach performance, it prioritizes using the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance over the normal background lamp data table and outputs brightness data to the LED driver based on the SP reach lamp data table. As a result, when the game effect lamps 9 are controlled in a manner corresponding to the normal state based on the normal background lamp data table and the game progresses to a super reach performance, lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the background lamp data table, while lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the super reach performance based on the SP reach lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the SP Reach lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table is not output to the LED driver. After the Super Reach performance ends and the system returns to the normal state, brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table is output to the LED driver. Also, after the Super Reach performance ends and a jackpot is achieved, resulting in the fanfare state, brightness data based on the fanfare background lamp data table is output to the LED driver, and all lamps are controlled in accordance with the fanfare background lamp data table.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the game state being controlled using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the background lamp data table corresponding to the game state being controlled. However, when the game progresses to a super reach effect, the CPU 120 uses the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach effect, prioritizing it over the background lamp data table, to output brightness data to the LED driver. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the time measurement for lamp control using the background lamp data table. In other words, even while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamp 9 based on the SP reach lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data included in the background lamp data table. However, because the brightness data included in the background lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data included in the SP reach lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data included in the background lamp data table to the LED driver. Then, after the Super Reach animation ends, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. For the game effect lamps 9 that do not have brightness data set based on the SP Reach lamp data table, the CPU continues to output brightness data from the background lamp data table to the LED driver.

Furthermore, for example, if an error occurs when the CPU 120 for performance control is outputting brightness data based on the normal background lamp data table in a normal state, or when it is outputting brightness data based on the SP reach lamp data table during a super reach performance, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table. However, for the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set, the error lamp data table corresponding to the error will be used preferentially over the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table, and brightness data will be output to the LED driver based on the error lamp data table. As a result, the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set will be controlled in a manner based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table, while the lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has been set will be controlled in a manner corresponding to the error based on the error lamp data table. Furthermore, during the period when brightness data based on the error lamp data table is output to the LED driver, for lamps where brightness data based on the error lamp data table is set, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will not be output to the LED driver. Once the error is cleared and the game returns to the normal state or the state during a Super Reach animation, brightness data based on the background lamp data table or the SP reach lamp data table will be output to the LED driver.

More specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control measures the time for lamp control corresponding to the normal state and the lamp control corresponding to the super reach performance during control using a timer, and outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the normal background lamp data table corresponding to the normal state and the SP reach lamp data table corresponding to the super reach performance. However, if an error occurs, it outputs brightness data to the LED driver using the error lamp data table corresponding to that error, with priority given to the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. During this time, the CPU 120 for performance control continues to update the timer value without stopping the measurement of the time for lamp control using the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. In other words, while the CPU 120 for performance control is controlling the game effect lamps 9 based on the error lamp data table, it continues to update the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table. However, because the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table has a lower priority than the brightness data contained in the error lamp data table, the CPU 120 does not output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver. After the error is cleared, the CPU 120 for performance control begins outputting the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver again, starting from where it left off updating the brightness data. Note that for game effect lamps 9 for which brightness data based on the error lamp data table has not been set, the CPU 120 continues to output the brightness data contained in the background lamp data table and the SP reach lamp data table to the LED driver.

[How the game effect lamp lights up]
In this embodiment, each game effect lamp 9 is controlled by the output of brightness data to the LED driver by the CPU 120 for performance control as described above. In this embodiment, terms such as "off,""partiallyoff,""on," and "flashing" are used to describe the lighting of each game effect lamp 9. As mentioned above, the states of each game effect lamp 9 when "on" or "flashing" are also referred to as "lighting states."

The term "off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is not lit and its brightness is 0. The term "partially off" includes the state in which the game effect lamp 9 is lit but its brightness is extremely low (for example, brightness "1" as described later).

For example, if the RGB (Red, Green, Blue) data defined as the luminance data is "000", the corresponding LED will be "off". Also, if the luminance data (RGB data) is "111", the corresponding LED will light up white at extremely low brightness. In this embodiment, the state of an LED with such RGB data as "111" may be referred to as "almost off" for convenience.

The term "illuminated" includes three states: constant illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 is always lit), wave illumination (where multiple lamps within the game effect lamp 9 switch from off to lit in sequence), and hazy illumination (where the game effect lamp 9 dimly illuminates while its brightness changes). Specifically, "illuminated" includes the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 when the brightness data is one of the values from "2" to "F". The brightness data is a hexadecimal value that can be specified from "0" to "F," where "0" represents no brightness, "1" represents the lowest brightness, and "F" represents the highest brightness.

The term "flashing" includes modes of operation other than the "off" and "on" states described above, where the brightness of each lamp alternates between a first brightness and a second brightness that is higher than the first brightness. For example, "flashing" includes repeatedly switching between on and off or partially off. Specifically, "flashing" includes switching between a brightness data value of "2" to "F" and a brightness data value of "0" or "1" over time. As described above, in this embodiment, there is a "hazy illumination" mode for the lamps. However, hazy illumination is a state where the game effect lamps 9 are dimly lit while changing brightness, whereas flashing differs in that all the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 repeatedly switch between on and off or partially off.

[Explanation regarding the game effect indicator lights]
Next, the lamp control of the game effect lamp 9 will be explained with reference to Figures 83 to 89.

[Regarding lamp control of game effect lamps using lamp data tables]
The CPU 120 for performance control uses the lamp data table stored in the ROM 121 to control one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 by turning them on, blinking, or turning them off.

Specifically, the display control unit 123 sets the sub-variation time according to the variation pattern command transmitted from the CPU 103 mounted on the main board 11. The sub-variation time is a counter that decrements by 1 for each frame (33 ms) of the displayed image. When the sub-variation time reaches the timing to start displaying each part, the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image display device 5 based on the image data (video data, animation data) stored in the ROM 121. The display control unit 123 sets an extended command (for example, extended command BXXX, where "X" is an arbitrary value (0 to F)) corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) to be displayed on the image display device 5, according to the display control it is performing, and transmits this extended command to the performance control CPU 120. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table corresponding to the performance display (performance scene) controlled by the display control unit 123.

Figure 83 illustrates an example of lamp control using a lamp data table. As shown in Figure 83, for example, when the display control unit 123 performs a predetermined display control, it sends an extended command (BXXX) to the performance control CPU 120 to specify the display control. Based on the extended command received from the display control unit 123, the performance control CPU 120 identifies the address of the parent table (XXX (parent)) corresponding to the predetermined display control.

The parent table stores information specifying which lamps (lit or unlit) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are subject to lamp control, information specifying the child table referenced during lamp control corresponding to the lamps subject to lamp control, and information specifying the maximum time for which lamp control is performed. Note that the parent table only stores information about the lamps subject to lamp control; information about lamps not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the parent table shown in Figure 85, side lamp 9b is specified as the target of lamp control. Furthermore, a child table: XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX is specified corresponding to side lamp 9, and the maximum time for lamp control by this child table is specified as 600,000 ms (600,000/10). Note that for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which corresponding information is not stored in the parent table (in Figure 85, main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the parent table that was last set previously will continue.

As shown in Figure 83, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a lamp specified in the parent table using the specified child table, for example, if the maximum time is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it decrements a counter by 1 every 10 ms to measure this 600,000 ms (10 minutes). In other words, the performance control CPU 120 measures 600,000 ms (10 minutes) by executing the counter decrementing process 60,000 times. The performance control CPU 120 controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table until it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes). Furthermore, if the performance control CPU 120 receives another extended command after receiving an extended command but before it has measured the maximum of 600,000 ms (10 minutes), it stops the currently running lamp control and controls the target lamp using the child table specified by the parent table specified by the newly received extended command. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, the maximum time for lamp control via the child table is set to 600,000 ms, significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene). Therefore, even if the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive the next extended command for any reason, it can continue the lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes).

The child table stores information specifying the sub-table to be referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time of each lamp control, for each lamp (lit location) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that are subject to lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the child table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the child table shown in Figure 86, corresponding to the side lamp 9b (XD_J_LWU_1_BXXX), the following are specified in the order in which the lamp control by these grandchild tables is executed: grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_1 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 500 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_3 with an execution time of 230 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table, and grandchild table XD___LWU_1_BXXX_2 with an execution time of 600,000 ms for lamp control by this grandchild table. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for the game effect lamps 9 for which no corresponding information is stored (in Figure 86, this includes the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e), the lamp control continues based on the information from the most recently set sub-table.

As shown in Figure 83, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp using a grandchild table specified by a child table, it first controls the target lamp using the first specified grandchild table, measures the execution time corresponding to this grandchild table, and then controls the target lamp using the next specified grandchild table. This process is performed for all specified grandchild tables in the specified order. For example, with the child table shown in Figure 86, for the side lamp 9b, it first controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 500 ms is measured, then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 until 230 ms is measured, and then controls the lamp using grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 until 600000 ms is measured. While it's not anticipated that a performance display (performance scene) would require 600,000 ms, by setting the maximum time for lamp control via the last specified grandchild table to 600,000 ms—significantly longer than the time required for a performance display (performance scene)—the performance control CPU 120 can continue the ongoing lamp control for up to 600,000 ms (10 minutes) even if it fails to receive the next extended command for any reason.

Furthermore, in the child table, when the side lamps 9b are to be controlled, there are cases where one grandchild table, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1, is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, as shown in Figure 87, or where two grandchild tables, XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 and XD___LWU_2_XXX_1, are specified, although these are not shown. When one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses this one grandchild table to perform the same lamp control for both the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b. On the other hand, when two grandchild tables are specified as the grandchild tables corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the CPU 120 for performance control uses one of the two grandchild tables to control the left side lamp 9b and the other grandchild table to control the right side lamp 9b. Therefore, if one grandchild table is specified as the grandchild table corresponding to the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, common lamp control is performed for both the left and right side lamps 9b. However, if two grandchild tables are specified, individual lamp control is performed for the left and right side lamps 9b.

The sub-table stores, for each lamp (the illuminated area) among the various lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 that are subject to lamp control, the brightness data referenced during lamp control and information specifying the execution time of the lamp control, in the order in which each lamp control is executed. Note that the sub-table only stores information about lamps that are subject to lamp control; information about lamps that are not subject to lamp control is not stored.

For example, in the grandchild table shown in Figure 87, corresponding to side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1), the brightness data is: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000, execution time for lamp control using this brightness data: 100 ms, brightness data: 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The following are specified as the order in which lamp control based on brightness data is executed: 0x000, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 120 ms, brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, execution time for lamp control based on this brightness data: 40 ms. Furthermore, in the sub-table, for lamps among the game effect lamps 9 for which corresponding information is not stored (in Figure 87, main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, button lamp 9e), lamp control based on the information in the last previously set sub-table continues.

In the luminance data for the left and right side lamps 9b (XD___LWU_1_XXX_1) of the sub-table shown in Figures 85 to 87, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b. Furthermore, the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 represent the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 represent the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8 represent the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last four to six digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 represent the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10 represent the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b; and the last three digits of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 11 represent the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on both side lamps 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, when separate sub-tables are specified for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, in the luminance data for the left side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_1_~), the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the first lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB values of the second lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the values of the third lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB values of the fourth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b, and the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 are on the left side The RGB values of the fifth lamp from the top on side lamp 9b are shown, and the last three digits of the data corresponding to the 5th and 6th lamps indicate the RGB values of the sixth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the seventh lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 7th and 8th lamps indicate the RGB values of the eighth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last four to six digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 9th and 10th lamps indicate the RGB values of the tenth lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. The last three digits of the data corresponding to the 11th lamp indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the left side lamp 9b. This indicates the RGB value of the 11th lamp from the top of lamp b. In the luminance data for the right side lamp 9b (XD___LWU_2_~), the 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 1st lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the 2nd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the 3rd lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 1st to 3rd digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the 4th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The 4th to 6th digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6 indicate the RGB value of the 5th lamp from the top of the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 5 and 6, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 6th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 7th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 7 and 8, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 8th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the fourth to the sixth digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 9th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to numbers 9 and 10, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 10th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b. The values of the data corresponding to number 11, from the first to the third digits from the bottom, indicate the RGB values of the 11th lamp from the top on the right side lamp 9b.

Furthermore, although not specifically illustrated, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LMAIN_~) specifying the main lamp 9a, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom indicate the RGB value of the main lamp 9a. Also, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LLOGO_~) specifying the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, the values in the fourth to sixth digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the second lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d, and the values in the first to third digits from the bottom of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of the movable lamp 9d. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LSLMP_~) that specifies decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 4th to 6th digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f, and the values from the 1st to 3rd digits of the data corresponding to number 5 indicate the RGB value of the fifth lamp from the top of decorative lamp 9f. Furthermore, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LATAK_~) specifying attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the first lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 1 and 2 indicate the RGB value of the second lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, the values from the fourth to sixth digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the value of the third lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c, and the values from the first to third digits of the data corresponding to numbers 3 and 4 indicate the RGB value of the fourth lamp from the left of attacker lamp 9c. Additionally, in the luminance data of the sub-table (XD___LPUSH_~) specifying button lamp 9e, the values from the first to third digits of the data indicate the RGB value of button lamp 9e.

The luminance data values correspond to the current values output to the lamps being controlled. The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e are composed of LEDs consisting of three elements: "R," "G," and "B." The luminance data for each element corresponds to the current value output to that element. Specifically, the luminance data is divided into 16 current values from 0 to F. When the luminance data is 0, the current value is the minimum value (e.g., 0), and when the luminance data is F, the current value is the maximum value. For example, when luminance data "A" is output to the "R" element, the current corresponding to that "A" luminance data flows to the "R" element. When luminance data "1" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "1" luminance data flows to the "G" element. When luminance data "F" is output to the "G" element, the current corresponding to that "F" luminance data flows to the "G" element.

The main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can emit light in various colors by flowing a current corresponding to the luminance data through each RGB element. Furthermore, the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e can light up in colors corresponding to various effects and characters based on the luminance data. For example, if the luminance data "F00" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up red. Similarly, if the luminance data "F0F" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up reddish-purple. Also, if the luminance data "FF0" is output from the LED lamp to the LED, and a current corresponding to this data flows, the LED lights up yellow.

As shown in Figure 83, when the performance control CPU 120 controls a target lamp by referring to the brightness data in the sub-table, for example, it first outputs the specified brightness data to the LED driver, measures the execution time corresponding to this brightness data, and then outputs the next specified brightness data to the LED driver. This process is performed for all specified brightness data in the specified order. For example, in the case of the child table shown in Figure 86, for the left side lamp 9b and the right side lamp 9b, the brightness data 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000 is output to the LED driver until 100 ms is first measured, then the brightness data 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, is output to the LED driver until 120 ms is next, and then the brightness data 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, 0x000000, The system outputs 0x000 to the LED driver, then outputs brightness data: 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 120ms have elapsed. Then, it outputs 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA5AA, 0x5AA, 0x5AA, until 40ms have elapsed. The LED driver then supplies the corresponding current to the specified LED based on the received brightness data. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to control each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 via the LED driver.

As described above, the CPU 120 for performance control has timers corresponding to the parent table, child table, and grandchild table. It controls the lamps based on the parent table, child table, and grandchild table while subtracting these timers at a fixed period (for example, a 10ms period).

Specifically, the CPU 120 for performance control starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table. When it has finished outputting brightness data up to the last specified location in the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table still has a remaining value, it starts outputting brightness data again from the first specified location in the grandchild table. On the other hand, while the CPU 120 is outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table, if the timer corresponding to the child table specifying that grandchild table becomes 0, it then sets a timer corresponding to another child table specified by the parent table specifying that child table, and starts outputting brightness data from the first specified location in the grandchild table specified by that child table. This causes the grandchild table to switch, and lamp control is performed based on the switched grandchild table.

The timer management of the child table by the CPU 120 for performance control will be explained with reference to the figure. Figure 84 is a diagram illustrating an example of lamp control using a grandchild table with timer management of the child table. As shown in Figure 84, in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, 500 ms is specified as the time for the first lamp control to be performed on the side lamp 9b, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 is specified. 500 ms is specified as the time for the second lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. 230 ms is specified as the time for the third lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 is specified. 600000 ms is specified as the time for the fourth lamp control to be performed, and the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 is specified. In the second and fourth grandchild tables: XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, for side lamp 9b, the luminance data (RGB data) is "0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388", "0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499", "0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA499, 0x388499, 0x5AA", "0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, 0x4995AA, 0x499388, The process is specified to execute at 100ms intervals in the order of "0x499". For the sake of explanation, the luminance data from the first 100ms will be referred to as Data 1, the luminance data from the second 100ms as Data 2, the luminance data from the third 100ms as Data 3, and the luminance data from the fourth 100ms as Data 4.

The CPU 120 for performance control, when performing lamp control for the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 specified in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, counts the specified 500ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10ms. Until the count reaches 500ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 (data 1, data 2, data 3, and data 4) to the LED driver at 100ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. If the count has not yet reached 500ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it restarts outputting the brightness data to the LED driver, starting from the first data 1. When the count eventually reaches 500ms, the CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2 and starts outputting brightness data based on the next grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_3 (specified by the child table).

Furthermore, when the performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control for the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2, which is the fourth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_XXX, it counts down to the specified 600,000 ms by decrementing a counter by 1 every 10 ms. Until the count reaches 600,000 ms, it outputs brightness data 1, 2, 3, and 4 to the LED driver at 100 ms intervals based on XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. However, if the count has not yet reached 600,000 ms after outputting data 1 through 4, it outputs the brightness data to the LED driver again, starting from the first data 1 in order. When the count reaches 600,000 ms, the performance control CPU 120 stops outputting brightness data based on the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_XXX_2. In this case, since no further grandchild tables are specified in the child table, the output of luminance data based on the first grandchild table specified in the child table: XD___LWU_1_XXX_1 will begin. However, unless some abnormality occurs, the timer will not reach 600,000 ms. Before the timer reaches 600,000 ms, the display control unit 123 will receive the next extended command, and the output of luminance data based on the parent, child, and grandchild tables specified in the newly received extended command will begin.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 85, the maximum time for lamp control by the child table is specified as 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the parent table serves a role in troubleshooting. Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 switches parent tables based on performance control commands from the main board 11 to perform lamp control. However, even if a malfunction occurs while lamp control is being performed based on a particular parent table, and the performance control CPU 120 fails to receive performance control commands from the main board 11, lamp control will continue for 10 minutes based on the same parent table. This prevents a chain reaction of different lamp controls from occurring due to the malfunction.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 86, the execution time for lamp control by the last specified grandchild table is set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This 10-minute data in the child table serves to prevent the lamp control from being performed again by the first specified grandchild table when the timer value corresponding to the child table becomes 0, because the parent table's timer is still active.

Furthermore, in the grandchild table, the execution time for lamp control referencing the last specified brightness data may be set to 600,000 ms (10 minutes). This configuration prevents the lamp control from being performed again using the brightness data specified first in the grandchild table, even when the timer value corresponding to the grandchild table becomes 0, because the timer in the child table is still active. By setting the last specified brightness data in the grandchild table to 10 minutes, the lamp is maintained at a predetermined level of illumination, thus preventing the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination. Moreover, specifying 600,000 ms (10 minutes) of brightness data at the end of the grandchild table, as specified at the end of the child table, can more effectively prevent the malfunction of continuously fluctuating lamp illumination.

[Regarding the lamp data table used during non-gameplay, Part 1]
Figure 90 shows the lamp data table used when not playing (only the white flashing button and red flashing button are used during gameplay).

The background shown in Figure 90 is the lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the normal background image. The CPU 120 for performance control uses the normal background to control the game effect lamps 9 when it receives the extended command B10E transmitted by the display control unit 123 when it controls the display of the normal background image after a power outage (when controlled to the normal state), after the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state, after the end of the variation in the normal state, after the end of the variation of the last game in the time-saving state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the normal state), after the demo movie ends in the normal state, and after the menu display ends in the normal state.

The background time reduction shown in Figure 90 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the time reduction background image. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B11D transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the time reduction background image after a power outage (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the variation in the time reduction state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the time reduction state), after the end of the demo movie in the time reduction state, and after the end of the menu display in the time reduction state, uses the normal background to control the game effect lamp 9.

The background data table shown in Figure 90 represents the lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the background image for the probability variation mode. The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B121 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the probability variation background image after a power outage (when controlled to the probability variation state), after the end of the variation in the probability variation state, after the end of the jackpot game state (when controlled to the probability variation state), after the end of the demo movie in the probability variation state, and after the end of the menu display in the probability variation state, uses the normal background data to control the game effect lamp 9.

The customer-waiting demo shown in Figure 90 is a lamp data table for game effect lamps other than the button lamp 9e corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted when the conditions for starting the customer-waiting demo performance are met and the display control unit 123 performs control to display the image corresponding to the customer-waiting demo performance, uses the customer-waiting demo to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white button illumination shown in Figure 90 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e, corresponding to non-game states except during initialization notification. The performance control CPU 120, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, after the completion of the initialization notification associated with the game state initialization, and after the completion of the operation-prompting performance, uses the white button illumination to control the game effect lamp 9.

The white flashing of the button shown in Figure 90 is the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompt effect. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the extended command B002, which is transmitted in conjunction with the control of the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to the operation prompt effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

The red flashing of the button shown in Figure 90 represents the lamp data table for the button lamp 9e corresponding to the operation prompting effect. When the CPU 120 for effect control receives the extended command B003 transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, it uses the white flashing of the button to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, button lamp 9e is not specified in the lamp data table used except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects. Except during initialization notification, error notification, and operation prompting effects, the game effect lamp 9 is controlled using the button's white illumination. Also, since the white illumination, white blinking, and red blinking button illumination do not specify any game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e, even if the effect control CPU 120 receives an extended command specifying the white illumination, white blinking, or red blinking button illumination, it continues to control the game effect lamps 9 other than button lamp 9e based on the previous lamp data table.

The initialization notification shown in Figure 90 is a lamp data table corresponding to the initialization notification. When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 controls the display of the image corresponding to the initialization notification, it uses the initialization to control the game effect lamp 9.

The error shown in Figure 90 is the lamp data table for the main lamp 9a corresponding to the error notification. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to the error, it uses the error to control the game effect lamp 9.

Furthermore, since no game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a are specified in the error, the CPU 120 for performance control will continue to perform lamp control for game effect lamps 9 other than the main lamp 9a based on the previous lamp data table, even when it receives an extended command specifying an error.

[Lamp Data Table: Normal Background]
Figure 91 shows the settings of the normal parent table used when the extended command B10E is received, Figure 92 shows the settings of the normal child table used in the lamp data table, and Figures 93 and 94 show the settings of the normal grandchild table used in the lamp data table.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the normal background image, it specifies the normal background parent table based on the extended command B10E. As shown in Figure 91, the normal background parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B10E, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP specified by the normal background parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main ramp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 92.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO (Figure 93), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 93, the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO is based on a blue-based brightness, and the main lamp 9a operates in a lighting pattern where the brightness changes based on a blue color.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_TSUJOHENDO_TSUJO_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 91 to 94, the background normal parent table has child tables set up that reference the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the lamps of the side lamps 9b, movable lamps 9d, decorative lamps 9f, and attacker lamps 9c in the same procedure as described above, by referring to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The background data, including the brightness data set in the grandchild table referenced by the normal child table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, is also based on a blue-based brightness. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also exhibit a brightness change pattern based on a blue color scheme.

Furthermore, since the background parent table does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Time Reduction]
Figure 95 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background time reduction used when the extended command: B11D is received, Figure 96 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background time reduction, and Figures 97 and 98 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background time reduction.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B11D transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of a time-saving background image, it specifies the parent table for background time-saving based on the extended command B11D. As shown in Figures 95 to 98, the parent table for background time-saving contains child tables referenced for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also contain referenced grandchild tables, and these grandchild tables contain referenced luminance data in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control refers to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the luminance data specified in the grandchild tables, and controls the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control.

The luminance data set in the grandchild tables referenced by the background time-saving child table for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c is set to a luminance based on green. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change in luminance based on green.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background time reduction does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Background Probability Change]
Figure 99 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: background probability variation used when the extended command: B121 is received, Figure 100 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: background probability variation, and Figures 101 to 102 show the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: background probability variation.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command B121 transmitted by the display control unit 123 in conjunction with the display of the background image for the probability variation mode, it specifies the parent table for the background probability variation mode based on the extended command B121. As shown in Figures 99 to 102, the parent table for the background probability variation mode has child tables set up to reference the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables also have grandchild tables set up to reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data set up in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the lamps of the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c in the same procedure as for normal background control, by referring to the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The sub-table of the background probability variation refers to the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. The brightness data set in these sub-tables is based on a purple color scheme. Therefore, the lighting patterns for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c also change brightness based on a purple color scheme.

Furthermore, since the parent table for background probability variation does not contain child or grandchild tables for button lamp 9e, lamp control continues based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

[Lamp Data Table: Customer Waiting Demo]
Figure 103 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo, which is used when the extended command: BF01 is received. Figure 104 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. Figures 105 to 111 show the settings of the grandchild tables of the lamp data table: customer waiting demo.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command BF01 transmitted by the display control unit when performing display control for the customer-waiting demo, specifies the parent table of the customer-waiting demo based on the extended command BF01. As shown in Figure 103, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command BF01, the CPU 120 controls the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the parent table of the customer-waiting demo.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 104.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is initially set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the main lamp 9a blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 106 and 107), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white during the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and its illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the third item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table is a grandchild table that is referenced in common even if the parent tables are different. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for the duration of the parts of the customer waiting demo performance: machine introduction 1, machine introduction 2-1, machine introduction 3-1, machine introduction 2-2, machine introduction 3-1, and machine introduction 2-3.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 30,500 ms, which is the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF, refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the fourth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used when displaying the title for the jackpot state. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the fifth grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is set in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of the first subtitle part of the customer waiting demo performance, the main lamp 9a blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the sixth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is set as the seventh entry in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance, the main lamp 9a blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the eighth item in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the main lamp 9a changes its illumination color to a rainbow pattern for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the 9th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LMAIN_OFF), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 111), which is set as the 10th entry in the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a lights up white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table) XD___LMAIN_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the 11th item in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the main lamp 9a remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figure 103, the parent table of the customer-waiting demo is configured to control the side lamp 9b by referring to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO for a maximum of 600,000 ms. When the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it refers to the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO specified by the customer-waiting demo's parent table to control the side lamp 9b.

The child table, XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, contains the grandchild table of side ramp 9b and the execution time, in the order they are referenced, as shown in Figure 104.

The CPU 120 for performance control first controls the lamps by referring to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is initially set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the company name section that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the second grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02 (Figures 106 and 107), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b illuminate in white for the duration of the company name segment of the customer waiting demo performance, and their illumination pattern changes in accordance with the movement of the company name characters.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 9500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_02), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the third item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the fourth grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03 (Figure 108), which is set in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, throughout the duration of the machine introduction 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color in the following order: green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white, according to the type of character appearing.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 12,500 ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_03), refers to the fifth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 109), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b lights up white and changes its illumination pattern in a predetermined sequence throughout the duration of the machine introduction 2-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the sixth grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 110), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the duration of the machine introduction 3-1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the seventh grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 109), which is set in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, during the period of the machine introduction 2-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and its illumination pattern changes according to a predetermined pattern.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05 (Figure 110), which is set as the eighth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks green throughout the period of the machine introduction 3-2, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 1000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_05), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04 (Figure 109), which is set as the ninth entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, during the period of the machine introduction 2-3, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b lights up in white, and its illumination pattern changes according to a predetermined pattern.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 5000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_04), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the 10th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the 11th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. The common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 is a grandchild table shared with the one used when displaying the title for the jackpot state. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors throughout the duration of the main title part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is set as the 12th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, at the start of subtitle part 1, which constitutes the customer waiting demo performance, the side lamp 9b blinks white.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the 13th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of one subtitle part that constitutes the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the grandchild table XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01 (Figure 105), which is set as the 14th entry in the child table XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to perform lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b blinks white at the start of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01 (Figure 128), which is set as the 15th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, to control the lamps. As a result, the side lamps 9b change their illumination color to rainbow colors for the duration of the two subtitle parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_RAINBOW_01), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the 16th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 500ms (the execution time of the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF), refers to the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06 (Figure 111), which is set as the 17th entry in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamps 9b light up white during the duration of the warning 1 and warning 2 parts that constitute the customer waiting demo performance.

The CPU 120 for performance control then, after timing 4000ms (the execution time of the grandchild table: XD___LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO_06), refers to the common table (grandchild table): XD___LWU_1_OFF (Figure 127), which is set as the 18th item in the child table: XD_J_LWU_1_KYAKUMACHIDEMO, and performs lamp control. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off for 500ms.

The CPU 120 for performance control then receives an extended command (B10E, B11D, or B121) sent by the display control unit 123 when performing display control such as a normal background. Upon receiving this extended command, the CPU switches to lamp control based on the lamp data table. As a result, the side lamp 9b remains off until a new extended command is received, at which point it switches to the illumination mode based on the received extended command.

As shown in Figures 103 to 111, the parent table for the customer waiting demo has child tables that reference the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c. These child tables have their referenced grandchild tables set in execution order, and these grandchild tables have their referenced brightness data set in execution order. The performance control CPU 120 controls the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

As a result, the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c flash white for 500ms at the start of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance after the start of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of the company name part of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in accordance with the movement of the company name letters, then turn off for 500ms, change their illumination color in the order of green, white, purple, white, pink, white, blue, and white according to the type of character that appears during the duration of machine introduction 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-1 of the customer waiting demo performance, light up white for the duration of machine introduction 2-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and change their illumination pattern in a predetermined pattern, flash green for the duration of machine introduction 3-2 of the customer waiting demo performance, and the customer waiting demo During the period of the machine introduction 2-3 that constitute the performance, the light illuminates in white, and the illumination pattern changes in a predetermined sequence. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the main title part of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 1 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. At the start of subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, it blinks in white. During subtitle 2 of the customer waiting demo performance, the illumination color changes to rainbow colors. Afterward, it remains off for 500ms. During the warning 1 and warning 2 parts of the customer waiting demo performance, it illuminates in white, then remains off for 500ms. It remains off until a new extended command is received, and upon receiving a new extended command, it switches to the illumination pattern based on the received extended command.

In this way, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the extended command BF01, it performs lamp control based on the extended command BF01 and the lamp data table: customer waiting demo. As a result, the main lamp 9a, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c change their emission color and emission pattern according to each part of the customer waiting demo performance.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the customer waiting demo does not have child or grandchild tables set for button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the previously set lamp data table (button white light).

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, sub-tables are specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part 1, model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, model introduction 2-3, main title part, subtitle part 1, subtitle part 2, and warning part. Therefore, lamp control can be performed so that the movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c emit light in a manner appropriate to each part.

Furthermore, in the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo, for the main lamp 9a, a sub-table is specified for each of the following parts: company name part, model introduction part, main title part, subtitle 1 part, subtitle 2 part, and warning part. However, for the parts that make up the model introduction part—model introduction 2-1, model introduction 3-1, model introduction 2-2, model introduction 3-2, and model introduction 2-3—only one sub-table is specified, thus reducing the overall data volume.

Furthermore, the lamp data table for the customer waiting demo does not include a sub-table for button lamp 9e. Since lamp control for button lamp 9e is based on the first sub-table from before the customer waiting demo, the overall amount of data can be reduced.

Furthermore, for sub-tables that control the lights to be off, or sub-tables that emit rainbow colors, the lamp control is performed using a common table that is also used in other parent tables, thus reducing the overall amount of data. Sub-tables that temporarily emit white light can also be controlled using a common table.

[Lamp data table: Button lights up white]
Figure 112 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button white light used when the extended command: B001 is received, Figure 113 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button white light, and Figure 114 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button white light.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B001 transmitted from the display control unit 123 after power loss and recovery, the completion of the initialization notification associated with the initialization of the game state, and the completion of the operation promotion performance, specifies the parent table for the white button illumination based on the extended command B001. As shown in Figure 112, the parent table for the white button illumination is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Upon receiving the extended command B001, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the white button illumination.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 113.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU (Figure 114), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 114. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU, is set to a brightness that emits white light, causing the button lamp 9e to light up white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B002 or B003) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENTOU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the button that lights up white does not have child or grandchild tables set for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, and attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes white]
Figure 115 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, which is used when the extended command: B002 is received. Figure 116 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: button blinking white, and Figure 117 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: button blinking white.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B002 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash white during gameplay, specifies the parent table for button white flashing based on the extended command B002. As shown in Figure 115, the parent table for button white flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command B002, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referring to the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for button white flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 116.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU (Figure 117), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 117. The CPU 120 for performance control then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU, includes settings for brightness levels that emit white light and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink white.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD__LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_SHIRO_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the white blinking button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp data table: Button flashes red]
Figure 118 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, which is used when the extended command: B003 is received. Figure 119 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: red blinking button, and Figure 120 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: red blinking button.

The CPU 120 for performance control, upon receiving the extended command B003 transmitted in conjunction with the control of displaying an image corresponding to the operation prompting effect that causes the button lamp 9e to flash red during gameplay, specifies the parent table for the red button flashing based on the extended command B003. As shown in Figure 118, the parent table for the red button flashing is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the button lamp 9e, referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, upon receiving the extended command B003, the CPU 120 performs lamp control for the button lamp 9e by referencing the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP specified by the parent table for the red button flashing.

The child table, XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e, as shown in Figure 119.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU (Figure 120), which is set in the child table XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

As shown in Figure 120, the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU contains the brightness data and execution time of the referenced button lamp 9e. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table ::XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU includes brightness levels for red light emission and an off state, causing the button lamp 9e to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP again and repeats the same control. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command (B001) to change the lighting pattern of the button lamp 9e before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LPUSH_AKA_TENMETSU_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the red flashing button does not contain child or grandchild tables for the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, or attacker lamp 9c, lamp control continues based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Lamp Data Table: Initialization Notification]
Figure 121 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: initialization notification used when the extended command: BFF is received, Figure 122 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: initialization notification, and Figure 123 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: initialization notification.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, which is transmitted when the display control unit 123 performs control to display an image corresponding to the initialization notification, it specifies the parent table for the initialization notification based on the extended command BFF. As shown in Figure 121, the parent table for the initialization notification is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP specified by the parent table for the initialization notification.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 122.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA (Figure 123), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 123. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table, XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA, is set to a brightness that causes red light to be emitted, and the main lamp 9a lights up red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_SHOKIKA until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_SHOKIKA_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the newly received extended command and the lamp data table.

As shown in Figures 121 to 123, the parent table for initialization notification has child tables that reference the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. These child tables also have grandchild tables that they reference, and these grandchild tables have brightness data and other information set in execution order. The CPU 120 for performance control controls the lamps of the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e using the same procedure as described above, by referencing the child tables specified in the parent table, the grandchild tables specified in the child tables, and the brightness data specified in the grandchild tables.

The child table of the initialization notification also references a grandchild table for the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. The brightness data set in this grandchild table also includes a brightness setting that causes the lamps to emit red light. Therefore, the side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e will also light up in red.

[Lamp data table: Error]
Figure 124 shows the settings of the parent table of the lamp data table: error used when the extended command: BFF1 is received, Figure 125 shows the settings of the child table of the lamp data table: error, and Figure 126 shows the settings of the grandchild table of the lamp data table: error.

When the CPU 120 for performance control receives the extended command BFF1 transmitted from the display control unit 123 in response to an error, it specifies the error's parent table based on the extended command BFF1. As shown in Figure 124, the error's parent table is configured to repeatedly perform lamp control for the main lamp 9a, referencing the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP for a maximum of 600,000 ms. Therefore, when the CPU 120 receives the extended command BFF1, it performs lamp control for the main lamp 9a by referring to the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP specified by the error's parent table.

The child table, XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, contains the grandchild table and execution time of the main lamp 9a being referenced, as shown in Figure 125.

The CPU 120 for performance control performs lamp control by referring to the grandchild table XD___LMAIN_ERROR (Figure 126), which is set in the child table XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP, for a maximum of 600,000 ms.

The sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains the brightness data and execution time of the main lamp 9a to be referenced, as shown in Figure 126. The performance control CPU 120 then switches the control based on the brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR according to the execution time of that brightness data. The brightness data set in the sub-table XD___LMAIN_ERROR contains settings for brightness levels that emit red light and an off state, causing the main lamp 9a to blink red.

The CPU 120 for performance control repeatedly performs lamp control using the grandchild table: XD___LMAIN_ERROR until 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified. After 600,000ms have elapsed, the CPU 120 sets the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP again and repeats the same control process. Furthermore, if the CPU 120 receives an extended command before 600,000ms have elapsed since the child table: XD_J_LMAIN_ERROR_LOOP was specified, it performs lamp control based on the lamp data table corresponding to the newly received extended command.

Furthermore, since the parent table for the error does not contain child or grandchild tables for side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, or button lamp 9e, lamp control will continue based on the lamp data table set previously.

[Common Table]
Common tables are grandchild tables that are referenced by child tables set in different parent tables, and as shown in Figures 127 to 131, they include common tables that turn off the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e (XD___L~_OFF), common tables that slowly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_01), and common tables that rapidly change the main lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e into rainbow colors (XD___L~_RAINBOW_02).

These common tables are provided for each of the in-lamp 9a, side lamp 9b, movable lamp 9d, decorative lamp 9f, attacker lamp 9c, and button lamp 9e. It is possible to control some of the game effect lamps 9 using these common tables.

By providing a common table that can be referenced and used for lamp control from child tables set in different parent tables, data capacity can be reduced.

While embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configurations are not limited to these embodiments, and any modifications or additions that do not depart from the spirit of the present invention are also included.

For example, in the above embodiment, a configuration was exemplified in which the first performance mode can be executed in a low-base state, the second performance mode in a low-probability, high-base state, and the third performance mode in a high-probability, high-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to execute two or more performance modes in a low-base state, three or more performance modes in a high-base state, or only one performance mode.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a configuration in which vertical scrolling is performed in the first display mode, rotational display in the second display mode, and vertical scrolling display in the third display mode, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the manner of variable display of decorative patterns in each display mode can be changed in various ways.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment exemplifies a scenario where a jackpot state is applied as an example of a favorable state for the player, the present invention is not limited to this. Other favorable states such as a time-saving state, a probability variation state, or a minor win state may also be applied.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the normal state is set to a low-probability, low-base state, and the special states, which are more likely to perform variable displays and have a shorter average variable display period than the normal state, are set to a low-probability, high-base state and a high-probability, low-base state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the normal state may be set to a low-probability state and the special states to a high-probability state.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the present invention was illustrated as being applied to a pachinko game machine 1 that has a normal state (low base state), a time-saving state (low probability high base state), and a probability variation state (high probability high base state) as game states, and can be controlled to a time-saving state or a probability variation state at the end of a big win game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display result was displayed as a specific result in some cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low probability state, or a time-saving state based on the fact that the variable display was executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled to an advantageous state in the low probability state after the end of an advantageous state or after a RAM clear (cold start of the pachinko game machine 1). In this case, for example, the time-saving state controlled after a big win can be designated as Time-Saving State A, the time-saving state controlled based on a predetermined number of variable displays being executed without being controlled to an advantageous state during a low-probability state after the end of an advantageous state or a RAM clear (cold start of pachinko machine 1) can be designated as Time-Saving State B, and the time-saving state controlled based on a specific result being displayed during a portion of the cases where the variable display result was not a miss in the low-probability state can be designated as Time-Saving State C.

Furthermore, in a pachinko game machine capable of controlling the aforementioned time-saving state C, multiple types of variable display results that result in winning time-saving state C may be provided, and the number of variable displays for which time-saving control is performed may differ depending on the type of variable display result when time-saving state C is won.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used spherical game balls (pachinko balls) as an example of a game medium, it is not limited to spherical game media; for example, non-spherical game media such as tokens may also be used.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment used a pachinko machine as an example of a gaming machine, it can also be applied to slot machines, for example, where a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using game value, and one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device capable of displaying multiple types of identifiable symbols, and a prize can be awarded according to the variable display result derived from the variable display device. In the case of slot machines, the normal state corresponds to the non-AT state, the advantageous state corresponds to Big Bonus, Regular Bonus, Assist Time (AT), and the special state corresponds to Assist Time (AT), etc.

The gaming machine of this invention can be applied to enclosed gaming machines and slot machines that enclose a gaming medium and award points based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, a gaming machine capable of gameplay only needs to be one that allows for gameplay; it is not limited to pachinko machines or slot machines, but may also be a general-purpose game machine.

1. Pachinko game machine 4A, 1st special symbol display device 4B, 2nd special symbol display device 5, image display device 100, microcomputer for game control 120, CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that displays variable special identification information based on the fulfillment of the starting conditions, and can be controlled to a favorable state for the player,
Display means and
Light-emitting means,
Movable body and,
Light emission control means,
An effect execution means capable of performing a specific effect that notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state, and a special effect that operates the movable body and illuminates the light-emitting means,
Equipped with,
The aforementioned performance execution means is
As the aforementioned specific performance, it is possible to perform a first specific performance that displays a specific character and notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state using the specific character, and a second specific performance that does not display the specific character and notifies whether or not the system is controlled to the advantageous state.
When it is announced that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state in the aforementioned specific performance, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the aforementioned specific performance.
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character is displayed along with an effect image related to the movement of the movable body.
During the execution period of the special effect in the second specific effect, the effect image in the same manner as the first specific effect is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed.
The mode of illumination of the light-emitting means in the special effect is the same whether the special effect is performed in the first specific effect or in the second specific effect.
The aforementioned effect image is an image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body and is not displayed at a time prior to the movement of the movable body.
The probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the first specific performance is performed than when the second specific performance is performed.
The aforementioned display means is
During the first period after the game has ended, a background display will be shown.
In the second period following the end of the first period, a demonstration display is shown.
It is possible to display a variable display of performance identification information corresponding to the variable display of the special identification information.
When the aforementioned starting condition is met, the variable display of the performance identification information is displayed such that the transparency of the performance identification information changes from a first value to a second value which is higher than the first value.
When the aforementioned demonstration display is displayed and the activation condition is met, the display is switched from the demonstration display to the variable display of the performance identification information before the transparency of the performance identification information reaches the second value.
The aforementioned light emission control means is
During the first period, the light-emitting means is controlled using a background display brightness data table corresponding to the background display.
During the second period, the light-emitting means is controlled using the demonstration display brightness data table corresponding to the demonstration display.
When the start condition is met while the demonstration display is displayed by the display means, the light-emitting means is controlled by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the brightness data table corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information, before the display means switches from the demonstration display to the display corresponding to the variable display of the performance identification information.
Before the display means switches the display from the demonstration display to the background display, the light-emitting means controls the light-emitting means by switching from the demonstration display brightness data table to the background display brightness data table .
The total number of luminance data points constituting the demonstration display luminance data table is greater than the total number of luminance data points constituting the background display luminance data table used in game state 1.
A gaming machine characterized by the following features.